Model AT-C3 Machine Code: D111/D142 Field Service Manual: January, 2012 Subject To Change

Model AT-C3
Machine Code: D111/D142
Field Service Manual
January, 2012
Subject to change
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier
power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the
main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
4. The copier drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be careful to
keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the copier starts operation.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating.
Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
Health Safety Conditions
1. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may
cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If unsuccessful, get
medical attention.
2. The copier, which use high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density is
harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
The copier and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has completed
the training course on those models.
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an explosion
might occur.
• The Controller board on this machine contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a
battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and local regulations.
• The optional fax and memory expansion units contain lithium batteries, which can explode if
replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
1
manufacturer. Do not recharge or burn the batteries. Used batteries must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an
open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic
photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100
batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical
reactions and heat build-up.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
• Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this
manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
• WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics
Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
• CAUTION MARKING:
2
Warnings, Cautions, Notes
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
• A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in
death or serious injury.
• A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
• Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of valuable
data and to prevent damage to the machine.
• This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
3
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations
are as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Important Safety Notices................................................................................................................................... 1
Prevention of Physical Injury.......................................................................................................................... 1
Health Safety Conditions............................................................................................................................... 1
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards................................................................................................. 1
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal................................................................................................... 2
Laser Safety.....................................................................................................................................................2
Warnings, Cautions, Notes...........................................................................................................................3
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks.........................................................................................................4
Trademarks..................................................................................................................................................... 4
1. Product Information
Specifications....................................................................................................................................................23
Product Overview.............................................................................................................................................24
Component Layout.......................................................................................................................................24
Paper Path.................................................................................................................................................... 26
Drive Layout..................................................................................................................................................27
Machine Codes and Peripheral Configuration............................................................................................. 29
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products..............................................................34
2. Installation
Installation Requirements................................................................................................................................. 35
Environment.................................................................................................................................................. 35
Machine Level.............................................................................................................................................. 36
Machine Space Requirements.................................................................................................................... 36
Machine Dimensions................................................................................................................................... 37
Power Requirements.................................................................................................................................... 37
Copier Installation............................................................................................................................................ 39
Power Sockets for Peripherals.....................................................................................................................39
Installation Flow Chart.................................................................................................................................39
Installation Procedure.................................................................................................................................. 40
Tapes and Retainers............................................................................................................................41
Developer and Toner Bottles..............................................................................................................42
Paper Trays..........................................................................................................................................43
Emblem and Decals............................................................................................................................ 44
Initialize the Developer.......................................................................................................................44
5
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract..........................................................................................44
SP Operation Sound On/Off Setting................................................................................................45
Settings for @Remote Service.............................................................................................................46
VM Card Installation...........................................................................................................................49
Enabling App2Me.............................................................................................................................. 50
Security Function Installation.............................................................................................................. 50
External USB Keyboard (External Option)................................................................................................ 58
Moving the Machine................................................................................................................................... 60
Transporting the Machine........................................................................................................................... 60
Paper Feed Unit PB3120 (D579)...................................................................................................................61
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................61
Caster Table Type D (D593)...........................................................................................................................66
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 66
Paper Feed Unit PB3130 (D580)...................................................................................................................68
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................68
Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638)..................................................................................................................73
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................73
LCIT RT3020 (D631).......................................................................................................................................75
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 75
Side Fence Position Change....................................................................................................................... 78
LCIT PB3140 (D581).......................................................................................................................................80
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................80
SP Settings............................................................................................................................................83
ARDF DF3060 (D578).................................................................................................................................... 84
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 84
ADF Handle Type B (D593)............................................................................................................................88
6
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 88
Preparing before Installing the DF Handle........................................................................................89
Installing the DF Handle......................................................................................................................91
1 Bin Tray BN3100 (D632)........................................................................................................................... 95
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 95
Internal Shift Tray SH3060 (D633)................................................................................................................99
Component Check....................................................................................................................................... 99
Side Tray Type C5502 (D635)................................................................................................................... 102
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................102
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................103
Bridge Unit BU3060 (D634)........................................................................................................................106
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................106
Finisher SR3070 (D585).............................................................................................................................. 110
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 110
Finisher SR3090 (D588).............................................................................................................................. 114
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 114
Booklet Finisher SR3100 (D589).................................................................................................................118
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 118
Punch Kit PU3000 (B807)............................................................................................................................123
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................123
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 124
Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674)...........................................................................................................131
Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829)......................................................................................................133
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................133
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 133
7
User Tool Setting...............................................................................................................................135
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870).........................................................................................137
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................137
Card Reader Bracket Type 3352 (D593)...................................................................................................140
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................140
Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)...........................................................................................................143
Anti-Condensation Heater Type A............................................................................................................... 145
Component Check.....................................................................................................................................145
For installing the tray heater in the main machine..........................................................................146
For installing the tray heater in D537............................................................................................. 147
For Installing the Tray Heater in D538........................................................................................... 149
For Installing the Tray Heater in D387........................................................................................... 152
Controller Options......................................................................................................................................... 156
Overview....................................................................................................................................................156
I/F Card Slots................................................................................................................................... 156
SD Card Slots....................................................................................................................................156
SD Card Appli Move................................................................................................................................ 157
Overview...........................................................................................................................................157
Move Exec........................................................................................................................................ 157
Undo Exec.........................................................................................................................................158
PostScript3 Unit Type C5502.................................................................................................................. 159
IPDS Unit Type C5502............................................................................................................................. 160
File Format Converter Type E................................................................................................................... 161
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A......................................................................................................... 162
Installation Procedure.......................................................................................................................162
IEEE 802.11a/g g Interface Unit Type J/K........................................................................................... 163
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN............................................................................................... 165
SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g g Wireless LAN.................................... 166
8
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D................................................................................................................167
Camera Direct Print Card Type J..............................................................................................................168
SD Card for Netware Printing Type H.....................................................................................................169
Browser Unit Type F.................................................................................................................................. 170
Browser Icon Addition......................................................................................................................171
Gigabit Ethernet Type B............................................................................................................................173
Check All Connections..............................................................................................................................174
3. Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance Tables......................................................................................................................................175
PM Parts Settings............................................................................................................................................176
Before Removing the Old PM Parts......................................................................................................... 176
After installing the new PM parts..............................................................................................................177
Preparation before operation check........................................................................................................177
Operation check........................................................................................................................................178
4. Replacement and Adjustment
Beforehand.....................................................................................................................................................179
Special Tools..................................................................................................................................................180
Image Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................... 181
Scanning.................................................................................................................................................... 181
Scanner sub-scan magnification..................................................................................................... 181
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..................................................................... 182
ARDF...........................................................................................................................................................182
ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge.................................................. 182
ARDF sub-scan magnification..........................................................................................................183
Registration................................................................................................................................................ 184
Image Area....................................................................................................................................... 184
Leading Edge.................................................................................................................................... 184
Side to Side....................................................................................................................................... 184
Adjustment Standard........................................................................................................................ 184
Paper Registration Standard............................................................................................................184
Adjustment Procedure.......................................................................................................................185
Erase Margin Adjustment..........................................................................................................................185
9
Color Registration......................................................................................................................................186
Line Position Adjustment................................................................................................................... 186
Printer Gamma Correction........................................................................................................................187
Copy Mode.......................................................................................................................................187
Printer Mode..................................................................................................................................... 191
Exterior Covers...............................................................................................................................................193
Front Door.................................................................................................................................................. 193
Controller Cover........................................................................................................................................194
Left Cover................................................................................................................................................... 194
Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................195
Right Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................... 195
Operation Panel........................................................................................................................................ 196
Paper Exit Cover........................................................................................................................................200
Inner Tray................................................................................................................................................... 202
Ozone Filter and Dust Filter...................................................................................................................... 202
Ozone filters for the scanner unit.....................................................................................................202
Ozone filter and dust filter for the AC controller............................................................................ 203
Scanner Unit...................................................................................................................................................205
Exposure Glass..........................................................................................................................................205
Exposure Lamp.......................................................................................................................................... 206
Reassembling.................................................................................................................................... 209
Chromaticity rank adjustment.......................................................................................................... 210
Scanner Motor...........................................................................................................................................212
Sensor Board Unit (SBU).......................................................................................................................... 212
When reassembling..........................................................................................................................213
Original Length Sensors............................................................................................................................213
LED Relay Board........................................................................................................................................214
SIO (Scanner In/Out) Board................................................................................................................... 215
Scanner HP Sensor....................................................................................................................................216
Platen Cover Sensor..................................................................................................................................217
Front Scanner Wire................................................................................................................................... 217
Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire................................................................................................ 219
Rear Scanner Wire....................................................................................................................................221
10
Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire.................................................................................................222
Touch Panel Position Adjustment.............................................................................................................. 223
Laser Optics....................................................................................................................................................224
Caution Decal Location............................................................................................................................ 224
LD Safety Switch........................................................................................................................................ 225
Error Messages.................................................................................................................................225
Laser Optics Housing Unit........................................................................................................................ 225
Preparing the new laser optics housing unit................................................................................... 226
Before removing the old laser optics housing unit......................................................................... 226
Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser optics housing unit.....................227
Removing the old laser optics housing unit.....................................................................................228
Installing a new Laser Optics Housing Unit.................................................................................... 229
After installing the new laser optics housing unit............................................................................230
Polygon Mirror Motor and Drive Board..................................................................................................231
Airflow Fans............................................................................................................................................... 232
Laser Optics Rear Right Thermistor...........................................................................................................233
Image Creation.............................................................................................................................................. 236
PCDU..........................................................................................................................................................236
Drum Unit and Development Unit............................................................................................................ 237
Developer..........................................................................................................................................240
Toner Collection Bottle..............................................................................................................................242
Second Duct Fan....................................................................................................................................... 243
When reinstalling the second duct fan............................................................................................244
Third Duct Fan............................................................................................................................................244
When reinstalling the third duct fan................................................................................................ 245
Toner Pump Unit........................................................................................................................................ 245
When you install the new toner pump unit..................................................................................... 248
Toner End Sensor...................................................................................................................................... 251
Image Transfer............................................................................................................................................... 252
Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit........................................................................................................... 252
Image Transfer Belt Unit............................................................................................................................252
Image Transfer Belt....................................................................................................................................253
When reinstalling the image transfer belt....................................................................................... 257
11
Paper Transfer................................................................................................................................................ 259
Paper Transfer Roller Unit......................................................................................................................... 259
Paper Transfer Unit....................................................................................................................................259
ID Sensor Board........................................................................................................................................ 261
Cleaning for ID sensors.................................................................................................................... 262
After installing a new ID sensor unit/board................................................................................... 262
Temperature and Humidity Sensor.......................................................................................................... 263
Drive Unit........................................................................................................................................................264
Gear Unit................................................................................................................................................... 264
When installing the drive unit...........................................................................................................270
Adjustment after replacing the gear unit.........................................................................................270
Registration Motor.....................................................................................................................................270
Paper Feed Motor..................................................................................................................................... 272
Drum/Development Motors for M, C, and Y......................................................................................... 273
Drum/Development Motor-K...................................................................................................................274
ITB Drive Motor......................................................................................................................................... 275
Fusing/Paper Exit Motor.......................................................................................................................... 275
Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor..........................................................................................................276
Duplex Inverter Motor...............................................................................................................................276
Pressure Roller Contact Motor..................................................................................................................278
Duplex/By-pass Motor.............................................................................................................................279
Paper Transfer Contact Motor..................................................................................................................280
Toner Transport Motor.............................................................................................................................. 282
Toner Collection Unit.................................................................................................................................283
Paper Feed Clutches................................................................................................................................. 283
Development Clutch-Y.............................................................................................................................. 285
Development Clutches for M and C........................................................................................................ 287
Development Clutch-K.............................................................................................................................. 287
Fusing..............................................................................................................................................................289
Fusing Unit PM Parts..................................................................................................................................289
Fusing Unit..................................................................................................................................................289
Fusing Exit Shutter Plate............................................................................................................................ 291
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate.....................................................................................................................291
12
Cleaning Requirement......................................................................................................................292
Fusing Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure...........................................................................................293
Fusing Unit Upper Cover.......................................................................................................................... 293
Fusing Unit Lower Cover........................................................................................................................... 295
Heating Sleeve Belt Unit........................................................................................................................... 297
Pressure Roller............................................................................................................................................300
Stripper Plate............................................................................................................................................. 302
Cleaning Requirement......................................................................................................................303
Pressure Roller Thermistors........................................................................................................................303
Pressure Roller Thermostats.......................................................................................................................304
NC Sensors................................................................................................................................................305
Fusing Fan.................................................................................................................................................. 306
When installing the fusing fan..........................................................................................................307
Paper Exit Fan............................................................................................................................................307
When installing the paper exit fan.................................................................................................. 307
AC Controller Board Fan..........................................................................................................................308
When installing the AC controller board fan................................................................................. 308
Fusing Entrance Thermopiles.................................................................................................................... 308
When cleaning the lens of the thermopile...................................................................................... 309
Pressure Roller HP Sensor......................................................................................................................... 310
QSU Fan.................................................................................................................................................... 311
Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Motor...................................................................................................... 312
Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Home Position Sensor......................................................................................314
Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Mechanism............................................................................................. 315
Paper Feed..................................................................................................................................................... 319
Paper Feed Unit......................................................................................................................................... 319
Pick-Up, Feed and Separation Rollers.....................................................................................................320
Tray 1 and Tray 2.............................................................................................................................320
Tray Lift Motor............................................................................................................................................321
Vertical Transport, Paper Overflow, Paper End and Paper Feed Sensor.............................................321
Registration Sensor....................................................................................................................................322
By-pass Paper Size Sensor and By-pass Paper Length Sensor............................................................. 323
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor.......................................................................... 324
13
By-pass Bottom Tray..................................................................................................................................325
By-pass Paper End Sensor........................................................................................................................328
By-pass Pick-up, Feed and Separation Roller, Torque Limiter...............................................................328
By-pass Feed Clutch..................................................................................................................................329
Paper Exit Unit........................................................................................................................................... 330
Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, Junction Paper Jam and Paper Exit Sensor............................................ 331
Duplex Unit.....................................................................................................................................................334
Duplex Unit................................................................................................................................................ 334
Duplex Door Sensor..................................................................................................................................335
Duplex Entrance Sensor............................................................................................................................336
Duplex Exit Sensor.................................................................................................................................... 337
Electrical Components...................................................................................................................................338
Boards........................................................................................................................................................ 338
Controller Unit........................................................................................................................................... 339
Controller Box Right Cover.......................................................................................................................340
Controller Box............................................................................................................................................341
When opening the controller box................................................................................................... 341
When removing the controller box................................................................................................. 342
IOB (In/Out Board).................................................................................................................................. 345
IPU.............................................................................................................................................................. 346
BCU............................................................................................................................................................ 347
When installing the new BCU..........................................................................................................348
PSU............................................................................................................................................................. 349
Shutdown Board............................................................................................................................... 349
PSU bracket.......................................................................................................................................350
PSU board.........................................................................................................................................352
PSU fans............................................................................................................................................ 352
ITB Power Supply Board...........................................................................................................................354
High Voltage Supply Board..................................................................................................................... 354
High Voltage Supply Board Bracket....................................................................................................... 355
AC Controller Board................................................................................................................................. 355
AC Controller Board Bracket................................................................................................................... 356
Controller Board........................................................................................................................................357
14
When installing the new controller board...................................................................................... 359
HDD Fan.................................................................................................................................................... 360
HDD............................................................................................................................................................360
When installing a new HDD unit..................................................................................................... 361
Disposal of HDD Units......................................................................................................................361
Reinstallation..................................................................................................................................... 361
Toner Bottle Detection Board................................................................................................................... 362
NVRAM Replacement Procedure............................................................................................................ 363
NVRAM on the BCU........................................................................................................................ 363
NVRAM on the controller board.....................................................................................................364
Using Dip Switches........................................................................................................................................ 366
Controller Board........................................................................................................................................366
BCU Board.................................................................................................................................................366
5. System Maintenance
Service Program Mode................................................................................................................................. 367
SP Tables....................................................................................................................................................367
Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode....................................................................................367
Entering SP Mode.............................................................................................................................367
Exiting SP Mode............................................................................................................................... 367
Types of SP Modes....................................................................................................................................367
SP Mode Button Summary............................................................................................................... 368
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing.................................................. 369
Selecting the Program Number....................................................................................................... 369
Exiting Service Mode....................................................................................................................... 370
Service Mode Lock/Unlock............................................................................................................ 370
Remarks......................................................................................................................................................371
Display on the Control Panel Screen.............................................................................................. 371
Others................................................................................................................................................ 372
Main SP Tables-1.......................................................................................................................................... 373
SP1-XXX (Feed)......................................................................................................................................... 373
Main SP Tables-2.......................................................................................................................................... 398
SP2-XXX (Drum).........................................................................................................................................398
Main SP Tables-3.......................................................................................................................................... 470
15
SP3-XXX (Process)..................................................................................................................................... 470
Main SP Tables-4.......................................................................................................................................... 501
SP4-XXX (Scanner)....................................................................................................................................501
Main SP Tables-5.......................................................................................................................................... 519
SP5-XXX (Mode)....................................................................................................................................... 519
Main SP Tables-6.......................................................................................................................................... 587
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)............................................................................................................................... 587
Main SP Tables-7.......................................................................................................................................... 596
SP7-XXX (Data Log).................................................................................................................................. 596
Main SP Tables-8.......................................................................................................................................... 635
SP8-xxx: Data Log2.................................................................................................................................. 635
Main SP Tables-9.......................................................................................................................................... 681
Input Check Table..................................................................................................................................... 681
Copier................................................................................................................................................681
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor..........................................................................................................684
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)............................................................................................... 684
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)...............................................................................................685
ARDF (D578).................................................................................................................................... 686
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804, B805)...................................................................687
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)........................................................................................................... 689
Bridge Unit (D634)/ Side Tray (D635)......................................................................................... 691
Internal Shift Tray (D633)................................................................................................................ 691
1 Bin Tray (D632)............................................................................................................................ 691
Two-Tray PFU (D580)/ LCIT 2000 (D581)/ LCIT 1200 (D631).............................................. 691
Output Check Table.................................................................................................................................. 692
Copier................................................................................................................................................692
ARDF (D578).................................................................................................................................... 699
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)........................................................................................................... 700
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804/B805).................................................................. 701
Bridge Unit (D386)/ Side Tray (D634)......................................................................................... 702
Shift Tray (D633)..............................................................................................................................702
1 Bin Tray (D632)............................................................................................................................ 703
16
Printer Service Mode.................................................................................................................................704
SP1-XXX (Service Mode)................................................................................................................. 704
Scanner SP Mode..................................................................................................................................... 712
SP1-xxx (System and Others)..........................................................................................................712
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality).................................................................................................713
Firmware Update...........................................................................................................................................714
Type of Firmware.......................................................................................................................................714
Before You Begin.......................................................................................................................................715
Updating Firmware................................................................................................................................... 715
Preparation........................................................................................................................................715
Updating Procedure......................................................................................................................... 716
Error Messages................................................................................................................................. 717
Firmware Update Error.....................................................................................................................717
Recovery after Power Loss............................................................................................................... 718
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel.......................................................................................... 718
Update Procedure for App2Me Provider............................................................................................... 719
Browser Unit Update Procedure.............................................................................................................. 720
Handling Firmware Update Errors...........................................................................................................721
Error Message Table........................................................................................................................ 721
Installing Another Language......................................................................................................................... 723
Reboot/System Setting Reset....................................................................................................................... 726
Software Reset........................................................................................................................................... 726
System Settings and Copy Setting Reset..................................................................................................726
System Setting Reset......................................................................................................................... 726
Copier Setting Reset......................................................................................................................... 726
Downloading Stamp Data............................................................................................................................ 728
NVRAM Data Upload/Download.............................................................................................................. 729
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card....................................................................................... 729
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM.................................................................................................... 730
Address Book Upload/Download.............................................................................................................. 732
Information List...........................................................................................................................................732
Download.................................................................................................................................................. 732
Upload....................................................................................................................................................... 733
17
Using the Debug Log..................................................................................................................................... 734
Overview....................................................................................................................................................734
Switching ON and Setting UP Save Debug Log.....................................................................................734
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD................................................................................................. 738
Recording Errors Manually.......................................................................................................................738
Debug Log Codes..................................................................................................................................... 739
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key....................................................... 739
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log...................................................................... 739
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log................................................................739
Card Save Function....................................................................................................................................... 740
Overview....................................................................................................................................................740
Card Save:........................................................................................................................................ 740
Procedure...................................................................................................................................................740
Error Messages..........................................................................................................................................744
SMC List Card Save Function....................................................................................................................... 745
Overview....................................................................................................................................................745
SMC List Card Save......................................................................................................................... 745
Procedure...................................................................................................................................................745
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists......................................................................................................... 747
Error Messages..........................................................................................................................................748
6. Troubleshooting
Service Call.................................................................................................................................................... 749
Service Call Conditions.............................................................................................................................749
SC Code Classification.................................................................................................................... 750
Service Call Tables - 1..............................................................................................................................752
SC1xx: Scanning.............................................................................................................................. 752
SC 2xx: Exposure............................................................................................................................. 757
SC3xx: Image Processing – 1......................................................................................................... 762
SC3xx: Image Processing – 2......................................................................................................... 763
SC4xx: Image Processing - 3.......................................................................................................... 767
18
SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing....................................................................................................... 771
SC6xx: Device Communication.......................................................................................................790
SC7xx: Peripherals........................................................................................................................... 801
SC8xx: Overall System.................................................................................................................... 814
SC9xx: Miscellaneous..................................................................................................................... 831
Process Control Error Conditions..................................................................................................................839
Developer Initialization Result.................................................................................................................. 839
Process Control Self-Check Result............................................................................................................840
Vsg Adjustment Result.......................................................................................................................842
Line Position Adjustment Result................................................................................................................. 842
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................................................................................844
Image Quality............................................................................................................................................844
Line Position Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 846
Test..................................................................................................................................................... 846
Countermeasure list for color registration errors............................................................................ 846
Stain on the Outputs..................................................................................................................................852
Stack Problem in the 1-Bin Tray............................................................................................................... 853
Problem at Regular Intervals.....................................................................................................................853
Toner End Recovery Error.........................................................................................................................854
Flow Chart for the Toner End Recovery Error.................................................................................855
Toner Bottles Detection Error.................................................................................................................... 856
Solid Image or Halftone Image Error...................................................................................................... 857
Recovery Procedure......................................................................................................................... 857
Problem Prevention Procedure.........................................................................................................858
Faulty Cleaning..........................................................................................................................................858
Black or color lines (2-3mm)........................................................................................................... 858
Band Image Between 20mm and 30mm ...................................................................................... 859
Damaged Lift Sensor Switch or Motor.....................................................................................................859
19
Cause.................................................................................................................................................859
Solution..............................................................................................................................................860
Encryption Key Restoration for NVRAM..................................................................................................863
How to restore the old encryption key to the machine.................................................................. 863
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key..................................................................... 864
Fax Icon is not Displayed..........................................................................................................................865
Other Symptoms........................................................................................................................................866
Flowchart for the error......................................................................................................................866
Countermeasure list for the error..................................................................................................... 867
Jam Detection.................................................................................................................................................870
Paper Jam Display.....................................................................................................................................870
Jam Codes and Display Codes................................................................................................................870
Paper Size Code...............................................................................................................................877
Sensor Locations............................................................................................................................... 879
Electrical Component Defects.......................................................................................................................880
Sensors....................................................................................................................................................... 880
Blown Fuse Conditions..............................................................................................................................885
Power Supply Unit............................................................................................................................ 885
AC Drive Board................................................................................................................................ 886
Scanner Test Mode........................................................................................................................................887
SBU Test Mode..........................................................................................................................................887
7. Energy Saving
Energy Save................................................................................................................................................... 889
Energy Saver Modes................................................................................................................................ 889
Timer Settings.................................................................................................................................... 889
Return to Stand-by Mode.................................................................................................................890
Recommendation.............................................................................................................................. 890
Energy Save Effectiveness........................................................................................................................ 890
Paper Save..................................................................................................................................................... 892
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function............................................................................................ 892
1. Duplex:..........................................................................................................................................892
2. Combine mode:............................................................................................................................892
3. Duplex + Combine:...................................................................................................................... 892
20
How to calculate the paper reduction ratio .................................................................................. 893
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................895
21
22
Specifications
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Supported Paper Sizes
• Software Accessories
• Optional Equipment
23
Product Overview
Component Layout
RTB 26
Wrong order of
PCUs
24
Product Overview
1. Scanner HP sensor 14. Paper transfer roller

2. ADF exposure glass 15. Registration roller
3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 16. By-pass feed table
4. Exposure glass 17. Tray 2
5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 18. Tray 1
6. Scanner lamp 19. Toner collection bottle
7. Original length sensor 20. Laser optics housing unit
8. Lens block 21. PCDU (4 colors)
9. Sensor board unit (SBU) 22. Image transfer belt cleaning unit
10. Scanner motor 23. Image transfer belt unit
11. Paper exit rollers 24. Toner bottle (4 colors)
12. Duplex unit 25. ID sensor
13. Fusing unit 26. Fusing sleeve belt unit
25
Paper Path
RTB 26
Wrong order of
PCUs
1. Original tray
9. Tray 5: Optional LCT 1200
2. Original exit tray
10. Tray 4: Optional paper feed unit
3. Duplex inverter
11. Finisher stapler (Optional)
4. Duplex feed
12. Finisher punch (Optional)
5. By-pass tray feed
13. Finisher lower tray (Optional)
6. Tray 1 feed
14. Finisher proof tray (Optional)
7. Tray 2 feed
15. Inner Tray
8. Tray 3: Optional paper feed unit/LCT
The 1000-sheet finisher and 1000-sheet booklet finisher require the bridge unit and one from the two-
tray paper feed unit or the LCT.
26
Product Overview
Drive Layout
1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit.
Turns on/off the drive power to the toner supply unit (K and -
2. Toner supply clutch-K and -CMY:
CMY).
3.ITB (Image Transfer Belt) contact

Moves the ITB into contact and away from the color PCDUs.
motor:
Drives the toner attraction pumps and the toner collection coils
4. Toner transport motor: from the PCDUs, from the transfer belt unit, and inside the
toner collection bottle. Also rotates the toner bottles.
Turns on/off the drive power to the development unit (K, Y,

5. Development clutch (K, Y, M, C):
M, C).
27
6. Drum/Development drive motor

Drives the color drum unit and development unit (K, Y, M, C).
(K, Y, M, C)
7. Paper feed clutch Switches the drive power between tray 1 and tray 2.
8. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2).
Turns on/off the drive power to the by-pass pick-up, feed and
9. By-pass feed clutch:
separation rollers.
10. Registration motor: Drives the registration roller.
Drives the by-pass pick-up, feed and separation roller, and

11. By-pass/duplex feed motor:
duplex transport rollers.
Moves the paper transfer roller in contact with the image

12. Paper transfer contact motor:
transfer belt.
13. ITB drive motor: Drives the image transfer belt unit.
14. Duplex inverter motor Drives the duplex inverter rollers and duplex transport rollers.
15. Fusing/paper exit motor: Drives the fusing unit and paper exit section.
16. Fusing unit shutter plate drive

Drives the fusing unit shutter plate.
motor
28
Machine Codes and Peripheral Configuration
Call
Item Machine Code Remarks
out
Mainframe D111/D142 [1]
Platen cover D593 [2]

One from the two for all models.
ARDF D578 [3]
1-bin tray D632 [4] -
Requires Tray 2 of the Mainframe or

Envelope feeder *1 D638 [5]
[8].
D631-17 (NA)
1200-sheet LCT [6] Requires [7] or [8].
D631-27 (EU/AA)
*1: The Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638) cannot be used in the one-tray paper feed unit (D579).
29
Call
out
D581-17 (NA)
2000-sheet LCT [7]
D581-27 (EU/AA)
One from [7], [8] and [9];
Two-tray paper feed unit D580-17 [8] [9] requires [10].
One-tray paper feed unit D579 [9]
Caster table D593 [10] -
1000-sheet finisher D588 [11] One from [11], [12] and [16];
1000-sheet booklet Requires [14] and one from [7] and
D589 [12] [8].
finisher
Side tray D635 [13]
Bridge unit D634 [14] One from [13], [14] and [15].
Shift tray D633 [15]
500-sheet finisher D585 [16] Requires [14].
Punch unit: 3/2 holes B807-17 -
Punch unit: 4/2 holes B807-27 -
Punch unit: 4 holes B807-30 -

Requires [12].
Punch unit: 2 / 3 holes D570-00 (NA) -
Punch unit: 2 / 4 holes D570-01 (EU) -
Punch unit: 4 holes D570-02 (Scandinavia) -
Card reader bracket D593-61 -

One from the two.
Key counter bracket A674 -
Optional counter interface

B870 - -
unit
Scanner accessibility
D423 - -
option
ADF handle D593-81 - -
30
Call
out
The included bracket is not for these

Handset (only for NA) D645 -
models.
Call
Item Machine code Remark
out
Gigabit Ethernet Type B D377-21 [F] -
IEEE 1284 Interface

B679-17 [D]
Board Type A
Wireless LAN
D377-01 (NA)
(IEEE 802.11a/g
D377-02 (EU/AA)
Interface Unit Type J) You can only install one of these at a
[E]
Wireless LAN time.
(IEEE 802.11g Interface D377-19 (EU)

Unit Type K)
File Format Converter

D377-04 [C]
Type E
31
Call
out
Bluetooth Interface Unit

D566-01 [B] -
Type D (USB)
Call
out
D645-11 (NA)
PostScript 3 Unit Type
D645-12 (EU)
C5502
D645-13 (AA)
-
PictBridge Type J
D645-15
Those cards should be installed from
D645-07 (NA) SD slot 2 (lower).
IPDS Unit Type C5502 D645-08 (EU) [A] If multiple applications are required,
D645-09 (AA) merge all applications in one SD
card with SP mode. ( p.157)
D645-17 (NA)
Browser Unit Type F D645-24 (EU)
D645-25 (AA)
SD Card for Netware

D645-23
Printing Type H
This card should already be in SD

PDF Direct / VM /
- - slot 1 (upper) when the machine
App2Me Card (Standard)
leaves the factory.
Copy Data Security Unit

RTB 26 B829 [G] -
Type F
D643-01 (NA)
Fax Option Type C5502 D643-02 (EU) - -
D643-03 (AA)
G3 Interface Unit Type D643-11 (NA)

- -
C5502 D643-12 (EU/AA)
Memory Unit Type B G578 - -
32
Call
out
Handset Type 3352 (only The included bracket is not for these
D593-71 -
for NA) models.
33
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with

Predecessor Products
Machine D111/D142 is a successor model to Machine D086/D087. If you have experience with the
predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual.
Different Points from Predecessor Products
D111/D142 D086/D087
Controller Type GW+ Controller GW Controller
New Fusing Unit without

Yes No
the Decurler
Fusing Unit New QSU-DH fusing system IH roller fusing system
SMC data SD card download or printing Printing only
Operation Panel Tiltable Operation Panel

Stationary Operation Panel
Includes USB/SD slot
USB2.0/SD Slot Standard Optional
Scanner Lamp LED Xenon
Data Overwrite Security,

Included in the controller ROM SD card
HDD Encryption
34
2. Installation
Installation Requirements
Environment
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
5. Do not let the machine get exposed to the following:
1) Cool air from an air conditioner
2) Heat from a heater
6. Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Install the machine at locations lower than 2,000 m (6,560 ft.) above sea level.
8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no more than 5 mm.)
9. Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.
• Do not leave the toner bottle in a place directly exposed to sunlight.
35
2. Installation
• The toner bottle must be kept at a temperature of 35°C (95°F) or less. Be careful not to leave the
toner bottle in a hot place when transporting or storing it.
Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")

Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Machine Space Requirements
• This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas. High ozone
density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated
room.
A: Over 100 mm (3.9")

B: Over 100 mm (3.9")
C: Over 100 mm (3.9")
D: Over 750 mm (29.5")
Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above.
36
Installation Requirements
Machine Dimensions
[A]: 760 mm (mainframe) + 260 mm (PFU) + 120 mm (ARDF)

[B]: 580 mm
[C]: 670 mm
[D]: 1065 mm
[E]: 577 mm
[F]: 682 mm (Depth) (766 mm Max. with D580)
Power Requirements
• Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.

• Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
• Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:

110 V, 60 Hz: 20 A (Taiwan)
120 to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A (NA)
37
2. Installation
220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: 10 A (EU/AA/China/Korea)

2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: +8.66 %/ -10 % (NA)
Permissible voltage fluctuation: ± 10 % (Others)
3. Do not put things on the power cord.
38
Copier Installation
Copier Installation
• Make sure that the image transfer belt is in its correct position (away from the PCDUs) before you
move the machine. Otherwise, the image transfer belt and the black PCDU can be damaged.
Power Sockets for Peripherals
• Rating voltage for peripherals.

• Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
Installation Flow Chart
This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation.
39
2. Installation
You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher (D588 or D589) or
1200-sheet LCT (D631).
The punch unit is for the booklet finisher (D589).
Installation Procedure
• Remove the tape from the development units before you turn the main switch on. The development
units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tape.
Put the machine on the paper tray unit or the LCT first if you install an optional paper tray unit or the
optional LCT at the same time. Then install the machine and other options.
40
Copier Installation
• Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the future if you
transport the machine to another location.
Tapes and Retainers
1. Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine.

2. Remove all the tapes and retainers in trays 1 and 2, and then take out the power cord from tray 1
(if applicable).
3. Remove the scanner unit stay [A].
4. Open the front door [B], and then remove the jam location sheet [C].
5. Keep the scanner unit stay [A] inside the front door.
6. Reattach the jam location sheet.
7. Close the front door.
• The scanner unit stay [A] should be reinstalled before the machine is transported.
41
2. Installation
Developer and Toner Bottles
1. Open the front door [A].

• GSA model (-51) and EU models (-27) do not require steps from 2 to 7. Skip to step 8 if you
install these models.
2. Remove the stopper [B] ( x 1).
• This stopper locks the drum positioning plate lever.

3. Release the image transfer unit lock lever [C], and turn the drum positioning plate lever [D]
counterclockwise.
4. Open the drum positioning plate [E].
5. Remove the tape [F] from the Bk development unit.
6. Remove all tapes on the other development units (C, M, Y) in the same way as described in the
previous step.
• When you remove the tape from the development unit, hold the development unit with your
hand, and then pull the tape.
7. Close the drum positioning plate. Then lock the image transfer unit lock and turn the drum
positioning plate lever clockwise.
8. Lock the drum positioning plate lever with the stopper [B] ( x 1).
9. Shake each toner bottle five or six times.
42
Copier Installation
10. Install each toner bottle [G] in the machine.
• The toner bottles are unique for the D111/D142 models. The toner bottles for the previous
models (D086/D087) cannot be used in the D111/D142 models.
Paper Trays
1. Pull each paper tray out. Then adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size.
• To move the side guide, first pull out the tray fully. Then push down the green lock at the rear
inside the tray.
2. Pull out the feeler [A] for the output tray full detection mechanism.
43
2. Installation
Emblem and Decals
1. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays [A].
• Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the optional
LCT. Keep these decals for use with these optional units.
Initialize the Developer
1. Plug in the machine.

2. Make sure that the platen or ARDF is closed and the main power is turned off.
3. Turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically starts the initialization procedure. The
Start button LED ( ) turns green when this procedure has finished.
4. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
5. Do the Automatic Color Calibration process (ACC) as follows:
1). Print the ACC test pattern (User tools Maintenance ACC Start).
2). Put the printout on the exposure glass.
3). Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4). Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5). Press “Start Scanning” on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
6. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract
Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract.
44
Copier Installation
• You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance with the contract
(See SP5-045-001).
• The SP operation sound can be turned on or off. For details, see “SP Operation Sound On/Off
Setting” below.
Item SP No. Function Default
Specifies if the counting method used in

Counting
SP5-045-001 meter charge mode is based on “0”: Developments
method
developments or prints.
Specifies whether the counter is doubled

A3/11" x 17"
for A3/11" x 17" paper. When you “No”: Single
double SP5-104-001
have to change this setting, contact your counting
counting
supervisor.
5812-002 programs the service station

fax number. The number is printed on the
Service Tel. SP5-812-001
counter list when the meter charge mode
No. Setting through 004
is selected. This lets the user fax the
counter data to the service station.
SP Operation Sound On/Off Setting
To turn off the SP Operation Sound

1. Enter the SP mode.
2. On the top menu screen [A], hold down the "Clear" button until you hear a beep sound. This turns
off the SP operation sound.
3. No SP operation sound can be heard in all levels [B] (SPx, SPx-xxx and SPx-xxx-xxx) of the SP
mode.
45
2. Installation
To turn on the SP Operation Sound

2. On the top menu screen [A], hold down the "Clear" button again until you hear a beep sound. This
turns on the SP operation sound.
3. SP operation sound can be heard in all levels [B] (SPx, SPx-xxx and SPx-xxx-xxx) of the SP mode.
Settings for @Remote Service
• Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For details, ask the
@Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
1. The setting of SP5816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".
2. Device ID2 (SP5811-003) must be correctly programmed.
• 6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
• ID2 (SP5811-003) and the serial number (SP5811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
• Proxy server IP address (SP5816-063)
• Proxy server Port number (SP5816-064)
• Proxy User ID (SP5816-065)
• Proxy Password (SP5816-066)
4. Get a Request Number
Execute the @Remote Settings
2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then enter
[OK] with SP5816-202.
3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5816-204.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
46
Copier Installation
Communication error (proxy

3 Check the network condition.
enabled)

disabled)
Proxy error (Illegal user name or

5 Check Proxy user name and password.
password)
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
8 Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing… Please wait.
executing
5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816-205 only when it has
been input at the Center GUI.
6. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5816-206.
7. Check the registration result with SP5816-207.
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
2 Already registered Check the registration status.

enabled)

disabled)
Proxy error (Illegal user name or

5 Check Proxy user name and password.
password)
8 Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing… Please wait.
executing
8. Exit the SP mode.

SP5816-208 Error Codes
47
2. Installation
Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
Obtain a Request Number

Inquiry, registration attempted
-12002 before attempting the Inquiry or
without acquiring Request No.
Registration.
-12003 Attempted registration without

Perform Confirmation before
execution of a confirmation and no
attempting the Registration.
previous registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries

Operation Error, Check ID2 of the mainframe.
for certification and ID2.
Incorrect Setting
-12005 @Remote communication is
Make sure that "Remote
prohibited. The device has an
Service" in User Tools is set to
Embedded RC gate-related
"Do not prohibit".
problem.
-12006 A confirmation request was made

after the confirmation had been Execute registration.
already completed.
-12007 The request number used at

registration was different from the Check Request No.
one used at confirmation.
-12008 Check the mainframe

Update certification failed because
condition. If the mainframe is in
mainframe was in use.
use, try again later.
Operation Error, -12009 Write a common certification,

Incorrect Setting ID2 mismatch between an and then execute the
individual certification and NVRAM confirmation request to the
@Remote Center.
-12010 Write a common certification

after initializing the certification
Certification area is not initialized. area, and then execute the
confirmation request to the
@Remote Center.
48
Copier Installation
Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
-2385 Other error
-2387 Not supported at the Service

Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
Two registrations for the same Check the registration

-2391
mainframe condition of the mainframe
Error Caused by -2392 Parameter error

Response from
GW URL -2393 External RCG not managed
-2394 Mainframe not managed
-2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal.
Mainframe ID for external RCG is

-2396
illegal.
Check the ID2 of the

-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
mainframe.
-2398 Incorrect request number format Check the Request No.
VM Card Installation
The following procedure basically should be done by a customer.

1. Press the [User Tools] key on the operation panel.
2. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice.
3. Touch the "Java TM Platform" line under the Startup Setting tab.
4. Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on the LCD.
5. Touch the " Java TM Platform " line.
6. Set "Auto Start" to "On".
7. Touch the "Exit" button.
8. Exit the "User Tools" settings.
49
2. Installation
Enabling App2Me
The following procedure basically should be done by a customer.

1. Press the [User Tools] key on the operation panel.
3. Touch the "App2Me" line under the Startup Setting tab.
5. Touch the "App2Me" line.
6. Set "Auto Start" to "On".
8. Exit the "User Tools" settings.
Security Function Installation
The machine contains the Security function (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit) built into
the controller board.
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD
Encryption unit by selecting "Format All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation panel.
• This method is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet (Address Book
data, image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a machine
that is already running, it is recommended to activate the unit by selecting "All Data" from “System
Settings” on the operation panel.
• Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the hard drive. (If
"Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the hard drive up to that point will be erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes to
complete before you can begin using the machine.
• If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the disk, or of the encryption key is changed,
this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned off while the encryption process is in progress.
50
Copier Installation
If the machine's main power is turned off while the encryption process is in progress, the hard disk will be
damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
Print encryption key and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a paper sheet).
Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and it need, the controller board,
hard disk and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.
• "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on Controller Board.

• "NVRAM" or EEPROM on BCU has nothing to do with this.
Please use the following procedure when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption reinstalled.
Data Overwrite Security
• Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
- Supervisor login password
- Administrator login name
- Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed
before you do the installation procedure.
2. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is on.
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] [Admin.
Authentication]
If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before you do the installation procedure.
3. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected).
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] [Available
Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected) before
you do the installation procedure.
• Installation Procedure
1. Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
3. Go into the SP mode and push “EXECUTE” with SP5-878-001.
4. Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch. Then turn off the main power switch.
5. Turn on the machine power.
6. Do SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
7. Go into the User Tools mode, and select [System Settings] [Administrator Tools]
[Auto Erase Memory Setting] [On].
51
2. Installation
8. Exit the User Tools mode.
This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be

Dirty
overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be

Clear
overwritten.
9. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [1] shows.
10. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [2] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
The icon [3] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
HDD Encryption
• Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at the factory default settings.
- Supervisor login password
- Administrator login name
- Administrator login password
These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed.
2. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on.
[User tools/Counter] key [System Settings]
[Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] [Admin. Authentication]
[On]
52
Copier Installation
If this setting is off, tell the customer that this setting must be on before you can do the installation
procedure.
3. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled.
[User tools/Counter] key [System Settings] [Administrator Tools]
[Administrator Authentication Management] [Available Settings]
"Available Settings" is not displayed until step 2 is done.
If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can
do the installation procedure.
• Installation Procedure
1. Turn on the main power switch, and then enter the SP mode.
2. Select SP5878-002, and then press "Execute" on the LCD.
3. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed on the LCD.
• Enable Encryption Setting
1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key.
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display
more settings.
5. Press [Encrypt].
53
2. Installation
6. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset.
To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All Data].
To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
7. Press [Start] key.

The encryption key for backup data is printed.
54
Copier Installation
8. Press [Exit].
9. Press [Exit].
10. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• After the step 11, turn to the below initial operation display. But, it is not be encrypted.
11. Turn off the power and the main power switch, and then turn the main power switch back.
55
2. Installation
12. Displayed “Memory Conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off” again,
turn off the power and the main power switch, and then turn the main power switch back.
13. Initial display.

• Confirmation Encryption Setting
2. Press the [System Settings].
3. Press the [Administer Tools].
56
Copier Installation
4. Press the [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
5. Please confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
• Print to encryption key
Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced.
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
5. If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more settings.
6. Press [Print Encryption Key].
57
2. Installation
Encryption key sample
Encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the sample shown above.
Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place.
External USB Keyboard (External Option)
Customers can use an external USB keyboard when the software keyboard is shown on the operation
panel, if an external USB keyboard is connected to the USB port at the side of the operation panel or
the controller box USB port.
If customers would like to use an external USB keyboard, execute the following steps to enable this
feature.
1. Connect the external keyboard to the USB port at the right side of the operation panel or the
controller box USB port.
• The external keyboard that is available in this machine is principally for the Windows OS.
However, no compatibility check is done, and there is no warranty.
58
Copier Installation
2. Enter the SP mode and set SP5075-001 to ON (1) (USB keyboard).

3. Exit the SP mode and turn the main power off and on.
4. Select a language type for the external USB keyboard with [User Tools] [System Settings]
[General Features] [External Keyboard].
5. Press [OK] to set it.
6. Turn the main power off and on.
59
2. Installation
Moving the Machine
This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the
section “Transporting the Machine” if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.
1. Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.
Transporting the Machine
Main Frame
1. Do SP 4806-001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position. This prevents dust from
falling into the machine during transportation.
2. Remove the toner cartridges. This prevents toner flow into the toner supply tube, which is caused by
vibration during transport. This can also cause the tube to be clogged with toner.
3. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of
paper and tape.
4. Empty the toner collection bottle. Then attach securing tape to stop the toner bottle from coming
out.
5. Take out the scanner stay from inside the front door and install the scanner stay.
6. Do one of the following:
• Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
• Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
• After you move the machine, make sure you do the "Auto Color Registration" as follows. This
optimizes color registration.
• 1. Do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode c" (SP2-111-3).
• 2. Then do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode a" (SP2-111-1).
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is
displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12.
• Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned to prevent color registration
errors.
60
Paper Feed Unit PB3120 (D579)

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q’ty
1 Screw (M4x10) 2
2 Screw with Spring washer (M4x10) 2
3 Securing bracket 2
• Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation
procedure.
• You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one
person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
• Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged.
• The one-tray paper feed unit must be installed on the caster table (D593). Prepare the caster table
first before installing this unit.
61
2. Installation
1. Remove all tape on the paper feed unit.

2. Remove the paper tray and remove all tapes and padding.
3. Put the paper tray unit on the caster table (D593).
• For details about the installation of the caster table, see the “Caster Table (D593)” installation
procedure.
1. Pull out the handle [A], then hold the handle and grips [B], and then put the copier on the paper
feed unit [C].
62
• You need two or more persons to lift the copier.
• Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
2. Attach the securing brackets [A] ( x 1; M4x10 each).
3. Remove the 1st and 2nd paper trays [A], and then secure the paper feed unit [B] ( spring
washer x 1; M4x10).
4. Reinstall the 1st and 2nd paper trays.
63
2. Installation
5. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C] on the
tray of the paper feed unit
• The paper tray number and size sheet is in the accessory box of the main machine.
6. Lock the caster stoppers for the front two casters under the paper feed unit.
7. Load paper into the paper tray and set the side fences and bottom fence.
8. Connect the power cord [A] to the inlet of the main machine.
64
9. Secure the power cord with the clamp [B] on the main machine so that the power cord is never
disconnected.
65
2. Installation
Caster Table Type D (D593)

Component Check
1 Caster Table 1
2 Stud Screw 1
1. Put the caster table on a flat place.
66
Caster Table Type D (D593)
2. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine, if the copier is to be installed on the caster
table.
3. Lift the copier or one-tray paper feed unit [C], and then install it on the caster table [D].
4. Pull out tray 2 of the mainframe or the tray of the one-tray paper feed unit.
5. Secure the machine or one-tray paper feed unit to the caster table (stud screw x 1)
6. Reinstall the tray in the mainframe or one-tray paper feed unit.
7. Adjust the five leveling adjustors of the caster table.
67
2. Installation

Accessory Check
1 Screw (M4x10) 2
2 Screw with Spring Washer (M4 x 10) 1
3 Securing Bracket 2
• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
• The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and locked unless
these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main machine.
68
1. Remove all tape on the paper feed unit.

2. Remove the paper trays and remove all tape and padding.
3. Pull out the handle [A], then hold the handle and grips [B].
4. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [C].
• You need two or more persons to lift the copier.
69
2. Installation
5. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1; M4 x 10
each).
6. Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine [A].

7. Fasten the paper tray unit at [B] ( spring washer x 1; M4 x 10).
8. Reinstall all the trays.
70
9. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C] on
each tray of the paper feed unit.
11. Load paper into the paper trays and set the side fences and bottom fence.
71
2. Installation
disconnected.
72
Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638)
Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638)

Accessory Check
1 Envelope feeder 1
2 Paper size decal 1
• This tray can be installed in tray 2 of the copier, or tray 3 or tray 4 of the paper feed unit (D580).
• There is no automatic paper size detection in the envelope feeder (D638). Adjust the paper size for
the tray where the envelope feeder is to be installed with User Tools.
1. Remove all tape from the envelope feeder.
73
2. Installation
2. Pull out tray 2 [A] from the main machine.
3. Install the envelope feeder [A] into tray 2 of the main machine.
4. Press the "User/Tools" key on the operation panel.
5. Enter "Small Paper Size Tray" under "General Features".
• Initial Settings > General Features > Small Paper Size Tray
6. Select "On" for the tray where the envelope feeder is installed.
7. Turn the main machine off and on.
74
LCIT RT3020 (D631)
LCIT RT3020 (D631)

Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
1 Front Bracket 1
2 Rear Bracket 1
3 Stud Screw 4
4 Joint Pin 2
5 LCT 1
• Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
75
2. Installation
• The Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT 2000-sheet (D581) must be installed before installing this
1200-sheet LCT.
1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes.

2. Remove the stand covers [A].
3. Release the locks [B] of the front and rear caster stands.
4. Remove the caster stands [C].
5. Remove the paper path cover [A], connector cover [B] and six hole covers [C].
76
LCIT RT3020 (D631)
6. Insert the joint pins [A].

7. Attach the front [B] and rear brackets [C] ( x 2 each).
8. Pull out the front and rear rails [A], and then hang them on each bracket [B].
9. Connect the LCT cable [C] to the main machine.
10. Slide the LCT [D] into the main machine.
11. Make sure that the front and rear sides of the LCT are closely attached to the main machine.
77
2. Installation
Side Fence Position Change
1. Open the right door of the LCT.

2. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position.
3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).

4. Install the side fences in the correct position (A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF).
5. Pull the end fence [A] for B5 size paper as shown ( x 1) if the side fences are adjusted for B5
size paper.
78
LCIT RT3020 (D631)
6. Close the right door.

7. Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode.
8. Input the correct paper size for the1200-sheet LCT with SP5181-018.
79
2. Installation
LCIT PB3140 (D581)

Accessory Check
1 Screw (M4x10) 2
2 Screw with Spring Washer (M4x10) 1
• The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and locked, unless
these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main machine.
80
LCIT PB3140 (D581)
1. Remove the strips of tape.
2. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine.

3. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT [C].
• The copier should be lifted by two persons or more.
• Hold the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
81
2. Installation
4. Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine.

5. Fasten the spring washer screw [D].
6. Reinstall all trays.
7. Attach the securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each; M4x10).
8. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C] on the
tray of the LCT.
10. Load paper into the LCT.
82
LCIT PB3140 (D581)
disconnected.
SP Settings
1. Connect the copier and turn the main machine on.

2. Do SP5-181-010 to set automatic paper size detection for the LCT paper tray.
LCT Paper Tray (Size Adjust Tray 3 / LCT

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-181-010 A4/LEF/LT/LEF 0: ISO (A3, A4, A5, etc.)
1: USA (DLT, LT, EXE, etc.)
3. Exit SP mode.
4. Do some test copies to make sure that the machine operates correctly.
83
2. Installation
ARDF DF3060 (D578)

Component Check
1 ARDF 1
2 Original Setting and ARDF Exposure Glass Cleaning Decal 1
3 Stamp Cartridge 1
4 Knob Screw 2
5 Stud Screw 2
84
ARDF DF3060 (D578)
• Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
• When unloading the ARDF from a pallet, hold the front and rear side of the ARDF.
2. Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine.
85
2. Installation
3. Mount the ARDF [A] by aligning the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support plate over the stud
screws.
4. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine.
5. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [C].
6. Attach the interface cable [D] to the inlet of the machine.
7. Install the stamp cartridge [A] in the ARDF.
86
ARDF DF3060 (D578)
8. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass.
9. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner on the exposure glass.
10. Close the ARDF.
11. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.
12. Attach the original setting and ARDF exposure glass cleaning decal [A] to the top cover as shown.
13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine, and then check the ARDF operation.
14. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew
are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew, referring to the service manual
("Copy Adjustments" in the "Replacements and Adjustments").
87
2. Installation
ADF Handle Type B (D593)

Component Check
1 Handle Unit 1
2 Holder 1
3 Stud Bracket 1
5 Handle Bracket 1
6 Hinge Stopper - Right 1
7 Hinge Stopper - Left 1
8 Spacer 1
9 Bushing: M6 1
10 Bushing: 6MM 1
11 Tapping Screw: M3 x 12 2
12 Tapping Screw (Self Binding): M3 x 12 2
13 Screw: M3 x 8 3
15 Operation Decal 1
16 Stud Decal 1
88
procedure.
Preparing before Installing the DF Handle
1. Open the ADF unit.
89
2. Installation
2. Hold the securing bracket [A] at the location [B], inside the ADF cover.
3. Secure the stud bracket [C] to the outside of the ADF cover at location [D] with two screws ( x 2:
M3x8).
• The two screws must go through the ADF cover and the securing bracket [A].
90
4. Make two screw holes [E] in the scanner right cover with an M3x12 tapping screw from the
accessories.
Installing the DF Handle
1. Attach the holder [A] to the scanner right cover (Tapping Screw x 2: M3x12).
• At first, secure the screw at the rear side (away from the operation panel) temporarily and
then at the front side temporarily. After that, secure them fully.
2. Install the bushing: 6MM [B] in the inside of the handle unit.
3. Attach the handle unit to the stud bracket on the left side of the ADF.
91
2. Installation
4. In the outside of the handle unit, install the bushing - M6 [C] first, and then the spacer [D].
5. Secure the handle unit with a screw ( x 1: M3x8).
6. Clean the handle unit with alcohol. Then attach the stud decal [E] at the location that was cleaned.
92
7. Attach the handle bracket [F] at the front right side on the bottom of the ADF unit (Tapping Screw
[Self Binding] x 2: M3x12).
8. Close the ADF unit.
9. Attach the hinge stoppers (left [G] and right [H]) to the left and right hinges (Tapping screw x 2:
M4x8 each).
93
2. Installation
10. Clean the front side of the duplex unit with alcohol. Then attach the operation decal [I] at the
location that was cleaned.
11. Check the operation of the handle unit [J].
94
1 Bin Tray BN3100 (D632)

Component Check
1 1 Bin Tray Unit 1
2 End-fence 1
3 Tray Support Bar 1
4 Screws (M3 x 16) 2
5 Screws (M3 x 8) 1
6 Harness Cover 1
7 Tray 1
If the bridge unit (D634) or side tray (D635) has already been installed in the machine, remove it
before installing the 1 bin tray unit (D632). This will make it easier for you to do the following
procedure.
1. Remove all tapes.
95
2. Installation
2. Open the right door of the machine.
3. Remove the front right cover [A] ( x 1).

4. Remove the inner cover [B] ( x 1).
• Keep this screw for step 5.
5. Install the 1 bin tray unit [3] ( x 1, x 1 [This screw was removed in step 4]).
96
6. Attach the tray support bar [A] to the tray [B] as shown, and then attach the end-fence [C].
7. Install the tray [A] with the tray support bar in the machine ( x 2; M3 x 16).
8. Connect the harness to the connector of the 1-bin tray unit ( x 1, x 1).
97
2. Installation
9. Attach the harness cover [H] ( x 1; M3 x 8).

10. Reinstall the front right cover on the machine, and then close the right door of the machine.
11. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
12. Check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
98
Internal Shift Tray SH3060 (D633)

Component Check
1 Shift Tray Unit 1
2 Connector Cover 1
3 Paper Guide - Small 1
99
2. Installation
2. Remove the inner tray [A].

3. Remove the connector cover [B] ( x 1).
4. Install two small paper guides [C].
100
5. Attach the connector cover [D] to the shift tray unit [E].
6. Install the shift tray unit [E] on the machine.
7. Push down the left edge part [F] of the shift tray.
9. Check the shift tray unit operation.
101
2. Installation
Side Tray Type C5502 (D635)

Component Check
1 Side Tray Unit 1
2 Sub Output Tray 1
3 Main Output Tray 1
4 Screw 1
5 Knob screw 1
6 Frame Cover 1
7 Guide 2
8 Holder bracket 1
102
procedure.
• If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before installing
the side tray (D635). This makes it easier to do the following procedure.

2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it into the machine.
4. Remove the upper inner tray [B].

5. Remove the front right cover [C] ( x 1).
6. Remove the connector cover [D] ( x 1).
103
2. Installation
7. Attach the main output tray [A] and sub output tray [B] to the side tray unit.
8. Install the side tray unit [A] in the machine.
104
9. Open the side tray cover [A].

10. Secure the side tray unit with the knob screw [B].
11. Attach the frame cover [C].
• Open the side tray cover [A] when installing the front right cover. Otherwise, it cannot be
reinstalled.
13. Install the holder bracket [D] ( x 1)
15. Check the side tray operation.
105
2. Installation
Bridge Unit BU3060 (D634)

Component Check
1 Bridge Unit 1
2 Frame Cover 1
3 Knob screw 1
4 Long knob screw 1
5 Holder bracket 1
6 Guide 2
106
• If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before installing
the bridge unit (D634). This makes it easy to do the following procedure.
• If you will install a finisher unit (D585, D588, or D589) on the machine, install it after installing the
bridge unit (D634).

2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it into the machine.
4. Remove the upper inner tray [B].

5. Remove the front right cover [C] ( x 1).
6. Remove the connector cover [D] ( x 1).
107
2. Installation
7. Install the bridge unit [E] in the machine.
8. Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw [F] and knob screw [H].
9. Attach the frame cover [I].
• Open the bridge unit cover [J] when installing the front right cover. Otherwise, it cannot be
reinstalled.
11. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure).
• Holder bracket [G] is used in the installation procedure of the finisher (D585, D588 or
D589). Do not install it at this time.
108

13. Check the bridge unit operation.
14. Pull the extension tray [K] only if the 1000-sheet finisher (D588) or the 500-sheet finisher (D585) is
to be installed in the main machine.
109
2. Installation
Finisher SR3070 (D585)

Accessory Check
No Description Q’ty For This Model
1 Unit Holder 1 Yes
2 Shift Tray 1 Yes
3 Holder Bracket 1 Yes
4 Screw: M3 x 8 4 Yes
8 Screw: M4 x 25 3 Not used
9 Support Bracket 2 Yes
10 Support Bracket Cover 2 Yes
110
• Whenever you lift or carry the SR3070, always hold it by the bottom edges of the front cover [C]
and rear cover [A], as shown in the diagram below left. If you do not, SC798 will occur when you
attach the finisher. DO NOT hold the finisher by the tray holder [B], as shown in the diagram below
right.
• The optional bridge unit (D634) must be installed before installing this finisher (D585).
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
111
2. Installation
2. Install the unit holder [A] ( x 4; M4 x 14).

3. Install the support brackets [B] ( x 2 each; M4 x 20).
4. Install the support bracket covers [C] ( x 1 each; M3 x 8).
5. Install the 500-sheet finisher [A].

6. Install the holder bracket [B] ( x 1; M3 x 6).
7. Connect the finisher cable [C].
112
8. Install the shift tray [A] ( x 2; M3 x 8).

9. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
113
2. Installation

Accessory Check
1 Grounding Plate 1
2 Rear Joint Bracket (Not used) 1
3 Front Joint Bracket 1
4 Rear Joint Bracket 1
5 Copy Tray 1
6 Screw - M3 x 8 1
7 Screw - M4 x 13 4
8 Knob Screw - M3 x 8 1
9 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 1
10 Screw - M4 x 25 (Not used) 3
11 Staple Position Decal 1
114
The following options must be installed before installing this finisher:

• Bridge Unit (D634)
• Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581)
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
• Be sure to keep screw [A]. It will be needed to secure the grounding plate in step 3.
115
2. Installation
2. Install the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2; M4x13), and then attach the front joint bracket [B] and the
holder bracket [C] ( x 2; M4x13).
• Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket is provided
with the Bridge Unit (D634).
3. Install the grounding plate [A] on the finisher ( x 2; M3x8).
• Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box.
4. Open the front door [B]. Then pull the locking lever [C].
5. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever.
6. Secure the locking lever ( x 1; knob M3x8) and close the front door.
7. Install the copy tray [D] ( x 1; knob M4x10).
8. Connect the finisher cable [E] to the main machine.
116
9. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown.

10. Turn on the ac switch and check the finisher operation.
117
2. Installation
Booklet Finisher SR3100 (D589)

Accessory Check
1 Rear Joint Bracket (Not used) 1
2 Rear Joint Bracket 1
3 Front Joint Bracket 1
4 Grounding Plate 1
5 Upper Output Tray 1
RTB 26 6 Lower Output Tray 2
7 Short Knob Screw 1
8 Long Knob Screw 1
9 Screw (M4 x 13) 4
10 Screw (M3 x 8) 2
11 Screw (M4 x 25) (Not used) 3
12 Cushion 2
118
The following optional units must be installed before installing this finisher (D589).
• Bridge Unit (D634)
• Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581)
119
2. Installation
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher.
2. Open the front door [A] of the 1000-sheet booklet finisher, and then pull out the jogger unit [B].
3. Remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the finisher.
4. Attach the cushions [A] to the finisher.
• Make sure that the cushions are placed within 0 to 1 mm [B] from the edge of the cover or
frame.
120
5. Install the ground plate [C] on the finisher [D] ( x 2; M3x8).
6. Install the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2; M4x13), and then attach the front joint bracket [B] and the
holder bracket [C] ( x 2; M4 x 13).
• Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket is provided
with the Bridge Unit (D634).
7. Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine, keeping its front door open until the brackets
[A] [B] go into their slots.
8. Push the lock lever [C], and then secure it (Long knob screw x 1).
9. Close the front door of the finisher.
121
2. Installation
10. Connect the finisher connector [D] to the machine.
11. Install the upper output tray [A] (Short knob screw x 1).
12. Install the lower output tray [B].
14. Check the 1000-sheet booklet finisher operation.
122
Punch Kit PU3000 (B807)

Component Check
1 Punch Unit 1
2 Punch Drive Motor 1
3 Hopper Full Sensor Arm 1
4 Sub-scan Registration Sensor Unit 1
5 Punch Unit Stay 1
6 Sub-scan Registration Sensor Guide 1
7 Hopper 1
8 Screw 8
9 Step Screw 1
10 Spring 1
123
2. Installation
Installation
• Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the 1000-sheet
booklet finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
124
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.

2. Open the top cover [A] and then release the guide arm [B] ( x 1).
3. Open the front door [C].
4. Pull the hook [D] up then remove the knob [E].
5. Timing belt cover [F].
6. Rear cover of the 1000-sheet booklet finisher [G] ( x 2).
125
2. Installation
7. Cover bracket [H] ( x 1)

8. Remove the paper guide plate [I] from the rear side ( x 4).
9. Install the punch unit stay [J] from the front side ( x 3).
10. Install the sub-scan registration sensor guide [K] from the top ( x 1).
126
11. Remove the bracket [L] from the punch unit ( x 1).
12. Install the punch unit [M] along the punch unit stay from the rear side.
13. Make sure to put the punch unit stay pin [N] through the hole [O].
127
2. Installation
14. Connect the harnesses [P] to the main PCB.

15. Put the harnesses [Q] through the hole [R] in the rear frame ( x 1).
16. Install the punch drive motor [S] on the rear frame ( x 2).
17. Connect the drive motor harness [T] to the harness from the punch unit ( x 1).
18. Connect the home position sensor harness from the punch unit to the home position sensor [U].
128
19. Install the sub-scan registration sensor unit [V] from the rear side ( x 2).
20. Route and connect the harnesses as shown ( x 2).
21. Install the hopper full sensor arm [W] ( x 1, spring x 1).
22. Connect the harness from the sub-scan registration sensor unit to the hopper full sensor [X].
129
2. Installation
23. Install the hopper [Y] from the front side.

24. Reinstall the timing belt cover and knob.
25. Reinstall the rear cover ( x 2).
26. Close the front door and top cover.
27. Install the 1000-sheet booklet finisher on the copier.
28. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
29. Check the 1000-sheet booklet finisher operation.
130
Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674)
Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674)

1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the key
counter holder [C].
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
3. Install the key counter cover [D] ( x 2).
4. Rear cover ( p.195)
5. Cut off the part [E] of the rear cover.
131
2. Installation
6. Connect the harness to the connector [F] inside the machine.
7. Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner
right cover [G].
8. Reassemble the machine.
132
Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829)

Component Check
No. Description Q’ty For this model
1 Bracket 1 1 Not used
2 ICIB-3 1 Yes
3 Flexible cable: Long 1 Not used
4 Flexible cable: Short 1 Not used
5 Harness with bands 1 Not used
6 Harness 1 Not used
7 Small Bracket 1 Not used
8 Saddle Clamp 1 Not used
9 Screws: M3x6 6 Not used
10 Screws: M3x4 2 Yes
11 Bracket 2 1 Not used
Installation
• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
133
2. Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] of the machine ( x 5).
2. Remove the controller box right cover [B] ( x 8).
134
3. Attach the ICIB-3 [D] (copy data security board) to CN 187 [C] on the BCU ( x 1, x 2).
User Tool Setting

2. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings > Administrator Tools > Copy Data
Security Option > “On”.
3. Exit User Tools.
4. Check the operation.
• The machine will issue an SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the ICIB-3 removed
and the “Data Security for Copying “feature set to “ON”.
• When you remove this option from the machine, first set the setting to “OFF” with the user tool
before removing this board. If you forget to do this, “Data Security for Copying “feature
135
2. Installation
cannot appear in the user tool setting. And then SC165 will appear every time the machine is
switched on, and the machine cannot be used.
Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end of this
section).
136
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)

Component Check
1 Key Counter Interface Board 1
2 Stud Stay 4
3 Wire Harness 1

2. IOB bracket ( p.341)
3. Install the four stud stays in the location [A] in the controller box.
4. Install the key counter interface board on the four stud stays in the controller box.
5. Connect the harness to CN3 on the key counter interface board.
137
2. Installation
6. Close the IOB bracket and connect the other terminal to CN215 [B] on the IOB.
7. Cut off the part [C] of the rear cover.
8. Clamp the harness from the counter device with the clamp [D] and put it as shown by the blue
arrow ( x 1).
9. Route the harness from the counter device in the same way as the other harnesses [E] ( x 3).
138
10. Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on the key counter interface board.
11. Reattach the IOB bracket ( p.341).
139
2. Installation
Card Reader Bracket Type 3352 (D593)

Component Check
1 Screw: M3 x 8 2
2 Screw: M3 x 14 1
3 Screw: M3 x 25*1 1
5 Upper Tray 1
6 Lower Tray 1
7 Tray Bracket 1
8 Clamp 5
*1: Not used in this machine
140
Card Reader Bracket Type 3352 (D593)
1. Remove the screw [A] on the scanner right cover.

2. Attach the tray bracket [B] to the scanner right cover ( [C] x 2: M3x10, [D] x 1: M3x14).
• For this model, use the screw holes marked "2" on the table bracket.
3. Attach the lower tray [A] to the tray bracket ( x 2: M3x8).

4. Attach the upper tray [B] to the tray bracket ( x 1: M3x8).
5. Use the clamps as necessary to clamp the cable of the card read/writer device.
141
2. Installation
• The smart card reader must be placed on this card reader table. If not, some antenna or transmitter
in the main machine may be interrupted.
142
Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)
Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)
• This option is provided as a service part.

2. Open the ARDF or platen cover.
3. Glass cover [A] ( x 4)
4. ARDF exposure glass [B]
5. Rear scale [C] ( x 3)
6. Exposure glass with left scale [D]
143
2. Installation
7. Move the scanner carriage to the right side by rotating the scanner motor [E].
8. Install the heater [F] in the scanner unit ( x 1, hook)
9. Put the connector [G] through the cutout.
10. Connect it to the connector [H] (blue and red cords) in the frame of the machine.
144
Anti-Condensation Heater Type A
• This option is provided as a service part.
Component Check
1 Tray heater 1
2 On-standby decal 1 (-90) or 2 (-91)
3 Harness 2 (For D387) 1
4 Harness 1 (For D537/D538) 1
5 Screw M4 x 10 2
- Installation procedure 1
145
2. Installation
• Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.

• Check that all harnesses are not damaged nor pinched after installation.
For installing the tray heater in the main machine
1. Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.

2. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Connect the connector [B] of the heater to the connector of the main machine.
4. Install the heater [C] inside the machine ( x 1).
146
For installing the tray heater in D537
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 8)

2. Pull out the two trays in the optional paper feed unit.
3. Install the tray heater [B] in the optional paper feed unit ( x 1).
147
2. Installation
4. Remove the two securing brackets [C] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [D] of the optional
paper feed unit ( x 2).
5. Remove the harness cover bracket [E] ( x 1).
6. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe.

7. Replace the shoulder screw [F] with the washer screw [G], using securing bracket [H] ( x 1).
148
8. Connect the harness [I] to the connector [J] of the tray heater.
9. Route the harness [I] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
10. Connect the harness [I] to the connector [K] of the mainframe.
11. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit.
12. Attach the on/standby decal [L] to the right-hand side of the main power switch.
For Installing the Tray Heater in D538
1. Remove the rear cover of the mainframe. (See step 1 in “For Installing the Tray Heater in D537”.)
2. Pull out the LCT drawer.
• If the right tray comes out with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT.
149
2. Installation
3. Left tray [A] ( x 2)
4. Remove the right tray [B] while pressing down the stopper [C].
• When reinstalling the right tray, set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray
in, making sure to keep the tray level.
150
5. Install the tray heater [D] in the optional LCT ( x 1).
6. Remove the two securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each), and the then rear cover [F] of the optional LCT
( x 2).
7. Remove the harness cover bracket [G] ( x 1).
151
2. Installation

9. Replace the shoulder screw [H] with the washer screw [I], using the securing bracket [J] ( x 1).
10. Connect the harness [K] to the connector [L] of the tray heater.
11. Route the harness [K] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
12. Connect the harness [K] to the connector [M] of the mainframe.
13. Reassemble the mainframe and optional LCT.
14. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit.

15. Attach the on/standby decal [N] to the right-hand side of the main power switch.
For Installing the Tray Heater in D387
1. Remove the rear cover of the mainframe ( step 1 in For Installing the Tray Heater in D537).
2. Pull out the tray in the optional paper tray.
152
3. Install the tray heater [A] in the optional paper tray ( x 1).
4. Remove the two securing brackets [B] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [C] of the optional
paper tray ( x 2).
5. Remove the harness cover bracket [D] ( x 1).
153
2. Installation

7. Replace the shoulder screw [E] with the washer screw [F], using securing bracket [G] ( x 1).
8. Connect the harness [H] to the connector [I] of the tray heater.
9. Route the harness [H] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
• Make sure that the harness [H] is placed below the harness [J].
10. Connect one harness [K] of the two-way harness to the connector [L] of the mainframe.
• The harness [K] of the two-way harness, which has two binds, is for the connector of the
mainframe. The harness [M], which has one bind, is for another optional paper feed unit.
11. Clamp the other harness [M] of the two-way harness as shown [N] if you do not install another
optional paper feed unit.
12. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper tray.
154
13. Attach the on/standby decal [O] to the right-hand side of the main power switch.
155
2. Installation
Controller Options
Overview
This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications.
After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it, see "Check All Connections" at the
end of this section ( p.174).
I/F Card Slots
• Slot A is used for one of the optional I/F connections (only one can be installed): IEEE1284,
RTB 26a
Delete text IEEE802.11a/g g (Wireless LAN), Remote Communication Gate.
as shown • Slot B is used for the File Format Converter or Remote Communication Gate.
• Slot C is used for Gigabit Ethernet.
SD Card Slots
• Slot 1 (upper) is already occupied by the PDF direct print, VM and App2me SD Card by factory
default, and is also used for optional applications (e.g.: Browser Unit, PostScript 3, PictBridge, IPDS
unit, etc).
• Slot 2 (lower) is used for installing applications, or for service only (for example, updating the
firmware).
156
Controller Options
SD Card Appli Move
Overview
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you move application programs from one
SD card to another SD card.
If more than one application is required, the applications must be moved to one SD card with SP5873-1
(PostScript 3, Security Application, PictBridge, IPDS unit, PDF Direct, etc.).
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card
to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you move the application
program from one card to another card.
• Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
• Remove the cover [A] ( x 2), and then keep the SD card in the place [B] after you move the
application program from one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
• The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
• You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
Move Exec
The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD card
to another SD card.
157
2. Installation
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the
machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Make sure that a target SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 (upper). The application program is moved to
this SD card.
3. Insert the source SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2 (lower).The application
program is copied from this source SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec".
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the source SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
Undo Exec
"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you move back application programs from an SD card in SD Card
Slot 1 (upper) to the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). You can use this program when, for
example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the
machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). The application program is copied back into
this card.
3. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1 (upper).The application program
is copied back from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec."
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
158
Controller Options

9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
12. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option, see “Check All Connections” at the end of
this section ( p.174).
PostScript3 Unit Type C5502

RTB 26
Delete this note
1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1).
2. Insert the SD card [C] (PostScript 3) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] towards the front of
the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.
159
2. Installation
3. Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [A] to the front door.
4. Plug in, and then turn on the machine.
5. Move the PostScript3 application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD slot 1
(upper) with SP5-873-001.
6. Turn off the machine.
7. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place ( p.157).
8. Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 1).
IPDS Unit Type C5502
RTB 26
Delete this note
160
Controller Options
2. Insert the SD card [C] (IPDS Unit) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] towards the front of the
machine.
4. Move security applications from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD slot 1
6. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place ( p.157).
RTB 43
Do not attach the decal until IBM approval has been obtained.
File Format Converter Type E
161
2. Installation
1. Remove the slot B cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the file format converter [B] into slot B and then fasten it with screws.
4. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below.
SP No. Title Setting
SP5-836-001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) "1"
SP5-836-002 Panel Setting "0"
5. Check the operation.

IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g g (Wireless
LAN), IEEE1284).
162
Controller Options
1. Remove the slot A cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2) into the slot A.
IEEE 802.11a/g g Interface Unit Type J/K
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g g (Wireless
LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).
163
2. Installation
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot ( x 2).
2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2) into the board slot.
4. Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners [A], and then attach them [A] at the front left
and rear left of the machine.
5. Attach "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) [B] to the front left of the machine.
6. Attach "ANT2" (having a white ferrite core) [C] to the rear right of the machine.
• "ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna. Do not

attach them at the wrong places.
164
Controller Options
7. Attach the clamps as shown above.

8. Wire the cables and clamp them ( x 7).
• Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers.
You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that
generates strong magnetic fields.
• Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.
Installing Various Hardware Combinations
• Refer to the above picture [A] when installing the handset.
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN
Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11
a/g g. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on.
• You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.

• The Bluetooth interface unit and the Wireless LAN interface unit can not be used simultaneously.
1. Press the "User Tools/Counter" key.
2. On the touch panel, press "System Settings".
• The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select "Interface Settings".
4. Press "Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either "802.11 Ad hoc" or "Infrastructure".
165
2. Installation
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Region A (mainly Europe and Asia)
Range: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
In some countries, only the following channels are available:
Range: 1-11 channels (default: 11)
Region B (mainly North America)
Range: 1-11, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
• The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect
wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock
encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects "Active" or "Inactive" ("Inactive" is default.).
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
9. Press "Return to Default" to initialize the wireless LAN settings.
Press "Yes" to initialize the following settings:
• Transmission mode
• Channel
• Transmission Speed
• WEP
• SSID
• WEP Key
SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g g Wireless LAN
The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11 a/g g.
166
Controller Options
SP No. Name Function
Sets the transmission speed

Auto, 54 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 24 Mbps,
5840-008 transmission speed
18 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps,
11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: Auto)
5840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.

UP mode WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be

WEP Mode
used for the WEP Key entry.
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g g (Wireless
LAN), Bluetooth).
• Do not remove the Bluetooth unit while the power of the machine is on.
167
2. Installation
1. Turn off the power of the machine, and then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
2. Insert the Bluetooth Interface adapter into the USB connector [A].
3. Plug the power cable and turn on the power of the machine.
4. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see “Check All Connections” at the end of
• The Bluetooth interface unit and the Wireless LAN interface unit can not be used
simultaneously.
Camera Direct Print Card Type J
RTB 26
Delete this note
2. Insert the SD card [C] (PictBridge) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face to the front of the machine.
4. Move the PictBridge application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD slot 1
6. Remove the SD card from slot SD 2, and then keep it in a safe place.
168
Controller Options
SD Card for Netware Printing Type H
RTB 26
• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Delete this note
2. Insert the SD card [C] (Netware Printing) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] to the front of
the machine.
4. Move the Netware printing application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD
slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.
6. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place.
8. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see “Check All Connections” at the end of
169
2. Installation
Browser Unit Type F
Browser RTB 1
Installation Procedure Replace the entire procedure.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1).

2. Turn the SD-card label face [B] of the browser unit to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly
into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.
4. Push the "User Tools" key.
• If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, step 5 and 6 are required. Otherwise,
skip to the step 7
5. Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
6. Login with the administrator user name and password.
7. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
8. Touch "Install" on the LCD.
9. Touch "SD Card".
10. Touch the "Browser" line.
11. Under "Install to" touch "Machine HDD" and touch "Next".
170
Controller Options
12. When you see "Ready to Install", check the information on the screen to confirm your previous
selection.
13. Touch "OK". You will see "Installing the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
14. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.
15. Touch "Change Allocation".
16. Touch the "Browser" line.
17. Press one of the hard keys, which you want to use for the Browser Unit. In default, this function is
assigned to the "Other Functions" key (bottom key of function keys).
18. Touch "OK".
19. Touch "Exit" twice to go back to the copy screen.
20. Turn off the main power switch.
21. Install the key for "Browser Unit" to the place, where you want.
22. Remove the SD card of the browser unit from SD slot 2 (lower).
23. Attach the slot cover [A] ( x 1).
24. Keep the SD card in the place ( p.157) after you install the application program from the card to
HDD. This is because: The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the
application program. You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the
future.
Browser Icon Addition
This procedure allows the browser icon to appear on the home screen of the operation panel.
1. Press [User Tools].
2. Press [Edit Home].
171
2. Installation
3. Press [Add Icon].
4. Press [Browser].
5. Press a [Blank] to set a location for the browser icon.

6. Press [Exit] to end the fax browser icon addition.
172
Controller Options
Gigabit Ethernet Type B
1. Remove the controller cover [A] ( x 3).

2. Pull out the controller board [B] ( x 5).
3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).
173
2. Installation
4. Attach the Gigabit Ethernet controller [A] into the slot [B] ( x 2).
5. Install the Ethernet connector cover included in the Gigabit Ethernet board kit on the 100M bit LAN
connector.
7. Check the operation of the Gigabit Ethernet
Check All Connections
1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch.

2. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config. Page
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
174
Maintenance Tables
See “Preventive Maintenance Tables” in "Appendices" for the following information:
• Preventive Maintenance Items
• Other Yield Parts
175
PM Parts Settings
Before Removing the Old PM Parts

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.
3. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset the PM
counters automatically. In the case of developer, the developer initialization will also be done
automatically.
Item SP
Black: 3902-005
Yellow: 3902-006
Developer
Cyan: 3902-007
Magenta: 3902-008
Black: 3902-009
Yellow: 3902-010
Drum Unit
Cyan: 3902-011
Magenta: 3902-012
Heating sleeve belt unit and Pressure Roller (not Heating belt: 3902-018
necessary for complete fusing units; see below) Pressure roller: 3902-019
Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit 3902-015
PTR Unit 3902-016
Toner Collection Bottle (if not full or near-full) 3902-017
• After the PM counter for the heating sleeve belt unit reaches its PM life (300K pages), the machine
stops the operation automatically. Replace the heating sleeve belt unit before the machine stops its
operation (stop warning: 315K pages, stop: 330K pages).
• Change the setting of SP3-902-018 from "0" to "1" before replacing the heating sleeve belt unit.
Otherwise, the machine will not recover.
For the following units, there is a new unit detection mechanism. It is not necessary to reset PM counters.
176
PM Parts Settings
• PCDU
• Development unit
• Toner Collection Bottle (if full or near-full)
• Fusing unit
After installing the new PM parts

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values.
3. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-803. If the PM counter for a
unit was not reset, then reset that counter with SP 7-804.
4. Make sure that the exchange counter counts up with SP7-853.
5. Make sure that the counters for the previous units (SP7-906) on the new SMC logging data list
(from step 2 above) are equal to the counters (SP7-803) for these units on the previous SMC
logging data list (the list that was output in the "Before removing the old parts" section).
6. Make sure that the unit replacement date is updated with SP7-950.
Preparation before operation check
1. Clean the exposure glasses (for DF and book scanning).

2. Enter the user tools mode.
3. Do the "Automatic Color Calibration(ACC)" for the copier mode & printer mode as follows:
• Print the ACC test pattern (User Tools Maintenance ACC Start).
• Put the printout on the exposure glass.
• Put 10 sheets of white paper on the test chart. This ensures the precise ACC adjustment.
• Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
• Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD. Then, the machine starts the ACC.
4. Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode.
5. Do the "Forced line position adjustment" as follows.
• First do SP2-111-3 (Mode c).
• Then do SP2-111-1 (Mode a).
• To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is
177
Operation check
Check if the sample image has been copied normally.
178
Beforehand
• Before installing options, please do the following:

• If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-
programmed items, and the system parameter list.
• If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.
• Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.
• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle
SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
179
Special Tools
Part Number Description Q'ty
B645 5010 SD Card 1
B645 6705 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1
B645 6820 USB Reader/Writer 1
VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1
G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel *NOTE 1
C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1
A257 9300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
5203 9502 Silicone Grease G-501 1
A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1
A184 9501 Optics Adjustment Tool (2 pcs / set) 2
B679 5100 Plug - IEEE1284 Type A 1
B132 9700 Lubricant Powder 1
• The "Loop-back Connector–Parallel" requires the "Plug-IEEE1284 Type A", and the optional
IEEE1284 interface option must also be installed.
180
Image Adjustment
Image Adjustment
Scanning
Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before you do
the following scanner adjustments.
• Use S-2-1 test chart to do the following adjustments.
Scanner sub-scan magnification
A: Sub-scan magnification
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008 if necessary.
Standard: ±1.0%.
181
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration
A: Leading Edge Registration

1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 0 ± 2mm for the leading edge registration, 0 ± 2.5mm for the side-to-side registration.
SP mode
Leading Edge Registration SP4-010-001
Side-to-Side Registration SP4-011-001
ARDF
ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge
182
Image Adjustment
A: Leading edge registration

Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above.
1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the registration. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following
SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 4.2 ± 2 mm for the leading edge registration, 2 ± 1 mm for the side-to-side registration.
Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-003 Leading Edge Registration ± 5.0 mm
SP6-006-005 Buckle: Duplex Front ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-006 Buckle: Duplex Rear ± 2.5 mm
SP6-006-007 Rear Edge Erase (Trailing Edge) ± 10.0 mm
ARDF sub-scan magnification
1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001 if necessary.
• Standard: ±5.0%
• Reduction mode: ±1.0%
• Enlargement mode: ±1.0%
183
Registration
Image Area
A = C = 5.2 mm (0.2"), B = 2.0 mm

Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below.
Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Side to Side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode (SP1-002) to adjust the
side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and duplex unit.
Adjustment Standard
• Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 5.2 ± 2 mm

• Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 1 mm
Paper Registration Standard
The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions can change within the following tolerance.
• Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 9 mm
• Main-scan direction: 0 ± 4 mm
184
Image Adjustment
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP2-109-003.
2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003.
• Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page. Print some pages of the 1-dot
trimming pattern for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge and side-to-side
registration values, and adjust each SP mode.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
4. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
Erase Margin Adjustment
• Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub scan) cannot be
adjusted within the standard values. Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin
C and D, and then adjust the erase margin A and B.
185
1. Enter SP2-109-003.
2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003.
3. Check the erase margin A and B. Adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -015 if necessary.
• Leading edge: 0.0 to 9.0 mm (default: 4.2 mm)
• Side-to-side: 0.0 to 9.0 mm (default: 2.0 mm)
• Trailing edge: 0.0 to 9.0 mm (default: 4.2 mm)
Color Registration
Line Position Adjustment
The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best color
prints.
Do the following if color registration shifts:
• Do "Auto Color Registration" as follows to do the forced line position adjustment.
1. First do SP2-111-3.
2. Then do SP2-111-1.
• You should also do the line position adjustment at these times:
186
Image Adjustment
• After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line position adjustment if
you install the machine at the user location.) if the machine is pre-installed at the workshop
and moved to the user location,
• When you open the drum positioning plate
• When you remove or replace the motors, clutches, and/or gears related to the drum/
development/transfer sections
• When you remove or replace the image transfer belt, image transfer belt unit or laser optical
housing unit
Printer Gamma Correction
• The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output. You only need
the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to meet user requirements.
Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC. You can adjust the
gamma data for the following:
• Highlight
• Middle
• Shadow areas
• IDmax.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).
Copy Mode
- KCMY Color Balance Adjustment -

The adjustment uses only "Offset" values.
• Never change "Option" values (default value is 0).
Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
ID max Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID, middle ID,
Offset
high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
187
There are four adjustable modes (can be adjusted with SP4-918-009):

• Copy Photo mode
• Copy Letter mode
• Copy Letter (Single Color) mode
• Copy Photo (Single Color) mode
- Adjustment Procedure -
1. Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust.
3. Select "System SP."
4. Select SP4-918-009.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (see the table below).
• 1. Never change "Option" value (default value is "0").

• 2. Adjust the density in this order: "ID Max", "Middle", "Shadow", "Highlight".
- Photo Mode, Full Color -
Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that

ID max: the density of level 10 matches
1
(K, C, M, and Y) that of level 10 on the C-4
chart.
188
Image Adjustment
Middle (Middle ID) Adjust the offset value so that

2 the density of level 6 matches
(K, C, M, and Y) that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
Shadow (High ID) Adjust the offset value so that


Highlight (Low ID) dirty background does not show
4 on the copy and the density of
(K, C, M, and Y) level 3 is slightly lighter than that
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.

K Highlight (Low ID) the color balance of black scale
(C,M, and Y) levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
5 seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
<on the full color should be visible). If the black
copy> scale contains C, M, or Y, do
steps 1 to 4 again.
- Photo Mode, Single Color -

the density of level 10 matches
1 ID max: (K)
that of level 10 on the C-4
chart.

2 Middle (Middle ID) (K) the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.

3 Shadow (High ID) (K) the density of level 8 matches
189

dirty background does not show
4 Highlight (Low ID) (K) on the copy and the density of
level 3 is slightly lighter than that
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color -
Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard

ID max: (K, C, M, and the density of level 10 matches
1
Y) that of level 10 on the C-4
chart.
Middle (Middle ID) Adjust the offset value so that

Shadow (High ID) Adjust the offset value so that


Highlight (Low ID) dirty background does not show
4 on the copy and the density of
(K, C, M, and Y) level 3 is slightly lighter than that
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color -

the density of level 10 matches
1 ID max: (K)
that of level 10 on the C-4
chart.

2 Middle (Middle ID) (K) the density of level 6 matches
190
Image Adjustment

3 Shadow (High ID) (K) the density of level 8 matches

dirty background does not show
4 Highlight (Low ID) (K) on the copy and the density of
level 3 is slightly lighter than that
• Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust "shadow" as shown above.
At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the
offset value of "shadow" again until it is.
Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
• 1200 x 1200 photo mode
• 1200 x 1200 text mode
• 2400 x 600 text mode
K C M Y
Highlight SP1-104-1 SP1-104-21 SP1-104-41 SP1-104-61

Shadow SP1-104-2 SP1-104-22 SP1-104-42 SP1-104-62
Middle SP1-104-3 SP1-104-23 SP1-104-43 SP1-104-63
IDmax SP1-104-4 SP1-104-24 SP1-104-44 SP1-104-64
- Adjustment Procedure -
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
191
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select "Printer SP".
5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust.
6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine the image quality
for these settings.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104. Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
• Adjust the density in this order: "ID Max", "Shadow", "Middle", "Highlight".
8. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings.
192
Exterior Covers
Exterior Covers
Front Door
1. Open the front door [A].
2. Remove the two pins [A], and then remove the front cover.
193
Controller Cover
1. Controller cover [A] ( x 3)
Left Cover
1. Controller cover ( p.194)
2. Left cover [A] ( x 6)
194
Exterior Covers
Rear Cover
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2 [B], stepped screw x 6, hook x 2)
Right Rear Cover

2. Scanner right cover ( p.202)
3. Right top cover ( p.202)
195
4. Open the right door [A].

5. Right rear cover [B] ( x 3)
Operation Panel
1. Open the right door.
2. Front right cover [A] ( x 1)
196
Exterior Covers
3. Turn the operation panel upright.
4. Upper cover [A] ( x 1)
197
5. Disconnect the connectors. ( x 3, x 1)

6. Return the operation panel to the flat position.
7. Paper exit upper cover [A] (hook x 1)
198
Exterior Covers
8. Take off the under cover [A] (hook x 1)

9. Turn the operation panel upright.
10. Scanner front cover ( p.206)
11. Ground cable ( x 1, x 2)
199
12. Operation panel ( x 4)
Paper Exit Cover
1. Front right cover ( p.196)
200
Exterior Covers
2. Paper exit upper cover [A] (hook x 1)
3. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1, hook x 1)
201
Inner Tray
1. Image transfer belt unit ( p.252)

2. Paper exit cover ( p.200)
3. Left cover ( p.194)
4. Toner cartridge cover [A] ( x 2)

5. Inner tray [B]
Ozone Filter and Dust Filter
Ozone filters for the scanner unit
202
Exterior Covers
1. Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2)

• Loosen the top-right screw of the rear cover.
2. Right top cover [B] ( x 1)
3. Ozone filters [A] in the right top cover.
Ozone filter and dust filter for the AC controller
1. AC controller board fan cover [A] (hook x 1)
203
2. Dust filter [A]

3. Ozone filter [B]
204
Scanner Unit
Scanner Unit
Exposure Glass
1. Glass cover [A] ( x 4)

2. ARDF exposure glass [B]
3. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)

4. Exposure glass with left scale [B]
205
• Position the white marker [A] at the rear-left corner and the black or blue marker [B] at the
front-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass.
Exposure Lamp
1. Exposure glass ( p.205)

2. Upper cover ( p.196)
206
Scanner Unit
3. Scanner front cover [A] ( x 2, hook x 2)
4. ADF ( x 2)
5. Scanner rear cover [A] ( x 1)
207
6. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the cutout [B] in the front frame.
7. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. ( x 1, x 2)
208
Scanner Unit
8. Pull out the exposure lamp from the cutout.
Reassembling
Run the cable so there is no slack. Slide the clamp [A] to adjust the cable slack.
209
Chromaticity rank adjustment
Each scanner lamp has a specific chromaticity rank. The chromaticity rank is indicated by the bar-code
on the new scanner lamp. After replacing the lamp, adjust the chromaticity rank to correspond to the
new scanner lamp.
1. Check the first three digits [A] in the bar-code on the new scanner lamp before installing the new
lamp.
2. After installing the new lamp, go to SP4-954-005 and enter the SP setting number referring to the
table below.
1st Three Digits SP Setting (SP4-954-005) 1st Three Digits SP Setting (SP4-954-005)
139 3 166 12
140 2 167 11
141 1 168 10
142 6 169 15
143 5 170 14
144 4 171 13
145 9 172 18
146 8 173 17
210
Scanner Unit
1st Three Digits SP Setting (SP4-954-005) 1st Three Digits SP Setting (SP4-954-005)
147 7 174 16
148 12 204 3
149 11 205 2
150 10 206 1
151 15 207 6
152 14 208 5
153 13 209 4
154 18 210 9
155 17 211 8
156 16 212 7
157 3 213 12
158 2 214 11
159 1 215 10
160 6 216 15
161 5 217 14
162 4 218 13
163 9 219 18
164 8 220 17
165 7 221 16
211
Scanner Motor

2. Scanner Rear cover ( p.206)
3. Scanner motor assembly [A] ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1)
4. Scanner motor [B] ( x 2)
Sensor Board Unit (SBU)

2. Original length sensor bracket ( p.213)
3. SBU cover bracket [A] ( x 9)
212
Scanner Unit
4. Sensor board unit [A] ( x 4, Grand screw x 1, x 2, x 2)
When reassembling
Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:
• SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning".
• SP4–010 (Sub Mag Reg.): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning".
• SP4–011 (Main Scan Reg): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning".
• SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment): Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in
the DF and Platen mode is different.
Original Length Sensors
1. Exposure glass with left scale ( p.205)
2. Original length sensor 1 [A] (hook x 2, x 1)
213
3. SBU cover bracket [A] ( x 9)
4. Original length sensor 2 [A] (hook x 2, x 1)
LED Relay Board
214
Scanner Unit
2. LED relay board ( x 2, x 2)
SIO (Scanner In/Out) Board
215
2. SIO [A] ( x 4, x All)
Scanner HP Sensor
1. Scanner left cover and scanner rear cover ( p.206)

3. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side.
216
Scanner Unit
4. Remove the mylar [A]

5. Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, three snaps)
Platen Cover Sensor
1. Scanner left cover and scanner rear cover ( p.206)
2. Platen cover sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Front Scanner Wire
217
2. Scanner left stay [A] ( x 3)

3. Front frame [B] ( x 5)
4. Front scanner wire clamp [A]

5. Front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1)
6. Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [C] ( x 1)
218
Scanner Unit
Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire
1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the ring) [C]
through the notch.
3. Wind the right end counterclockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times. Wind the left end
clockwise twice.
• The two red marks [D] come together when you have done this. Stick the wire to the pulley
with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation.
219
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft [A].
• Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Insert the left end into the slit [B]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [C] and the
rear track of the movable pulley [D].
6. Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [A]. The end should go via the front track of
the right pulley [B] and the front track of the movable pulley [C].
220
Scanner Unit
• Do not attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time.
7. Remove the tape from the drive pulley.

8. Insert a scanner-positioning pin [A] through the 2nd carriage hole [B] and the left holes [C] in the
front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [D] through the 1st carriage hole [E] and the right
holes in the front rail [F].
9. Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail.
10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [G].
11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
• Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the positioning pins.
Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.
Rear Scanner Wire

2. Scanner left stay ( p.217)
221
3. Scanner rear frame [A] ( x 9, ground screw x 2, x All)

4. Follow the steps 3 through 5 in the “Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire” Section. You can remove
the rear scanner wire with the same manner for replacing the front scanner wire.
Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire
1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the left end (with the ball) [B] through the drive pulley notch. Pass the right end (with the ring)
[C] through the drive pulley hole.
3. Wind the left end [B] clockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times. Wind the right end [C]
counterclockwise three times.
• The two red marks [D] come together when you do this. Attach the wire to the pulley with
tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
• Do not attach the pulley on the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Install the wire.
222
Scanner Unit
• The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the same as
the winding on the three pulleys at the front. This must show as a mirror image.
Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three windings must face
the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it must face the rear.
6. Do steps 7 through 13 again in the “Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire” Section.
Touch Panel Position Adjustment
• It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times:

• When you replace the operation panel.
• When you replace the controller board.
• When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly.
Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only.
1. Press , press "1", "9", "9", "3", then press 5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics menu.
2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press "1").
3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark " ".
4. Press the lower right mark when " " shows.

5. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished.
6. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save the calibration settings.
223
Laser Optics
• Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this
section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
Caution Decal Location
Caution decals are placed as shown below.
• Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before
beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This copier uses a class IIIb laser beam
with a wavelength of 655 nm and an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
224
Laser Optics
LD Safety Switch
A relay on the PSU ensures technician and user safety. It also prevents the laser beam from turning on
during servicing. This relay turns off when the front cover, upper left cover, or right door is opened. At
this time it cuts the power (+5V) supplied to the LD board for each color through the IPU.
Two safety switches are turned on or off by the front door or right door, and this opens the relay.
• LD Driver: Precise Pulse Modulation ASIC on C-MOS technology
• LDB: LD Drive Board (included in the LD Unit)
Error Messages
Along with other switches, the LD safety switches help show error messages related to external covers.
When one or more covers are open, the messages, "Cover is open." and "Close the indicated cover,"
show with a diagram. The diagram shows which cover is open.
Laser Optics Housing Unit
• Before installing a new laser optics housing unit, remove the sponge padding and the tag from the
new unit.
225
• A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the new unit,
do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the correct time is stated
in the manual).
• This bracket protects a capacitor on the unit. If the bracket is removed too early, you could break
the capacitor on the corner of the main frame when you install the new unit.
Preparing the new laser optics housing unit
1. Polygon motor cover [A] of the laser optics housing unit ( x 4)

2. Sponge padding [B]
3. Tag [C]
4. Reinstall the polygon motor cover [A].
Before removing the old laser optics housing unit
Do the following settings before removing the laser optics housing unit. These are adjustments for skew
adjustment motors in the laser optics housing unit.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
3. Execute SP2220-001 to clear the L2 lens positioning motor setting for Magenta.
4. Execute SP2220-002 to clear the L2 lens positioning motor setting for Cyan.
5. Execute SP2220-003 to clear the L2 lens positioning motor setting for Yellow.
226
Laser Optics
7. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier.
Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser optics housing unit
If you did not do the procedure in ‘Before removing the old laser optics housing’ before removing the
old laser optics housing unit, you must do the following.
1. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier.
2. Remove the left cover and harness cover bracket (see the following "Removing the old laser optics
housing unit")
3. Disconnect the harness [A] of the skew correction motor.

4. Do steps 1 to 7 of "Before removing the old laser optics housing unit".
5. Connect the harness [A] and reinstall the harness bracket and left cover.
227
Removing the old laser optics housing unit
1. Controller cover [A] ( x 3)

2. Left cover [B] ( x 6)
3. Left fan bracket [A] for the laser housing optics unit ( x 4, x 2)
228
Laser Optics
4. Remove the old laser optics housing unit [A] ( x 2, All 's, x 3)
Installing a new Laser Optics Housing Unit
• A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the new unit,
do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the correct time is stated
in the manual).
• This bracket protects a capacitor on the unit. If the bracket is removed too early, you could break
the capacitor on the corner of the main frame when you install the new unit.
1. Push the new laser optics housing unit [A] slowly into the copier until the bracket [B] bumps against
the frame of the copier.
2. Remove the bracket [B], and then push the new laser optics housing unit fully into the copier ( x
2, All 's, x 3).
229
After installing the new laser optics housing unit
Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser optics housing unit.
2. Adjust the main scan magnification only for black (Bk).

• Input the standard value [A] provided with a new laser optics housing unit for the main scan
magnification adjustment with SP2-185-001.
• The value [A] is different for each laser optics housing unit.
• Print the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern in the SP2-109-003).
• Check that the left and right trim margin is within 4 ± 1 mm. If not, change the standard value
for the main scan magnification adjustment.
3. Adjust the main scan registration only for black (Bk).
• Input the registration value [B] provided with a new laser optics housing unit for the main scan
registration adjustment with SP2101-001.
• The value [B] is different for each laser optics housing unit.
• Print the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern in the SP2-109-003).
• Check that the left trim margin is within 2 ± 1 mm. If not, change the registration value for the
main scan registration adjustment.
4. Select "0" with SP2-109-003 after printing the "1-dot trimming pattern.
5. Do the line position adjustment.
• First do SP2-111-3.
• Then do SP2-111-1.
230
Laser Optics
After you replace the housing unit, do the adjustments in the following section of the manual: Image
Adjustment – Registration.
Polygon Mirror Motor and Drive Board
1. Laser optics housing unit [A] ( p.225)
2. Polygon mirror motor cover [A] of the laser optics housing unit ( x 4)
231
3. Polygon mirror motor holder [A] ( x 2)

4. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1)
After installing the polygon mirror motor:
• 1) Do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode c" (SP2-111-3).
• 2) Then do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode a" (SP2-111-1).
To check if SP2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is displayed at
the end. Also, you can check the result with SP2-194-10 to -12.
After you replace the motor, do the adjustments in the following section of the manual: Image Adjustment
– Registration.
Airflow Fans

232
Laser Optics
3. Airflow fan bracket [A] for the laser housing optics unit ( x 4, x 2)
4. Airflow fans [A]

• There are two airflow fans on the bracket.
Laser Optics Rear Right Thermistor

2. Fusing unit ( p.289)
3. Open the front door.
4. All PCDUs ( p.236)
233
6. Release the harness clamp [A] and remove the screw [B].
7. Open the controller box ( p.341).
1. Release the harness clamp [D] and disconnect the thermistor connector [E].
234
Laser Optics
2. Pull out the laser optics rear right thermistor [A] gently from behind by pinching its harness ( x 2,
x 1, x 1).
• When reinstalling the laser optics rear right thermistor:

• The thermistor harness is about 25 cm long. When routing the harness, use tweezers, and pay
extra attention to avoid damaging the harness.
235
Image Creation
PCDU
• Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve.
2. Lever lock [A] ( x 1)

3. Turn the drum positioning plate lever [B] and the image transfer unit lock lever [C] counter-
clockwise.
4. Open the drum positioning plate [D].
5. Pull out the PCDU (hold the grip while you pull it out).
236
Image Creation
Drum Unit and Development Unit
The new drum unit has a front cover and a front joint. When you attach the new drum unit to the
development unit, remove a front cover and a front joint at first.
And use them for reassembling the new drum unit and development unit.
1. If you install a new drum unit, set SP 3902-xxx to "1".
• Black: 3902-009
• Yellow: 3902-010
• Cyan: 3902-011
• Magenta: 3902-012
• If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the drum unit automatically, after
you turn the power on again.
2. Turn the machine power off.
3. PCDU ( p.236)
4. Front cover [A] ( x 2)
237
• Do not touch the bearing [A] after removing the front cover. The bearing is properly applied
with lubricant.
5. Remove the bushing [A] of the development roller at the rear of the PCDU ( x 1).
• Do not put too much weight on the PCDU. Otherwise, the plastic frame [B] of the development
unit may be damaged.
238
Image Creation
6. Remove the front joint [A] ( x 2, x 1).
• The front joint [A] is firmly set. Remove it with a flat screwdriver.
7. Drum unit [A] and Development Unit [B]
• When the development unit is removed from the drum unit, clean the entrance mylar [C] with
a vacuum.
239
8. Rotate the development roller [A] five or six times in the counterclockwise direction.
• This step removes developer that has stuck to the development roller, which would cause color
unevenness.
9. If you change the development unit, do the ACC procedure.
10. Execute the drum phase adjustment with SP1902-001 twice.
When reassembling the PCDU:
• Make sure that the harness [A] is hooked as shown.
Developer
1. Set SP 3902-xxx to "1".

Black: 3902-005
Yellow: 3902-006
Cyan: 3902-007
240
Image Creation
Magenta: 3902-008
2. Turn the machine power off.
3. Development unit ( p.237)
4. Hopper cover [A] (4 hooks)

• Release the three hooks first in the correct order (from to ).
• Put the head of a screwdriver in the groove gap [B] as shown, and then release the hook .
• Follow the correct order to . Otherwise, the hopper cover may be damaged. The hook
breaks easily.
5. Shake a bag of developer and pour it into the development hopper [A].
6. Reattach the hopper cover (hook x 3).
• Keep the developer off at both ends of the development unit enclosed in red lines in the
diagram.
241
7. Turn the machine power on. The machine initializes the developer and resets the PM counter for the
developer. (For details of the developer initialization result, see "Developer Initialization Result" in
the "Appendix: Process Control Error Conditions" chapter.
8. Do the ACC procedure.
Toner Collection Bottle
If you will install a new bottle, and the old bottle is not in a full or near-full condition, then set SP
3902-017 to 1.
• If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the bottle automatically, after you turn
the power on again.
• If the bottle is in a full or near-full condition, it is not necessary to do this.
2. Open the front door and remove the screw [A].

4. Pull out tray 1 [B].
5. Open the toner collection bottle door [C].
6. Pull out the toner collection bottle [D].
242
Image Creation
Second Duct Fan

2. Right rear cover ( p.195)
3. Open the controller box ( p.341)
4. Second duct [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 2)
5. Split the second duct (4 hooks).
243
6. Second duct fan [A]
When reinstalling the second duct fan
Make sure that the second duct fan is installed with its decal facing to the front of the machine.
Third Duct Fan

4. Third duct [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
244
Image Creation
5. Third duct fan [A] (3 hooks)
When reinstalling the third duct fan
Make sure that the third duct fan is installed with its decal facing to the upper side of the machine.
Toner Pump Unit
There are four pump units inside the machine. This procedure describes the replacement procedure only
for one unit. If you need to replace another unit, do the same as this procedure.
• Put some sheets of paper on the floor before doing this procedure. Toner may fall on the floor.

3. All PCDUs ( p.236)
245
4. Put a sheet of paper (A3/DLT) inside the machine as shown and on the floor.
• The sheet of paper on the floor is used in a later step.
5. Release the harness [A] from the clamp ( x 1 for YCM, x 2 for K) and hook, and then
disconnect the harness.
• Avoid touching these spring terminals [B].

6. Release the toner supply tube [C].
7. Remove the toner pump unit [A] ( x 2)
246
Image Creation
• Make sure that a sheet of paper is attached to the frame of the rear side. The picture on the
left shows a sheet of paper that is correctly set, but the picture on the right shows a sheet of
paper that is not correctly set. This sheet of paper prevents toner and screws from falling into
the laser optics housing unit through cutouts.
8. Slowly remove the toner supply tube [A] from the toner pump unit by pulling the tube right and left.
9. Turn up the openings of the toner pump unit and toner supply tube just after removing the tube.
• If not, the toner may scatter away and fall down.
247
10. Put the toner pump unit on the sheet of paper, which has been put in step 4, with its opening [A] up.
11. Keep the opening [A] of the toner supply tube up, and then clip the opening of the toner supply.
When you install the new toner pump unit
Before installing the new toner pump unit, mask the opening of the old toner pump unit with tape.
Dispose of it following local rules.
248
Image Creation
1. Put a sheet of paper (A3/DLT) inside the machine.

2. Turn up the opening of the toner supply tube, and then remove the object that was used to clip the
opening of the toner supply tube.
3. Insert the opening of the toner pump unit [A] into the opening of the toner supply tube [B] as far as
possible.
4. Connect the harness [A] to the connector of the machine.
249
• On the above picture, the magnified picture of the connector shows the easiest way to
connect it.
5. Clamp the harness [A] ( x 1 for YCM, x 2 for K).
• Avoid touching these spring terminals [B].
6. Pass the harness of the toner pump unit behind the hook [A], while pressing at [B].
7. Secure the toner supply tube with the holder [C], lifting up the edge of the holder "very gently".
• Be careful when you lift the edge of the holder, because the holder is easily broken.
8. Insert the toner pump unit [A] into the rear frame of the machine ( x 2).
250
Image Creation
Toner End Sensor

3. Toner end sensor [A] ( x 1, 2 hooks each)
• A toner end sensor is not installed in the entrance of the toner supply tube for black.
251
Image Transfer
Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit
1. If you will install a new belt cleaning unit, then set SP 3902-015 to 1.
• If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the belt cleaning unit
automatically, after you turn the power on again.
• Do not use SP3902-015 or 013 if you replace the complete ITB unit.
5. Open the drum positioning plate. ( p.236)
6. Loosen the screw [A].

7. Turn the lock lever [B] clockwise
8. Pull out the image transfer belt cleaning unit [C].
Image Transfer Belt Unit

252
Image Transfer
3. Open the drum positioning plate. ( p.236)
4. Image transfer belt cleaning unit ( Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit)
5. Turn the image transfer belt unit lock lever [A] counterclockwise.
6. Pull out the image transfer belt unit [B] halfway.
7. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the image transfer belt unit fully.
Image Transfer Belt
1. Image transfer belt cleaning unit ( p.252)

253
3. Turn the image transfer unit contact lever [A] counterclockwise (as seen from the rear).
4. Gear [B] (hook x 1)
5. Turn the gear cover [C] clockwise (as seen from the rear) ( x 1).
6. Three stays [A] ( x 6)
254
Image Transfer
7. Guide plate [A] (as seen from the right side of the machine) ( x 2)
8. Remove the two screws and then the rear holder bracket [A] (as seen from the rear).
255
9. Remove the two screws and then the front holder bracket [A] (as seen from the front).
10. Put the front side of the image transfer belt unit on a corner of the table or a box as shown.
11. Pull the tension roller [A] as shown.
256
Image Transfer
12. Image transfer belt [A]
When reinstalling the image transfer belt
• Clean all rollers with dry cloth before installing the image transfer belt.
• There is a rim [A] at each edge of the transfer belt. The ends of all the rollers ([B] for example) in
the transfer belt unit must be between the two rims.
• There are two rims (width [C]: about 5 mm) on the underside of the front and rear edges of the
image transfer belt.
257
• This belt must be installed the correct way around. When you reinstall the image transfer belt unit,
install it with the number [A] on the belt at the rear side of the unit.
• Put "Lubricant Powder" (B132 9700) on the surface of the image transfer belt [A], while you turn
the drive gear [B] at a constant speed, as shown. (The straight arrow in the picture shows belt
movement direction.) Lubricant powder prevents the image transfer cleaning blade from turning up.
• Do not put the lubricant powder at the right side of the image transfer belt unit (the above
picture is taken from the rear). Otherwise, lubricant powder may damage the encoder sensor.
258
Paper Transfer
Paper Transfer
Paper Transfer Roller Unit
If you will install a new paper transfer unit, then set SP 3902-016 to 1.
• If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically,
after you turn the power on again.
2. Release the white hook.

3. Paper transfer roller unit [A]
Paper Transfer Unit
If you will install a new paper transfer unit, then set SP3-902-016 to 1.
• If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically,
after you turn the power on again.
259
2. Open the duplex door [A].

3. Open the by-pass tray [B]
4. Right door cover [C] ( x 4)
6. Right door inner cover [A] ( x 1)
260
Paper Transfer
7. Pivot bracket [A] ( x 1)

8. Paper transfer unit [B] ( x 1, 2 springs)
ID Sensor Board
1. K PCDU ( p.236)
5. ID sensor unit [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1)
261
6. ID sensor cover [A] ( x 4)

7. ID sensor board [B] ( x 2)
Cleaning for ID sensors
ID sensors require a cleaning procedure every EM. Do the following steps for ID sensor cleaning.
1. K PCDU ( p.236)
4. Slide the ID sensor shutter [A] to the left side.
5. Clean the ID sensors keeping the ID sensor shutter to the left.
After installing a new ID sensor unit/board
Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor unit/board.

1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
262
Paper Transfer
3. Input two correction coefficients [A] for the ID sensor with SP3-362-013 and SP3-362-016 on the
barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor unit/board.
• For example, input "1.03" with SP3-362-013.

• SP numbers other than SP3-362-013 and -016 are not required for this procedure.
Temperature and Humidity Sensor

3. Temperature and humidity sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
263
Drive Unit
The drawing above shows the drive unit layout.
1. Fusing/paper exit motor

7. Paper feed clutch – Tray 2
2. Development clutches
8. Paper feed motor
3. Image transfer belt contact motor
9. Registration motor
4. Toner transport motor
10. Paper transfer contact motor
5. Drum/Development drive motors
11. ITB drive motor
6. Paper feed clutch – Tray 1
There are some motors and clutches that are not shown in the above drawing:
• Tray lift motor 1 and 2 • Junction gate 1 motor

• Duplex inverter motor • Shutter motor
• Duplex/By-pass Motor • By-pass clutch
Gear Unit
1. All PCDU's
264
Drive Unit

4. Controller box ( p.341)
5. Toner sump cover [A] ( x 2)

6. Third duct ( p.244)
8. PSU bracket ( p.350)
9. Remove the rear stay [A] ( x 3).
265
10. Remove ten clamps (blue arrows).
11. Release seven clamps and turn each harness aside.
12. Disconnect four connectors (red arrows).
266
Drive Unit
13. Disconnect two connectors (red arrows) and put these harnesses inside the machine.
14. Disconnect each connector (red circles) from the drum/development drive motors ( x 1, x1
each).
15. Disconnect each connector (blue circles) from the development clutches ( x 1 each).
16. Cover [A] ( x 2)
267
17. Disconnect eight connectors from the high voltage supply board ( x 8, x 2).
18. Release four clamps (red circles) and turn the harnesses aside.
19. Disconnect five connectors (red circles) ( x 5).

20. Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3)
268
Drive Unit
21. Pulley [A] (timing belt)
22. Gear unit [A] ( x 8)
269
When installing the drive unit
Make sure that the bushing [A] is fully set in the frame of the gear unit before installing the timing belt
and pulley to the shaft [B].
Adjustment after replacing the gear unit
Do the following procedures after replacing the gear unit.

2. Enter "System SP" in the SP mode.
3. Do “Amplitude Control" with SP1-902-001.
4. Check the result of the Amplitude Control with SP1-902-002.
0: Success, 2: Failure due to no sampling data,
3: Failure due to insufficient number of pattern detections
When the result of this adjustment is "2" or "3":
• Check that all the PCDUs are correctly set and that the image transfer belt unit is correctly set.
• Do "Amplitude Control" again after checking the PCDUs and image transfer belt unit.
When the result is still "2" or "3" after checking the PCDUs and image transfer belt unit:
• Check that the gear unit is installed correctly.
Registration Motor
270
Drive Unit

3. Ventilation duct ( p.349)
5. Fusing power supply board fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
271
6. Registration motor assembly [A] ( x 3, x 1)
1. Registration motor ( x 2)
Paper Feed Motor

272
Drive Unit
3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
Drum/Development Motors for M, C, and Y

273
4. Drum/Development motors (three motors, one each for MCY) [A] ( x 4, x 1 each)
Drum/Development Motor-K

4. Third duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)
274
Drive Unit
5. Drum/Development motor-K [B] ( x 4, x 1)
ITB Drive Motor

3. ITB drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
Fusing/Paper Exit Motor

2. Open the controller box. ( p.341)
275
• You will need a short screwdriver to attach the screw.

3. Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor

3. Transfer belt contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 2)
Duplex Inverter Motor

2. Right door cover ( p.325)
276
Drive Unit
3. Duplex door [A] (2 hooks)

4. Duplex guide plate [B] ( x 3, 2 hooks)
5. Duplex inverter motor bracket cover [A] ( x 2, x 2)
6. Duplex inverter motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 1)
277
7. Gear [A] ( x 1, belt x 1)

8. Duplex inverter motor [B] ( x 4)
Pressure Roller Contact Motor

4. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1).
278
Drive Unit
5. Pressure roller contact motor [A] ( x 4)
Duplex/By-pass Motor

4. Pressure roller contact motor ( p.278)
5. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1, x 1)
279
6. Duplex/by-pass motor bracket [A] ( x 2)
7. Duplex/by-pass motor [A] ( x 4, belt x 1)
Paper Transfer Contact Motor

280
Drive Unit
4. Stay [A] ( x 4)
5. Pressure roller contact motor ( p.278)
6. Duplex/by-pass motor bracket ( p.279)
7. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1)
8. Paper transfer contact motor [A] ( x 2)
281
• The picture below shows how to use the screwdriver to remove the screws of the paper
transfer contact motor.
Toner Transport Motor

3. Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
282
Drive Unit
Toner Collection Unit
1. Gear Unit ( p.264)
2. Toner collection unit [A] ( x 6, x 1)
Paper Feed Clutches

283
3. Release five clamps, and then turn the harness [A] aside.
4. Paper feed clutch 1 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1, x 1)
5. Paper feed clutch 1 [A]
284
Drive Unit
6. Paper feed clutch 2 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
7. Paper feed clutch 2 [A]
Development Clutch-Y

3. Open the controller box. ( p.341).
4. Toner sump cover ( p.264)
5. Drum/development motor-Y ( p.273)
285
6. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1).
7. Remove the pulley and bushing [A].
8. Turn the development clutch unit [A] counter-clockwise and then pull it out ( x 1).
286
Drive Unit
9. Development clutch-Y [B] ( x 1)
Development Clutches for M and C

3. Open the controller box. ( p.341).
4. Toner sump cover ( p.264)
5. Drum/development motors for M and C ( p.273)
6. Disconnect the connector for each development clutch ( x 1).
8. Development clutches for M and C [B] ( x 1)
Development Clutch-K

4. Drum/development motor-K ( p.274)
287
6. Development clutch-K [A] ( x 1)
288
Fusing
Fusing
Fusing Unit PM Parts
In the fusing unit, there are some PM parts. Refer to the following list to check the PM parts.
Maintenance Parts Replacement Procedure
Heating sleeve belt unit p.297
Pressure Roller p.300
Fusing Unit
• Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the
procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.
1. If you will replace the heating roller or pressure roller in the fusing unit (at PM for example), then
reset each counter.
• Set SP 3902-018 to "1" for the heating roller replacement.
• Set SP 3902-019 to "1" for the pressure roller replacement.
• If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the heating roller or pressure
roller automatically, after you turn the power on again.
• It is not necessary to clear the PM counter for the fusing unit with SP mode when you replace
the fusing unit. This is because the fusing unit has a new unit detection mechanism.
289
4. Remove two transport brackets [A] if installed. ( x 1 each)
5. Release the lock levers [A].

6. Hold the fusing unit handles [B], and then pull out the fusing unit.
290
Fusing
Fusing Exit Shutter Plate
2. Fusing exit shutter plate [A] ( x 2)
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

2. Turn over the fusing unit.
291
3. Fusing entrance guide plate [C] ( x 2)
• Screw [A] and screw [B] are different from each other.
Cleaning Requirement
The fusing entrance guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval.
Clean the fusing entrance guide plate at the place shown above with a dry cloth, and then clean the
fusing entrance guide plate again with a cloth moistened with alcohol.
292
Fusing
Fusing Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure
The fusing exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval.
2. Open the exit guide plate [A].

3. Clean the exit guide plate with a dry cloth, and then clean the exit guide plate again with a cloth
moistened with alcohol at the points shown above.
Fusing Unit Upper Cover

2. Fusing exit shutter plate ( p.291)
293
3. Right guide bracket [A] ( x 1)

4. Springs [B]
5. Remove the fusing unit upper cover [C] while pressing down the rollers [D] ( x 4).
294
Fusing
• The shutter plate [A] should be closed whenever the fusing unit upper cover is reinstalled.
Otherwise, the ends of the shutter plate [B] may be damaged and this will result in a problem when
opening and closing the shutter.
Fusing Unit Lower Cover

2. Fusing unit upper cover ( p.293)
295
3. Place the fusing unit upside down.

4. Lift up the fusing unit lower cover [A] half way ( x 4).
5. Disconnect two connectors [B], [C] and remove the wire harnesses from their harness guides ( x
2).
• The fusing lower cover cannot be removed from the fusing main body completely before
removing the thermistors. Therefore, pay extra attention to handling the fusing lower cover
when disassembling the fusing unit.
296
Fusing
6. Fusing unit lower cover [A]
Heating Sleeve Belt Unit

RTB 55
Additional notes due to new components
• After the PM counter for the heating roller has reached its PM life (300K pages), the machine stops
automatically. Replace the heating roller before the machine stops (stop warning issued at 315K
pages, stops at 330K pages).
• Change the setting of SP3-902-018 from "0" to "1" before replacing the heating roller. Otherwise,
the machine will not recover.
3. Fusing unit lower cover ( p.295)
4. Fusing entrance guide plate ( p.291)
297
5. Pressure roller contact shaft actuator [A] and pressure roller contact shaft gear [B] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Bearing [D]
7. Right stay [C] ( x 3)
8. Turn over the fusing unit gently to prevent damage to the harnesses.
1: Right side
9. Remove two screws at the right side ( x 2).
298
Fusing
1: Left side
10. Left bracket [A] ( x 2)
1: Left side
11. Remove gears [A], [B], [C] ( x 1, x 1, bearings x 2).
12. Remove two screws on the left side ( x 2).
299
13. Remove the heating sleeve belt unit while releasing 4 snapping points at the right and left side (See
the photos of steps 9 and 11).
• The surface of the heating sleeve belt is delicate. Never touch the surface. Do not wipe the surface
with anything. If the surface of the heating sleeve belt must be cleaned because of offset image for
example, feed some sheets of white paper through the fusing unit instead.
Pressure Roller
1. Heating sleeve belt unit ( p.297)
300
Fusing
2. Remove the pressure roller with bearings [A].
• The surface of the pressure roller is fragile, so the pressure roller must be covered with a sheet
of paper when it is placed on a table or floor.
301
• Do not wipe off the grease of the new fusing drive gear when replacing the fusing drive gear
[A].
Stripper Plate

3. Pressure roller ( p.300)
302
Fusing
4. Heating roller stripper plate [A] (spring x 2)
Cleaning Requirement
The stripper plates require cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. Clean the
stripper plates with a dry cloth, and then clean the stripper plates again with a cloth moistened with
alcohol at the points shown above.
Pressure Roller Thermistors
303

3. Pressure roller ( p.300)
4. Pressure roller thermistor [A] ( x 1 each)
Pressure Roller Thermostats

304
Fusing
4. Pressure roller thermostat (center) [A] and pressure roller thermostat (end) [B] ( x 2 each)
NC Sensors

305
4. NC sensor (center) [A] and NC sensor (end) [B] (hooks x 2 each, x 1 each)
Fusing Fan

306
Fusing
3. Fusing duct [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Fusing fan [A] (hooks x 5)
When installing the fusing fan
Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine.
Paper Exit Fan

3. Paper exit fan [A] ( x 1, hook x 3)
When installing the paper exit fan
• Make sure that the paper exit fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the machine.
307
AC Controller Board Fan

3. AC controller board fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4. AC controller board fan [B] ( x 2)
When installing the AC controller board fan
Make sure that the AC controller board fan is installed with its decal facing the upper side of the
machine.
Fusing Entrance Thermopiles
308
Fusing
3. Fusing entrance thermopile brackets ( x 1 each)
4. Fusing entrance thermopiles ( x 1 each, x 1 each)
When cleaning the lens of the thermopile
• Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down. Otherwise, you may
get a serious burn.
309
2. Clean with a cotton-swab dipped in alcohol.
Pressure Roller HP Sensor

3. AC controller board ( p.355)
4. AC controller board bracket ( p.356)
310
Fusing
5. Pressure roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, hooks x 3)
QSU Fan

3. Pull out trays 1 and 2, and the image transfer belt unit.
311
4. Right front cover [A] and front inner cover [B].
5. QSU fan bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

6. QSU fan ( x 2)
Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Motor
312
Fusing
2. Fusing unit shutter plate drive motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
• Do not wipe off the grease of the gear [B] on the new motor [A] when replacing it.
313
Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Home Position Sensor

3. Fusing unit shutter plate home position sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
314
Fusing
4. Fusing unit shutter plate home position sensor [A] (Hooks x 4)
Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Mechanism

3. Fusing unit shutter plate home position sensor bracket ( p.314)
315
1. Fusing unit shutter plate drive mechanism [A] ( x 4)
• If the shaft interferes with the movement of the screwdriver, the screw [B] should be removed
at the very last while pushing the shaft down slightly.
316
Fusing
2. Drive shaft stay [A] (Bearing x 1)
3. Drive cams [A] ( x 3, [B] x 1)

4. Drive gear [C] and drive shaft [D] (Bearing x 1, x 1)
5. Drive belt [A]
317
• When reinstalling the fusing unit shutter plate drive mechanism:

• Make sure that the tension of the coil spring on the drive shaft is correct before reinstallation. If
the tension is weak, rotate the spring one revolution on the shaft and hook it.
318
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Paper Feed Unit

3. Duplex unit ( p.334)
4. Pull out tray 1 and tray 2.
5. Paper guide plate [A] (tab x 2)
6. Harness cover [A] ( x 1)
319
7. Paper feed unit [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Pick-Up, Feed and Separation Rollers
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1. Paper feed unit ( p.319)
2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1)

3. Pick-up roller [B]
4. Feed roller [C]
5. Separation roller [D] and torque limiter [E] ( x 1)
320
Paper Feed
Tray Lift Motor

3. High voltage supply board bracket ( p.355)
4. Tray lift motor 1 [A] or 2 [B] ( x 2, x 3, x 1 each)
Vertical Transport, Paper Overflow, Paper End and Paper Feed Sensor

3. Paper feed unit ( p.319)
321
4. Paper overflow sensor [A]

5. Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook, x 1 each)
6. Vertical transport sensor bracket [D] ( x 1, x 1)
7. Vertical transport sensor [E] ( x 1, hook)
8. Paper feed sensor bracket [F] ( x 1)
9. Paper feed sensor [G] ( x 1, hook)
Registration Sensor

322
Paper Feed
3. Paper guide plate 1 [A] and 2 [B] ( x 2 each)

4. Registration sensor [C] ( x 1, hook)
By-pass Paper Size Sensor and By-pass Paper Length Sensor
1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

2. Move the side fences to the center.
3. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 4)
323
4. By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1)

5. By-pass paper length sensor [B] ( x 1)
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor
1. Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered).
2. Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the projection
[C] of the left side fence bar.
3. Reassemble the copier.
5. Check this switch operation with SP5803-011 (By-pass paper size < Input Check).
- Display on the LCD -

Paper Size Display Paper Size Display
A3 SEF 00001110 A5 SEF 00001011
324
Paper Feed
Paper Size Display Paper Size Display
B4 SEF 00001100 B6 SEF 00000011
A4 SEF 00001101 A6 SEF 00000111
B5 SEF 00001001 Smaller A6 SEF 00001111
By-pass Bottom Tray

2. By-pass tray cover ( p.323)
3. Open the duplex door [A].

4. Right door cover [B] ( x 4)
325
5. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3)
6. Remove the screw at the front side ( x 1).
7. Remove the cover [A] (2 hooks).
326
Paper Feed
8. Remove the screw at the rear side.
9. Release the front [A] and rear [B] arms ( x 1 each).
10. By-pass bottom tray [A]
327
By-pass Paper End Sensor
2. By-pass feed unit cover [A] ( x 2).

3. By-pass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1, hook)
By-pass Pick-up, Feed and Separation Roller, Torque Limiter
2. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook)
328
Paper Feed
3. By-pass feed roller [A] ( x 1)

4. By-pass feed unit cover ( p.328)
5. By-pass separation roller [A] ( x 1)

6. Torque limiter [B]
By-pass Feed Clutch

2. Right door rear cover ( p.325)
329
3. By-pass feed clutch holder [A] ( x 2)

4. By-pass feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1)
Paper Exit Unit
1. Fusing Unit ( p.289)

4. Inner Tray ( p.202)
7. Fusing entrance thermopiles ( p.308)
8. Fusing duct ( p.306)
330
Paper Feed
10. Gear cover [A] ( x 1)

11. Paper exit unit [B] ( x 2, x 2)
Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, Junction Paper Jam and Paper Exit Sensor
1. Paper exit unit ( p.330)
331
2. Fusing exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)

3. Remove the fusing exit sensor from the fusing exit sensor bracket ( x 1)
4. Paper overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
5. Junction paper jam sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
332
Paper Feed
6. Remove the junction paper jam sensor from the junction paper jam sensor bracket (hook)
7. Paper exit sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
8. Remove the paper exit sensor from the paper exit sensor bracket (hook)
333
Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit

4. Close the right door [A].

5. Remove the spring [B].
6. Open the right door [A].
7. Release the front link [A] ( x 1).

8. Keep the right door fully open.
334
Duplex Unit
9. Hold the right door, and then release the wire [A] ( x 1).
• Keep holding the right door before removing the right door completely. Otherwise, the right
door can fall down and injure you.
10. Press the projection [B] to pull the right door shaft into the unit, and then remove the duplex unit [C]
( x 1, x 1, x 4, ground cable x 1).
Duplex Door Sensor

335
3. Duplex door sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
Duplex Entrance Sensor

3. Duplex entrance guide [A] ( x1, stepped screw x 2)

4. Duplex entrance sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
336
Duplex Unit
5. Duplex entrance sensor [C] (hook)
Duplex Exit Sensor
1. Paper transfer unit ( p.259)
2. Guide plate [A] (two hooks)

3. Duplex exit sensor [B] ( x 1, hook)
337
Electrical Components
Boards
Controller Box closed
[A] IOB
[B] FCU (Option)
[C] G3 Interface Unit (Option)
[D] PSU
[E] High Voltage Supply Board (Behind the PSU [D] )
338
Behind the IOB, FCU and G3 Interface Unit
[F] IPU
[G] BCU
[H] Controller Board
[I] HDD
Controller Box Open
[J] ITB Power Supply Board
Controller Unit
339
2. Controller unit [A] ( x 5)
Controller Box Right Cover
340
D144 RTB 89
Take caution when removing the controller
board cover, because the edges of the cover
are sharp.
2. Controller box right cover [A] ( x 8)
Controller Box
When opening the controller box
2. Remove seven screws.
341
3. Open the controller box [A].
When removing the controller box

4. Controller box right cover ( p.340)
342
5. Controller box stay [A] ( x 4)
343
6. IOB bracket [A] ( x 4, x All)
7. Disconnect the scanner interface cable [A] (ground cable)

8. Release all clamps on the controller box frame.
9. Disconnect all connectors on the IPU board and the BCU board [B].
10. Disconnect the connector [C] at the outer controller box and at the inner controller box.
11. Disconnect two ground cables. ( x 1, each)
344
12. Open [1] and lift up [2] the controller box [A], and then remove it. ( x 4)
IOB (In/Out Board)

345
3. IOB [A] ( x 6, All s)
IPU

346
4. IPU [A] ( x 6, x all)
BCU

347
4. BCU [A] ( x 4, x All)
• Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the NVRAM
slot with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the left side.
When installing the new BCU
Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU. Then install it on the new BCU after you replace the BCU.
Replace the NVRAM ( p.363) if the NVRAM on the old BCU is defective.
• Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before you
replace the NVRAM.
• Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.
• Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old BCU are the same for the new BCU when. Do not
change the DIP switches on the BCU in the field.
348
• Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data; if not, SC 995-001
occurs.
PSU
Shutdown Board
2. Shutdown board with bracket ( x 4, x 2, x 3)
349
3. Shutdown board ( x 2)
PSU bracket

2. Shutdown board with bracket ( Shutdown Board)
3. Ventilation duct [A] ( x 2)
350
4. First duct fan bracket [A] ( x 2)
5. Remove [A] ( x 2, x 1)
6. PSU bracket [A] ( x 6, x All, x All)
351
PSU board

2. Shutdown board with bracket ( p.349)
3. Ventilation duct ( p.350)
4. First duct fan bracket ( p.350)
5. Remove [A] ( x 2, x 1)
RTB 71
Some parts of the board remain charged even after
unplugging the machine.
6. PSU board [A] ( x 11, all s, all s)
PSU fans

2. Shutdown board with bracket ( p.349)
352
3. PSU fan bracket [A] ( x 4, x 2)
4. PSU fans ( x 2 each)
353
ITB Power Supply Board

2. Scanner rear cover ( p.206)
4. ITB power supply board [A] ( x 5, x 6)
High Voltage Supply Board

3. High voltage supply board [A] ( x 8, All s, x 2)
354
High Voltage Supply Board Bracket

3. High voltage supply board bracket [A] ( x 3, x All, x 2)
AC Controller Board

3. Fusing duct ( p.306)
355
4. AC Controller Board [A] ( x 7, x 5)
AC Controller Board Bracket
356
2. AC controller board bracket [A] ( x 3)
Controller Board
1. Controller unit ( p.339)
357
2. Controller board [A] ( x 7, x 3)
358
3. Interface rails [A], NV-RAM [B], RAM-DIMM [C]
When installing the new controller board
Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board. Then install it on the new controller board after you
replace the controller board. Replace the NVRAM if the NVRAM on the old controller board is
defective.
• Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before you
replace the NVRAM.
• Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.
• Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board.
359
• Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old controller board are the same for the new
controller board. Do not change the DIP switches on the controller board in the field.
HDD Fan
2. HDD fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)
HDD
2. Remove the HDD [A] with the bracket ( x 4, x 2).
360
3. Remove the HDD from the bracket [A] ( x 4).
When installing a new HDD unit
1. Turn the main power switch on. The disk is automatically formatted.
2. Install the stamp data using "SP5853".
3. Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use.
Disposal of HDD Units
• Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
• If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD must
remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
• The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information. Specifically, the
HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary files created automatically
during copy job sorting and jam recovery. Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it
cannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods.
Reinstallation
Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is
replaced:
• Document server documents
• Custom-made stamps
• Document server address book
The address book and document server documents (if needed) must be input again.
361
If you previously backed up the address book to an SD card with SP5846 051, you can use SP 5846
052 to copy the data from the SD card to the hard disk.
If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security feature, the DOS function must be set up again. For
more, see Section 1 (Installation).
If the customer is using the optional Browser Unit, this unit must be installed again. For more, see Section
1 (Installation).
Toner Bottle Detection Board
2. Remove the grounding plate [A] completely ( x 3).

3. Move the harnesses [C] downward to prevent the board from catching on them.
4. Pull out the toner bottle detection board [B] gently and horizontally ( x 1, x 4)
362
• The toner bottles detection board should be pulled out horizontally. If you ignore this, the toner
bottle detection terminals [A] may be damaged.
NVRAM Replacement Procedure
This machine has two types of NVRAM. One is on the BCU ( p.347); the other is on the controller
board ( p.357).
RTB 37
Important notes
NVRAM on the BCU
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.
2. Output the SMC data (SP5-990-001) if possible.
4. Install an SD card into SD card slot 3. Then turn the main power on.
5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card (SP5-824-001) if possible.
6. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.
8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
9. Select a paper-size type (SP5-131-001).
10. Specify the serial number and destination code of the machine.
• Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the serial number and destination code.
• SC 999 or "Fusing Unit Setting Error" can be shown until the serial number and destination
code are correctly programmed.
363
11. Turn the main switch off and on.

12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (SP5-825-001) if you have successfully copied
them to the SD card.
13. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
15. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
16. Do the process control self-check.
17. Do ACC for the copier application program.
18. Do ACC for the printer application program.
• If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM replacement,
the encryption key should be restored. See “Encryption Key Restoration for NVRAM” for the
restoration procedure. ( p.863)
NVRAM on the controller board
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.
2. Output the SMC data (“ALL”) using SP5-990-001. (SP5-990-001)
3. Turn off the main switch.
4. Insert a blank SD card into slot #2, and then turn on the main switch.
5. Upload the NVRAM data to the blank SD card using SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload).
6. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the AC power cord.
7. Remove the SD card containing the NVRAM data from slot #2.
8. Replace the NVRAM on the controller board with a new one.
9. Plug in the AC power cord, and then turn on the main power switch.
• When you do this, SC995-02 (Defective NVRAM) will be displayed. However, DO NOT turn
off the main power switch. Continue with this procedure.
10. Re-insert the SD card that you removed in step 7 back into slot #2.
11. Download the old NVRAM data from the SD card onto the new NVRAM using SP5-825-001
(NVRAM Data Download).
• This will take about 2 or 3 minutes.

12. Turn off the main power switch, and then remove the SD card from slot #2.
364
14. Output the SMC data (“ALL”) using SP5-990-001, and make sure that it matches the SMC data
you printed out in step 2 above (except for the value of the total counter).
• The value of the total counter is reset to “0” when the NVRAM is replaced.
15. Do Process Control Self-check.
16. Do ACC for the Copier function.
17. Do ACC for the Printer function.
• Do all of the following if SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and SP5-825-001 (NVRAM
Data Download) cannot be performed for some reason.
1. Manually enter all data on the SMC report (factory settings).
2. Install the Security function (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit) again.
For the procedure, see “Security function Installation” in “Installation Procedure” of
“Copier Installation”. ( p.40)
• If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM replacement,
the encryption key should be restored. See “Encryption Key Restoration for NVRAM” for the
restoration procedure. ( p.863)
365
Using Dip Switches

Controller Board
DIP SW No. OFF ON
1 Boot-up from Flash Memory Boot-up from SD card
2 to 8 Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch settings.
BCU Board
DIP SW No. OFF ON
1 and 2 Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch settings.
366
Service Program Mode
• Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates
that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the
data.
SP Tables
See "Appendices" for the following information:

• System SP Tables
• Printer SP Tables
• Scanner SP Tables
Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode
• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might
be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.
Entering SP Mode
For details, ask your supervisor.
Exiting SP Mode
• Press "Exit" on the LCD twice to return to the copy window.
Types of SP Modes
• System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions

• Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
• Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
367
• Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions

Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as
shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the functions of the
System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.
SP Mode Button Summary
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
1 Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
2 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
368
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode
3
(highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press .
4 (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing . If not, just press the
required SP Mode number.)
Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
5
operation.
6 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
7 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
8 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page).
9 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing
1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press "Copy Window".
2. Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for the test
print.
3. Press Start to start the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.

1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to
adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that you want
to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set
and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below default or the current
settings.
369
• Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
• Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate
number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
• Press to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is out of
range.)
• Press "Yes" when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and select the
settings for the test print. Press Start and then press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to
return to the SP mode display.
7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
Exiting Service Mode
• Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the
machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the
machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set
"Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
370
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary to ask the
Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the
machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
Remarks
Display on the Control Panel Screen
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30
characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated. The
following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
Paper Weight
Thin paper: 52-59 g/m2
Plain Paper: 60-81 g/m2, 16-21.6lb.
Middle Thick: 82-105 g/m2, 21.87-28lb.
Thick Paper 1: 106-169 g/m2, 28.5-44.9lb.
Thick Paper 2: 170-220 g/m2, 45-58lb.
Thick Paper 3: 221-256 g/m2, 59lb-68lb
Thick 4: 257 g/m2-300 g/m2, 68.4-79.8lb
Paper Type
Paper Feed Station
N: Normal paper
P: Paper tray
MTH: Middle thick paper
B: By-pass table
TH: Thick paper
371
Color Mode [Color]

[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode
Print Mode Process Speed

S: Simplex L: Low speed (77 mm/s)
D: Duplex M: Middle speed (154 mm/s)
Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.

FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets enclosed.
You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch must be turned
off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored in the
NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value. "ENG" and "CTL" show
which NVRAM contains the data.
• ENG: NVRAM on the BCU board
• CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the following
way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
• If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the SP mode
shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings
in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.
SSP: This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting.
372
Main SP Tables-1
Main SP Tables-1
SP1-XXX (Feed)
[Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type Thin, Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or
1001 Thick 3
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing
for each mode.
002 Tray: Plain *ENG
003 Tray: Middle Thick *ENG
004 Tray: Thick 1 *ENG
007 By-pass: Plain *ENG
008 By-pass: Middle Thick *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
009 By-pass: Thick 1 *ENG
013 Duplex: Plain *ENG
014 Duplex: Middle Thick *ENG
015 Duplex: Thick 1 *ENG
373
017 Tray: Plain:1200 *ENG
018 Tray: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
019 Tray: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
020 By-pass: Plain:1200 *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
021 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
022 By-pass: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
023 Duplex: Plain:1200 *ENG
024 Duplex: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
025 Duplex: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
026 Tray: Thin *ENG
027 By-pass: Thin *ENG
028 Duplex: Thin *ENG
029 Tray: Thin: 1200 *ENG
030 By-pass: Thin: 1200 *ENG
031 Duplex: Thin: 1200 *ENG
[Side to Side Registration] Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment

1002 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each
mode.
374
Main SP Tables-1
001 By-pass Table *ENG
002 Paper Tray 1 *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
006 Duplex *ENG
008 Large Capacity Tray *ENG
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color mode), Paper Type Plain, Thick, Thick1
1003
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed
timing.
002 Paper Tray1: Plain *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
003 Tray1: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
004 Paper Tray1: Thick1 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
007 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Plain *ENG
008 Tray 2/3/4/5/LCT: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
009 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]

[–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
014 By-pass: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]

[–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
020 Duplex: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
375
021 Paper Tray1: Plain: 1200 *ENG
022 Tray1: Middle Thick: 1200 *ENG
023 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Plain: 1200 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
024 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Mid: 1200 *ENG
025 By-pass: Plain: 1200 *ENG
026 By-pass: Middle Thick: 1200 *ENG
027 Paper Tray1: Thick1: 1200 *ENG
028 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1:1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
029 By-pass: Thick 1: 1200 *ENG
030 Duplex: Plain: 1200 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
031 Duplex: Middle Thick: 1200 *ENG
032 Duplex: Thick 1: 1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display
LG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass tray.
001 This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is less than
8.5”.
0: OFF (Letter/SEF), 1: ON (Legal/SEF)
[Reload Permit Setting]

1101
Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
001 Pre-rotation Start Temp. *ENG [-50 to 200 / -50 / 1 deg/step]
002 Reload Target Temp.:Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg/step]
003 Reload Target Temp.:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
004 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Delta:Cold:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
376
Main SP Tables-1
006 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]
[Forced Ready Set]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
007 Forced Reload Time :Cold *ENG [0 to 100 / 9 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for warm temperature in color mode.
008 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
009 Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
010 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for warm temperature in color mode.
011 Forced Reload Time:Warm *ENG [0 to 100 / 9 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for hot temperature in color mode.
012 Temp.:Delta:Hot:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
013 Temp.:Delta:Hot:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
014 Temp.:Delta:Hot:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for hot temperature in color mode.
015 Forced Reload Time:Hot *ENG [0 to 100 / 9 / 1 sec/step]
[Reload Permit Setting Temp.]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode.
016 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
017 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
018 Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode.
377
Forced Reload
019 *ENG [0 to 100 / 9 / 1 sec/step]
Time:Cold:BW

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2.
Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Cent
020 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
er
021 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
022 Temp.Delta:Cold:BW2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
[Forced Ready Set]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2.
023 Time:Cold:BW2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
[Feed Permit Setting]

1102
Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing.
001 Temp.:Lower Delta:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
003 Temp.:Upper Delta:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
006 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
007 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1
008 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Upper
009 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1
010 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Lower Delta:Press:Sp.
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
1
378
Main SP Tables-1
012 Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
013 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Upper
015 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
017 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
2
018 Rotation Time:Sp2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
019 Feed Permit Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
1105 [Print Target Temp]
(Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex)

Roller Type Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure Pressure roller
Paper Type Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special
Plain1:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

001
Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color printing.
Plain1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

002 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color
printing.
Plain1:BW:Center *ENG [180 to 100 / 140 / 1 deg/step]

003
Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.
Plain1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

004
Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.

005
379

006 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full coloe
printing.

007

008
009 Thin:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
010 Thin:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
011 Thin:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
012 Thin:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
013 M-thick:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
014 M-thick:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
015 M-thick:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
016 M-thick:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
017 Thick1:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
018 Thick1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
019 Thick1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
020 Thick1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
380
Main SP Tables-1
029 Special1:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg/step]
030 Special1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
031 Special1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg/step]
032 Special1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
041 Envelop:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step]
042 Envelop:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
101 Plain1:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 133 / 1 deg/step]
102 Plain1:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Plain1:BW:Center:Low
103 *ENG [100 to 180 / 133 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
104 Plain1:BW:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
107 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:FC:Center:Low
109 *ENG [100 to 180 / 143 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
381
110 M-thick:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
M-thick:BW:Center:Low
111 *ENG [100 to 180 / 143 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:BW:Press:Low
112 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
113 Thick1:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
114 Thick1:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Thick1:BW:Center:Low
115 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
116 Thick1:BW:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Special1:FC:Center:Low
117 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:FC:Press:Low
118 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:BW:Center:Low
119 *ENG [100 to 180/ 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:BW:Press:Low
120 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
121 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
122 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
123 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
124 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
125 Plain1:Glossy:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
126 Plain1:Glossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
382
Main SP Tables-1
129 M-thick:Glossy:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
130 M-thick:Glossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
131 OHP:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 158 / 1 deg/step]
132 OHP:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
133 Envelop:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 163 / 1 deg/step]
134 Envelop:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
135 Thin:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 128 / 1 deg/step]
136 Thin:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
137 Thin:BW:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 128 / 1 deg/step]
138 Thin:BW:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
1106 [Fusing Temp. Display]
001 Heat Center - [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step]
002 Heat End - Displays the temperature of the heating roller.
003 Press Center - [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step]
004 Press End - Displays the temperature of the heating roller.
1107 [Standby Target Temp. Setting]
Stanby/Preheat1:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 sec/step]

001 Specifies the time that the fusing heater turns off after the fusing unit temperature has
reached its target temperature.
Stanby/Preheat1: Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the ready or energy save 1 mode.
383
Preheat2:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 sec/step]

003
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the ready or energy save 2 mode.
Preheat2:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

004
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Low Power:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 sec/step]

005
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the low power mode.
Low Power:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 60 / 1 deg/step]

006
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the low power mode.
Print Ready:Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

007
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the print ready condition.
Print Ready:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

008
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the print ready condition.
1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.]
Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

001
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job.
Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job.
1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing]
Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step]

001 Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing temperature is 17°C
or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low temperature.
Temp.: Threshold: High *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

002 Specifies the threshold temperature for high temperature. If the fusing temperature is 30°C
or more, the machine executes the fusing mode for high temperature.
384
Main SP Tables-1
Low Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

003 Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature. If the fusing temperature is
in low temperature condition, this temperature is added to the target temperature.
High Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

in high temperature condition, this temperature is added to the target temperature.
005 Job Low Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
006 Job High Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Job Low Temp.

007 *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
Job High Temp.

008 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
1113 [Curl Correction]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
Execute Pattern *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On (No Decurl), 2: On
Selects the curl correction type.
Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step]

002
Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.
Humidity:Threshold:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

003
Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity.
Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:M-
*ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]
004 humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in middle humidity.
Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:H-
*ENG [0 to 200 / 50 / 1 deg/step]
005 humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity.
006 *ENG [0 to 200 / 50 / 1 deg/step]
humid:No Decurl
385
Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in middle humidity.
*ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 1 deg/step]
007 humid:No Decurl
Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in high humidity.
CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

008 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in middle
humidity.
CPM:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

009 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high
humidity.
CPM:M-humid:No Decurl *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

010 Specifies the CPM ratio against of the no decurl control to the normal operation in middle
humidity.
CPM:H-humid:No Decurl *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

011 Specifies the CPM ratio against of the no decurl control to the normal operation in high
humidity.
1115 [Target Temp. Correction]
Temp.:Delta:End *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

001
Specifies the different temperature between end and center of the heating roller.
1141 [Fusing SC Issue Time Info]
001 SC Number *ENG Displays the issued SC number.
386
Main SP Tables-1
101 Htg Roller:Ctr Det1 *ENG
102 Htg Rolloer:End Det1 *ENG
104 Htg Roller:End Det1 *ENG

[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]
Displays the temperature at the center
153 Press Roller:Ctr Det2 *ENG of the heating roller when an SC was
issued.
154 Press Roller:End Det2 *ENG
203 Press Roller:Ctr Det3 *ENG
1142 [Fusing Jam Detection]
SC Display *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection.
0: No detection, 1: Detection
1151 [Pressure Setting]
Pressure Change ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
001 Enables or disables the pressure switching control for the fusing unit.
0: OFF , 1: ON
Pressure Position1 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 420 / 10 msec/step]

002
Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the pressure position 1.

003
387

004
Depressure Position *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 220 / 10 msec/step]

005 Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the depression position
(no pressure).
Shift Time *ENG [0 to 3600 / 60 / 1 sec/step]

011 Specifies the timing for depressing the fusing unit. If the machine does not get any jobs for
specified time by this SP after copying or printing, the machine depresses the fusing unit.
101 Pressure:Plain1/2 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in normal speed.
0: Depression position (no pressure)
1: Position 1 (less pressure)
2: Position 2
3: Position 3 (strongest pressure)
102 Pressure:Thin *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
103 Pressure:M-thick *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
104 Pressure:Thick1 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
107 Pressure:Special1 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
110 Pressure:Envelope *ENG [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
151 Pressure:Plain1/2:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
388
Main SP Tables-1
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in low speed.
2: Position 2
152 Pressure:M-thick:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
153 Pressure:Thick1:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
154 Pressure:Special1:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
156 Pressure:Plain1/2:Glossy *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
157 Pressure:M-thick:Glossy *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
158 Pressure:OHP *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
159 Pressure:Envelope:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
160 Pressure:Thin:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Pressure:Thick4 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for thick 4 paper.
161
2: Position 2
Pressure:Postcard *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for postcard.
162
2: Position 2
Filler Edge Detection Counter ENG [0 to 9,000,000 / - / 1 /step]

201
Displays the detection time for the edge of the pressure roller actuator.
389
1152 [Fusing Nip Band Check]
001 Execute - [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller.
If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure roller or
install a new fusing unit.
Pre-idling Time *ENG [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 sec/step]

002
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001.
Stop Time * ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step]

003
Specifies the time for measuring the nip.
Pressure Position * ENG [1 to 3 / 3 / 1 ]

004
Specifies the pressure position for measuring the nip.
1153 [Fuser Cleaning]
001 Compulsion execution - Execute the fusing cleaning mode.
Operation interval *ENG [1 to 300 / 0 / 1 K/step]
002 Adjusts the execution interval for the fusing cleaning mode.
1K= 100 sheets
Control Temp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 180 / 1°C/step]

003
Specifies the heating roller temperature for the fusing cleaning mode.
Page Count *ENG [1 to 300000 / - / 1 page/step]

004
Displays the page counter for the fusing cleaning mode.
1801 [Motor Speed Adj.]
001 Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
002 Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
003 Registration:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
390
Main SP Tables-1
004 Registration:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
005 Registration:Middle Thick:High *ENG
006 Registration:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
007 Registration:Thick1:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
008 Registration:Thick 2:Low *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
010 Duplex CW:Plane:Low *ENG
011 Duplex CW:Normal:High *ENG
012 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Low *ENG
013 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG
014 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
015 Duplex CW:Thick1:Low *ENG
016 Duplex CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
019 Duplex CCW:Normal:High *ENG
020 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
021 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:high *ENG
023 Duplex CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
024 Reverse CW:Normal:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step]
025 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
026 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step]
391
028 Reverse CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
029 Reverse CCW:Normal:High *ENG
030 Reverse CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
031 Reverse CCW:Middle Thick:High *ENG
033 Reverse CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
034 Feed:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
035 Feed:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
036 Feed:Middle thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
037 Feed:Middle thick:Mid *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
038 Feed:Middle thick:High *ENG
039 Feed:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
040 Feed:Thick 1:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
041 Feed:Thick 2:Low *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
043 Bridge Motor:Low *ENG
044 Bridge Motor:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
045 Bridge Motor:High *ENG
060 KOpcDevMot:High *ENG
061 KOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.3 / 0.01 %/step]
062 KOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
063 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
064 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
065 MOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
066 COpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
067 COpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
068 COpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
392
Main SP Tables-1
069 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
070 YOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
071 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
072 Fusing: High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
073 Fusing: Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.8 / 0.01 %/step]
074 Fusing: Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.3 / 0.01 %/step]
075 TransferMot:High *ENG
076 TransferMot:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.1 / 0.01 %/step]
077 TransferMot:Low *ENG
078 TonerMot *ENG [–30 to 30 / 10 / 5 %/step]
079 Fusing: 1200 *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Drum Adjust *ENG
100 0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the drum amplitude adjustment.
101 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG
103 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG
104 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG
106 YOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG
107 MOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
109 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
110 MOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG
111 COpcDevMot:1200 *ENG [– 7 to 7 / 0 / 1 step/step]
112 YOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG
393
120 Long:Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
121 Long:Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
122 Long:Registration:Middle Thick:High *ENG
Long:Registration:Middle [–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step]

123 *ENG
Thick:Middle
124 Long:Registration:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
125 Long:Registration:Thick 1:Middle *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1 / 0.1 %/step]
126 Long:Registration:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
129 Long:Fusing:Plain:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step]
130 Long:Fusing:Plain:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.1 / 0.01 %/step]
131 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step]
132 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:Middle *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.4 / 0.01 %/step]
133 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.1 / 0.01 %/step]
134 Long:Fusing:Thick 1:Middle *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.01 %/step]
135 Long:Fusing:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.7 / 0.01 %/step]
1902 [Amplitude Control]
001 Execute *ENG Execute the drum phase adjustment.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
Displays the result of the drum phase adjustment.
002 Result *ENG 0: Successfully done
2: Sampling failure
3: Insufficient detection number
394
Main SP Tables-1
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
003 Auto Execution *ENG Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on or off.
0: Off, 1: On
[Fan Cooling Time Set]

1950
Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end.
002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG
006 Main Suction Fan *ENG
007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG
008 PSU Fan *ENG
009 QSU Heater Cooling Fan *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
AC Control board Cooling

010 *ENG
Fan
011 Second Duct Fan *ENG
012 Toner Supply Cooling Fan *ENG
[Fan Start Time Set]

1951
Adjust the start time for each fan motor after a job end.
002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
006 Main Suction Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
008 PSU Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
009 Fusing IH Coil Fan *ENG
010 IH Power Supply Fan *ENG

[0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
012 Third Duct Fan *ENG
395
[Fan Control Off Mode Time Set]

1952
Specifies the time for fan control off mode.
001 - *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 min./step]
[Extra Fan Control]

1953
Configures the settings of extra fan control.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Extra Fan Cooling State *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Displays the extra fan cooling is On or Off.
Extra Fan Cooling: Time: [0 to 180 / C2.5a: 110, C2.5b: 100 / 1

002 *ENG
Threshold min./step]
Extra Fan Cooling: Rotat:

003 *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 min./step]
Threshold
Displays the execution time and date of the

004 Extra Fan Cooling: Start Date *ENG
extra fan cooling.
Extra Fan Cooling Time *ENG [0 to 120 / 30 / 0.1 min./step]

005
Specifies the execution time for the extra fan cooling.
[Extra Fan Control]

1954
Fan Cooling Time:Fusing Exit

002 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Main

006 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Suction Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Paper Exit

007 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:PSU

008 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Fusing IH

009 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Coil Fan:Initial
396
Main SP Tables-1
Fan Cooling Time:IH Power

010 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Supply Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Second

011 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Duct Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Third Duct

012 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
397
Main SP Tables-2
SP2-XXX (Drum)
[Charge DC Voltage] Charge Roller DC Voltage Adjustment

(Paper Type, Process Speed, Color)
2005
Paper Type Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2
Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&FINE: Low speed
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3-041-1 Default:
ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-041-1, the values in
these SP modes are used for printing.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
005 Thick 1: Bk *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 1000 / 690 / 10 –V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG
011 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG
012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG
[Charge DC: Correction]
[–100 to 100 / C3c: -26, C3d: -28 / 1 –V/

013 PCU:Plain *ENG
step]
014 PCU:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / -29 / 1 –V/step]
398
Main SP Tables-2
015 PCU:Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / -28 / 1 –V/step]
016 HVP:Plain *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step]
017 HVP:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step]
018 HVP: Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / 29 / 1 –V/step]
[Charge AC Voltage] Charge Roller AC Voltage Adjustment

2006
Adjusts the AC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (AC component) is adjusted by environment correction (SP2-007-xxx to
SP2-011-xxx). These SPs are activated only when SP2-012-1 is set to "1: manual
control".
001 Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
002 Plain: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
004 Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
005 Thick 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
010 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
011 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
2012 [Charge Output Control]
399
Selects the AC voltage control type.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 AC Voltage *ENG 0: Process control
1: Manual control (AC voltages are decided
with SP2006.)
2013 [Environmental Correction: PCU]
Displays the environmental condition, which is

measured in absolute humidity.
[1 to 5 / – / 1 /step]
Current Environmental FC: 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m3)

001 *ENG
Display 2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m3)
3: MM (11.3 < MM <= 18.0 g/m3)
4: MH (18.0 < MH <= 24.0 g/m3)
5: HH (24.0 g/m3 < HH)
Selects the environmental condition manually.

[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Forced Setting *ENG 0: The environmental condition is determined
automatically.
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
Changes the humidity threshold between LL

Absolute Humidity: Threshold and ML.
003 *ENG
1
[0 to 100 / 3.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Changes the humidity threshold between ML

Absolute Humidity: Threshold and MM.
004 *ENG
2
[0 to 100 / 8.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Changes the humidity threshold between MM

Absolute Humidity: Threshold and MH.
005 *ENG
3
[0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Changes the humidity threshold between MH

Absolute Humidity: Threshold and HH.
006 *ENG
4
[0 to 100 / 22.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
400
Main SP Tables-2
Displays the current temperature.

007 Current Temp. FC: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]
Current Relative Humidity FC: Displays the current relative humidity.

008 *ENG
Display [0 to 100 / - / 1%RH/step]
Current Absolute Humidity Displays the absolute humidity.

009 *ENG
FC: Display [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Displays the previous environmental condition,

Previous Environmental Bk: which is measured in absolute humidity.
010 *ENG
Display [1 to 5 / - / 1 /step]
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
Displays the previous temperature.

011 Previous Temp. Bk: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]
Previous Relative Humidity Displays the previous relative humidity.

012 *ENG
Bk: Display [0 to 100 / - / 1%RH/step]
Previous Absolute Humidity Displays the previous absolute humidity.

013 *ENG
Bk: Display [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
[Charge AC Adj: Result]

2015
Displays a result of the AC charge adjustment.
001 Bk *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Success
002 M *ENG
1: Out of tolerance range
003 C *ENG
2: Out of adjustable range
004 Y *ENG 3: Adjustment incompleted
[Color Registration Correction] FA
These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are
2101 adjusted at the factory. However, you must input a value for SP2101-001 after replacing
the laser optics housing unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the
"Replacement and Adjustment" section. The value should be provided with the new laser
optics housing unit.
401
001 Main Dot: Bk *ENG
002 Main Dot: Ma *ENG

[–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
003 Main Dot: Cy *ENG
004 Main Dot: Ye *ENG
005 Sub Line: Bk *ENG
006 Sub Line: Ma *ENG

[–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
007 Sub Line: Cy *ENG
008 Sub Line: Ye *ENG
2103 [Erase Margin Adjustment] (Area, Paper Size)
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.
001 Lead Edge Width *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Trail. Edge Width *ENG
003 Left *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
004 Right *ENG
006 Duplex Trail. L Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 Duplex Trail. M Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
008 Duplex Trail. S Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
009 Duplex Left Edge *ENG

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
010 Duplex Right Edge *ENG
011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick *ENG

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
015 Duplex Right Edge:Thick *ENG
402
Main SP Tables-2
016 Lead Edge Width: Thin *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
017 Trail. Edge Width: Thin *ENG
018 Duplex Trail. L Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
019 Duplex Trail. M Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
020 Duplex Trail. S Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
2105 [LD Power Adj.] (Process Speed, Color)
Adjusts the LD power of each color for each process speed.

Each LD power setting is decided by process control.
001 High Speed: Bk *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]

002 High Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner on
the output.
003 High Speed: Cy *ENG
Increasing a value makes lines thicker on the
004 High Speed: Ye *ENG output.
005 Middle Speed: Bk *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]

006 Middle Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner on
the output.
007 Middle Speed: Cy *ENG
008 Middle Speed: Ye *ENG output.
009 Low Speed: Bk *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]

010 Low Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner on
the output.
011 Low Speed: Cy *ENG
012 Low Speed: Ye *ENG output.
[Test Pattern]
2109
Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD.
003 Pattern Selection - [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
403
0 None 11. Independent Pattern (1dot)

1: Vertical Line (1dot) 12. Independent Pattern (2dot)
3: Horizontal (1dot) 14. Trimming Area
4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line 17: Band (Horizontal)
6: Grid Horizontal Line 18: Band (Vertical)
7: Grid pattern Small 19: Checker Flag Pattern
8: Grid pattern Large 20: Grayscale Vertical Margin
9: Argyle Pattern Small 21: Grayscale Horizontal Margin
10: Argyle Pattern Large 23: Full Dot Pattern
Specifies the color for the test pattern.

[1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
005 Color Selection -
1: All colors, 2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4:
Cyan
006 Density: Bk -
Specifies the color density for the test pattern.
007 Density: Ma - [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
008 Density: Cy - 0: Lightest density

15: Darkest density
009 Density: Ye -
2111 [Forced Line Position Adj.]
Executes the fine line position adjustment twice.

001 Mode a - If this SP is not completed (NG is displayed), do
SP2111-003 first and then try this SP again.
Executes the fine line position adjustment once.

002 Mode b - If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003 first
and then try this SP again.
Executes the rough line position adjustment once.
003 Mode c - After doing this SP, make sure to execute

SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line
position adjustment is not perfectly done.
404
Main SP Tables-2
2112 [TM/ID Sensor Check] ID Sensor Check FA
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Execute This SP is used to check the ID sensors at the

factory. The results of this SP are displayed in
SP2140 to SP2145.
[Skew Adjustment]
Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.

2117
These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or when
SC2.585 occurs. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and
Adjustment" section.
001 Pulse: M *ENG
002 Pulse: C *ENG [–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
003 Pulse: Y *ENG
2118 [Skew Adjustment]
001 Execute: M *ENG Changes the current skew adjustment values to

the values specified with SP2117.
002 Execute: C *ENG
These SPs must be used when a new laser optics
housing unit is installed or when SC2.585
occurs. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing
003 Execute: Y *ENG
Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment"
section.
[Skew Adjustment Display]

2119
Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor.
001 M *ENG
002 C *ENG [–50 to 50 / - / 1 pulse/step]
003 Y *ENG
405
[Area Mag. Correction] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA
Adjusts the magnification for each area. The main scan (297 mm) is divided into 8 areas.
Area 1 is at the front side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 8 is at the rear
2150 side of the machine (right side of the image).
Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print.
Increasing a value makes the image shift to the right side on the print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
027 Area 0: Bk *ENG [-255 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]
028 Area 1: Bk *ENG
029 Area 2: Bk *ENG
030 Area 3: Bk *ENG
031 Area 4: Bk *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
032 Area 5: Bk *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
033 Area 6: Bk *ENG
034 Area 7: Bk *ENG
035 Area 8: Bk *ENG
036 Area 9: Bk *ENG
037 Area 10: Bk *ENG

Not used
079 Area 0: Ma *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
406
Main SP Tables-2
080 Area 1: Ma *ENG
081 Area 2: Ma *ENG
082 Area 3: Ma *ENG
083 Area 4: Ma *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
085 Area 6: Ma *ENG
086 Area 7: Ma *ENG
087 Area 8: Ma *ENG
088 Area 9: Ma *ENG
089 Area 10: Ma *ENG

Not used
131 Area 0: Cy *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
132 Area 1: Cy *ENG
133 Area 2: Cy *ENG
134 Area 3: Cy *ENG
135 Area 4: Cy *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
137 Area 6: Cy *ENG
138 Area 7: Cy *ENG
139 Area 8: Cy *ENG
140 Area 9: Cy *ENG
141 Area 10: Cy *ENG

Not used
183 Area 0: Ye *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
407
184 Area 1: Ye *ENG
185 Area 2: Ye *ENG
186 Area 3: Ye *ENG
187 Area 4: Ye *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
189 Area 6: Ye *ENG
190 Area 7: Ye *ENG
191 Area 8: Ye *ENG
192 Area 9: Ye *ENG
193 Area 10: Ye *ENG

Not used
[Area Shad. Correct. Setting] FA
Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power.

The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited from area 1
2152 to area 14.
For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image) and
area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
For Cyan and Yellow, area 1 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image)
and area 14 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image).
408
Main SP Tables-2
001 Area 0: Bk *ENG
002 Area 1: Bk *ENG
003 Area 2: Bk *ENG
004 Area 3: Bk *ENG
005 Area 4: Bk *ENG
006 Area 5: Bk *ENG
007 Area 6: Bk *ENG

This is for the synchronizing detection board.
008 Area 7: Bk *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
009 Area 8: Bk *ENG
010 Area 9: Bk *ENG
This is out of the image area.

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

033 Area 0: Ma *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
409
034 Area 1: Ma *ENG
035 Area 2: Ma *ENG
036 Area 3: Ma *ENG
037 Area 4: Ma *ENG
038 Area 5: Ma *ENG
039 Area 6: Ma *ENG
040 Area 7: Ma *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
041 Area 8: Ma *ENG
042 Area 9: Ma *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

065 Area 0: Cy *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
410
Main SP Tables-2
066 Area 1: Cy *ENG
067 Area 2: Cy *ENG
068 Area 3: Cy *ENG
069 Area 4: Cy *ENG
070 Area 5: Cy *ENG
071 Area 6: Cy *ENG
072 Area 7: Cy *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
073 Area 8: Cy *ENG
074 Area 9: Cy *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

097 Area 0: Ye *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
411
098 Area 1: Ye *ENG
099 Area 2: Ye *ENG
100 Area 3: Ye *ENG
101 Area 4: Ye *ENG
102 Area 5: Ye *ENG
103 Area 6: Ye *ENG
104 Area 7: Ye *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
105 Area 8: Ye *ENG
106 Area 9: Ye *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
2181 [Line Position Adj. Result]
Displays the values for each correction.

• "Paper Int. Mag: Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value between two
sheets of paper.
• "Mag.Cor. Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value.
• "M. Scan Erro." indicates the shift correction value in the main scan direction.
• "S. Scan Erro." Indicates the shift correction value in the sub scan direction.
• "M. Cor.: Dot" indicates the dot correction value in the main scan direction.
• "M. Cor.: Subdot" indicates the sub dot correction value in the main scan direction.
• Bk: Black, M: Magenta, C: Cyan, Y: Yellow
001 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
412
Main SP Tables-2
002 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
003 Skew: M *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
005 M. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG
006 M. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG
007 M. Scan Erro.: Right: M *ENG

[–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
008 S. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG
009 S. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG
010 S. Scan Erro.: Right: M *ENG
011 M. Cor.: Dot: M *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
012 M. Cor.: Subdot: M *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
013 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: M *ENG
014 Mag.Cor. Subdot: M *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
015 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
016 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
017 S. Cor.: 600 Line: M *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / - / 1 line/step]
018 S. Cor.: 600 Sub: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / - / 0.001 line/step]
021 Skew: C *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
023 M. Scan Erro.: Left: C *ENG
024 M. Scan Erro.: Center: C *ENG
025 M. Scan Erro.: Right: C *ENG

[–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
026 S. Scan Erro.: Left: C *ENG
027 S. Scan Erro.: Center: C *ENG
028 S. Scan Erro.: Right: C *ENG
029 M. Cor.: Dot: C *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
413
030 M. Cor.: Subdot: C *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
031 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: C *ENG
032 Mag.Cor. Subdot: C *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
033 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
034 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
035 S. Cor.: 600 Line: C *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / - / 1 line/step]
036 S. Cor.: 600 Sub: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / - / 0.001 line/step]
039 Skew: Y *ENG
041 M. Scan Erro.: Left: Y *ENG
042 M. Scan Erro.: Center: Y *ENG
043 M. Scan Erro.: Right: Y *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
044 S. Scan Erro.: Left: Y *ENG
045 S. Scan Erro.: Center: Y *ENG
046 S. Scan Erro.: Right: Y *ENG
047 M. Cor.: Dot: Y *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
048 M. Cor.: Subdot: Y *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
049 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Y *ENG
050 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Y *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
051 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
052 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
053 S. Cor.: 600 Line: Y *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / - / 1 line/step]
054 S. Cor.: 600 Sub: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / - / 0.001 line/step]
414
Main SP Tables-2
[Line Position Adj. Offset]

2182
(Color) M. Scan: Main scan, S. Scan: Sub-scan
001 M Magnification *ENG

Adjusts the line position manually.
002 C Magnification *ENG
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%/step]
003 Y Magnification *ENG
When line shifts are not corrected by the automatic line position adjustment, do this SP.
Increasing a value reduces the image in the main scan direction.
Decreasing a value enlarges the image in the main scan direction.
004 M. Scan: High: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
005 M. Scan: High: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
006 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
007 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
008 M. Scan: Low: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
009 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
010 M. Scan: High: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
011 M. Scan: High: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
012 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
013 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
014 M. Scan: Low: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
015 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
016 M. Scan: High: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
017 M. Scan: High: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
018 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
019 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
020 M. Scan: Low: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
021 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
415
022 S. Scan: High: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
023 S. Scan: High: Subline: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
024 S. Scan: Medium: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
025 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
026 S. Scan: Low: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
027 S. Scan: Low: Subline: M *ENG Not used
028 S. Scan: High: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
029 S. Scan: High: Subline: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
030 S. Scan: Medium: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
031 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
032 S. Scan: Low: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
033 S. Scan: Low: Subline: C *ENG Not used
034 S. Scan: High: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
035 S. Scan: High: Subline: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
036 S. Scan: Medium: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
037 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
038 S. Scan: Low: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
039 S. Scan: Low: Subline: Y *ENG Not used
[Main Scan Length Target Display]
Displays/adjusts the target value for the main scan length correction of the line position
adjustment.
2185
After replacing the laser optics housing unit, input the standard value for Bk provided with
the new unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement Adjustment"
section. It is not necessary to input the values for the other colors; these are automatically
adjusted after doing the line position adjustment.
416
Main SP Tables-2
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 266667 / 249449 / 1 sub-dot/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
2193 [MUSIC Condition Set] Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ]
Auto Execution *ENG
001 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables/disables the automatic line position adjustment
Page: Job End: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 500 / 1 page/step]

002 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode after
job end.
Page: Job End: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

003
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode after job end.
Page: Interrupt: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

004 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode during
job.
Page: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

005
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode during jobs.
Page: Stand-By: BW *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand-by
006 mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in BW printing
mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the condition of SP2-193-008 or
SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
Page: Stand-By: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for FC printing mode in stand-by
007 mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in color printing
417
Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1deg/step]
008 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b:
adjustment once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of
several conditions.
Time *ENG [1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]

009 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment once). The
timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions.
Magnification *ENG [0 to 10 / 0.1 / 0.01%/step]

010 Adjusts the magnification threshold for line position adjustment. If the length of the main
scan is changed by this amount since the previous MUSIC, then MSUIC is done again.
Temp. 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1deg/step]
011 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a:
adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of
several conditions.
Time 2 *ENG [1 to 9999 / 600 / 1 minute/step]

012 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a: adjustment twice). The
Page: Power ON:BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and FC printing mode at
013 power-on. The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in BW and
color printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the condition of
SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
2194 [MUSIC Execution Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result
Year *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1 year/step]

001
Displays the year of the last MUSIC execution.
Month *ENG [1 to 12 / - / 1 month/step]

002
Displays the month of the last MUSIC execution.
Day *ENG [1 to 31 / - / 1 day/step]

003
Displays the date of the last MUSIC execution.
418
Main SP Tables-2
Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / - / 1 hour/step]

004
Displays the time (hour) of the last MUSIC execution.
Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / - / 1 minute/step]

005
Displays the time (minute) of the last MUSIC execution.
Temperature *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]

006
Displays the temperature of the last MUSIC execution.
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
007 Execution Result *ENG
0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed
008 Number of Execution *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step]
009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step]
010 Error Result: M *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1 /step]

0: Not done
011 Error Result: C *ENG
1: Completed successfully
2: Cannot detect patterns
3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target
012 Error Result: Y *ENG 4: Not used
5: Out of the adjustment range
6 to 9: Not used
[Music A/D Interval]

2198
ADC Trigger Counter
001 ADC Trigger Counter *ENG [7.5 to 20 / 10 / 0.1 s/step]
[Skew Origin Set]

2220
Executes the skew motor initialization in the laser optics unit.
001 M: Skew Motor *ENG -
002 C: Skew Motor *ENG -
003 Y: Skew Motor *ENG -
419
[LD Power] LD Power Control
Adjusts the fixed LD power for each line speed and color.
2221
These SPs are activated only when SP3-041-002 is set to "0".
Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step]

Increasing this value makes the image density
007 Thick 1: C *ENG darker.
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
[Development DC Vias] Development DC Bias Adjustment
Adjusts the development bias.

Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting
2229 these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-041-001 Default: ON) is
activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-041-001, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
420
Main SP Tables-2
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / 550 / 10 –V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2&FINE:Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2&FINE:M *ENG
011 Thick 2&FINE:C *ENG
012 Thick 2&FINE:Y *ENG
[Temperature/Humidity: Display]
2241
Displays the environment temperature and humidity.
001 Temperature - [-50 to 450 / - / 0.1deg/step]
002 Relative Humidity - [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 %RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity - [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
004 AIT Temperature - [0 to 70 / - / 0.1deg/step]
005 Correction Coefficient A - [0 to 70 / 1 / 0.1/step]
006 Correction Coefficient B - [-70 to 70 / 0 /0.1/step]
[TS Operation Env. Log]

2242
Displays TS Operation Env. logs.
001 TS <= 40 - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
002 40 < TS <= 45 - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
003 45 < TS - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
421
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
004 Log Clear -
1: Clear
[Environmental Correction: Transfer]

2302
Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit
Current Environmental
001 - Displays the current environment condition.
Display
Sets the environment condition manually.

[0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Automatic environment control
1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity)
002 Forced Setting *ENG
2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity)
3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle humidity)
4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity)
5: HH (High temperature/ High humidity)
Absolute Humidity: Adjusts the threshold value between LL and ML.

003 *ENG
Threshold 1 [0 to 100 / 4 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Absolute Humidity: Adjusts the threshold value between ML and MM.

004 *ENG
Adjusts the threshold value between MM and

Absolute Humidity: MH.
005 *ENG
Threshold 3
[0 to 100 / 16 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Absolute Humidity: Adjusts the threshold value between MH and HH.

006 *ENG
007 Temp Threshold *ENG [–5 to 30 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[Paper Size Correction]

2308
Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction.
[0 to 350 / 297 / 1 mm/step]

001 Threshold 1 *ENG Threshold 1 ≤ paper:
Paper is detected as "S1" size.
422
Main SP Tables-2
[0 to 350 / 257 / 1 mm/step]

002 Threshold 2 *ENG Threshold 2 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 1:
[0 to 350 / 210 / 1 mm/step]

[0 to 350 / 148 / 1 mm/step]

Threshold 4 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 3:
004 Threshold 4 *ENG Paper is detected as "S4" size.
Paper ≤ Threshold 4:
2311 [Non Image Area: Bias]
Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt

between images. This value is added to the value
001 Image Transfer *ENG of the image transfer belt bias.
[10 to 250 / 100 / 5 %/step]
Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller

002 Paper Transfer *ENG between images.
[0 to 2100 / 500 / 100 V/step]
2326 [Transfer Roller CL: Bias] Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment
Positive *ENG [0 to 2100 / 500 / 100 V /step]

001 Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer
roller.
Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]

002 Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer
roller.
Positive *ENG [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 100 V/step]

003 Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer
roller.
423
004 Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
[Common: BW: Bias]

2351
ITB unit: Plain *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1 *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]

002
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]

003 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 2 paper or FINE
mode.
[Common: FC: Bias] Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment
2357
ITB unit: Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 A]

002 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for plain
paper.
ITB unit: Plain: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]

003
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 28 / 1 A]

004
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]

005
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]

006 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for thick 1
paper.
424
Main SP Tables-2
ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]

007
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 14 / 1 A]

008 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for thick 1
paper.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]

009 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for Thick 2 and
fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]

010 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for Thick 2
and fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]

011 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for Thick 2 and
fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 14 / 1 A]

012 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for Thick 2 and
fine.
2360 [Common: BW Env. Correction]
001 ITB unit: Plain *ENG
002 ITB unit: Thick 1 *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
003 ITB unit: Thick 2 *ENG
004 ITB unit: Plain: Bk *ENG [1 to 60 / 13/ 1 /step]
005 ITB unit: Plain: M *ENG
006 ITB unit: Plain: C *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
007 ITB unit: Plain: Y *ENG
008 ITB unit: Thick 1: Bk *ENG [1 to 60 / 31 / 1 /step]
009 ITB unit: Thick 1: M *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
425
010 ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG

[1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
011 ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG
014 ITB unit: Thick 2: C *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
015 ITB unit: Thick 2: Y *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
[Plain: Bias]
2401 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for plain paper.
001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
004 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[Plain: Bias: BW]
2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in black-and-white mode.
Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st

001 *ENG
Side
[0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]
Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd
002 *ENG
Side
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st

003 *ENG [0 to 250 / 7 / 1 - A /step]
Side
Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd

004 *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
Side
426
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Bias: FC]
2407 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color mode.

001 *ENG [0 to 250 / 27 / 1 - A /step]
Side

002 *ENG [0 to 250 / 33 / 1 - A /step]
Side

003 *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 – A /step]
Side

004 *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
Side
[Plain: Paper Size Correction]
2411 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper
size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Paper Transfer: Plain : 1st

001 *ENG
Side: S1

002 *ENG
Side: S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)

003 *ENG
Side: S1

004 *ENG
Side: S1
Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st [100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

005 *ENG
Side: S2 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width)
Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

006 *ENG
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

007 *ENG
427

008 *ENG [100 to 600 / 150 / 5%/step]
Side: S2

009 *ENG

010 *ENG
Side: S3 [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm (Paper width)
011 *ENG
Side: S3

012 *ENG [100 to 600 / 300 / 5%/step]
Side: S3

013 *ENG

014 *ENG

015 *ENG

016 *ENG [100 to 600 / 340 / 5%/step]
Side: S4

017 *ENG
Side: S5 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width)

018 *ENG

019 *ENG

020 *ENG [100 to 600 / 400 / 5%/step]
Side: S5
428
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Leading Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Leading Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in
2421 each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
• The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422.

001 *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
Side

002 *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
Side

003 *ENG
Side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
004 *ENG
side
Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2401 is multiplied by these SPs values.
2421
Separation DC: Plain: 1st

005 *ENG
Side
Separation DC: Plain: 2nd

006 *ENG
Side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
Separation DC: 1200: 1st
007 *ENG
Side
Separation DC: 1200:

008 *ENG
2nd Side
[Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
2422 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the
paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
429

001 *ENG
Side

002 *ENG
Side

003 *ENG
Side

004 *ENG
side
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 *ENG
Side

006 *ENG
Side

007 *ENG
Side
Separation DC: 1200: 2nd

008 *ENG
Side
[Plain: Trailing Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing
2423 edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
• The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2424.
430
Main SP Tables-2

001 *ENG
Side

002 *ENG
Side

003 *ENG
Side

004 *ENG
side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
005 *ENG
Side

006 *ENG
Side

007 *ENG
Side

008 *ENG
Side
[Plain: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge]
2424 Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the
paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG
004 Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd side *ENG

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG
006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG
008 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side *ENG
431
[Thin: Bias]
2451 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thin paper.
001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side

*ENG
002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 -V/
003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side step]
*ENG
004 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side
[Thin: Bias: BW]
2453 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white mode.
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side

*ENG [0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side

*ENG [0 to 250 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
004 Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd Side
[Thin: Bias: FC]
2457 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode.

*ENG [0 to 250 / 30 / 1 - A /step]

*ENG [0 to 250 / 15 / 1 - A /step]
[Thin: Paper Size Correction]
Plain: High speed
432
Main SP Tables-2
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
*ENG
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S1 S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
*ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper
006 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S2 width)
017 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5

*ENG [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]
018 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5
[Thin: Leading Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Leading Edge Correction
each mode. SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values.
2471
Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed

*ENG
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
*ENG
mode. SP2451 is multiplied by these SP values.
2471
433

*ENG
006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side
*ENG
[Thin: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed,

*ENG

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
*ENG

*ENG
[Thin: Trailing Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
edge in each mode. SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values.
2473

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
434
Main SP Tables-2

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thin: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge]

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
*ENG

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
*ENG
[Thin: Environment Correction]

2480

*ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side

*ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 2nd Side
005 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st Side

*ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
006 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 2nd Side
435

*ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
009 Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 1st Side
Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 2nd *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]

010
Side
011 Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 1st Side

*ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
012 Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 2nd Side
2481 [Glossy: Bias]
Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]

001
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for glossy paper.
2482 [Glossy: Bias: BW]
Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]

001
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for glossy paper in black-and-white mode.
2483 [Glossy: Bias: FC]

001
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for glossy paper in full color mode.
2484 [Glossy: Paper Size Correction]
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S1 *ENG [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
2485 [Plain: Leading Edge Correction]
436
Main SP Tables-2
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
005 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]]
2486 [Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG
2487 [Plain: Trailing Edge Correction]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]
2488 [Plain:SwitchTiming:Trail. Edge]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2489 [Glossy: Environment Correction]
001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
[Thick 1: Bias]
2501 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 1 paper.
437
[Thick 1: Bias: BW]
2502 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in black-and-white mode.

[0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
[Thick 1: Bias: FC]
2507 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color mode.

[0 to 250 / 15 / 1 - A /step]
[Thick 1: Paper Size Correction]
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: S1 *ENG [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S1 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side: S1 *ENG
S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 130 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper
width)
438
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 115 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 190 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

017 Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st Side: S5 *ENG
148 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 220 / 5%/step]

018 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

439
[Thick 1: Leading Edge Correction] Thick 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2521

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thick 1: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
001 Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st Side *ENG
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 Separation DC: Plain 1: 1st Side *ENG
006 Separation DC: Plain 1: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
440
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 1: Trail. Edge Correction] Thick 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2523

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thick 1: Sw Timing: Trail. Edge]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Thick 1: Environment Correction]

2530

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
441
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG
005 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
006 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
009 Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
011 Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
[Thick 2: Bias]
2551
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 2 paper.

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
002 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG
[Thick 2: Bias: BW]

2553
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in black-and-white mode.
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 7 / 1 – A /step]
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
[Thick 2: Bias: FC]

2558
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in full color mode.

002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S1 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
442
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

004 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]

010 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG
443
2571

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thick 2: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step]
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
003 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
004 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thick 2: Trail. Edge Correction]

444
Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2580 [Thick 2 Environment Correction]

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG

[0 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: BW: 2nd Side *ENG
006 Paper Transfer: FC: 2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[OHP: Bias]
2601
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for OHP.
001 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[OHP: Bias: BW]

2603
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black-and-white mode.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
[OHP: Bias: FC]

2608
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode.
[OHP: Paper Size Correction]

445
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

001 Paper Transfer: S1 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 200 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 330 / 5%/step]

[OHP: Leading Edge Correction]
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2621
002 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[OHP: Switch Timing: Leading Edge]

001 Paper Transfer *ENG

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
002 Separation DC *ENG
446
Main SP Tables-2
[OHP: Trailing Edge Correction]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
002 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2630 [OHP: Environment Correction]
001 Separation DC *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
002 Paper Transfer: BW *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: FC *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
[Thick3: Bias]
2650
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick paper 3.

[0 to 3500 / 0 / 10 –V/step]
[Thick3: Bias: BW]

2651
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in black-and-white mode.
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 - A /step]
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
447
[Thick3: Bias: FC]

2652
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color mode.
[Thick3: Paper Size Correction]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

002 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

007 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
448
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]


[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2654

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
449

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[Thick 3: Environment Correction] Thick 3 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment

2660 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode. When the environment is detected as
MM, SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values.

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode. When the environment is detected as
MM, SP2650 is multiplied by these SP values.

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
450
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick4: Bias]
2670

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[Thick4: Bias: BW]

2671
[Thick4: Bias: FC]

2672

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
451
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]


[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2674
452
Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
453


[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
2680

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: BW: 2nd Side: *ENG
[Special1: Bias]
2751 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 1.
Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/
step]
003 Paper Transfer: Thick 1: 1st Side *ENG
[Special1: Bias: BW]
2753 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in black-and-white
mode.
Plain: High speed

[0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
454
Main SP Tables-2
[Special1: Bias: FC]
2757 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode.
Plain: High speed, Fine: Low speed
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 33 / 1 - A /step]
[Special1: Paper Size Correction]

297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
006 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG (Paper width)
275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

455
[Special 1: Leading Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
mode. SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values.
2771
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2771

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Special 1: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
456
Main SP Tables-2
[Special 1: Trail. Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2773

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Special 1: Sw Timing: Trail. Edge]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[Special 1: Environment Correction]

2780
001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 32 / 1 /step]
457

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Special2: Bias]

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/
step]
mode.

[0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
Plain: High speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed
458
Main SP Tables-2

[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

459
[Special 2: Lead Edge Correction] Special 2 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2821
2821
006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
460
Main SP Tables-2
2823

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

2830
461
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Special 3: Bias]

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/
step]
[Special 3: Bias: BW]
mode.

[0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]
[Special 3: Bias: FC]
462
Main SP Tables-2
[Special 3: Paper Size Correction]

[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer:: 2nd Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

017 Paper Transfer:: 1st Side: S5 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

018 Paper Transfer:: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG
463
[Special 3: Lead. Edge Correction] Special 3 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2871
2871

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Page *ENG
464
Main SP Tables-2
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
2873

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

2880
465

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Dev Rvs Time] Development Roller Reverse Time
2905 Specified the time of the development roller reverse rotation after the development unit has
stopped. The reverse rotation of the development roller is used for removing dust from the
development roller.
001 K *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 200 / 80 / 10 msec/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[Dev Rvs Threshold Counter]
Specified the threshold distance for the development roller reverse mode. This SP refers to
005
the counters for SP2905-006 to -009.
All *ENG [0 to 400000 / 4000/ 10 mm/step]
[Dev Rvs Counter]
006 K *ENG
007 M *ENG
[0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
008 C *ENG
009 Y *ENG
466
Main SP Tables-2
[Acs Setting (FC to Bk)]
Adjusts the threshold for moving away the image transfer belt from the color PCDUs. This
2907 SP moves the image transfer belt away from the color PCDUs when the number of B/W
image printouts reaches the number of sheets specified with this SP after consecutive full
color image printouts in the full color mode.
If this SP is set to "0", the image transfer belt does not move away.
001 Continuous Bk Pages *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
2920 [Trans Mot Control]
0: Encorder 1 :FG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Selects the speed control mode for the ITB.
If SC443 occurs and machine does not recover, change this setting to "1".
SC443-00 Count *ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]

002 Displays the number of the ITB encodre error. SC443 is displayed if this counter counts to
"3".
[SecondaryFB: Threshold] Paper Transfer Roller Feed-back: Threshold Adjustment

2930 Adjusts the threshold between high resistance (division 1) and low resistance (division 2)
at the paper transfer roller. This SP affects SP2931 to SP2939.
001 Voltage *ENG [0 to 7000 / 6000 / 10 –V/step]
2960 [Process Interval]
Additional Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

001
Adjusts the additional time for ending the machine's process.
2970 [Cleaning After JOB]
[0 to 100 / 33 / 1 /step]
No Refresh *ENG
0: No cleaning
001
Specifies the threshold sheets for the cleaning of the paper transfer roller without the
refresh mode.
467
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
002 Refresh *ENG
0: No cleaning, 1: Cleaning
2971 T1 Non Image Area ON Timing
Standard Speed *ENG [–400 to 290 / 0 / 10 msec/step]

001
Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller.
002 Medium Speed *ENG [–400 to 290 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
003 Low Speed *ENG [–790 to 410 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
2972 B/W Image Request Timing
001 Standard Speed *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
002 Medium Speed *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
003 Low Speed *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
2973 Forced Process Down Threshold
001 - *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 10 page/step]
2974 OPC PreCharge Time Control
2980 Continuous Job Page
001 - *ENG [0 to 300 / 100 / 10 page/step]
002 - *ENG [0 to 600 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
003 - *ENG [0 to 600 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
2990 Print Duty Control
468
Main SP Tables-2
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
001 Duty Control State *ENG
0: No limit, 1: Limit
002 Exec Interval: Duty Control *ENG [60 to 3600 / 300 / 10 min./step]
003 Duty Control Thresh *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Forced CPM Down Thresh:

004 *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
No Duty Control
Drum Stop Time: No Duty

005 *ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
ITB Stop Time: No Duty

006 *ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
Control

007 *ENG [0 to 5000 / 1 / 1 page/step]
Duty Control
Drum Stop Time: Duty

008 *ENG [300 to 20000 / 7500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
009 ITB Stop Time: Duty Control *ENG [300 to 20000 / 7500 / 10 msec/step]
Displays the time of the duty control

010 Duty Control: Start Time *ENG
execution.
Sets the threshold of the duty control

011 Execution Temp. Threshold *ENG execution temperature.
[ 20 to 70 / 39.8 / 0.1/step]

Cancellation Temp. cancellation temperature.
012 *ENG
Threshold
[ 0.1 to 20 / 1 / 0.1/step]
Turns duty control off or on.

013 ON/OFF Setting *ENG 0: OFF
1: ON
469
Main SP Tables-3
SP3-XXX (Process)
3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution]
Executes the normal process control manually

(potential control).
001 Normal -
Check the result with SP3-325-001 and
3-012-001 after executing this SP.
002 Density Adjustment - Executes the toner density adjustment manually.
Executes the process control that is normally done

before ACC.
003 Pre-ACC -
The type of process control is selected with
SP3-041-004.

004 Full MUSIC - at the same time as MUSIC. This SP does the
MUSIC (line position adjustment) twice.

005 Normal MUSIC - at the same time as MUSIC. This SP does the
MUSIC (line position adjustment) once.
[Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result
Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.

All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “Y C M K”
3012
e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were
successful.
See the "Error Condition Tables" in the "Appendix: Process Control Error Conditions"
section for details.
470
Main SP Tables-3
001 History: Latest *ENG
002 Result: Latest 1 *ENG

[1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
3013 [T Sensor Initial Set: Exe] Developer Initialization Setting
001 Execution: ALL -
002 Execution: COL -
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the developer initialization for each

004 Execution: M - color.
005 Execution: C -
006 Execution: Y -
[T Sensor Initial Set:Exe]

3014
Developer Initialization Result: Display
[0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ]
Display: YCMK *ENG
1: Success, 2 to 9: Failure
Displays the developer initialization result. See section "Developer Initialization Result" in
001 the "Appendix: Process Control Error Conditions" section for details on the meaning of
each code.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order Y C M Bk.
e.g., 1 (Y) 2 (C) 1 (M) 1 (Bk): Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded.
471
3015 [Forced Toner Supply: Execute] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the manual toner supply to the

004 Execution: M - development unit.
005 Execution: C -
006 Execution: Y -
[Forced Toner Supply: Setting]

3016
Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
001 Supply Time: Bk *ENG
002 Supply Time: M *ENG

[0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step]
003 Supply Time: C *ENG
004 Supply Time: Y *ENG
3041 [Process Control Type]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the charge DC
Voltage Control *ENG bias and development DC bias set with SP2-005
001 and SP2-229.)
1: CONTROL
Enables or disables potential control.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
LD Power Control *ENG 0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx)
002
1: CONTROL (adjusted by process control)
Selects the LD power control mode.
472
Main SP Tables-3
AutoControl Prohibition [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
*ENG
003 Set 0: Permit, 1: Forbid
Enables or disables the automatic process control prohibition.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0: Not Executed
Pre-ACC Process Control *ENG 1: Process Control
004
2: TC Control (TD Adjustment)
3: Not used
Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
Pattern Calculation 0: FIXED
*ENG
005 Method 1: INITIALIZED
2: CALCULATED
Selects the process control method.
3043 [TD Adjustment Mode]
Repeat Number: Power ON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at power on.
0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number,
001 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is
consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Initialization *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at the developer
initialization.
002
4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
6 to 9: Disabled
473
Repeat Number: Non-use *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in stand by
mode.
003
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: ACC *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at ACC.
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Recovery *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]

005
Not used
Repeat Number: Job End *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at job end.
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat: Interrupt *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]

007 Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment during printing.
DFU
Toner Supply Coefficient *ENG [0 to 25.5 / 10 / 0.1 sec/step]

008
Adjusts the time for the toner supply mode when a toner density is detected to be low.
474
Main SP Tables-3
Consumption pattern: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

009 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density when toner
density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment.
Consumption pattern: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

010 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density when toner
Consumption pattern: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

011 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the cyan toner density when toner
Consumption pattern: Y *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

012 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the yellow toner density when toner
T1 Bias: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 µA/step]

013
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Black.
T2 Bias: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 µA/step]

014
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Magenta.
T3 Bias: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 µA/step]

015
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan.
T4 Bias: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 28 / 1 µA/step]

016
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Yellow.
Developer Mixing Time *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

017
Specifies the developer mixing time at the toner density adjustment.
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: Bk *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment.
018
In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma
values (SP3611-001) exceed the target values (SP3611-005) by more than the specified
thresholds (SP3239-009).
475
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: M *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
019
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: C *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
020
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: Y *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
021
[Toner Supply Type]

3044
Selects the toner supply method type.
001 Bk *ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric

0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with SP
002 M *ENG
3401)
003 C *ENG 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed)
2: PID (Vtref_Control)
004 Y *ENG 3: Not used
4:MBD (Vtref_Control)
[Toner End Detection: Set]

3045
Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
001 ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Detect, 1: Not Detect
476
Main SP Tables-3
[Toner End Recovery]

3102 Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the TD sensor
continues to detect toner end during toner recovery.
001 Repeat: Bk *ENG
002 Repeat: M *ENG

[1 to 20 / 5 / 1 time/step]
003 Repeat: C *ENG
004 Repeat: Y *ENG
[TE Count m: Display]

3131
Display the number of toner end detections for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 99 / - / 1 time/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[TD Sensor: Vt Display]

3201
Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color.
001 Current: Bk *ENG
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
[Vt Shift: Display/Set]
3211 Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed.

Thick 1: 154 mm/sec, Thick 2&Fine: 77 mm/sec
001 Thick 1 Shift: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
002 Thick 1 Shift: M *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Thick 1 Shift: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
477
004 Thick 1 Shift: Y *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.31 / 0.01 V/step]
005 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
006 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: M *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
008 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: Y *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.31 / 0.01 V/step]
009 Mid TCShift: Bk *ENG
010 Mid TCShift: M *ENG

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
011 Mid TCShift: C *ENG
012 Mid TCShift: Y *ENG
013 Low TCShift: Bk *ENG
014 Low TCShift: M *ENG

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
015 Low TCShift: C *ENG
016 Low TCShift: Y *ENG
[Vtcnt: Display/Set]
3221
Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
005-008 Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization. DFU
005 Initial: Bk *ENG
006 Initial: M *ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: C *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
478
Main SP Tables-3
[Vtref: Display/Set]
3222
Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
005-008 Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization. DFU
006 Initial: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: C *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
009-012 Displays and adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color. DFU
009 Pixel Correction: Bk *ENG
010 Pixel Correction: M *ENG

[-5 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
011 Pixel Correction: C *ENG
012 Pixel Correction: Y *ENG
[Vtref Correction: Setting]

3239
Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control.
479
001 (+)Consumption: Bk *ENG
002 (+)Consumption: M *ENG
003 (+)Consumption: C *ENG
004 (+)Consumption: Y *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.04 / 0.01 V/step]
005 (-)Consumption: Bk *ENG
006 (-)Consumption: M *ENG
007 (-)Consumption: C *ENG
008 (-)Consumption: Y *ENG
009-012 Threshold for development gamma rank.
009 P Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [0 to 2 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step]
011 P Rank 3 Threshold *ENG [-2 to 0 / -0.05 / 0.1 /step]
013-014 Threshold for image density rank on the image transfer belt.
013 T Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [-1 to 0 / -0.2 / 0.01 V/step]
014 T Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 V/step]
021-028 Sets the correction coefficient of the Vtref correction.
021 Correction Coefficient 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
022 Correction Coefficient 1: M *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
023 Correction Coefficient 1: C *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
024 Correction Coefficient 1: Y *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
480
Main SP Tables-3
3241 [Background Potential Setting]
001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG These are parameters for calculating the charge
bias referring to the development bias at process
002 Coefficient: M *ENG control.
003 Coefficient: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 1 /step]
DC charge bias = Development bias x (1 +
004 Coefficient: Y *ENG 0.001 x these vales) + SP3-241-005 to -008
005 Offset: Bk *ENG These are additional values for calculating the
charge bias referring to the development bias at
006 Offset: M *ENG process control.
007 Offset: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 140 / 1 V/step]
008 Offset: Y *ENG 0.001 x SP3-241-001 to -004) + these values
[LD Power Setting]

3242
Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control.
001 StdSpd:Coefficient: Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 118 / 1 /step]
002 StdSpd:Coefficient: M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 117 / 1 /step]
003 StdSpd:Coefficient: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 79 / 1 /step]
004 StdSpd:Coefficient: Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 92 / 1 /step]
005 StdSpd:Offset: Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 47 / 1 /step]
006 StdSpd:Offset: M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 41 / 1 /step]
007 StdSpd:Offset: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 72 / 1 /step]
008 StdSpd:Offset: Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
009 MidSpd:coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 118 / 1 /step]
010 MidSpd:Coef:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 117 / 1 /step]
011 MidSpd:Coef:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 79 / 1 /step]
012 MidSpd:Coef:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 92 / 1 /step]
013 MidSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 47 / 1 /step]
481
014 MidSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 41 / 1 /step]
015 MidSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 72 / 1 /step]
016 MidSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
017 LowSpd:Coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 98 / 1 /step]
018 LowSpd:Coef:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 104 / 1 /step]
019 LowSpd:Coef:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 78 / 1 /step]
020 LowSpd:Coef:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 84 / 1 /step]
021 LowSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
022 LowSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 45 / 1 /step]
023 LowSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 69 / 1 /step]
024 LowSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 65 / 1 /step]
[Coverage]
3251
These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
001 Latest Pixel: Bk *ENG
002 Latest Pixel: M *ENG Displays the latest coverage for each color.
003 Latest Pixel: C *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 cm2/step]
004 Latest Pixel: Y *ENG
Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
005-008 "Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the
number specified with SP3251-017.
005 Average S: Bk *ENG
006 Average S: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
007 Average S: C *ENG
008 Average S: Y *ENG
482
Main SP Tables-3
009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the
009 Average M: Bk *ENG
010 Average M: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
011 Average M: C *ENG
012 Average M: Y *ENG
013-016 "Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the
number specified with SP3-251-019.
013 Average L: Bk *ENG
014 Average L: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
015 Average L: C *ENG
016 Average L: Y *ENG
017-019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-005 to -016.
017 Total Page Setting: S *ENG [1 to 100 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
018 Total Page Setting: M *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
019 Total Page Setting: L *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
020 Total Page Setting: S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 40 / 1 sheet/step]
021 Total Page Setting: M2 *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
022 Total Page Setting: L2 *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color.
024 Latest Coverage: Bk *ENG
025 Latest Coverage: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
026 Latest Coverage: C *ENG
027 Latest Coverage: Y *ENG
483
Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not.

028
DevMix Threshold *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]
[ID Sensor DetectValue: Vofset]

3311
Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
002 Voffset reg: M *ENG
003 Voffset reg: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
004 Voffset reg: Y *ENG
005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
005 Voffset dif: M *ENG
006 Voffset dif: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
007 Voffset dif: Y *ENG
008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
008 Voffset TM (Front) *ENG
009 Voffset TM (Center) *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
010 Voffset TM (Rear) *ENG
3321 [Vsg Adjustment: Execution]
Execute the ID sensor initialization setting for

010 P/TM Sensor All -
all sensors
[Vsg Adjustment Result: Vsg]

3322
Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor.
484
Main SP Tables-3
001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG
002 Vsg reg: M *ENG
003 Vsg reg: C *ENG
004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG
005 Vsg dif: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
006 Vsg dif: C *ENG
007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG
008 Vsg TM (Front) *ENG
009 Vsg TM (Center) *ENG
010 Vsg TM (Rear) *ENG
[Vsg Adjustment Result]
Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.

3325
The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front, sensor for Bk,
sensor for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor for Yellow and sensor for
Rear).
001 Latest *ENG
004 Result: Latest 3 *ENG [111 to 999 / - / 1 /step]

9: Unexpected error
3: Offset voltage error
2: Vsg adjustment value error
007 Result: Latest 6 *ENG 1: O.K
485
[Fixed Supply Mode]

3401
Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode.
001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG
002 Fixed Rate: M *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step]

These SPs are used only when SP3-044 is set
003 Fixed Rate: C *ENG to "1".
004 Fixed Rate: Y *ENG
[Toner Supply Rate: Display]

3411
Displays the current toner supply rate.
001 Latest: Bk *ENG
002 Latest: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Latest: C *ENG
004 Latest: Y *ENG
3421 [Toner Supply Range]
001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG
002 Upper Limit: M *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during
printing.
003 Upper Limit: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
004 Upper Limit: Y *ENG
005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk *ENG
006 Minimum Supply Time: M *ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply time.
007 Minimum Supply Time: C *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
008 Minimum Supply Time: Y *ENG
[Process Control Target M/A]

3501
Adjusts the target M/A.
486
Main SP Tables-3
001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG
002 Maximum M/A: M *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.4 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
003 Maximum M/A: C *ENG
004 Maximum M/A: Y *ENG
[ImageQuality Adj. Counter:Disp]

3510
Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode.
001 Potential Control: BW *ENG
002 Potential Control: FC *ENG
003 Power ON: BW *ENG
004 Power ON: FC *ENG
005 MUSIC: BW *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
006 MUSIC: FC *ENG
007 Vsg Adj. *ENG
008 Charge AC Control *ENG
009 MUSIC: Power ON: BW *ENG
010 MUSIC: Power ON: FC *ENG
[Execution Interval: Setting]

3511
Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode.
001 Job End: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
002 Job End: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
003 Interrupt: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
004 Interrupt: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]
005 Initial: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
006 Initial: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
487
007 Vsg Adj. Counter *ENG

[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
008 Charge AC Control Counter *ENG
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
019 Environmental Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
020 Gamma Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
021 Non-use Time Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
022 Correction Coef 1: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 page/step]
023 Correction Coef 2: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
024 Correction Coef 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step]
025 Correction Coef 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
026 Cor Coef 1: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]
027 Cor Coef 2: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
028 Cor Coef 1: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01/step]
029 Cor Coef 2: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
030 Max. Number Cor Threshold *ENG [0 to 99 / 5 / 1/step]
031 Max. Number Correction Counter *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step]
[Image Quality Adj.: Interval]

3512
Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position adjustment.
001 During Job *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 page/step]
002 During Stand-by *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
488
Main SP Tables-3
[PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk]
3513 Displays the last time that the PCDU motors stopped.
These are used for process control execution timing.
001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1/step]
002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / - / 1/step]
003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / - / 1/step]
004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / - / 1/step]
005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / - / 1/step]
[Environmental Display: Job End]
3514 Displays the environmental conditions for the last job.

001 Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / - / 0.1°C/step]
002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/m3/step]
004 AIT Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / - / 0.1 deg/step]
[Execution Interval: Display]
3515 Displays the current interval for process control execution.

When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of
conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions.
001 Job End: Pot Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
002 Job End: Pot Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
003 Interrupt: Pot Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
004 Interrupt: Pot Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
489
[Blade damage prevention mode]
3517 Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the transfer belt
cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this value, toner is applied
to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to prevent the blade from flipping over.
001 Execution Temp. Threshold *ENG [0 to 50 / 40 / 1°C/step]
[Toner End Prohibition Setting]

3519
Enables or disables each adjustment at toner near end.
001 Process Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner near
002 MUSIC *ENG
end condition)
1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner near
003 TC Adj. *ENG
end condition)
[ITB Idling Number]

3520
Specifies the number of the ITB idling rotation for each condition.
001 Temperature: H *ENG
002 Temperature: M *ENG

[0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
003 Temperature: L *ENG
004 Temperature: L: Power ON *ENG
[Temperature Threshold]
Specifies the threshold temperature for each condition. These settings affect the conditions
3521 of SP3-520.
t1: Threshold between L (low temp.) and M (medium temp.)
t2: Threshold between M (medium temp.) and H (high temps)
001 Threshold: t2 *ENG [20 or 30 / 25 / 1 deg/step]
490
Main SP Tables-3
[Initial Process Control Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on.

3522
When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when
compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at power on is
executed.
002 Non-use Time Setting *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step]
003 Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1°C/step]
004 Relative Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]
005 Absolute Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]
006 AIT Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 25 / 1°C/step]
007 Vtref Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 20 / 1°C/step]
[Rapi_timer]
100 Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the time-out time for the Rapi timer.
[Non-use Time Process Control Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by.

3531
compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at stand-by is
executed.
Adjusts the maximum execution time for the

005 Maximum Execution Number *ENG process control at stand-by.
[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 time/step]
3611 [Development Gamma: Display/Set]
491
001 Bk (Current) *ENG
002 M (Current) *ENG Displays the current development gamma for

each color.
003 C (Current) *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
004 Y (Current) *ENG
005 Bk (Target Display) *ENG
006 M (Target Display) *ENG Displays the target development gamma for
each color.
007 C (Target Display) *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
008 Y (Target Display) *ENG
009 Bk (Standard Target Set) *ENG
010 M (Standard Target Set) *ENG Displays the standard target development
gamma for each color.
011 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
012 Y (Standard Target Set) *ENG
Turns on or off the environmental correction

for target development gamma.
013 Environmental Correction *ENG
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not Correct, 1: Correct
014 K (Max Correction) *ENG Adjusts the maximum correction value for
015 M (Max Correction) *ENG each color. These SPs are effective only
when the setting of SP3-611-013 is set to
016 C (Max Correction) *ENG "1".
017 Y (Max Correction) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.15 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/ step]
018 K (Max Abs Hum) *ENG Adjusts the maximum humidity correction
019 M (Max Abs Hum) *ENG value for each color. These SPs are effective
only when the setting of SP3-611-013 is set
020 C (Max Abs Hum) *ENG to "1".
021 Y (Max Abs Hum) *ENG [1 to 99 / 20 / 1 g/m3/step]
022 K (Min Correction) *ENG [0 to 0.1 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/ step]
492
Main SP Tables-3
[Vk Display]
3612
Displays Vk for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[-300 to 300 / - / 1 V/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[Development DC Control: Disp]

Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed
3621
Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed
and color.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2 & FINE: Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
011 Thick 2 & FINE: C *ENG
012 Thick 2 & FINE: Y *ENG
[Charge DC Control: Display]

3631
Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line speed and
color.
493
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
008 Thick 1& FINE: Y *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
[Charge AC Control: Display]
3641 Plain: High speed
Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each color.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 3 / - / 0.01 kV/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
[LD Power Control: Display]
3651 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed
Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment.
494
Main SP Tables-3
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
[HST Concentration Control: Set]
3710 TD Sensor: Toner Concentration Control Setting
Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory, which is in the TD sensor.
001 Control Method: Selection *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Not Use, 1: Use
[HST Concentration Control: Bk]

3711
Displays the factory settings of the black PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / - / 0.01 V/step]
004 Sensitivity: HM *ENG

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]
005 Sensitivity: ML *ENG
006 Set Detection *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
007 Without Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
495
008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
009 Serial Number 1 *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
011 Adjustment: Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
012 Adjustment: Vtref *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
013 Adjustment: Vtcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1 /step]
[HST Concentration Control: M]

3712
Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
496
Main SP Tables-3
[HST Concentration Control: C]

3713
Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
[HST Concentration Control: Y]

3714
Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]
497

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
[Waste Toner Full Detection]

3800 Displays/ adjusts the toner collection bottle detection settings. These SPs are used for
NRS.
001 Condition *CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Detection Times *CTL [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Print Page After Near Full *CTL [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
004 Pixel Count After Near Full *CTL [0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
Displays the pixel counter after replacement

Pixel Count After of toner collection bottle.
005 *CTL
Replacement
[0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
008 Coefficient *ENG [0.1 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.1 /step]
Enables or disables the calling for @Remote.

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
Notice Setting *ENG
0: Enable @Remote calling
1: Disable @Remote calling
011
NOTE:
If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects used toner
near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect toner collection bottle
near full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
498
Main SP Tables-3
Day Threshold: Toner

*ENG [1 to 30 / 5 / 1 day/step]
Collection bottle:NF
012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the toner collection bottle
is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected the actuator in the toner
collection bottle.
Displays the total amount of the used toner.

013 Total:Toner Collection Bottle *ENG
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1]
Mechanism Full Detection Displays the date of the full detection for he
014 *ENG
Date toner collection bottle.
[Waste Toner New Detection]

3900
Turns toner collection bottle full detection on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 ON/OFF Setting *ENG
0: OFF, 1: ON
[New PCU Detection]

3901
Turns new PCDU detection on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
[Manual New Unit Set]
3902 Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off.
The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant parts of section
3 (Replacement and Adjustment).
001 Development Unit: Bk *ENG
002 Development Unit: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Development Unit: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
004 Development Unit: M *ENG
499
005 Developer: Bk *ENG
006 Developer: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Developer: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
008 Developer: M *ENG
009 PCU: Bk *ENG
010 PCU: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
011 PCU: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
012 PCU: M *ENG
013 Image Transfer Unit *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
015 Cleaning Unit *ENG Do not use 3902-013 if you only change the
cleaning unit.
016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG 3902-015: This is for the image transfer belt
cleaning unit.
017 Toner Collection Bottle *ENG
018 Fusing Roller *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: OFF, 1: ON
019 Pressure Roller *ENG "Fusing Roller" is designated as "Heating
Roller" in this manual.
020 Pump Unit: Bk *ENG
021 Pump Unit: M *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
022 Pump Unit: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
023 Pump Unit: Y *ENG
500
Main SP Tables-4
Main SP Tables-4
SP4-XXX (Scanner)
[Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment]

4008
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
001 - *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA
[L-Edge Regist Adjustment]

4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan
direction.
001 - *ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
[S-to-S Regist Adjustment]

4011 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main scan
direction.
001 - *ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
[Scanner Erase Margin: Scale]

4012 Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale.
001 Book: Leading Edge
002 Book: Trailing Edge

*ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right
005 ADF: Leading Edge
007 ADF: Right *ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
008 ADF: Left
501
[Scanner Free Run]
4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

*ENG
002 Lamp: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON
[Scan]
4014
Execute the scanner free fun with each mode.
001 HP Detection Enable - Scanner free run with HP sensor check.
002 HP Detection Disable - Scanner free run without HP sensor check.
4020 [Dust Check]
Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/ off.

001 Dust Detect:On/Off *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the detect level.

[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detect:Lvl *ENG
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level
Selects the level of the sub scan line correction

when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
003 Dust Reject:Lvl *ENG
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest
011 Dust Detect:On/Off:Rear *ENG Not used
012 Dust Detect:Lvl:Rear *ENG Not used
502
Main SP Tables-4
[APS Operation Check]

4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors. (See
"Input Check Table" in this section.)
001 APS Operation Check - -
[APS Min. Size]

4303
Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all OFF.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 - *ENG 0: No Original
1: A5-Lengthwise (16K SEF if 4305 is set to 3)
[8K/16K Detection]
4305
This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Normal Detection (the machine detects A4/LT
size as A4 or LT, depending on the paper size
001 - *ENG setting)
1: A4-Sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-Sideways A4-Lengthwise
3: 8K 16K
4308 [Scan Size Detection]
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Detection ON/OFF *ENG 0: OFF
001 1: ON
Turns on or off the CCD original size detection. This detection is used only when an
original is scanned in book scanning mode.
4309 [Scan Size Detect:Setting]
503
Original Density Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit/step]

001 Specifies the threshold between an original area and non-original area for the scan
original size detection in book scanning mode.
Detection Time *ENG [20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec/step]

002
Specifies the detection time for the scan original size detection in book scanning mode.
Lamp ON:Delay Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec/step]

003
Specifies the lamp on timing for the scan original size detection in book scanning mode.
LED PWM Duty *ENG [0 to 100 / 60 / 1/step]

004
Sets the LED lamp intensity.
[Scan Size Detect Value]

4310 Displays the detected value by CCD. Each detection point for paper size and color is
displayed on the LCD.
001 S1:R *ENG
002 S1:G *ENG
003 S1:B *ENG
004 S2:R *ENG
005 S2:G *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit/step]
006 S2:B *ENG
007 S3:R *ENG
008 S3:G *ENG
009 S3:B *ENG
[Scanner Erase Margin] *ENG
4400 Set the Mask for Original.

These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
504
Main SP Tables-4
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 ADF: Right
008 ADF: Left
[IPU Test Pattern]

4417
Selects the IPU test pattern.
001 Test Pattern Selection [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: Scanned image
13: Grid pattern CMYK
1: Gradation main scan A
14: Color patch CMYK
2: Gradation main scan B
15: Gray pattern (1)
3: Gradation main scan C
4: Gradation main scan D
17: Gray Pattern (3)
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
18: Shading pattern
6: Grid pattern
19: Thin line pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK
21: Scanned + Gray scale
9: UCR pattern
22: Scanned + Color patch
10: Color patch 16 (1)
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
12: Color patch 64
4429 [Illegal Copy Output]
001 Copy
002 Scanner *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
003 Fax
505
4450 [Scan Image Path Selection]
Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

001
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF

002
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
[ACC Target Den]

4501
Selects the ACC result.
001 Copy: K: Text *ENG
002 Copy: C: Text *ENG
003 Copy: M: Text *ENG
004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
005 Copy: K: Photo *ENG 10: Darkest density
006 Copy: C: Photo *ENG
007 Copy: M: Photo *ENG
008 Copy: Y: Photo *ENG
[ACC Cor:Bright]
4505
Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
005 Photo:K *ENG
006 Photo:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG
506
Main SP Tables-4
[ACC Cor:Dark]
4506
Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
005 Photo:K *ENG
006 Photo:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG
[Print Coverage]
4540 This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors [R, G, B,
Option]) for a total of 48 parameters.
001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B
005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B
009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B
013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B
017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B
021-024 CG Phase: Option/R/G/B Specifies the printer vector correction

*ENG value.
025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
029-032 BC Phase: Option/R/G/B
033-036 BM Phase: Option/R/G/B
037-040 MB Phase: Option/R/G/B
041-044 MR Phase: Option/R/G/B
045-048 RM Phase: Option/R/G/B
507
4600 [SBU Version Display]
001 SBU ID *ENG Displays the ID of the SBU.
002 GASBU-N ID *ENG Displays the ID of the GASBU.
003 VSP5100 ID *ENG Displays t he ID of the VSP5100.
4602 [Scanner Memory Access]
Enables the read and write check for the SBU

001 Scanner Memory Access -
registers.
4603 [AGC Execution]
001 HP Detection Enable - Executes the AGC.
002 HP Detection Disable - DFU
4609 [Gray Balance Set: R]
001 Book Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
4610 [Gray Balance Set: G]
001 Book Scan

*ENG [-384 to 255 / -20 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan
4611 [Gray Balance Set: B]
001 Book Scan

*ENG [-384 to 255 / -28 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan
[Black Level Adj. Display]

4623
RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
Displays the black offset value for the even red

001 Latest: RE Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
508
Main SP Tables-4
Displays the black offset value for the odd red

002 Latest: RO Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4624
GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal
Displays the black offset value for the even

001 Latest: GE Color *ENG green signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Displays the black offset value for the odd green

002 Latest: GO Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4625
BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
Displays the black offset value for the even blue signal in
001 Latest: BE Color *ENG the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Displays the black offset value for the odd blue signal in
002 Latest: BO Color *ENG the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
[Analog Gain Adjust]

4628
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Latest: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4629
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Latest: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
509

4630
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Latest: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
[Digital Gain Adjust]

4631
001 Latest: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: RO Color *ENG

4632
001 Latest: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: GO Color *ENG

4633
001 Latest: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: BO Color *ENG
4645 [Scan Adjust Error]
001 White level *ENG

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Black level *ENG
[Scanner Hard Error]

4647
Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
[0 to 35535 / - / 1digit /step]

001 Power-ON *ENG 0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure
If the SBU connection check fails, SC144 occurs.
510
Main SP Tables-4

4654

Last Correct Value: RE signal in the CCD circuit board.
001 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: RO signal in the CCD circuit board.
002 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4655

Last Correct Value: GE green signal in the CCD circuit board.
001 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: GO signal in the CCD circuit board.
002 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4656
Displays the black offset value for the even blue

Last Correct Value: BE signal in the CCD circuit board.
001 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Displays the black offset value for the odd blue

Last Correct Value: BO signal in the CCD circuit board.
002 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4658
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Last Correct Value: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
511

4659
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Last Correct Value: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4660
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Last Correct Value: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4661 [Digital Gain Adjust] RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: RO Color *ENG
4662 [Digital Gain Adjust] GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: GO Color *ENG
4663 [Digital Gain Adjust] BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: BO Color *ENG

4673
Displays the factory setting values of the black

level adjustment for the even red signal in the
001 Factory Setting: RE Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

level adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD
002 Factory Setting: RO Color *ENG circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]
512
Main SP Tables-4

4674

level adjustment for the even green signal in the
001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

level adjustment for the odd green signal in the
002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

4675

level adjustment for the even blue signal in the
001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

level adjustment for the odd blue signal in the
002 Factory Setting: BO Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

4677
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
001 Factory Setting: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4678
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green.
001 Factory Setting: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4679
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue.
513
001 Factory Setting: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4680
001 Factory Setting: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: RO Color *ENG

4681
001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG

4682
001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: BO Color *ENG
[Scan Image Density Adjustment]
4688 Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF or 1-pass
DF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different.
001 ARDF *ENG [80 to 120 / 98 / 1%/ step]
002 1-pass DF *ENG [80 to 120 / 98 / 1%/ step]
[White Level Peak Read]
4690 Displays the peak level of the white level scanning.

If these scanned white levels are out of the correct range, SC142 may be issued.
001 RE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 RO *ENG
514
Main SP Tables-4

001 GE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 GO *ENG

001 BE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 BO *ENG
[Black Level Peak Read]
4693 Displays the level of the black level scanning.

If these scanned black levels are out of the correct range, SC141 may be issued.
001 RE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 RO *ENG

001 GE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 GO *ENG

001 BE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 BO *ENG
515
4796 [Low Density Color Correction]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Front Side *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the low color density correction for the front side of originals.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Rear Side *ENG
002 0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the low color density correction for the back side of originals.
4802 [DF Shading FreeRun]
001 Lamp OFF Executes the scanner free run of shading

movement with exposure lamp on or off.
*ENG
002 Lamp ON Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the
free run lasts.
4804 [Home Position]
001 - *ENG Executes the scanner HP detection.
4806 [Carriage Save]
Moves the carriage from the scanner home

position.
001 - *ENG Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass.
Therefore, do this SP when you transport the
machine a long distance.
4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change]
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Scanning image
1: Fixed pattern
001 - *ENG 2: Main scanning gradation
3: Sub scanning gradation
4: Grid pattern
(5 to 255 : Scanning images)
516
Main SP Tables-4
4808 [Factory Setting Input]
002 Execution Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
[Disp ACC Data]
This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution.
4902
A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
001 R DATA1 *ENG Photo C Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
002 G DATA1 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
003 B DATA1 *ENG Photo Y Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
005 G DATA2 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit)
[Man Gamma:Pht:Y]
4918 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
See “Printer Gamma Correction" in the Replacement and Adjustment for how to use.
Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen

(-001 to 008). For details, see the "Printer
009 - *ENG
Gamma Correction" in the section "Replace and
Adjustment".
4954 [Read/Restore Std]
001 Read New Chart *ENG Execute the scanning of the A4 chart.
002 Recall Prev Chart *ENG Clear the data of the scanned A4 chart.
003 Read Std Chart *ENG Execute the scanning of the A4 standard chart.
004 Set Std Chart *ENG Overwrite the standard data.
005 Chromaticity Rank *ENG Restores the standard chromaticity rank.
517
[IPU Image Pass Selection]
4991 Selects the image path.

Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key pad.
RGB Frame Memory *ENG [0 to 11 / 2 / 1 /step ]
0: Scanner input RGB images

1: Scanner I/F RGB images
001
2: RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)
3: Shading data
4 to 11: Not used
4993 [High Light Correction]
Selects the Highlight correction level.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
Selects the range level of Highlight correction.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
002 Range Selection *ENG
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction
[Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.]

4994
Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF.
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Text priority
001 High Compression PDF *ENG
1: Normal
2: Photo priority
518
Main SP Tables-5
Main SP Tables-5
SP5-XXX (Mode)
[mm/inch Display Selection]

5024
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
0: mm (Europe/Asia)
001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL
1: inch (USA)
[Accounting counter]
Selects the counting method.

5045
• The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter
value is negative or positive.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 Counter Method *CTL 0: Developments SP 5045
Modified
1: Prints
[Paper Display]
5047
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Backing Paper *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
[TonerRefillDetectionDisplay]
5051
Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
5051 1 - *CTL 0: ON
1: OFF
519
[Display IP Address]
5055
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF 1: ON
SP 5056 [Coverage Counter Display]

Deleted 5056
Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: Not display, 1: Display
[Toner Remaining Icon Display Change]

5061
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
[Parts Replacement Alert Display]

5062
Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD.
001 Drum Unit: Bk *CTL
002 Drum Unit: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Drum Unit: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
004 Drum Unit: Y *CTL
005 Development Unit: Bk *CTL
006 Development Unit: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Development Unit: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
008 Development Unit: Y *CTL
520
Main SP Tables-5
009 Developer: Bk *CTL
010 Developer: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
011 Developer: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
012 Developer: Y *CTL
013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL
014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit *CTL
015 Fusing Unit *CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit *CTL
017 Waster Toner bottle *CTL
018 Fusing Roller *CTL
019 Pressure Roller *CTL
[PM Parts Display]

5066
Display or does not display the “PM parts” button on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
[Part Replacement Operation Type]
5067 Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts.
If the user service is selected, PM alert is displayed on the LCD.
002 Drum Unit: M *CTL

[0: Service] or [1: User]
003 Drum Unit: C *CTL
521
005 Development unit: Bk *CTL
006 Development unit: M *CTL

007 Development unit: C *CTL
008 Development unit: Y *CTL
010 Developer: M *CTL

011 Developer: C *CTL
013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
015 Fusing Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
017 Waste Toner bottle *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
018 Fusing Roller *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
019 Pressure Roller *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
5071 [Set Bypass Paper Size Display]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
- *CTL
0: Off, 1: On
001
Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up prevents
mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation panel and an actual paper
size on the by-pass tray.
[Home Screen Login]

5074
Sets the application that appears when the home key is pressed.
0: Function disable
091 (0:OFF 1:SDK 2:Reserve) *CTL 1: SDK application
2: Legacy application (reserved)
522
Main SP Tables-5
Sets the Application product ID.

092 Product ID *CTL
[0x00 to 0xffff / - / 1/step]
Sets the display category of the application that is

093 Application ID *CTL specified in the SP5075-001,002
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
[USB Keyboard]
5075
Sets the function of the external keyboard.
0: Disable
001 Function Setting *CTL
1: Enable
523
Sets the external keyboard type.

0: None
1: English (NA)
2: Turkish
3: Korean
4: Chinese (Simplified)
5: Chinese (Traditional)
6: English (UK)
7: French (France)
8: French (Belgium)
9: French (Canada)
10: German
11: Italian
12: Spanish
002 Keyboard Type Setting *CTL 13: Spanish (Latin America)
14: Dutch
15: Norwegian
16: Danish
17: Swedish
18: Portuguese
19: Portuguese (Brazil)
20: Finnish
21: Catalan
22: Portuguese
23: Hungarian
24: Czech
25: Russian
26: Japanese
27: Greek
RTB 26c
SP5101 added
5104* [Counter: Size Setting] A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)
524
Main SP Tables-5
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. “Yes” counts except from the
bypass tray. When “Yes” is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4
x2 and LT x2 respectively.
Default setting: Yes
5113 [Optional Counter Type]
This program specifies the counter type.

0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
Default Optional Counter 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card
001 *CTL
Type 4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
This program specifies the external counter type.

0: None
External Optional Counter
002 *CTL 1: Expansion Device 1
Type
2: Expansion Device 2
5114 [Optional Counter I/F]
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

001 MF Key Card Extension *CTL
accounting)]
[Disable Copying]
5118
This program disables copying.
001 - *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
[Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal]

5120 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or remove
an optional counter, check the settings.
[0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but not

001 - *CTL
used)/ 2: No (not removed)]
525
[Counter Up Timing]
5121 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper feed” and
“paper exit” respectively.
001 0:Feed 1:Exit *CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit]
[F Size Original Setting]

5126
Selects F size original setting.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap)
001 - *ENG
1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio)
2: 8" x 13" (F)
[APS Mode]
5127
This program disables the APS.
[Paper Size Type Selection]

5131 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB system
(0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
001 - *ENG [0: JP (Japan)/ 1: NA / 2: EU]
5148 Size Detection Off *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
0: Detect
1: Not Detect
[Bypass Length Setting]
5150 Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited to 600
mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
001 0: OFF 1: ON *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
526
Main SP Tables-5
5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [0: Soft Key Set/ 1: Hard Key Set]
001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]

5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used
when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL 0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
[CE Login]
5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this SP
before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 CE Login *CTL 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
[Size Adjust]
5181
Adjusts the paper size for each tray.
[0 to 3 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step]

001 TRAY 1 *ENG
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF, 3: A5 LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
002 TRAY 2: 1 *ENG
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
003 TRAY 2: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
004 TRAY 2: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
005 TRAY 2: 4 *ENG
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
527
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
006 TRAY 3/T-LCT: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
007 TRAY 3: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
008 TRAY 3: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
009 TRAY 3: 4 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
010 TRAY 4: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
011 TRAY 4: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
012 TRAY 4: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
013 TRAY 4: 4 *ENG
[0 to 2 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
018 LCT *ENG
0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF, 2: B5LEF
[RK4]
5186 Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection.
If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine
automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - *ENG 0: Disable
1: Enable
[Copy Nv Version]
5188
Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board.
001 - - -
528
Main SP Tables-5
5193 [External Controller Info. Settings]
Sets the external controller type. This setting is

appropriately adjusted if an external controller is installed
in the machine.
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - - 0: No external controller installed

1: EFI controller
2: Ratio controller
3: Egret controller
4 to 10: Reserved
5199 [Paper Exit After Staple End.]
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling.
• If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum number of
the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum
number).
• If this setting is "0: OFF", paper is fed out with stapling at the maximum number of the
finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum
number).
5212 [Page Numbering] *CTL
This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A "– value" moves the page number positions to the left edge. A "+ value" moves the page
number positions to the right edge.
Duplex Printout Right/Left

003 [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Position
Duplex Printout High/Low

004 [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Position
529
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302 NA: -300 (New York)
EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
*CTL
002 Time Difference [-1440 to 1440 / -300 / 1 min./step]
#
5307 [Summer Time]
[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled
Setting
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
001
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
• Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not
activated even if this SP is set to "1".
530
Main SP Tables-5
Rule Set (Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so
the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
003
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
• The digits are counted from the left.
• Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
For example: 3500010 (EU default)

The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
Rule Set (End) - -
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
004
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
5404 [User Code Count Clear]
001 UCodeCtrClr Clears all counters for users.
5411 [LDAP Certification]
Determines whether easy LDAP certification is

004 Easy Certification *CTL done.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 1: On, 0: Off
531
This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set

to "1" (On).
005 Password Null Not Permit *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
Determines whether LDAP option (anonymous

certification) is turned on or off.
006 Detail Option *CTL
Bit0
0: OFF, 1: ON
5413 [Lockout Setting]
Switches on/off the lock on the local address

book account.
001 Lockout On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for

002 Lockout Threshold *CTL account lockouts.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1/step]
Determines whether the system waits the

prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and
password after an account lockout has occurred.
003 Cancellation On/Off *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct
user ID and password are entered.
Determines the length of time that the system waits

for correct input of the user ID and password after
004 Cancellation Time *CTL a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only if
SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).
[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min./step]
5414 [Access Mitigation]
532
Main SP Tables-5
Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs

and passwords that are identical.
001 Mitigation On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets the length of time for excluding continuous

002 Mitigation Time *CTL access for identical user IDs and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min./step]
5415 [Password Attack]
Sets the number of attempts to attack the system

with random passwords to gain illegal access to
001 Permissible Number *CTL the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt/step]
Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once

002 Detect Time *CTL such an attack has been detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec./step]
5416 [Access Information]
Limits the number of users used by the access

exclusion and password attack detection
001 Access User Max Num *CTL functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users/step]
Limits the number of passwords used by the

Access Password Max access exclusion and password attack detection
002 *CTL functions.
Num
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 password/step]
Sets the processing time interval for referencing

003 Monitor Interval *CTL user ID and password information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
5417 [Access Attack]
533
Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive

number of attempts are detected for MFP
001 Access Permissible Number *CTL features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1/step]
Sets the length of time for monitoring the

002 Attack Detect Time *CTL frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec./step]
Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of

certification when an excessive number of access
003 Productivity Fall Wait *CTL attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
Sets a limit on the number of requests received for

certification in order to slow down the
004 Attack Max Num *CTL certification speed when an excessive number of
access attempts have been detected.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 attempt/step]
[User Authentication]
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

5420
• These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled.
Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the copy applications.
001 Copy *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
534
Main SP Tables-5
Color Security Setting *CTL -
Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the user
authentication is "ON".
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
Bit0: B/W mode
002
Bit1: Mono color mode
Bit2: Two colors mode
Bit3: Full color mode
Bit4: Automatic color mode
Bit5 to 7: Reserved

before a user can use the document server.
011 DocumentServer *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the fax application.
021 Fax *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the scan applications.
031 Scanner *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the printer applications.
041 Printer *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
051 SDK1
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2 *CTL Determines whether certification is required
before a user can use the SDK application.
071 SDK3
535
[Authentication Error Code]

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
Determines whether an error code appears in the

system log after a user authentication failure
001 System Log Disp *CTL occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Off, 1: On
Determines whether an error code appears on

the operation panel after a user authentication
002 Panel Disp *CTL failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 1 /1]
1: On, 0: Off
5490 [MF KeyCard (Japan only)]
Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Job Permit Setting *CTL 0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a user
code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user
code.
002 Count Mode Setting *CTL -
5501 [PM Alarm] *CTL -
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Alarm off
001 PM Alarm Level
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x
1000 > PM counter
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: No alarm sounds
002 Original Count Alarm
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing
through the ARDF > 10,000
5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL -
536
Main SP Tables-5
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Zero (Off)
001
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level.

5505 The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm
counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied
sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / C3a: 25, C3b: 35 / 100 copies /

001 - *CTL
step]
5508* [CC Call] *CTL -
Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable

001*
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable

002*
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable

003*
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
Jam Detection: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]

011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”. This
setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is set to "1".
Jam Detection: Continuous Count [2 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]

012* Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is
enabled only when SP5508-004 is set to "1".
537
Door Open: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]
013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5-508-004 is set to "1".
[SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL -
5515 With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call
when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC
error occurs.
001 SC Call
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
002 Service Parts Near End Call
0: Off
003 Service Parts End Call
1: On
004 User Call
006 Communication Test Call
007 Machine Information Notice
008 Alarm Notice

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
009 Non Genuine Tonner Alarm 0: Off
1: On
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
[Individual PM Part Alarm Call] *CTL -

5516 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call when one of
SP parts reaches its yield.
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not send, 1: [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

001
Send) 0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
5610 [Base Gamma Control Point: Command]
538
Main SP Tables-5
Factory Setting *ENG -

004
Recalls the factory settings.
Restore *ENG -
005
Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.
Restore *ENG -
006
Recalls the previous settings.
5611 [Toner Color in 2C]
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-C *ENG
001 128: Darkest density
Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-M *ENG
Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-C *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-Y *ENG
Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-M *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-Y *ENG
5618 [Color Mode Display Selection]
539
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour,
- *CTL
001 Single colour
1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White
Selects the color selection display on the LCD.
• Memory Clear (SP5-801)

• The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information, meter charge
setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and 586) are not cleared.
5801 [Memory Clear]
Resets all correction data for process control and all

001 All Clear software counters, and returns all modes and adjustments
to their default values.
002 Engine Clears the engine settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control

003 SCS Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and
ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clr Initializes the IMH settings.
005 Mcs Initializes the Mcs settings.
006 Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax Application
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
540
Main SP Tables-5
The following service settings:

• Bit switches
• Gamma settings (User & Service)
• Toner Limit
The following user settings:
008 Printer Application
• Tray Priority
• Menu Protect
• System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver
• I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
• PCL Menu
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the
009 Scanner Application
scanner SP modes.
Deletes the network file application management files and

010 Web Service
thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)

011 NCS
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for

012 R-Fax
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)

015 Clear UCS Setting
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)

016 MIRS Setting
settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control

017 CCS
Service) settings.
018 SRM Memory Clr Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings.
020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings.
021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings.
541
[FreeRun]
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
5802
• The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT, A3 or
A4 SEF printing from the 1st or 2nd tray. Therefore, the correct paper should be
loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is not fed.
• The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a test.
001 B/W A4 LEF -
002 FC A4 LEF - -
003 FC A3 LEF *ENG
See “Input Check Table” in “Main SP Tables-9”.

5803 [Input Check] -
( p.681)
0: Unlock
044 Cooling Fan: Lock *ENG
1: Lock
0: Unlock
045 2nd Duct Fan2: Lock *ENG
1: Lock
See “Output Check Table” in “Main SP

5804 [Output Check] *ENG
Tables-9”. ( p.692)
5805 [Anti-Condensation Heater]
002 0:OFF / 1:ON *ENG -
[SC Reset]
Resets a type A service call condition.

5810
• Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
001 Fusing SC Reset -

-
002 Hard High Temp. Detection -
542
Main SP Tables-5
5811 [MachineSerial] Machine Serial Number Display
002 Display Displays the machine serial number.

*ENG
004 BCU Inputs
5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]
Service *CTL -
001 Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the
Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
Facsimile *CTL -
002 Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on
the Counter List.
Supply *CTL -
003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the
number and press #.
Operation *CTL -
004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press
#.
5816 [Remote Service] *CTL -
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
001
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
543
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
• This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.

003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL during an

RCG send for the @Remote over a network interface.
007
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote Communication
Gate) connects during a call via the @Remote network.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to the RCG
during a call over the @Remote network.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written from the RCG
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
544
Main SP Tables-5
Port 80 Enable -
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port 80 on the
@Remote network.
011
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
RFU Timing
Selects the timing for the remote firmware updating.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Any status of a target machine

1: Sleep or panel off mode only
RCG – C Registed
This SP displays the RCG-N installation end flag.

021
0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the RCG-N connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.

061 Cert Expire Timing DFU
[0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when

the machine communicates with the service center.
062 Use Proxy [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not use
1: Use
545
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between the RCG
device and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server
address.
063 The address is necessary to set up the embedded RCG-N.
• The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond the 128
character are ignored.
• This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy PortNumber
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between the
embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up the embedded
064
RC Gate-N.
• This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
• The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
• This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066
• The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the
31st character is ignored.
546
Main SP Tables-5
CERT:Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by RCG-N is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW
1
URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
2
successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed
3
update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being
4
sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting
11
is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of
067 12
the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully,
13 and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW
URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW
14
controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the
15
successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
16
failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW
URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but an
17
certification error has been received, and the rescue certification is being
recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being
18
notified of the failure of the certification update.
547
CERT:Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the
certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired.
068 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has
2
expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT:Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the

previous version of the firmware before the firmware update
execution. If the option to confirm the previous version is
085 Firm Up User Check
selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the
firmware update is done with the firmware files from the
URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the

086 Firmware Size
firmware data files during the firmware update execution.
087 CERT: Macro Ver. Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification.
088 CERT: PAC Ver. Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces are

089 CERT: ID2 Code displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (****) indicate
that no @Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the @Remote certification

subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are displayed
090 CERT: Subject
as underscores (_). Asterisks (****) indicate that no DESS
exists.
548
Main SP Tables-5
Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks

091 CERT: Serial No
(****) indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote

092 CERT: Issuer certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes
(****)indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the current
093 CERT: Valid Start
@Remote certification is enabled.
Displays the end time of the period for which the current
094 CERT: Valid End
Displays cryptic strength of the NRS certification.

102 CERT: Strength 1: 512 bit
2: 2048 bit
Selection Country
Select the country where embedded RCG-M is installed in the machine. After selecting
the country, you must also set the following SP codes for embedded RCG-M:
• SP5816-153
150
• SP5816-154
• SP5816-161
0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France, 6: Italy,
7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain
Line Type AutomaticJudgment
Press [Execute].
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG-M is connected as
either dial-up (pulse dial) or push (DTMF tone) type, so embedded RCG-M can
151 automatically distinguish the number that connects to the outside line.
• The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be displayed with
SP5816-152.
• If the execution succeeded, SP5816-153 will display the result for confirmation
and SP5816-154 will display the telephone number for the connection to the
outside line.
549
Line Type Judgment Result
Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a list of
what the numbers mean.
0: Success
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
152 3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress – ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.
Selection Dial / Push
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the access point
for embedded RCG-M. The number displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the execution of
SP5816-151. However, this setting can also be changed manually.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
153 0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
Inside Japan "2" may also be displayed:
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS
550
Main SP Tables-5
Outside Line Outgoing Number
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for embedded
RCG-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).
• If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and embedded RCG-M has
connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
154 • If embedded RCG-M has connected to an internal line, then the number of the
connection to the external line is displayed.
• If embedded RCG-M has connected to an external line, a comma is displayed with
the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.
• The number setting for the external line can be entered manually (including
commas).
Dial Up User Name
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when
setting a user name:
156
• Name length: Up to 32 characters
• Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation
marks (").
Dial Up Password
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when
157
marks (").
Local Phone Number
161 Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where embedded RCG-M is
connected. This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)
551
Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming
When the Call Center calls out to an embedded RCG-M modem, it sends a repeating ID
tone (*#1#). This SP sets the time the line remains open to send these ID tones after the
162 number of the embedded RCG-M modem is dialed up and connected.
[0 to 24 / 1 / 1 /step]
The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if you set "2" the line will
remain open for 4 sec.
Access Point
This is the number of the dial-up access point for RCG-M. If no setting is done for this SP
163 code, then a preset value (determined by the country selected) is used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Line Connecting
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates the line to
RCG-M only, or sets the line for sharing between RCG-M and a fax unit.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Sharing Fax
164
1: No Sharing Fax
• If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.
• SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used to interrupt a
RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction.
173 Modem Serial No. This SP displays the serial number registered for the RCG-M.
Retransmission Limit
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update requests, and
for the notification that the certification has been completed. However, RCG-M
174 generates charges based on transmission time for the customer, so a limit is placed upon
the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP to cancel
the time restriction.
552
Main SP Tables-5
FAX TX Priority -
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a RCG-M
transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP can be used only if
187
SP5816 164 is set to "0".
[0 or 1/ 0 / - ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
200 Manual Polling - Executes the manual polling.
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the registered device by the external nor embedded RCG device is set.
1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
201 status, this unit cannot answer a polling request from the external RCG.
2. The embedded RCG device is set. In this status, the external RCG unit cannot answer
a polling request.
3. The registered device by the external RCG is being set. In this status the embedded
RCG device cannot be set.
4 The registered module by the external RCG has not started.
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the

202 Letter Number
RCG-N device.
203 Confirm Execute Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote GW URL.
Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
204
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing
553
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the
inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

8: Other error
9: Registration executing
554
Main SP Tables-5
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
[-2147483647 to 2147483647 / 0 / - ]
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without

-12002
acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without execution of an

-12003
inquiry and no previous registration.
Operation Error,
208 Attempted setting with illegal entries for
Incorrect Setting -12004
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited. The

-12005 device has an Embedded RC gate-related
problem.
A confirmation request was made after the

-12006
confirmation had been already completed.
The request number used at registration was

-12007
different from the one used at confirmation.
Operation Error,
Update certification failed because mainframe
was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual

-12009
certification and NVRAM
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.
555
Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

-2385
international prefix for the telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2391 Two registrations for same device

208
Response from GW URL
-2393 Basil not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal
-2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal
-2398 Incorrect request number format
209 Instal Clear Releases the machine from its embedded RCG setup.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
5821 [Remote Service Address]
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote

002 RCG IP Address *CTL Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.
[NV-RAM Data Upload]
5824 Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from the
NVRAM to an SD card. For details, see the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in this
section.
001 NV-RAM Data Upload # -
556
Main SP Tables-5
[NV-RAM Data Download]

5825 Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For details, see
the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in this section.
001 NV-RAM Download # -
5828 [Network Setting] *CTL -
Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

1284 Compatibility
050 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
(Centro)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
052 ECP (Centro)
• This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is set to

"1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.

065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power on.

Job Spooling Clear: Start
066 0: ON (Data is cleared)
Time
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
557
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each

protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
069 Job Spooling (Protocol)
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
Enables or disables the Web operation.

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet

or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
Active IPv6 Link Local
145 "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
Address
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8
blocks of 16 bits each.
558
Main SP Tables-5
Active IPv6 Stateless

147
Address 1

149
Address 2 These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5) referenced
on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
151 "Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
Address 3
Active IPv6 Stateless blocks of 16 bits each.
153
Address 4

155
Address 5
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
156 IPv6 Manual Address "Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The IPv6 address
158 IPv6 Gateway Address
consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
each.
Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6 stateless.

IPv6 Stateless Auto
161 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Setting
Displays or does not display the Web system items.

[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1:
Displayed
236 Web Item visible
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the

Web shopping link top page and link page of the web system.
237
visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
559
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable

Supplier on the top page and link page of the web system.
238 Web supplies Link visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page

239 Web Link1 Name of the web system. The maximum characters for the URL
name are 31 characters.
This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link

240 Web Link1 URL page of the web system. The maximum characters for the
URL are 127 characters.
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top

page of the web system.
241 Web Link1 visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL -
560
Main SP Tables-5
001 HDD Formatting (ALL)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only if
there is a hard disk error.
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
HDD Formatting (Data for a

009
Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5836 [Capture Setting] *CTL -
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable

001 With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
Panel Setting 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

002
Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.
5836-71 to 5836-78, Copier and Printer Document Reduction

The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the
document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
071 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
074 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
075 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
561
076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2:

077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200dpi
skipped) , 6: 2/3
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2:

078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200dpi
skipped) , 6: 2/3
5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
081 Format for Copy Color
• This SP is not used in this model.
082 Format for Copy B&W Text
083 Format Copy B&W Other
084 Format for Printer Color
085 Format for Printer B&W
086 Format for Printer B&W HQ
Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server via
the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
562
Main SP Tables-5
Sets the IP address for the primary capture server. This is

101 Primary srv IP address
basically adjusted by the remote system.
102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
103 Primary srv port number This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
104 Primary srv URL path This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Sets the IP address for the secondary capture server. This is

111 Secondary srv IP address
112 Secondary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Secondary srv port

113 This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
number
114 Secondary srv URL path This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
120 Default Reso Rate Switch This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Reso: Copy (Color) [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
121 Selects the resolution for color copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi
Reso: Copy (Mono) [0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
122 Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi
This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

Reso: Print (Color)
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
123 Selects the resolution for color print mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi

Reso: Print (Mono)
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
124
Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
563

Reso: Fax (Color)
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
125
Selects the resolution for color fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi

Reso: Fax (Mono)
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
126
Selects the resolution for BW fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

Reso: Scan (Color)
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
127 Selects the resolution for color scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.

Reso: Scan (Mono)
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
128 Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.
5840 [IEEE 802.11]
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel Max *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless
006 LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings
are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the
maximum number of channels. DFU
• Do not change the setting.
564
Main SP Tables-5
[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel Min *CTL Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless
are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the
minimum number of channels. DFU
0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix
0 x 0F - 36M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix
0 x 0D - 12M Fix
008 Transmission Speed *CTL 0 x 0B - 9M Fix
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
Selects the WEP key.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
011 WEP key Select *CTL
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
565
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the

IEEE802.11 card.
042 Fragment Thresh *CTL [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11
card is installed.
Determines whether the CTS self function is turned

on or off.
043 11g CTS to Self *CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
card is installed.
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

044 11g Slot Time *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
Selects the debug level for WPA authentication

application.
045 WPA Debug Lvl *CTL [1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
card is installed.
5841 [Supply Name Setting]
566
Main SP Tables-5
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta
007 OrgStamp
011 Staple Std1 Specifies supply names. These appear

*CTL on the screen when the user presses the
012 Staple Std2 Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
013 Staple Std3
014 Staple Std4
021 Staple Bind 1
022 Staple Blind2
023 Staple Blind 3
5844 [USB]
0x01: Full speed

Transfer Rate *CTL
001 0x04: Auto Change
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
002 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU
003 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version

004 Device Release Number *CTL
number. DFU
[Delivery Server Setting] *CTL -

5845
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]

001
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
567
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Primary)
255.255.255.255
002
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab
can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a
test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external
device.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Secondary)
255.255.255.255
008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the
secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP
address without reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model [0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
009 1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr. Capability [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists Changes the capability of
010
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists the registered that the
I/O device registered.
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set

to “0”)
568
Main SP Tables-5
Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
011
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Server Scheme (Primary) DFU

013
This is used for the scan router program.
Server Port Number (Primary) DFU

014
Server URL Path (Primary) DFU

015
Server Scheme (Secondary) DFU

016
Server Port Number (Secondary) DFU

017
Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU

018
Rapid Sending Control
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error.
022
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
5846 [UCS Setting] *CTL -
Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID
001 Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only
displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394
EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
569
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
002 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute
this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the
ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries [2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and
the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
server address book.
Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]

008 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information
managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]

010
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
WSD Maximum Entries [5 to 250 / 250 / 1 /step]

020
Sets the maximum entries for the address book of the WSD (WS-scanner).
Addr Book Migration (USB HDD)

040
Not used in this machine.
570
Main SP Tables-5
Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic

machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the
new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM
and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be
accessed only by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service
technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
041
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes successfully, any user
can access the address book.
Displays the slot number where an address book data is

in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
043 Addr Book Media 1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
Clears the local address book information, including the

047 Initialize Local Addr Book
user code.
Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book information, except
048
Book the user code.
Clears the LDAP address book information, except the

049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book
user code.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS,

050 Initialize All Addr Book
including all user codes.
571
051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
052 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the

service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this
machine.
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
053 Clear Backup Info
• After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and then

turn the power off.
• Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops
flashing.
Search option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address
book.
Bit: Meaning
060 0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
Complexity option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book.
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the
password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.

• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password
policy to control access to the address book.
063 Complexity Option 2 DFU
572
Main SP Tables-5
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server

091 FTP Auth Port Setting address book that is used in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function for the

094 Encryption Stat
address book data.
[Rep Resolution Reduction] *CTL -
SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data transferred
externally by the Net File page reference function. [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
5847
SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.
“Net files” are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
001 Rate for Copy Color 0: 1x
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text 1: 1/2x

2: 1/3x
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
3: 1/4x
004 Rate for Printer Color 4: 1/6x
005 Rate for Printer B&W 5: 1/8x
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
006 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
573
Network Quality Default for JPEG
021 Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function
is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
[Web Service] *CTL -
5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
5848 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is equal
to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control

Access Ctrl: Repository (only
002 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Lower 4 bits)
0010: No writing control
Access Control: Doc. Svr. Print

003
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Control: udirectory

004
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax

007
(Lower 4 bits)
Switches access control on and off.
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4
009 0000: No access control
bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Access Ctrl: Devicemanagement
011
(Lower 4bits)
Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4

021
bits)
Access Ctrl: uadministration

022
(Lower 4bits)
Repository: Download Image

99 DFU
Setting
Specifies the max size of the image data that the

Repository: Download Image machine can download.
100
Max. Size
[1 to 2048 / 2048 / 1 MB /step]
574
Main SP Tables-5
210 Setting: LogType: Job1
212 Setting: LogType: Access
213 Setting: PrimarySrv

NIA
214 Setting: SecondarySrv
215 Setting: StartTime
216 Setting: IntervalTime
217 Setting: Timing
5849 [Installation Date] *CTL -
The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to

5849 1 Display
“Installation Date” or “Inst. Date”.
Determines whether the installation date is printed on

the printout for the total counter.
5849 2 Switch to Print [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
003 Total Counter -
5850 [Address Book Function] *CTL -
Replacement of Circuit Classification Japan Only
003 The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at once
to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the G4 line
becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
5851 [Bluetooth] *CTL -
mode
001 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
575
[Stamp Data Download]
Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and
copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This SP must be
5853
executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
• This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
[Remote ROM Update]

5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port (IEEE1284) when
updating the remote ROM.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port *CTL 0: Disable
1: Enable
5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL -
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON

001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this
feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with
SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
Save to HDD
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
005
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card.
Save to SD Card
006
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.
009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
010 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
576
Main SP Tables-5
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
013 Free Space on SD Card
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug
[Debug Save When] *CTL -
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination
5858 selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error
codes.
Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by

Engine SC Error
001 copier engine errors.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]

Controller SC Error
002 GW controller errors.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.

004 Jam (0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL -
577
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
005 Key 5 functions that use common memory on the controller
board.
006 Key 6
[–9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL -
Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour/step]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The
received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this
prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
Determines whether RFC2.5298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

021
0: No
1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
022 account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. “From” item not switched.
1: Yes. “From item switched.
578
Main SP Tables-5
SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / - / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
• Bit 0: LOGIN
• Bit 1: PLAIN
025
• Bit 2: CRAM MD5
• Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
• Bit 4 to 7: Not used
• This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent

by S/MIME.
S/MIME: MIME Header [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]

026 -
Setting 0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5870 [Common Key Info Writing]
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for

001 Writing *CTL
validating the device for @Remote specifications.
Initializes the data area of the common proof for

003 Initialize *CTL
validating.
5873 [SD Card Appli Move]
This SP copies the application programs from the original SD card in

001 Move Exec
SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.
This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in SD

Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot 1. Use this menu
002 Undo Exec
when you have mistakenly copied some programs by using "Move
Exec" (SP5873-1).
5875 [SC Auto Reboot]
579
Enables or disables the automatic reboot function

when an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 / – ]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error
001 Reboot Setting *CTL
code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does
not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error
occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC codes.
Selects the reboot method for SC.

002 Reboot Type *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5878 [Option Setup]
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. Press

001 Data Overwrite Security - "EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then turn the
machine off and on.
002 HDD Encryption - Installs the HDD Encryption unit.
5881 [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]
001 - - Deletes the fixed phrase.
[Line Speed Selection]

5883
Selects the line speed for middle thick paper.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Middle Thick *ENG 0: MID CARD: Half Speed (115 mm/sec)
1: MID CARD: Normal Speed
[Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings

5885
Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor.
580
Main SP Tables-5
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit Meaning
0: Forbid all document server access (1)
1: Forbid user mode access (1)
2: Forbid print function (1)
020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl *CTL
3: Forbid fax TX (1)
4: Forbid scan sending (1)
5: Forbid downloading (1)
6: Forbid delete (1)
7: Reserved
Selects the display type for the document box

list.
050 DocSvr Format *CTL
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details
Sets the number of documents to be displayed in

051 DocSvr Trans *CTL the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
Selects whether the signature is added to the

scanned documents with the WIM when they
are transmitted by an e-mail.
100 Set Signature *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Setting for each e-mail
1: Signature for all
2: No signature
Determines whether the scanned documents with

the WIM are encrypted when they are
101 Set Encrypsion *CTL transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
200 Detect Mem Leak *CTL Not Used
201 DocSvr Timeout *CTL Not Used
581
[SD Get Counter]

5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in

SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The operation stores.
The file is stored in a folder created in the root
directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER.
The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with
the number of the machine.
001 - *CTL
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower
slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are
prompted.
5888 [Personal Information Protect]
Selects the protection level for logs.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
001 - *CTL 0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an
administrator can see the logs)
[SDK Application Counter] *CTL -

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
[External Counter Setting]

5894
Test Name1_1
582
Main SP Tables-5
001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
[Application Invalidation]
5895 Enables or disables the printer or scanner application.

These SPs are used only when an external controller is installed in the machine.
001 Printer *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]

0: Enable
002 Scanner *CTL
1: Disable
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be
001 registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the
setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913 [Switchover Permission Time]
Print Application Timer *CTL [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]
002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the
operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain control
of the display.
5967 [Copy Server : Set Function] *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image
001 data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you
must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.
[Cherry Server]
5974
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, “Lite” or “Full”, is installed.
001 (0:Light 1:Full) *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
583
[Device Setting]
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable
and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the
controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is limited
only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
• Other network applications than NRS or LDAP/NT

authentication are not available when this SP is set to "2".
Even though you can change the initial settings of those
network applications, the settings do not work.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
5987 [Mech. Counter]
This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is

001 0: OFF / 1: ON *ENG
removed. If it is detected, SC610 occurs.
[SP print mode]

5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
584
Main SP Tables-5
001 All (Data List) -
002 SP (Mode Data List) -
003 User Program -
004 Logging Data -
005 Diagnostic Report -
006 Non-Default - -
007 NIB Summary -
008 Capture Log -
021 Copier User Program -
022 Scanner SP -
023 Scanner User Program -
024 SDK/J Summary -

-
025 SDK/J Application Info -
[SP Text mode]

5992
Exports the SMC sheet data to the SD Card.
585
003 User Program -
004 Logging Data -
006 Non-Default -
007 NIB Summary - Press “Execute” key to start exporting the SMC
008 Capture Log - data in the SP mode display.
022 Scanner SP -
024 SDK/J Summary -
026 Printer SP mode -
[Fusing Cont mode] Fusing Control Mode

5998
Turns the silent fusing warm-up mode on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 fast/silent *ENG 0: Silent (less noise)
1: Fast (less time)
586
Main SP Tables-6
Main SP Tables-6
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
6006 [ADF Adjustment]
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.
001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front

*ENG [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear
003 Leading Edge Registration *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rear sides.
005 Buckle: Duplex Front [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

*ENG
006 Buckle: Duplex Rear [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.
007 Rear Edge Erase *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
[ADF INPUT Check]

6007 Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF. Only Bit 0 is used
for ADF input check ( p.681).
[ADF OUTPUT Check]
6008 Activates the electrical components for functional check.

It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time ( p.692).
[ADF Free Run]

6009
Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode.
001 Free Run Simplex Motion *ENG
002 Free Run Duplex Motion *ENG -
003 Free Run Stamp Motion *ENG
587
[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

6010
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
001 - *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Original Size Detect Setting]

6016 Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original sensors
cannot recognize all sizes.
[0 or 1 / - / - ]
*ENG
0: Setting 1, 1: Setting 2
Setting 1 Setting 2
DLT SEF Folio SEF 11" x 15"
NA LG SEF Foolscap SEF

001 -
LT SEF US EXE 8" x 10"
LT LEF US EXE LEF
DLT SEF 8K 267 x 390 mm

EU/
LT SEF 16K 195 x 267 mm
ASIA
LT LEF 16K 267 x 195 mm
[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment

6017
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
001 - *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
[Skew Correction Moving Setting]

6020
Turns the original skew correction in the ARDF for all original sizes on or off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *ENG 0: Off (only for small original sizes)
1: On (for all original sizes)
588
Main SP Tables-6
[Punch Position: Sub Scan]

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction.
Domestic 2Hole (Europe

001 *ENG
2Hole)
002 North America 3Hole *ENG

[-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
003 Europe 4Hole *ENG
004 North Europe 4Hole *ENG
[Punch Position: Main Scan]

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction.

001 *ENG
2Hole)

[-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.4 mm/step]
[Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.]

6130
Adjusts the paper buckle for each paper size.
589
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG
006 B5Y *ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step]
007 DLT-T *ENG
008 LG-T *ENG
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Skew Correction Control]

6131 Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. These are only activated for
B804/B805.
590
Main SP Tables-6
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
006 B5Y *ENG
0: No (No skew correction)
007 DLT-T *ENG
1: Roller Stop Skew Correction
008 LG-T *ENG
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Jogger Fence Fine Adj]
6132 This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the
finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher B804/B805. The adjustment is done
perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
591
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]

006 B5Y *ENG + Value: Increases distance between jogger
fences and the sides of the stack.
007 DLT-T *ENG
- Value: Decreases the distance between the
008 LG-T *ENG jogger fences and the sides of the stack.
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Staple Position Adjustment]
Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (B408/B804/B805).

6133
+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
001 Finisher1 *ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 1/step]
[Saddle Stitch Position Adjust]

6134 Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled
and folded in the Booklet Finisher B804.
592
Main SP Tables-6
001 A3T
002 B4T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step]

+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
003 A4T
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5T
005 DLT-T
006 LG-T
007 LT-T
008 12*18
009 Other
[Folder Position Adj.]

6135 This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet
Finisher B804.
001 A3T
002 B4T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step]

003 A4T
004 B5T
005 DLT-T
006 LG-T
007 LT-T
008 12*18
009 Other
[Folding Number]
6136
Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher B804.
001 - [2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
593
6139 [FIN (KIN) INPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Input Check
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher. ( p.
681)
6140 [FIN (EUP) INPUT Check] Finisher (B804/B805) Input Check
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. ( p.
681)
6144 [FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Output Check
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher. ( p.
692)
6145 [FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B804/B805) Output Check
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. ( p.
692)
[Max. Pre-Stack Sheet] *ENG Number of Pre-Stack Sheets
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149
• You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick paper.
001 - [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheet/step]
[INPUT Check]
6150 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the bridge unit (D386) / side
tray (D542) ( p.681).
[OUTPUT Check]
6151 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the bridge unit (D386)/ side
tray (D542) ( p.692).
594
Main SP Tables-6
[INPUT Check]
6152 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the shift tray (D388) ( p.
681).
[OUTPUT Check]
692).
[INPUT Check]
6154 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the 1 bin tray (D536) ( p.
681).
[OUTPUT Check]
692)
001 1 bin: Junction Solenoid
[INPUT Check]
6160 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the two-tray paper feed unit
(D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.681)
[OUTPUT Check]
(D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.692)
595
Main SP Tables-7
SP7-XXX (Data Log)
[Total SC]
7401
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
002 Total SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
[SC History]
7403 Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be
seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
001 -
002 -
003 -
004 -
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
[Total Paper Jam]

7502
Displays the total number of jams detected.
001 Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
002 Total Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
596
Main SP Tables-7
[Total Original Jam]

7503
Displays the total number of original jams.
001 Original Jam counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 original/step ]
002 Total Original Counter *CTL -
[Paper Jam Loc]

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
7504
Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
001 At Power On *CTL
003 Tray 1: On *CTL
004 Tray 2: On *CTL
005 Tray 3: On *CTL
006 Tray 4: On *CTL For details, see “Jam Detection”. ( p.

007 LCT : On *CTL 870)
008 Registration Sn: On (Bypath) *CTL
009 Registration Sn: On (Duplex) *CTL
011 Vertical Trans. 1: On *CTL
597
017 Registration: On *CTL
018 Fusing Entrance: On *CTL

For details, see “Jam Detection”. ( p.
019 Fusing Exit: On *CTL
870)
020 Paper Exit: On *CTL
021 Bridge Tray Exit: On *CTL
022 Bridge Relay: On *CTL
024 Junction Gate Sensor : On *CTL
025 Duplex Exit: On *CTL
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In) *CTL
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out) *CTL
051 Vertical Trans. 1: Off *CTL
053 Vertical Trans. 3: Off *CTL For details, see “Jam Detection”. ( p.
054 Vertical Trans. 4: Off *CTL 870)
057 Registration Sensor: Off *CTL
058 LCT Feed Sensor : Off
060 Paper Exit Off *CTL
061 Bridge Tray Exit: Off *CTL
062 Bridge Relay: Off *CTL
598
Main SP Tables-7
064 Junction Gate Sensor : Off *CTL
065 Duplex Exit: Off *CTL
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In) *CTL
067 Duplex entrance : Off (Out) *CTL
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN *CTL
101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN *CTL

102 Finisher Staple: KIN *CTL
870)
103 Finisher Exit: KIN *CTL
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN *CTL
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN *CTL
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN *CTL
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN *CTL
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN *CTL
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP *CTL
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP *CTL
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP *CTL
194 Finisher Stapler Exit: EUP *CTL
195 Finisher Exit: EUP *CTL
198 Finisher Folder: EUP *CTL

199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP *CTL
870)
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP *CTL
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP *CTL
202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: EUP *CTL
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP *CTL
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP *CTL
206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP *CTL
599
[Original Jam Det]

7505
Displays the total number of original jams by location.
001 At Power On *CTL -
003 Skew Correction Sensor: On *CTL
004 Registration Sensor: On *CTL
005 Original Exit Sensor: On *CTL

-
008 Reverse Sensor: On *CTL
053 Skew Correction Sensor: Off *CTL
055 Original Exit Sensor: Off *CTL

-
058 Reverse Sensor: Off *CTL
[Jam Count by Paper Size]

7506
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
005 A4 LEF *CTL
006 A5 LEF *CTL
014 B5 LEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
038 LT LEF *CTL
044 HLT LEF *CTL
600
Main SP Tables-7
132 A3 SEF *CTL
133 A4 SEF *CTL
134 A5 SEF *CTL
141 B4 SEF *CTL
142 B5 SEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
160 DLT SEF *CTL
164 LG SEF *CTL
166 LT SEF *CTL
172 HLT SEF *CTL
255 Others *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
[Plotter Jam History]

7507
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
001 -
002 -
003 -
004 -
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
[Original Jam History]

7508
Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
601
001 -
002 -
003 -
004 -
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF

7624
Selects the PM maintenance for each part.
001 Drum unit: Bk
002 Drum unit: M
003 Drum unit: C
004 Drum unit: Y
005 Development unit: Bk

[0 or 1 / 1 -]
006 Development unit: M
0: Not PM maintenance
007 Development unit: C
1: PM maintenance
008 Development unit: Y
009 Developer: Bk
010 Developer:M
011 Developer:C
012 Developer:Y
602
Main SP Tables-7
013 Image Transfer Belt
014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit
015 Fusing Unit

[0 or 1 / 1 -]
016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit 0: Not PM maintenance
1: PM maintenance
017 Waste Toner bottle
018 Fusing Roller
019 Pressure Roller
7801 [ROM No/ Firmware Version]
Displays all versions and ROM numbers in the

002 Engine *CTL
machine.
[PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color])
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed. Therefore,
the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be deactivated.
7803 When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed.
Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter - Previous
(SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to “0”.
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-1 to 10.
001 Paper *CTL -
603
002 Page: PCU: Bk
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: C
005 Page: PCU: Y

*ENG -
006 Page: Development Unit: Bk
007 Page: Development Unit: M
008 Page: Development Unit: C
009 Page: Development Unit: Y
010 Page: Developer: Bk
011 Page: Developer: M
012 Page: Developer: C
013 Page: Developer: Y
014 Page: Image Transfer
015 Page: Cleaning Unit *ENG -
016 Page: Fusing Unit
017 Page: Paper Transfer Unit
018 Page: Toner Collection Bottle
019 Page: Fusing Roller
020 Page: Pressure Roller
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current maintenance
unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
When a unit is replaced, and SP7804-xxx is executed, the current PM counter value is
moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-11 to 20) and is reset to “0”. The total
number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-11
to 20.
021 - *ENG
604
Main SP Tables-7
Displays the number of pages of the pump unit for each current maintenance unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step ]
number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-020 to 112.
021 Page: Pump Unit: Bk
022 Page: Pump Unit: M [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/

*ENG
023 Page: Pump Unit: C step ]
024 Page: Pump Unit: Y
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk
032 Rotation: PCU: M
033 Rotation: PCU: C
034 Rotation: PCU: Y
035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk
036 Rotation: Development Unit: M [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/

*ENG
037 Rotation: Development Unit: C step ]
038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y
039 Rotation: Developer: Bk
040 Rotation: Developer: M
041 Rotation: Developer: C
042 Rotation: Developer: Y
605
043 Rotation: Image Transfer *ENG
044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *ENG
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit *ENG

[0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG
step ]
047 Measurement: Toner Collection bottle *ENG
048 Rotation: Fusing Roller *ENG
049 Rotation: Pressure Roller *ENG
Displays the value given by the following formula:

(Current revolution / Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s
expected lifetime has been used up.
The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter is
still less than 100%.
050 - *ENG
Displays the running time of the pump unit for each current maintenance unit.
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
SP7-906-020 to 112.
050 Run Time: Pump Unit : Bk
051 Run Time: Pump Unit : M [0 to 999999999 / - / 1

*ENG
052 Run Time: Pump Unit : C msec/step]
053 Run Time: Pump Unit : Y
606
Main SP Tables-7
061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk
062 Rotation (%): PCU: M
063 Rotation (%): PCU:C
064 Rotation (%): PCU:Y
065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: M [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG
067 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C (See SP7-803-079 below.)
068 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation (%): Developer: Bk
070 Rotation (%): Developer: M
071 Rotation (%): Developer: C
072 Rotation (%): Developer: Y
073 Rotation (%): Image Transfer Belt
074 Rotation (%): Cleaning Unit
075 Rotation (%): Fusing Unit
076 Rotation (%): Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
077 Measurement (%): Toner Collection bottle
078 Rotation (%): Fusing Roller
079 Rotation (%): Pressure Roller

The Rotation (%) counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations
reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count
lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R (%)
counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
607
- *ENG

(Current running time / Target running time) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s
080
The Run Time (%) counter is based on the running time, not printouts nor revolutions. If the
number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If
the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end condition,
even though the Run Time (%) counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
080 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: Bk
081 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
082 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: C
083 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: Y
091 -

(Current printouts / Target printouts) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected
lifetime has been used up.
The Page (%) counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of printouts
reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the revolution count
lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the Page
(%) counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
091 Page (%): PCU: Bk
092 Page (%): PCU: M
093 Page (%): PCU: C
094 Page (%): PCU: Y

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk
096 Page (%): Development Unit:M
097 Page (%): Development Unit:C
098 Page (%): Development Unit:Y
608
Main SP Tables-7
099 Page (%): Developer: Bk
100 Page (%): Developer: M
101 Page (%): Developer: C
102 Page (%): Developer: Y
103 Page (%): Image Transfer [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG
104 Page (%): Cleaning Unit (See SP7-803-091 below.)
105 Page (%): Fusing Unit
106 Page (%): Paper Transfer Unit
107 Page (%): Fusing Roller
108 Page (%): Pressure Roller
109 - *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
109 Page (%): Pump Unit: Bk
110 Page (%): Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
111 Page (%): Pump Unit: C
112 Page (%): Pump Unit: Y
7804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear (Unit, [Color])
Clears the PM counter.

Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?”, which will store the PM counter
value in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of the current PM counter
(SP7-803) to “0”.
609
002 PCU (Drum Unit): Bk - -
003 PCU (Drum Unit): M - -
004 PCU (Drum Unit): C - -
005 PCU (Drum Unit): Y - -
006 PCU (Drum Unit): All - -
007 Development Unit: Bk - -
008 Development Unit: M - -
009 Development Unit: C - -
010 Development Unit: Y - -
011 Development Unit: All - -
012 Developer: Bk - -
013 Developer: M - -
014 Developer: C - -
015 Developer: Y - -
016 Developer: All - -
017 ITB Unit - -
018 Cleaning Unit - -
019 Fusing Unit - -
020 PTR Unit - -
021 Toner Collection Bottle - -
022 Fusing Roller (Heating Roller) - -
023 Pressure Roller - -
024 Pump Unit: Bk - -
025 Pump Unit: M - -
026 Pump Unit: C - -
027 Pump Unit: Y - -
610
Main SP Tables-7
028 Pump Unit: All - -
100 All - -
[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

7807
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
001 SC/Jam Clear - -
[Self-Diagnose Result Display]

7832
Displays the result of the diagnostics.
001 Diag. Result *CTL -
7835 [ACC Counter]
001 Copy ACC *CTL Displays the ACC exectuion times for each
002 Printer ACC *CTL mode.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
[DF Glass Dust Check]
7852 Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on the scanning
glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter. Counting is done only if SP4-020-1
(ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on.
001 Dust Detection Counter *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detection Clear Counter *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
003 Dust Detection Counter: Back *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
[Replacement Counter]
7853
Displays the PM parts replacement number.
611
001 PCU: Bk *ENG
002 PCU: M *ENG
003 PCU: C *ENG
004 PCU: Y *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
007 Development Unit: C *ENG
008 Development Unit: Y *ENG
011 Developer: C *ENG
012 Developer: Y *ENG
013 Image Transfer *ENG
014 Cleaning Unit *ENG
015 Fusing Unit *ENG
016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
017 Tonner Collection Bottle *ENG
018 Fusing Roller *ENG
019 Pressure Roller *ENG
020 Pump Unit: Bk
021 Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
022 Pump Unit: C
023 Pump Unit: Y
612
Main SP Tables-7
[Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.

Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
• [A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
• [B] 20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.
7855
• The setting value [B] must be set larger than [A].

The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each coverage range
are displayed with the following SPs.
• Color1 counter: SP8601-021
001 Coverage Range 1 *CTL [1 to 200 / 5 /1]
[Prev. Unit PM Counter]
7906 (Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
613
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: M
003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: Y

*ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
014 Page: Cleaning Unit
016 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units.
(See SP7-906-031 to 046 below.)
020 Page: Pump Unit *ENG
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
614
Main SP Tables-7
021 Page: Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
022 Page: Pump Unit: C
036 Rotation: Development Unit: M [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

*ENG
037 Rotation: Development Unit: C (See SP7-906-019 above.)
043 Rotation: Image Transfer
044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

*ENG
(See SP7-906-019 above.)
Measurement: Toner Collection
047
bottle
048 Rotation: Fusing Roller
049 Rotation: Pressure Roller
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge.
050 Run Time: Pump Unit *ENG
615
Displays the running time of the previous pump unit

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
050 Run Time: Pump Unit: Bk
051 Run Time: Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
052 Run Time: Pump Unit: C
053 Run Time: Pump Unit: Y
061 Rotation %: PCU: *ENG

(Current revolution / Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected
The Rotation % counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the Rotation %
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
061 Rotation %: PCU: BK
062 Rotation %: PCU:M
063 Rotation %: PCU:C
064 Rotation %: PCU:Y

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
065 Rotation %: Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation %: Development Unit: M
067 Rotation %: Development Unit: C
068 Rotation %: Development Unit: Y
616
Main SP Tables-7
069 Rotation %: Developer: Bk
070 Rotation %: Developer: M
071 Rotation %: Developer: C
072 Rotation %: Developer: Y
073 Rotation %: Image Transfer Belt
074 Rotation %: Cleaning Unit

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit
076 Rotation %: Paper Transfer Unit
Measurement %: Toner Collection

077
bottle

(Current count / Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values in the
counter for the part, and “Yield count” is the recommended yield.
Run Time (%): Pump Unit *ENG

080
The Run Time (%) counter is based on the total running time, not printouts nor revolutions. If
the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
If the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end condition,
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
080 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: Bk
081 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
082 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: C
083 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: Y
617
Page %: PCU *ENG

091
The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the revolution count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the Page% counter is
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
091 Page %: PCU: Bk
092 Page %: PCU: M
093 Page %: PCU: C
094 Page %: PCU: Y
095 Page %: Development Unit: Bk
096 Page %: Development Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
097 Page %: Development Unit: C
098 Page %: Development Unit: Y
099 Page %: Developer: Bk
100 Page %: Developer: M
101 Page %: Developer: C
102 Page %: Developer: Y
618
Main SP Tables-7
103 Page %: Image Transfer
104 Page %: Cleaning Unit
105 Page %: Fusing Unit
106 Page %: Paper Transfer Unit

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
[Toner Bottle Bk]

7931
Displays the toner bottle information for Bk.
619
001 Machine Serial ID
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID
007 Maintenance ID
008 New Product Information
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No. *ENG
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History
015 Refill Information
016 Attachment: Total Counter
017 Attachment: Color Counter
018 End: Total Counter
019 End: Color Counter
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle M]
7932
Displays the toner bottle information for M.
620
Main SP Tables-7
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle C]
7933
Displays the toner bottle information for C.
621
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle Y]
7934
Displays the toner bottle information for Y.
622
Main SP Tables-7
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
7935 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk]
623
001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter log 1 for Bk.
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
7936 [Toner Bottle Log 1: M]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter log 1 for M.
624
Main SP Tables-7
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
7937 [Toner Bottle Log 1: C]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter log 1 for C.
011 Serial No.

*ENG
625
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
7938 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter log 1 for Y.
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
626
Main SP Tables-7
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
[Unit Replacement Date]

7950
Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.
002 Cleaning Unit
003 Paper Transfer Unit
004 Fusing Unit
005 Toner Collection Bottle
006 AIT:Bk
007 AIT:M
008 AIT:C *ENG -
009 AIT:Y
010 Fusing Roller
011 Pressure Roller
012 Pump Unit: Bk
013 Pump Unit: M
014 Pump Unit: C
015 Pump Unit: Y
627
[Remaining Day Counter]

7951
Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit.
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: M
003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: Y

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
628
Main SP Tables-7
036 Rotation: Development Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
037 Rotation: Development Unit: C
043 Rotation: Image Transfer *ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit

047
bottle
629
101 Minimum: PCU: Bk
102 Minimum: PCU: M
103 Minimum: PCU: C
104 Minimum: PCU: Y
105 Minimum: Development Unit: Bk
106 Minimum: Development Unit: M
107 Minimum: Development Unit: C Displays one of the three, Remaining

Day Counter: Rotation or Runtime, or
108 Minimum: Development Unit: Y Remaining Day Counter: Page, which
is the minimum value.
109 Minimum: Developer: Bk
*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
110 Minimum: Developer: M
For toner collection bottle, this SP is
111 Minimum: Developer: C not displayed because its Remaining
Day Counters is calculated with its
112 Minimum: Developer: Y weights only.
113 Minimum: Image Transfer
114 Minimum: Cleaning Unit
115 Minimum: Fusing Unit
116 Minimum: Paper Transfer Unit
117 Minimum: Fusing Roller
118 Minimum: Pressure Roller
119 Minimum: Pump Unit: Bk

Displays either Remaining Day
120 Minimum: Pump Unit: M Counter: time or Page, which is less
*ENG value.
121 Minimum: Pump Unit: C
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
122 Minimum: Pump Unit: Y
[PM Yield Setting]

7952
Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit.
001 Rotation: Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 256597000 / 1 mm/step]
630
Main SP Tables-7
002 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 128299000 / 1 mm/step]
003 Rotation: Fusing Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 155595000 / 1 mm/step]
004 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 192448000/ 1 mm/step]
011 Page: Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0 to 999999 / 320000 / 1 sheet/step]
012 Page: Cleaning Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet/step]
013 Page: Fusing Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet/step]
014 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 240000/ 1 sheet/step]
021 Day Threshold: PCU: Bk
022 Day Threshold: PCU: M
023 Day Threshold: PCU: C
024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y
Day Threshold: Development

025
Unit: Bk
Adjusts the threshold day for the near end fro
026 each PM unit.
Unit: M
*CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
027 These threshold days are used for @Remote
Unit: C
alarms.
028
Unit: Y
029 Day Threshold: Developer: Bk
030 Day Threshold: Developer: M
031 Day Threshold: Developer: C
032 Day Threshold: Developer: Y
631
Day Threshold: Image

033
Transfer Belt
034 Day Threshold: Cleaning Unit Adjusts the threshold day for the near end fro
each PM unit.
035 Day Threshold: Fusing Unit
*CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
Day Threshold: Paper Transfer These threshold days are used for @Remote
036
Unit alarms.

037
Collection Bottle
038 Rotation: PCU Bk
039 Rotation: PCU M

*CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
040 Rotation: PCU C
041 Rotation: PCU Y
Rotation: Development Unit:

042
Bk

043 *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
M

*CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
050 Page: PCU: Bk
051 Page: PCU: M

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
052 Page: PCU: C
053 Page: PCU: Y
632
Main SP Tables-7

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7953 [Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk]
Displays the PCDU rotation distance in each specified operation environment.

T: Temperature (°C), H: Relative Humidity (%)
001 T<=0
002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30
003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70
004 0<T<=5:70<=H<=100
005 5<T<15:0<=H<30
*CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
006 5<T<15:30<=H<55
007 5<T<15:55<=H<80
008 5<T<15:80<=H<=100
009 15<=T<25:0<=H<30
010 15<=T<25:30<=H<55
633
011 15<=T<25:55<=H<80
012 15<=T<25:80<=H<=100
013 25<=T<30:0<=H<30
014 25<=T<30:30<=H<55
015 25<=T<30:55<=H<80
016 25<=T<30:80<=H<=100 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
017 30<=T<35:0<=H<30
018 30<=T<35:30<=H<55
019 30<=T<35:55<=H<80
020 30<=T<35:80<=H<=100
021 35 <= T
[Operation Env. Log Clear]

7954
Clears the operation environment log.
001 -
7955 Fusing Stop
Near End: Page - [1 to 999999 / 318000 / 1 sheet/step]

001
Displays the threshold sheet for the heating roller near end.
End: Page - [1 to 999999 / 330000 / 1 sheet/step]

002
Displays the threshold sheet for the heating roller end.
[0 to 999999999 / C3a: 173327000, C3b:

Near End: Rotation -
003 162570000 / 1 mm/step]
Displays the threshold distance for the heating roller near end.
[0 to 999999999 / C3a: 179868000, C3b:

End: Rotation -
004 168705000 / 1 mm/step]
Displays the threshold distance for the heating roller end.
634
Main SP Tables-8
Main SP Tables-8
SP8-xxx: Data Log2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color
faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others,
can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that
you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F,

T: Total: (Grand Total).
P, etc.).
C: Copy application.
F: Fax application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application
P: Print application. when the job was not stored on the document server.
S: Scan application.
635
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L:

counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they
count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can
be in document server mode (from the document server
Local storage (document
L: window), or from another mode, such as from a printer
server)
driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy
mode window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document server.
Each counter will be discussed case by case.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in the
example) future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the
small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and
refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
636
Main SP Tables-8
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to

DesApl
store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count
up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number
GPC
that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up
11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
ImgEdt
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines

NRS
remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
637
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print
jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and
Palm 2
allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different
formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
PGS count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
R
machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
SMC
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
638
Main SP Tables-8
• All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
T:Total Jobs *CTL

8 001
These SPs count the number of times each application is
8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL used to do a job.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL
Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the other
8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL applications are used to send a job to the document server,
plus the number of times a file already on the document
8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL server is used.
8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer using
the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is counted
at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not (the
document server is not used).
• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are not
counted separately).
• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one
transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has
been completed.
• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a print
job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters both
increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server, only
the L: counter increments.
639
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments.
8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL
8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document
8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL server by each application, to reveal how local storage is
being used for input.
8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL
8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter
document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL
8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL

These SPs reveal how files printed from the document
8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL server were stored on the document server originally.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL
8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C: counter
increments.
640
Main SP Tables-8
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document
server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both
increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S:
counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the L:
counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are
printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image
Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

These SPs reveal what applications were used to
8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL output documents from the document server.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the application
that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor,
etc.) the L: counter increments.
641
8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored files on
the document server that were later accessed for
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL transmission over the telephone line or over a
8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by
I-Fax).
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned
from within the document server mode screen at the
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
operation panel.
• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e-
mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

These SPs count the applications used to send files
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from the document server over the telephone line or
over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax
8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
image by I-Fax). Jobs merged for sending are
8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL counted separately.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
642
Main SP Tables-8
F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 063 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 065 These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print
window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application, over
the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set for
8 06x 1 Sort Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter increments.
(See SP8 066 1)
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple mode,

8 06x 4 Booklet
the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set
8 06x 5 Z-Fold
for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print job,
8 06x 6 Punch
the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
643
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job,
regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number
of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 073 These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number
S:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 075 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number
L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 076 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web Image
Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
644
Main SP Tables-8
• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode,
the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the
error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of
the copy job (SP 8072).
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted.
T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 111 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax, either
directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 113 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax
directly on a telephone line.
8 11x 1 B/W
8 11x 2 Color
• These counters count jobs, not pages.

• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents
stored on the document server.
• If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started.
• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where both
are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also increments.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
645
T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 121 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent, either
directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax.
F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 123 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored on the
document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color

• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time.
T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 131 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
S: S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 135 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and attached
to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS

• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color or
black-and-white then counted.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be
sent, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of
the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
646
Main SP Tables-8
• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or if
one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example, if the
same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for
Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 141 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent
to a Scan Router server.
S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in scanner
mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8 14x 1 B/W
8 14x 2 Color
8 14x 3 ACS

• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server
cannot be confirmed.
• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a "Color"
job.
delivered, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent
8 151 to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

with Scan-to-PC.
647
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 15x 3 ACS

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission
jobs. A job is counted from when it is registered for
sending, not when it is sent.
8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.
• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to the
destination from the PC through the copier.
8 171 T:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS.
8 175 S:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
-001 B/W
-002 Color
-003 ACS
8 181 T:Scan to Media Jobs *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a media by
the scanner application.
8 185 S:Scan to Media Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
-001 B/W
-002 Color
-003 ACS
648
Main SP Tables-8
8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL

These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL application that uses the scanner to scan images.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S: count
is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File
button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 201 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy
jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
F: LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 203 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax
transmission.
S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 205 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only.
Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted.
649
8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the
document server .
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
operation panel, and with the Store File button from
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL within the Copy mode screen
• Reading user stamp data is not counted.

• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the
L: count is 6.
ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 221 These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side
scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count
is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex
scanning.
8 221 1 Front
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side
scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user loads face
up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the
8 221 2 Back same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is
the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side scanning.
• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also,
the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
650
Main SP Tables-8
Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the
work load on the ADF.
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in

8 231 1 Large Volume
the ADF at one time.
8 231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF.
Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation

8 231 3 Mixed Size
panel.
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original

8 231 5 Platen
directly on the platen.
8 231 6 Mixed 1side/ 2side Simplex and Duplex mode.
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen
mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the original's
page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
• If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF,
the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 241 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs,
C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 242
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 243
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 245
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
651
L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 246 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within
the Copy mode screen
8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246
8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
652
Main SP Tables-8
8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit features
have been selected at the operation panel for each
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL application. Some examples of these editing features
8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL are:
• Erase> Border
8 255 S : Scan PGS/ImgEdr *CTL
• Erase> Center
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL • Image Repeat
• Centering
• Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit
features have been used. A detailed breakdown of
exactly which features have been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8 265 S:Scn PGS/Color *CTL -
8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 26x 1 Color Conversion
8 26x 2 Color Erase These SPs show how many times color creation
8 26x 3 Background features have been selected at the operation panel.
8 26x 4 Other
8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned using
a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the
TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.
653
8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages stamped with
the stamp in the ADF unit.
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL
within the Copy mode screen
T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size
[SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page
size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application.
8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within
8 306 the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page
size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
654
Main SP Tables-8
8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
8 30x 5 B5
8 30x 6 DLT
-
8 30x 7 LG
8 30x 8 LT
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed
8 30x 254 Other (Standard)
8 30x 255 Other (Custom)
T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 311 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
S: Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, SP8-311 and SP8-315 perform identical counts.
8 31x 1 1200dpi <
8 31x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi
8 31x 3 400dpi to 599dpi
8 31x 4 200dpi to 399dpi
8 31x 5 < 199dpi
• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

• The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the
Fax application.
655
8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed by the
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL customer. The counter for the application used for
storing the pages increments.
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL
operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL button from within the Copy mode screen go to the
C: counter.
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted
as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for
the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following
pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
656
Main SP Tables-8
8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed from
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL the document server. The counter for the application
8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL used to print the pages is incremented.
8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last
8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL pages printed only on one side are not counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the scanner application.
657
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the
operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by Other applications
8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex
8 42x 3 Book> Duplex
8 42x 4 Simplex Combine
8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
8 42x 6 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8 42x 7 4 in1 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
8 42x 12 Booklet
8 42x 13 Magazine
• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their
compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
658
Main SP Tables-8
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below,
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 432 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with
the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server
mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Other applications.
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count for a

8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed as

8 43x 2 Series/Book
a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were applied,

8 43x 3 User Stamp
including page numbering and date stamping.
659
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 441
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 442 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 443 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 445 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 446 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
660
Main SP Tables-8
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5
8 44x 6 DLT
8 44x 7 LG
8 44x 8 LT
8 44x 9 HLT
8 44x 10 Full Bleed
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8 451 1 Bypass Tray Bypass Tray
8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8 451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.
661
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on
8 461 feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However,
these counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 462
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 463
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 464
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 466 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel.
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
8 46x 8 Other
PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
662
Main SP Tables-8
8 471 1 < 49%
8 471 2 50% to 99%
8 471 3 100%
8 471 4 101% to 200%
8 471 5 201% <
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also
counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of
100%.
8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched
on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed in the
8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
Color Mode by each application.
8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 497 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 49x 1 B/W
8 49x 2 Single Color
663
8 49x 3 Two Color
8 49x 4 Full Color

These SPs count the number of pages printed in
8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
the Color Mode by the print application.
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Mono Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
8 50x 5 Two Color
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 511
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 514
664
Main SP Tables-8
8 514 1 RPCS
8 514 2 RPDL
8 514 3 PS3
8 514 4 R98
8 514 5 R16
8 514 6 GL/GL2
8 514 7 R55
8 514 8 RTIFF
8 514 9 PDF
8 514 10 PCL5e/5c
8 514 11 PCL XL
8 514 12 IPDL-C
8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 514 14 Other
• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 523 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax
application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
665
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
• If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are
still counted.
• The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are
counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the

8 531 Staples *CTL machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 581 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
666
Main SP Tables-8
8 581 1 Total
8 581 2 Total: Full Color
8 581 3 B&W/Single Color
8 581 4 Development: CMY
8 581 5 Development: K
8 581 6 Copy: Color
8 581 7 Copy: B/W
8 581 8 Print: Color
8 581 9 Print: B/W
8 581 10 Total: Color
8 581 11 Total: B/W
8 581 12 Full Color: A3
8 581 13 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
8 581 14 Full Color Print
8 581 15 Mono Color Print
8 581 16 Full Color GPC
8 581 17 Twin Color Mode Print
8 581 18 Full Color Print (Twin)
8 581 19 Mono Color Print (Twin)
8 581 20 Full Color Total (CV)
8 581 21 Mono Color Total (CV)
8 581 22 Full Color Print (CV)
8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color
output.
667
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 2 Single Color
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Mono Color
8 584 3 Full Color
8 584 5 Two Color
8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
O:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed,
and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.
668
Main SP Tables-8
8 591 1 A3/DLT
-
8 591 2 Duplex
T: Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for
each printing mode.
8 601 1 B/W
8 601 2 Color
8 601 11 B/W Printing Pages
8 601 12 Color Printing Pages -
8 601 21 Coverage Counter 1
SDK Apli Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion.
8 617 1 SDK-1
8 617 2 SDK-2
8 617 3 SDK-3
-
8 617 4 SDK-4
8 617 5 SDK-5
8 617 6 SDK-6
T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 631 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone
number.
669
F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

number.
8 63x 1 B/W
8 63x 2 Color
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as
B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633
are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 641 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images
using I-Fax.
F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 643 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using
I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color
B/W or Color.
are the same.
each destination.
670
Main SP Tables-8
T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 651 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for
both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

the Scan application only.
8 65x 1 B/W
8 65x 2 Color
• The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is
cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
• If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages
are sent to the same SMTP server together).
• If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is
sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
• Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to a
large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For example, if a
10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the
count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

server by the Scan application.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color
• The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router
server.
671
• If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done.
• The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC
(Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S: Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with
the Scan application.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax.
These SPs are provided for the Fax application only, so
the counts for SP8 681 and SP8 683 are the same.
8 683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier to the
destination.
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only
counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes
up by 10, not 20.)
8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages sent from the
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL document server. The counter for the application that
was used to store the pages is incremented.
8 693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL panel. Pages stored with the Store File button from within
the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
• If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the
application that stored them.
672
Main SP Tables-8
• When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of
pages sent to each destination.
TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 701 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them. For
example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for
ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network
8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 715
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other
8 715 5 PDF/Comp
8 721 T:Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: Dvliv PGS/WSD *CTL
8 725
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
x 1 B/W -
x 2 Color -
673
8 731 T:Scan PGS/Media *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Media *CTL
8 735 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by each scanner
mode.
x 1 B/W -
x 2 Color -
RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 741 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive
them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1 -
8 741 2 PSTN-2 -
8 741 3 PSTN-3 -
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4) -
8 741 5 Network -
Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers)
for black and other color toners.
8 771 1 Total
8 771 2 K
8 771 3 Y
8 771 4 M
8 771 5 C
Toner_Bottle_Info. *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
674
Main SP Tables-8
8 781 1 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles
8 781 2 Toner: Y The number of yellow-toner bottles
8 781 3 Toner: M The number of magenta-toner bottles
8 781 4 Toner: C The number of cyan-toner bottles
This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for storing
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the
8 801 user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better
than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10%
steps).
8 801 1 K
8 801 2 Y
8 801 3 M
8 801 4 C
CVr Cnt: 0-10% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color
is from 0% to 10%.
8 851 11 0 to 2%: BK 8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK
8 851 12 0 to 2%: Y 8 851 32 5 to 7%: Y
8 851 13 0 to 2%: M 8 851 33 5 to 7%: M
8 851 14 0 to 2%: C 8 851 34 5 to 7%: C
8 851 21 3 to 4%: BK 8 851 41 8 to 10%: BK
8 851 22 3 to 4%: Y 8 851 42 8 to 10%: Y
675
8 851 23 3 to 4%: M 8 851 43 8 to 10%: M
8 851 24 3 to 4%: C 8 851 44 8 to 10%: C
CVr Cnt: 11-20% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

is from 11% to 20%.
8 861 1 BK
8 861 2 Y
8 861 3 M
8 861 4 C
CVr Cnt: 21-30% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

is from 21% to 30%.
8 871 1 BK
8 871 2 Y
8 871 3 M
8 871 4 C
CVr Cnt: 31%- *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

is 31% or higher.
8 881 1 BK
8 881 2 Y
8 881 3 M
8 881 4 C
Page/Toner Bottle *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 891
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color.
676
Main SP Tables-8
8 891 1 BK
8 891 2 Y
8 891 3 M
8 891 4 C
Page/Toner_prev1 *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color.
8 901 1 BK
8 901 2 Y
8 901 3 M
8 901 4 C

8 911
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color.
8 911 1 BK
8 911 2 Y
8 911 3 M
8 911 4 C
Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
677
8 921 1 Coverage (%) Bk
8 921 2 Coverage (%) Y
8 921 3 Coverage (%) M
8 921 4 Coverage (%) C
8 921 11 Coverage /P: Bk
8 921 12 Coverage /P: Y
8 921 13 Coverage /P: M
8 921 14 Coverage /P: C
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode.
These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for
improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while

8 941 1 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves

8 941 2 Standby Time data to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy Save,
Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing background

8 941 3 Energy Save Time
printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. Includes

8 941 4 Low Power Time
time while machine is performing background printing.
Includes time while machine is performing background

8 941 5 Off Mode Time printing. Does not include time machine remains powered
off with the power switches.
8 941 6 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Total time when paper jams have been staying during

8 941 7 PrtJam
printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying during

8 941 8 OrgJam
scanning.
678
Main SP Tables-8
8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
AddBook Register *CTL

8 951
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration.
User Code/User
8 951 1 User code registrations.
ID
8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 951 4 Group Group destination registrations.
Fax relay destination registrations

8 951 5 Transfer Request
for relay TX.
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
Copy application registrations with

8 951 7 Copy Program
the Program (job settings) feature.
Fax application registrations with

8 951 8 Fax Program
Printer application registrations with [0 to 255 / 0 / 255]

8 951 9 Printer Program
Scanner application registrations

8 951 10 Scanner Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Admin. Counter List *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 999
679
8 999 1 Total
8 999 2 Copy: Full Color
8 999 3 Copy: BW
8 999 4 Copy: Single Color
8 999 5 Copy: Two Color
8 999 6 Printer Full Color
8 999 7 Printer BW
8 999 8 Printer Single Color
8 999 9 Printer Two Color
8 999 10 Fax Print: BW
8 999 12 A3/DLT
8 999 13 Duplex
8 999 14 Coverage: Color (%)
8 999 15 Coverage: BW (%)
8 999 16 Coverage: Color Print Page (%)
8 999 17 Coverage: BW Print Page (%)
8 999 101 Transmission Total: Color
8 999 102 Transmission Total: BW
8 999 103 FAX Transmission
8 999 104 Scanner Transmission: Color
8 999 105 Scanner Transmission: BW
680
Main SP Tables-9
Main SP Tables-9
Input Check Table
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to
a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Copier
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 1 2nd Tray Size Detection See table 2 following this table.
5803 2 1st Tray Set Detection Set Not set
5803 3 1st Tray Paper Height Sensor1 See table 1 following this table.
5803 5 2nd Tray Paper Height Sensor1 See table 1 following this table.
5803 7 1st Tray Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 8 2nd Tray Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 9 1st Tray Upper Limit Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 10 2nd Tray Upper Limit Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 11 Bypass Paper Width Detection See table 3 following this table.
5803 12 Bypass Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 13 Bypass Paper Length Detection See table 3 following this table.
5803 14 1st Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 15 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
681
5803 16 Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 17 Tray Full Exit Sensor Paper not full Paper full
5803 18 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5803 19 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 20 1st Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 21 2nd Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 22 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 23 Registration Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 24 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 25 Junction Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 26 2nd Tray Set Detection Set Not set
5803 30 Toner End Sensor: Bk Toner end Toner remaining
5803 31 Toner End Sensor: M Toner end Toner remaining
5803 32 Toner End Sensor: C Toner end Toner remaining
5803 33 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner end Toner remaining
Actuator not
5803 34 Drum Phase Sensor: Bk Actuator detected
detected
Actuator not
5803 35 Drum Phase Sensor: M Actuator detected
detected
Actuator not
5803 36 Drum Phase Sensor: C Actuator detected
detected
Actuator not
5803 37 Drum Phase Sensor: Y Actuator detected
detected
5803 38 Interlock Release Detection 1 Front door open Front door closed
5803 40 Right Door Closed Open
5803 41 Duplex Cover Closed Open
682
Main SP Tables-9
5803 42 Toner Collection Bottle Set Set Not set
5803 43 Toner Collection Full Sensor Not full Full
5803 46 ITB New Unit Detection Not new New
5803 50 Airflow Fan: Front: Lock Normal Lock
5803 51 Airflow Fan: Rear: Lock Normal Lock
5803 52 Fusing Exit Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 53 2nd Duct Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 54 3rd Duct Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 55 Paper Exit Fan:Lock Normal Lock
5803 56 Fusing Coil Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 57 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 60 ITB Contact Motor Position Not contact Contact
5803 61 Paper Transfer Contact Motor Position Not contact Contact
5803 62 Toner Relay Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 63 ITB Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 64 K Drum/Development Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 65 M Drum/Development Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 66 C Drum/Development Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 67 Y Drum/Development Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 68 Fusing Exit Motor:Lock Normal Lock
5803 80 HVPS:TTS:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 81 HVPS:CB:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 82 HVPS:D:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 83 Fusing Destination Detection: DOM (Dom) Set Not set
5803 84 Fusing Destination Detection: NA Set Not set
5803 87 Fusing New Unit Detection New Not new
683
5803 90 Zero-cross Signal - -
Actuator not
5803 91 Fusing Rotation Sensor Actuator detected
detected
5803 92 Fusing Pressue Release Sensor Not contact Contact
Closed Open
5803 94 GAVD Open/Close Detection
(LD5V ON) (LD5V OFF)
5803 100 Keycard: Set Set Not set
5803 101 Mechanical Counter Bk: Set Set Not set
5803 102 Mechanical Counter FC: Set Set Not set
5803 103 Key Counter: Set Set Not set
5803 110 IOB Version - -
5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Closed
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor
0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full 0 0
Nearly full 1 0
Near end 1 1
Almost empty 0 1
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)
Switch 1 is used for tray set detection.

0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 4 (bit0) 3 (bit1) 2 (bit2)
684
Main SP Tables-9
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 0 1
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF*2 B4 SEF*2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 1 0
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 0 0
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-003.
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-004.
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-002.
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-005.
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)
0: ON, 1: OFF
By-pass Paper Size Sensor

Length Sensor NA EU/ASIA
bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
1 1 1 1 1 HLT SEF A6 SEF
1 0 0 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
685

bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
1 0 0 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 1 0 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
1 1 0 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 1 0 0 0 DLT SEF A3 SEF
1 1 0 0 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
1 1 1 0 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
*1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001.
ARDF (D578)
Reading
6007 Description
0 1
6007 1 Original Length 1 (B5 Detection Sensor) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 2 Original Length 2 (A4 Detection Sensor) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 3 Original Length 3 (LG Detection Sensor) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 4 Original Width 1 Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 9 Original Detection Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 10 Separation Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 11 Skew Correction Paper not detected Paper detected
686
Main SP Tables-9
6007 12 Scan Entrance Secsor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 13 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 14 Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 15 Feed Cover Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open
6007 16 Lift Up Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open
6007 17 Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 18 Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
6007 19 Original Set HP Sensor Original not detected Original detected
6007 23 Rear Edge Detection (Not used) - -
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804, B805)
Reading
6140 Bit Description
0 1
6140 1 Entrance Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 2 Proof Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 3 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
Paper not
6140 4 Trailing Edge Detection: Shift Paper detected*1
detected*1
6140 5 Staple Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 6 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 7 Shift Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 8 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 9 Paper Detection Sensor: Staple Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 10 Paper Detection Sensor: Shift Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 11 Paper Full Sensor: 2000-Sheet Not Full Full
6140 12 Oscillating Back Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
687
6140 13 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 14 Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor HP Not HP
6140 15 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 16 Staple Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 17 Skew HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 18 Limit SW Not Limit Limit
6140 19 DOOR SW Closed Open
6140 20 Stapler 1 Rotation Not HP HP
6140 21 Staple Detection Staple not detected Staple detected
6140 22 Staple Leading Edge Detection Staple not detected Staple detected
6140 23 Punch Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 24 Punch Registration HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 25 Punch Registratioin Detection Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 26 Punch Chad Full Sensor Not Full Full
6140 27 Punch HP Not HP HP
6140 28 Punch Selection DIPSW 1 See *1
Stack Junction Gate Open/Closed HP

6140 30 Not HP HP
Sensor
6140 31 Leading Edge Detection Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 32 Drive Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 33 Arrival Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 34 Rear Edge Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 35 Folder Cam HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 36 Folder Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 37 Folder Pass Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
688
Main SP Tables-9
Paper not
6140 38 Saddle Full Sensor: Front Paper detected*2
detected*2
Paper not
6140 39 Saddle Full Sensor: Rear Paper detected*2
detected*2
6140 40 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation: Front Not HP HP
6140 41 Saddle Stitch Detection: Front Staple not detected Staple detected
Saddle Stitch Leading Edge Detection:

6140 42 Staple not detected Staple detected
Front
6140 43 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation: Rear Not HP HP
6140 44 Saddle Stitch Detection: Rear Staple not detected Staple detected

Rear
6140 46 Full Sensor: 3000-Sheet Not Full Full
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type
0 0 Japan
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (B804 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "2000/3000 (Booklet)
Finisher".
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)
Reading
6139 Description
0 1
6139 1 Entrance Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
689
Shift Exit Sensor

6139 2 Paper not detected Paper detected
(Lower Tray Exit Sensor)
Staple Entrance Sensor

6139 3 Paper detected Paper not detected
(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor)
Staple Moving HP Sensor

6139 4 Not home position Home position
(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
6139 6 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor Home position Not home position
Staple Rotation Sensor

(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
Staple not
6139 9 Staple Sensor Staple detected
detected
Staple not
6139 10 Staple READY Detection Staple detected
detected
Exit Guide Plate HP

(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
6139 12 Shift HP Sensor Not home position Home position
Paper Sensor Output tray not Output tray

6139 13
(Stack Height Sensor) detected detected
Tray Lower Sensor

6139 14 Lower limit Not lower limit
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
Proof Full Sensor

6139 15 Not full Full
(Paper Limit Sensor)
690
Main SP Tables-9
Bridge Unit (D634)/ Side Tray (D635)
Reading
6150 Description
0 1
6150 1 Bridge/Left: Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
6150 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
6150 3 Bridge/Left: Set Detection Set Not set
6150 4 Bridge/Left: Exit Cover Detection Closed Open
6150 5 Bridge/Left: Feed Cover Detection Closed Open
Internal Shift Tray (D633)
Reading
6152 Description
0 1
6152 2 Shift: Position Sensor Tray position: Front Tray position: Rear
1 Bin Tray (D632)
Reading
6154 Description
0 1
6154 1 1 bin: Set Detection Set Not set
6154 2 1 bin: Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
Two-Tray PFU (D580)/ LCIT 2000 (D581)/ LCIT 1200 (D631)
Reading
6160 Description
0 1
6160 1 Bank: Tray3: Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
691
6160 4 Bank: Tray3: Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6160 7 Bank: Feed Cover Detection Closed Open
6160 11 Bank: Palau: Paper Supply Switch Closed Open
6160 12 Bank: Palau: Slide Switch Closed Open
Output Check Table
Copier
5804 Display Description
Drum/Development Drive Motor-K: High

5804 3 Drum/Dev Motor: K: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-K: Middle

5804 4 Drum/Dev Motor: K: MiddleSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-M: Low

5804 5 Drum/Dev Motor: K: LowSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor- C: High

5804 10 Drum/Dev Motor: M: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Middle

5804 11 Drum/Dev Motor: M: MiddleSpeed
Speed
5804 12 Drum/Dev Motor: M: LowSpeed Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Low Speed

5804 17 Drum/Dev Motor: C: HighSpeed
Speed

5804 18 Drum/Dev Motor: C: MiddleSpeed
Speed
5804 19 Drum/Dev Motor: C: LowSpeed Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Low Speed
692
Main SP Tables-9

5804 24 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: HighSpeed
Speed

5804 25 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: MiddleSpeed
Speed
5804 26 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: LowSpeed Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Low Speed
5804 31 - See the last of this table.
5804 37 Toner Relay Motor Toner Transport Motor
5804 40 Image Transfer Motor: HighSpeed ITB Drive Motor: High Speed
5804 41 Image Transfer Motor: MiddleSpeed ITB Drive Motor: Middle Speed
5804 42 Image Transfer Motor: LowSpeed ITB Drive Motor: Low Speed
5804 50 Feed Motor: HighSpeed Paper Feed Motor: High Speed
5804 51 Feed Motor: IncreaseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Increase Speed
5804 52 Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Middle Speed
5804 53 Feed Motor: MiddleIncreaseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Middle Increase Speed
5804 54 Feed Motor: LowSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Low Speed
5804 55 Feed Motor: LowInceraseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Low Incerase Speed
5804 60 Regist Motor: HighSpeed Registration Motor: High Speed
5804 61 Regist Motor: MiddleSpeed Registration Motor: Middle Speed
5804 62 Regist Motor: LowSpeed Registration Motor: Low Speed
5804 67 Duplex Feed M:CW:HighSpeed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: High Speed
5804 68 Duplex Feed M:CW:MiddleSpeed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Middle Speed
5804 69 Duplex Feed Motor: CW: LowSpeed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Low Speed
Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW:

5804 74 Duplex Feed M:CCW:HighSpeed
High Speed
693

5804 75 Duplex Feed M:CCW:MiddleSpeed
Middle Speed

5804 76 Duplex Feed Motor: CCW: LowSpeed
Low Speed
5804 81 Duplex Reverse M:CW:HighSpeed Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: High Speed
5804 82 Duplex Reverse M:CW:MiddleSpeed Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Middle Speed
Duplex Reverse Motor: CW:

5804 83 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Low Speed
LowSpeed
Duplex Inverter Motor: CCW:

5804 88 Duplex Reverse M:CCW:HighSpeed
High Speed
Duplex Reverse Duplex Inverter Motor: CCW:

5804 89
M:CCW:MiddleSpeed Middle Speed
Duplex Reverse Motor: CCW: Duplex Inverter Motor: CCW:

5804 90
LowSpeed Low Speed
5804 95 ITB Contact Motor Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor
5804 96 Paper Transfer Contact Motor Paper Transfer Contact Motor
5804 97 1st Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Up
5804 98 1st Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Down
5804 99 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Up
5804 100 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Down
5804 102 Fusing Pressue Release Motor Pressure Roller Contact Motor
5804 104 Polygon Moter: LL Polygon Motor: LL
5804 105 Polygon Moter: L Polygon Motor: L
5804 107 Polygon Moter: HH Polygon Motor: HH
5804 110 Air Flow Fan: Front Ventilation Fan - Front
5804 111 Air Flow Fan:Rear Ventilation Fan - Rear
5804 112 Fusing Fan:H Fusing Fan: High Speed
694
Main SP Tables-9
5804 113 Fusing Fan:L Fusing Fan: Low Speed
5804 114 PSU Cooling Fan PSU Fan 1: High Speed
5804 115 2nd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 2: High Speed
5804 117 3rd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 3: High Speed
5804 119 Paper Exit Fan:H Paper Exit Fan: High Speed
5804 121 Fusing Coil Fan QSU Fan
5804 122 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan AC controller board Fan
5804 126 Development Clutch: Bk Development Clutch-K
5804 127 Development Clutch: M Development Clutch-M
5804 128 Development Clutch: C Development Clutch-C
5804 129 Development Clutch: Y Development Clutch-Y
5804 130 Toner Bottle Clutch: Bk Toner Bottle Clutch-K
5804 131 Toner Bottle Clutch: M Toner Bottle Clutch-M
5804 132 Toner Bottle Clutch: C Toner Bottle Clutch-C
5804 133 Toner Bottle Clutch:Y Toner Bottle Clutch-Y
5804 134 Toner Supply Pump: Bk Toner Supply Clutch: Bk
5804 135 Toner Supply Pump: M Toner Supply Clutch: M
5804 136 Toner Supply Pump: C Toner Supply Clutch: C
5804 137 Toner Supply Pump: Y Toner Supply Clutch: Y
5804 138 1st Paper Feed Clutch Paper Feed Clutch 1
5804 139 2nd Paper Feed Clutch Paper Feed Clutch 2
5804 140 Bypass Feed Clutch By-pass Feed Clutch
5804 141 Bypass Pickup Solenoid Bypass Pickup Solenoid
5804 143 TD Sensor Shutter Solenoid ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid
5804 144 Exit Junction Solenoid Junction Gate 1 Solenoid
5804 145 1st Feed Pickup Solenoid 1st Pickup Solenoid
695
5804 146 2st Feed Pickup Solenoid 2nd Pickup Solenoid
5804 161 PCL: Bk
5804 162 PCL: M
5804 163 PCL: C
5804 164 PCL: Y
5804 166 HST Sensor:Bk TD Sensor:Bk
5804 167 HST Sensor: M TD Sensor: M
5804 168 HST Sensor: C TD Sensor: C
5804 169 HST Sensor: Y TD Sensor: Y
5804 170 Toner End Sensor: Bk Toner End Sensor: Bk
5804 171 Toner End Sensor: M Toner End Sensor: M
5804 172 Toner End Sensor: C Toner End Sensor: C
5804 173 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner End Sensor: Y
5804 174 TM Sensor: Front ID Sensor: Front
5804 175 TM Sensor: Center ID Sensor: Center
5804 176 TM Sensor: Rear ID Sensor: Rear
5804 177 TM Sensor: M ID Sensor: M
5804 178 TM Sensor: C ID Sensor: C
5804 179 TM Sensor: Y ID Sensor: Y
5804 181 PP:Charge AC:Y:HighSpeed -
5804 182 PP:Charge AC:Y:MiddleSpeed -
5804 183 PP:Charge AC:Y:LowSpeed -
5804 186 PP:Development:K -
5804 187 PP:Development:M -
5804 188 PP:Development:C -
5804 189 PP:Development:Y -
696
Main SP Tables-9
5804 190 PP:Separation -
5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: K -
5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: Y -
5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: C -
5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: M -
5804 196 RFID COM ON:K -
5804 197 RFID COM ON: Y -
5804 198 RFID COM ON: C -
5804 199 RFID COM ON: M -
5804 202 Scanner Lamp -
5804 216 LD1: K -
5804 217 LD2: K -
5804 218 LD1: M -
5804 219 LD2: M -
5804 220 LD1: C -
5804 221 LD2: C -
5804 222 LD1: Y -
5804 223 LD2: Y -
5804 224 PP:ITB:K PP: Image Transfer Roller: K
5804 225 PP:ITB:M PP: Image Transfer Roller: M
5804 226 PP:ITB:C PP: Image Transfer Roller: C
5804 227 PP:ITB:Y PP: Image Transfer Roller: Y
5804 228 PP:PTR:+ PP: Paper Transfer Roller:+
5804 229 PP:PTR:- PP: Paper Transfer Roller:-
5804 231 HVPS: ChargeDC: K -
5804 232 HVPS: ChargeDC: M -
697
5804 233 HVPS: ChargeDC: C -
5804 234 HVPS: ChargeDC: Y -
5804 237 PP:Charge AC:K:HighSpeed -
5804 238 PP:Charge AC:K:MiddleSpeed -
5804 239 HVPS: ChargeAC: K: LowSpeed -
5804 244 PP:Charge AC:M:HighSpeed -
5804 245 PP:Charge AC:M:MiddleSpeed -
5804 246 HVPS: ChargeAC: M: LowSpeed -
5804 251 PP:Charge AC:C:HighSpeed -
5804 252 PP:Charge AC:C:MiddleSpeed -
5804 253 HVPS: ChargeAC: C: LowSpeed -
698
Main SP Tables-9
Fusing Exit Motor

Note: These SP modes will be moved to Super SP mode in the near future.
Important: Use the procedure below to do the output checks for the fusing exit motor. If
you do not follow this procedure, a kink will form in the fusing belt sleeve, and the fusing
sleeve belt unit will need to be replaced.
• Open the right cover of the paper bank
• Remove one of the toner bottles
• Pull out the waste toner bottle half-way
• Remove the fusing unit
5804 2. Enter SP mode.

3. Do the following out output checks:
• SP5-804-031 (Fusing exit motor: High speed)
• SP5-804-032 (Fusing exit motor: Middle speed)
• SP5-804-033 (Fusing exit motor: Low speed)
• SP5-804-035 (Fusing exit motor: Very low speed)
4. Without exiting SP mode, turn the main power switch off and then on again.
Important: If you exit SP mode before you turn the main power switch off, the fusing exit
motor will stay off when the machine warms up. Heat will be concentrated in one area
of the fusing belt sleeve and cause a kink to form. If this happens, you will need to
replace the fusing sleeve belt unit.
5. Do the reverse of what you did in step 1 (for example, reattach the fusing unit).
5804 31 Fusing Exit Motor: HighSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: High Speed
5804 32 Fusing Exit Motor: MiddleSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Middle Speed
5804 33 Fusing Exit Motor: LowSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Low Speed
5804 35 Fusing Exit Motor: LLowSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: LLow Speed
ARDF (D578)
6008 1 Pick-Up Motor Forward
6008 2 Pick-Up Motor Reverse
699
6008 3 Feed Motor Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation
6008 4 Feed Motor Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation
6008 5 Relay Motor Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 7 Inverter Motor Reverse Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 8 Inverter Motor Reverse -
6008 11 Inverter Solenoid -
6008 12 Stamp Stamp Solenoid
6008 13 Fan Motor -
6008 14 Feed Clutch -
6008 15 Feed Solenoid -
6144 1 Relay Up Motor Upper Transport Motor
6144 2 Relay Down Motor Lower Transport Motor
6144 3 Exit Motor -
6144 4 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor
6144 6 Jogger Motor Jogger Fence Motor
6144 7 Staple Moving Motor Stapler Motor
6144 8 Staple Motor Stapler Hammer
6144 9 Staple Junction Gate SOL Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
6144 10 Positioning Roller Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid
6144 11 Stack Feed-out Motor -
6144 12 Shift Motor -
700
Main SP Tables-9
6144 13 Exit Guide Plate Motor -
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804/B805)
6145 1 Entrance Motor Finisher Entrance Motor
6145 2 Upper Feed Motor Upper Transport Motor
6145 3 Lower Feed Motor Lower Transport Motor
6145 4 Exit Motor Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor
6145 5 Knock Roller Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor
6145 6 Shift Motor Shift Roller Motor
6145 7 Exit Guide Plate Open/Close Motor Exit Guide Plate Motor
6145 8 Tray Lift Motor Upper Tray Lift Motor
6145 9 Oscillating Back Roller Motor Stacking Sponge Roller Motor
6145 11 Stack Feed-out Motor Feed Out Belt Motor
6145 12 Staple Moving Motor Corner Stapler Movement Motor
6145 13 Staple Skew Motor Corner Stapler Rotation Motor
6145 14 Staple Motor Corner Stapler EH530
6145 15 Upper Junction Gate Solenoid Proof Junction Gate Solenoid
6145 16 Lower Junction Gate Solenoid Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
6145 17 Knock Solenoid Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid
6145 18 Trailing Edge Hold Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid
6145 19 Saddle Stitch Hold Solonoid Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid
Stack Junction Gate Open/Close

6145 20 Stack Junction Gate Motor
Motor
6145 21 Trailing Edge Fence Moving Motor Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor
701
6145 22 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: Front Booklet Stapler EH185R: Front
6145 23 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: Rear Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear
6145 24 Folder Plate Motor Fold Plate Motor
6145 25 Folder Roller Motor Fold Roller Motor
6145 26 Drive Roller Oscillating Motor Positioning Roller Motor
6145 27 Punch Motor Punch Drive Motor
6145 28 Punch Moving Motor Punch Movement Motor
6145 29 Punch Registration Detection Motor Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor
Bridge Unit (D386)/ Side Tray (D634)
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Current

6151 1 Bridge: Feed Motor: Current switching signal
Selection
6151 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Reset Bridge: Feed Motor:Reset
6151 3 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Enable Bridge: Feed Motor:Enable
6151 6 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: High Speed Bridge: Feed Motor: High Speed
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Middle

6151 7 Bridge: Feed Motor: Middle Speed
Speed
6151 8 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Low Speed Bridge: Feed Motor: Low Speed
6151 11 Bridge/Left: Junction Solenoid Bridge: Junction Solenoid
Shift Tray (D633)
6153 1 Shift Tray: Motor -
702
Main SP Tables-9
1 Bin Tray (D632)
6155 1 1 bin: Junction Solenoid -
Feed Motor:High Speed

6161 5 Bank1: Feed Motor: HighSpeed
(D537/D538)
Feed Motor: Increase Speed

6161 6 Bank1: Feed Motor: IncreaseSpeed
(D537/D538)
Feed Motor: Middle Speed

6161 8 Bank1: Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed
(D537/D538)
Feed Motor: Low Speed

6161 9 Bank1: Feed Motor: LowSpeed
(D537/D538)
Bank1: Feed Motor: Feed Motor:Low Increase Speed (D537/

6161 10
LowIncreaseSpeed D538)
6161 15 Bank2: Feed Motor:HighSpeed Feed Motor:High Speed (D537)
6161 16 Bank2: Feed Motor: IncreaseSpeed Feed Motor: Increase Speed (D537)
6161 18 Bank2: Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed Feed Motor: Middle Speed (D537)
6161 19 Bank2: Feed Motor: LowSpeed Feed Motor: Low Speed (D537)
Bank2: Feed Motor:

6161 20 Feed Motor: Low Increase Speed (D537)
LowIncreaseSpeed
6161 30 Bank:Tray3: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D537/ D538)
6161 31 Bank:Tray4: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D537/ D539)
6161 32 Bank:Tray5: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D539)
6161 35 Bank:Tray3: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D537/ D538)
6161 36 Bank:Tray4: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D537/ D539)
703
6161 37 Bank:Tray5: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D539)
Printer Service Mode
SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never
occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot. For details, see
"Card Save Function" ( p.740).
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the
printable area.
1001 Bit Switch
704
Main SP Tables-9
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Collate Normal Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have
a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
• If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL
switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
705
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be
changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4 DFU 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side because
of printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce printing speed.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
706
Main SP Tables-9
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch

Disable Enable
Type" buttons on the operation panel.
If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch
bit 0 Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on the device and
configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools Printer Features System"
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch 0: Disable

1: Enable
occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device can be configured to
print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a

job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000 Disable Enable (1000)
jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via
Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 Face-up output Disable Enable
Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.
bit 6 Method for determining the image rotation for the

0: Disable 1: Enable
edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of
older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
707
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
1001 Bit Switch
006 Bit Switch 6 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable
bit 0 If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last
page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the
duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without requiring

Disable Enable
User Code
Enable: BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if usercode
authentication is enabled.
• Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
708
Main SP Tables-9
1001 Bit Switch
"Disabled
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via "Enabled
USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediatel
(10 seconds)"
y)"
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device whether
to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled

Enabled
(Not
(Cancelled)
cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation (SEF/LEF) 0: Disable 1: Enable
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous generations. It only
takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" = "Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the bypass
tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch, the
MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by the MFP
bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
Bit 4 DFU
- -
to 7
1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 1
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 3 Delete Program
709
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Summary
1004 1
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1005 [Display Version]
Disp. Version
1005 1
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On
Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document server is
1006 1 enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When you select
"1," the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
[Data Recall]
1101 Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous
setting, or c) the current setting.
1101 1 Factory
1101 2 Previous
*CTL
1101 3 Current
1101 4 ACC
[Resolution Setting]
1102
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
2400x600 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 2400x600 Text, 1800x600,
1102 1
Text, 600x600 Text
[Test Page]
1103
Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.
1103 1 Color Gray Scale
1103 2 Color Pattern
710
Main SP Tables-9
[Gamma Adjustment]
1104
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection" menu.
1104 1 Black: Highlight
1104 2 Black: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 3 Black: Middle
1104 4 Black: IDmax
1104 21 Cyan: Highlight
1104 22 Cyan: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 23 Cyan: Middle
1104 24 Cyan: IDmax
1104 41 Magenta: Highlight
1104 42 Magenta: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 43 Magenta: Middle
1104 44 Magenta: IDmax
1104 61 Yellow: Highlight
1104 62 Yellow: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 63 Yellow: Middle
1104 64 Yellow: IDmax
[Save Tone Control Value]
1105 Stores the print gamma adjusted with the "Gamma Adj." menu item as the current setting.
Before the machine stores the new "current setting", it moves the data currently stored as
the "current setting" to the "previous setting" memory storage location.
1105 1 Save Tone Control Value
[Toner Limit]
1106
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
711
1106 1 Toner Limit Value *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]
Scanner SP Mode
SP1-xxx (System and Others)
[Compression Type]
1004
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1004 1 Compression Type *CTL
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase Margin(Remote scan)]
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is activated
only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[Remote scan disable]

1009
Enable or disable remote scan.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
1009 1 0:enable 1:desable *CTL
0: enable, 1: disable
[Non Display Clear Light PDF]

1010
Enable or disable remote scan.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
1010 1 Non Display ClearLight PDF *CTL
0: Display, 1: No display
712
Main SP Tables-9
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)
[Compression Level(Grayscale)]
2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three settings
that can be selected at the operation panel.
2021 1 Comp1:5-95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2021 2 Comp2:5-95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
2021 3 Comp3:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]
2021 4 Comp4:5-95 [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2021 5 Comp5:5-95 [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
[Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF]

2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at
the operation panel.
2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]

*CTL
2024 2 Compression Ratio (High) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
713
Firmware Update
To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded
onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 (lower) on the left rear
side of the controller box.
Type of Firmware
There are several types of firmware as shown below.
Type of firmware Function Location of firmware Message shown
Engine Printer engine control BCU Flash ROM Engine
System/Copy Flash ROM on the

Operating system System/Copy
Application controller board
Lcdc Panel control LCDC Lcdc
ADF Main Control

ADF ADF control ADF
Board
NetworkSupport Controller Board NetworkSupport
Language 1 LCDC Language1
Language 2 LCDC Language2
RPCS Controller Board RPCS
MediaPrint:JPEG/
MediaPrint:JPEG/TIFF Controller Board
TIFF
FONT Controller Board FONT
FONT1 Controller Board FONT1
NetworkDocBox Controller Board NetworkDocBox
Printer Controller Board Printer
Scanner Controller Board Scanner
Websupport Controller Board Websupport
WebUapl Controller Board WebUapl
714
Firmware Update
Before You Begin
An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD cards:
• Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card into the slot
with the power on.
• Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
• Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
• Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high humidity,
or exposure to direct sunlight.
• Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD card get
exposed to shock or vibration.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an application
to it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware
upgrade.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
• "Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card. "Download" means to send data
from the SD card to the machine.
• To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the LCD, or,
press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the operation panel. For example, when
"Exit (0)" shows on the screen you can touch the Exit button on the screen, or, press the "0" button
on the operation panel of the copier.
• Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving
while the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update procedure.
Updating Firmware
Preparation
• If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
• If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D142" folder onto the card.
If the card already contains folders up to "D142", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g.
D142xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
• Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only model
firmware you want.
715
Updating Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).

3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (lower). Make sure the label on the SD card faces [B] the
front side of the machine.
4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure the SD
card locks in place.
• To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops out of the slot.
5. Disconnect the network cable from the copier if the machine is connected to a network.
6. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version update screen
appears on the LCD in English.
7. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the operation panel to
select the item in the menu that you want to update.
ROM/NEW What it means
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version currently
ROM: installed. The first line is the module number, the second line the version
name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The
NEW:
first line is the module number, the second line the version name.
716
Firmware Update
• Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time. It is
recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
8. Touch "UpDate (#)" (or ) to start the update.
• The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch "OpPanel".
The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals when the LCDC firmware is updating.
The power key flashes on and off at 3 s intervals when the update is finished.
9. The "Update is Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating. The
message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated.
10. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the "Update is Done" message or follow the
procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error "E24" displayed.
RTB 26
Add: For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( p.721)
Troubleshooting for Error Messages
Firmware Update Error
If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update because the
module selected for update was not on the SD card.
717
Recovery after Power Loss
If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating,
then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again.
If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct
operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is updated
successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download
automatically from the card without the menu display.
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel
Do the following procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).

1. Turn the copier main switch off.
2. Remove the SD slot cover [A] ( x 1).

3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
4. Switch the copier main switch on.
5. The initial screen opens in English after about 45 seconds.
6. Touch "Ope Panel.xx".
7. "xx" differs depending on the destination.
8. Touch "UpDate(#) or ( ) to start the update.
9. Downloading starts after about 9 seconds.
718
Firmware Update
10. The operation panel goes off and the main power on key flashes in red at 0.5 s intervals when the
data is downloading. The same key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals when the update is
finished.
11. Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card. Then switch the copier on.
Update Procedure for App2Me Provider
Follow this procedure to update App 2 Me if a new version is available.

1. Push the [User/Tools] key on the operation panel.
2. If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, Step 3 and Step 4 are required. Otherwise,
skip to step 5.
3. Push [Login/Logout] on the operation panel.
6. Touch each of the applications until the status changes to "Stop".
7. Turn the machine off, and then remove the VM Card.
8. Prepare the newer App2Me Provider zip file from the Firmware Download Center, and then unzip
the zip file. (The folder name is "337051920".)
9. Copy the App2Me Provider folder into the specified path for the VM card. The path is:
"SD_Card Drive\ sdk\dsdk\dist\337051920"
10. Turn the SD card label face to the front of the machine, and then push it slowly into Slot 2 (lower)
until you hear a click.
719
11. Turn the main power switch on.

12. Press [User Tools] on the operation panel.
15. Touch the "App2Me" line.
16. Set the setting of the "Auto Start" to "On".
18. Exit the [User Tools/Counter] settings.
• App2Me and all other running applications on the VM card must be shut down before removing
the VM card in order to update the firmware, back up NVRAM, install the browser unit, or execute
application move or undo with SP5873.
• After the VM card is re-inserted, App2Me (and any other VM card applications used by the
customer) must be switched on after the machine is switched on.
Browser Unit Update Procedure
1. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1).

1. Turn the SD-card label face of the browser unit to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into
slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.
720
Firmware Update
3. Push the "User Tools" key.

• If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, step 5 and 6 are required. Otherwise,
skip to the step 7
4. Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
7. Touch "Uninstall" on the LCD.
8. Touch the "Browser" line
9. Confirmation message appears on the LCD.
10. Touch "Yes" to proceed.
11. Reconfirmation message appears on the LCD.
12. Touch "Yes" to uninstall the browser unit.
13. You will see "Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
14. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.
15. Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch.
16. Remove the SD card of the browser unit from SD card slot 2 (lower).
17. Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk" folder of the browser unit application with PC.
18. Do the "Installation Procedure" to install the browser unit.
Handling Firmware Update Errors
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code consists of
the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Cannot decompress compressed Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

22
data corrupted.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt
23
update program started fails, replace controller board.
721
Code Meaning Solution
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use another

24 SD card access error
SD card.
No HDD available for stamp

30 HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
data download
Data incorrect for continuous Insert the SD card with the remaining data required for
31
download the download, the re-start the procedure.
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended

Data incorrect after download
32 module download, then repeat the installation
interrupted
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

33 Incorrect SD card version
corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct data
34
module is not on the SD card) (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is

Module mismatch – Module on
35 for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
SD card is not for this machine
install again.

Cannot write module – Cause
other than E34, E35
install again.
Replace the update data for the module on the SD card

40 Engine module download failed
and try again, or replace the BCU board.
Operation panel module Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
42
download failed and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
43
failed and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Controller module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
44
failed and tray again, or replace controller board.

Electronic confirmation check
failed
install again.
722
Installing Another Language

Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at a time. Do the
following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can select both of the languages you
want from the user interface on the operation panel.
1. Switch the copier main power switch off.
2. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 2.
4. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45 seconds.
5. Touch "Language Data (2)" on the screen (or press the "2" key).
6. Touch "LANG. 1(1)" or "LANG. 2(2)"
Key What it does
Touch this button on the screen (or press the "1" key on the 10-key pad)
LANG. 1(1)
to open the next screen so you can select the 1st language.
Touch this button on the screen (or press the "2" key on the 10-key pad)
LANG. 1(2)
to open the next screen so you can select the 2nd language.
Touch this key on the screen (or press the "0" key on the 10-key pad) to
Exit (0)
quit the update procedure and return to normal screen.
7. Touch "LANG 1(1)" to select the 1st Language. Touch "LANG (2)" to select the 2nd Language.
723
8. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select a
language as the 1st (or 2nd) language.
• If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse.
• Touching "Exit (0)" returns you to the previous screen.
9. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch " (7)" or " (9)" on the screen (or
press the "7" or "9" key) to show more choices.
The Download Screen opens after you select a language.
The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows.
The following show to right of the selection:
• 1. The first column shows the language currently selected.
• 2. The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language.
The example below shows that the download will replace "Japanese" with "Italian" as the 1st
language.
724
10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download.
Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading.
The following occur at the time the language is downloading:
• The operation panel switches off.
• The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.
11. After the message of installation completed has shown on the LCD, switch the copier main power
switch off. Then remove the SD card from the slot.
12. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.
725
Reboot/System Setting Reset

Software Reset
You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures:
1. Turn the main power switch off and on.
2. Press and hold down and together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once,
release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait” shows for a few seconds, the copy window
will open. The machine is ready for normal operation.
System Settings and Copy Setting Reset
System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down and then press System Settings.
• You must press first.
3. Press yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
Copier Setting Reset
Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
726
Reboot/System Setting Reset
• You must press first.
3. Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document
Server settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
727
Downloading Stamp Data

The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the following
times:
• After the hard disks have been replaced.
The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data
required by the hard disks.
2. Select SP5853 and then press "EXECUTE". The following screen opens while the stamp data is
downloading.
The download is finished when the message prompts you to close.
3. Press the "Exit" button. Then turn the copier off and on again.
728
NVRAM Data Upload/Download

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked
1. Do SP5990-001 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off. You will need a record of the
NVRAM settings if the upload fails.

4. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card slot 2 (lower). Then switch the copier on.
5. Execute SP5824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the “Execute” key.
6. The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload procedure is
finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number “K5000017114”:
NVRAM\K5000017114.NV
729
7. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the
uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
• You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM
Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
• The NVRAM data down load may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the
connection between the controller and BCU is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM
data.

3. Insert the SD card [B] with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
4. Switch the copier main power switch on.
5. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.
730
• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine for
the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do not
match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count
731
Address Book Upload/Download

Information List
The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
Information
• Registration No.
• Select Title
• User Code
• Folder
• E-mail
• Local Authentication
• Protection Code
• Folder Authentication
• Fax Destination
• Account ACL
• Fax Option
• New Document Initial ACL
• Group Name
• LDAP Authentication
• Key Display
Download
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.

2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
3. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
4. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1).
5. Install the SD card into the SD card slot 2 (for service use).
8. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
9. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
10. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2.
11. Install the SD slot cover.
• If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error message
is displayed.
• Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to your
location.
732
Address Book Upload/Download
Upload
1. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.

2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1).
3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2.
6. Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
8. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2.
9. Install the SD slot cover.
• The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

• The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.
• If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is displayed.
733
Using the Debug Log

Overview
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve
error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this information is lost
when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
• Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later retrieval.
• Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically
to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Then ask the user to reproduce the problem.
Switching ON and Setting UP Save Debug Log
The debug information cannot be saved until the “Save Debug Log” function has been switched on and
a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
• Enter the SP mode.
• Touch “System SP”.
• On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “1 On/Off”.
3. On the control panel keypad, press “1”. Then press . This switches the Save Debug Log feature
on.
734
Using the Debug Log
• The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the debug
information to be saved.
4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under “5857 Save Debug
Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the target
destination. Then press .
• Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is inserted in the
service slot.
5. Now touch “5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858
(Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Saves data when an engine-related SC code is

1 Engine SC Error
generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related SC Code

2 Controller SC Error
is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by

3 Any SC Error
entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
• More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press “ON” for each selection. This example shows “Engine SC
Error” selected.
735
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys.
Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
• For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4.
“Troubleshooting”.
6. Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Touch “5859”.
Under “5859” press the necessary key item for the module that you want to record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press .
• Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered.
736
Using the Debug Log
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses indicate
the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10

Key No. Copy Printer Scanner Web
1 2222 (SCS)
2 14000 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848 (COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (IPU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3000 (UCS) 3300 (PTS)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (IPU) 4126 (DCS) 2000 (NCS)
• The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GW Print Service – Print

GSP-PM PTS Print Server
Module
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
System Resource
MCS Memory Control Service SRM
Management
Web Document Box

NCS Network Control Service WebDB
(Document Server)
737
7. The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD (the target
selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected with SP5858 and the memory modules
selected with SP5859.
Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:
• Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner, and Web
memory modules.
• The initial settings are all zero.
• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings, especially
the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key.
• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding 4-digit
numbers from the table.
• You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006 to 010. For example, if you
want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available selections for
the “PRINTER” column only.
• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4 MB.
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD
Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into slot 2 (service slot) of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)) to write the
debugging data to the SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by
email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.
Recording Errors Manually
SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically. Please instruct the user to do the
following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data for any other errors that occur while the
customer engineer is not on site. Such problems also include a controller or panel freeze.
• You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and select the hard disk as
the save destination (SP5857-002) if you want to use this feature.
1. Press (Clear Modes).on the operation panel when the error occurs.
2. On the control panel, enter “01”. Then hold down for at least 3 seconds until the machine
beeps and then release it. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an SD
card by the service representatives.
738
Using the Debug Log
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.

The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets the service representative
retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card.
Debug Log Codes
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared
memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the log directory of the SD
card inserted in the same slot. (This function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can
hold up to 4 MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy operation to
prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data from more than one machine can
be copied onto the same SD card. This command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the
name of the specified key.
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a completely empty file. The
created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key number and other non-volatile information.
Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD (it
takes some time to complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may be
switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the log
file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and
save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be
recorded. A new log file does not need to be created. To create a new log file, do SP5857-011 to
delete the debug log data from the HDD. Then do SP5857-016.
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a completely empty file.
The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key number and other non-volatile information.
Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card
(it takes some time to complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may be
switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the log
file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and
save onto the SD card. With the file already created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs
to be recorded; a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, do SP5857-012 to
delete the debug log data from the SD card. Then do SP5857-017.
739
Card Save Function

Overview
Card Save:
• The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no
print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will
remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
• Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be created. This
file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
• Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has “Add”
and “New” menu items.
• Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the card
becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation panel.
Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
• Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
• Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks will not
work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.
Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.

2. Insert the SD card into slot 2. Then turn the power ON.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select the “Printer Sp”.
5. Select SP-1001 "Bit Switch”.
740
Card Save Function
6. Select “Bit Switch 1 Settings” and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the “#”
button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card Save
option will appear in the “List/Test Print” menu.
7. Press “Exit” to exit SP Mode.

8. Press the “User Tools/Counter” button.
9. Select “Printer Features”.
741
10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save
(Add) or Card Save (New).
11. Press “OK” and then exit the “User Tools/Counter” menu.
12. Press the “Printer” button.
742
Card Save Function
13. Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel.
14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below.
15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print
output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful.
16. Press “Offline” and then the “Clear” button to exit Card Save mode.
743
17. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000. Press the “#” button in the numeric
keypad to register the changes.
18. Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off.
Error Messages
Card Save error messages:

• Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to initialize.
• Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
• No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
• Write error: Failed to write to the card.
• Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing “OK” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
744
SMC List Card Save Function

Overview
SMC List Card Save
• The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the
SD-card inserted into service slot 2 or the operation panel card slot.
Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.

2. Insert the SD card into slot 2 or the operation panel SD-card slot. Then turn the power ON.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select “Copy SP”.
5. Select SP-5992 "SP Text Mode”.

6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP-5992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
745
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
7. Press [EXECUTE].
8. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
746
9. “It is executing it” is shown on the screen while executing.
10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.
• The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

• Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode.
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists
The SMC list data saved on the SD-card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
follows.
Example:
A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP number. In this
case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the upper SP table for the
correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
747
File creation date

Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
• A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this function is
executed.
Error Messages
SMC List Card Save error message:

• Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
748
6. Troubleshooting
Service Call
Service Call Conditions
The "SC Table" section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not
controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table
shows the classification of the SC codes.
Key Definition Reset Procedure
Controller The error has occurred in the See "Troubleshooting Procedure" in

CTL
errors controller. the table.
RTB 31 The error involves the fusing unit. Turn the main switch off and on. Reset
Correction A The machine operation is disabled. the SC (set SP5-810-1). Turn the main
The user cannot reset the error. switch off and on.
The error involves one or some

specific units. The machine operates
B Turn the operation switch off and on.
as usual, excluding the related
units.
Other errors The error is logged. The SC-code

The SC will not show. Only the SC
C history is updated. The machine
history is updated.
operates as usual.
The machine operation is disabled.

You can reset the machine by
turning the operation switch or main Turn the operation switch or main
D
switch off and on. If the error occurs power switch off and on.
again, the same SC code is
displayed.
After you turn the main power switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the main power
switch on (SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004) in SP mode can check the
latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when the SC code is detected.
• If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect the connectors
before you replace the PCBs.
749
6. Troubleshooting
• If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or
sensors.
SC Code Classification
The table shows the classification of the SC codes:
Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section
100 - Scanner
1XX Scanning
190 - Unique for a specific model
200 - Polygon motor
220 - Synchronization control
230 - FGATE signal related

2XX Laser exposure
240 - LD control
290 - Shutter
300 - Charge
330 - Drum potential

3XX Image development 1
350 - Development
400 - Image transfer
420 - Paper separation
430 - Cleaning
4XX Image development 2
440 - Around drum
460 - Unit
480 - Others
750
Service Call
Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section
500 - Paper feed
5XX Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex
520 - Paper transport
530 - Fan motor
540 - Fusing
5XX Paper feed / Fusing
560 - Others
600 - Electrical counters
620 - Mechanical counters
630 - Account control
6XX Communication 640 - CSS
650 - Network
670 - Internal data processing
700 - Original handling
7XX Peripherals 720 - Two-tray finisher
740 - Booklet finisher
800 - Error after ready condition
820 - Diagnostics error

8XX Controller
860 - Hard disk
900 - Counter
9XX Others 920 - Memory
990 - Others
751
6. Troubleshooting
Service Call Tables - 1
SC1xx: Scanning
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Exposure lamp error
The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the
shading plate.
• Exposure lamp defective

• LED relay board defective
• Exposure lamp connector defective
101 D • Standard white plate dirty
• Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty
1. Check and clean the scanner mirror(s) and scanner lens.

2. Check and clean the shading plate.
3. Replace the exposure lamp.
4. Replace the LED relay board.
5. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or scanner lens.
752
Service Call
Scanner home position error 1
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "OFF" condition during
operation.
• Scanner motor driver defective

• Scanner motor defective
• Harness between SIO board and scanner motor disconnected
120 D
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between SIO and HP sensor disconnected
1. Check the cable connection between the SIO board and scanner motor.
2. Check the cable connection between the SIO and HP sensor.
3. Replace the scanner motor.
4. Replace the HP sensor.
Scanner home position error 2
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "ON" condition during
operation.
• Scanner motor driver defective

• Scanner motor defective
• Harness between SIO board and scanner motor disconnected
121 D
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between SIO and HP sensor disconnected
1. Check the cable connection between the SIO board and scanner motor.
2. Check the cable connection between the SIO and HP sensor.
4. Replace the HP sensor.
753
6. Troubleshooting
Black level detection error
The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp.
• Harness disconnected
141 D
• Defective SBU
1. Check the cable connection

2. Replace the SBU.
White level detection error
The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control.
• Dirty exposure glass or optics section

• SBU board defective
• Exposure lamp defective
• LED relay board defective
142 D • Scanner motor defective
1. Clean the exposure glass, white plate, mirrors, and lens.

2. Check if the exposure lamp is lit during initialization.
3. Check the harness connection between SBU and IPU.
4. Replace the exposure lamp.
6. Replace the SBU board.
754
Service Call
SBU communication error
The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from the energy
save mode.
• Defective SBU
144 D • Defective harness
• Defective detection port on the BCU
1. Replace the harness.

2. Replace the SBU.
3. Replace the BCU.
161 IPU error
The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the IPU is detected.
• Defective IPU
-01 D • Defective connection between IPU and SBU
1. Check the connection between IPU and SBU.

2. Replace the IPU.
The machine detects an error during an access to the Ri.
-02 D • Defective IPU board
Replace the IPU board.
755
6. Troubleshooting
Copy Data Security Unit error
• The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data security
function is set "ON" with the initial setting.
• A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set
"ON" with the initial setting.
165 D
• Incorrect installation of the copy data security board
• Defective copy data security board
1. Reinstall the copy data security board.

2. Replace the copy data security board.
Serial Number Mismatch
• Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code.
• NVRAM defective
195 D
• BCU replaced without original NVRAM
1. Check the serial number with SP5-811-002.

2. If the stored serial number is incorrect, contact your supervisor.
756
Service Call
SC 2xx: Exposure
Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout
The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within the
specified time after turning on or changing speed
• Defective or disconnected harness to polygon motor driver board

• Defective polygon motor driver board
202 D
• Defective polygon motor.
1. Replace the polygon motor.

2. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
4. Replace the IPU.
Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout
The polygon mirror motor does leave the READY status within 3 seconds after the
polygon motor switches off.
• Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board

203 D • Defective polygon motor driver board
• Defective polygon motor
1. Check or replace the harness.

3. Replace the IPU.
757
6. Troubleshooting
Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error
The SCRDY_N signal goes HIGH (inactive) while the laser diode is firing.
• Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board

• Defective polygon motor
204 D
• Defective polygon motor driver board

3. Replace the IPU.
210
C Laser synchronizing detection error: end position [K]
-01
-02 C Laser synchronizing detection error: end position [C]
-03 C Laser synchronizing detection error: end position [M]
-04 C Laser synchronizing detection error: end position [Y]
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the end position of LDB [K], [C], [M],
[Y] is not detected for one second after the LDB unit turned on when detecting the
main scan magnification.
• Disconnected or defective harness to synchronizing detector for end position

• Defective synchronizing detector board
• Defective LD board or driver
• Defective IPU
1. Check the connectors.

2. Replace the harness of the LD board.
4. Replace the IPU.
758
Service Call
220
D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [K]: LD1
-01
-02 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [C]: LD1
-03 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [M]: LD1
-04 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD1
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB [K], [C],
[M], [Y] is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon
motor is rotating normally.
• Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective

connection
• Defective laser synchronizing detector
• Defective LDB
• Defective IPU
1. Check the connectors.

2. Replace the laser-synchronizing detector.
3. Replace the LDB.
4. Replace the IPU.
230
D FGATE ON error: K
-01
-02 D FGATE ON error: C
-03 D FGATE ON error: M
-04 D FGATE ON error: Y
759
6. Troubleshooting
The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the
image in normal job or MUSIC for start position [K], [C], [M], [Y].
• Defective ASIC (Lupus)

• Poor connection between controller and IPU
• Defective IPU
1. Check the connection between the controller board and the IPU.
2. Replace the IPU.
3. Replace the controller board.
231
D FGATE OFF error: K
-01
-02 D FGATE OFF error: C
-03 D FGATE OFF error: M
-04 D FGATE OFF error: Y
• The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the
image in normal job or MUSIC for end position [K], [C], [M], [Y].
• The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts.
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.
240
C LD error: K
-01
-02 C LD error: C
-03 C LD error: M
-04 C LD error: Y
760
Service Call
The IPU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after
LDB initialization.
• Worn-out LD
• Disconnected or broken harness of the LD
1. Replace the harness of the LD.

3. Replace the IPU.
GAVD communication error
The 12C bus device ID is not identified during initialization.

A device-status error occurs during 12C bus communication.
The 12C bus communication is not established due to an error other than a buffer
shortage.
• Loose connection
270 D • Defective GAVD
• Defective BCU
• Defective controller board
1. Turn the power switch off and on.

2. Check the cable connection.
3. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
4. Replace the BCU.
761
6. Troubleshooting
Line position adjustment (MUSIC) error
Line position adjustment fails four consecutive times.
• Pattern sampling error ( insufficient image density )

• Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment
• Defective image transfer belt unit
• Defective PCDU(s)
285 D • Defective laser optics housing unit
1. Check and reinstall the image transfer belt unit and PCDUs.
2. Check if each toner bottle has enough toner.
3. Replace the ID sensor.
4. Replace the image transfer belt unit.
5. Replace the PCDU(s).
SC3xx: Image Processing – 1
312
D Charge P.P. output error: K
-01
-02 D Charge P.P. output error: C
-03 D Charge P.P. output error: M
-04 D Charge P.P. output error: Y
762
Service Call
The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.3 V or less for 0.2
seconds after the charge AC has been turned on.
• Disconnected or broken harnesses of the HVPS

• Defective PCDU
• Defective HVPS
1. Check or replace the harnesses of the HVPS.

2. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
3. Replace the HVPS.
SC3xx: Image Processing – 2
360
D TD sensor adjustment error: K
-01
-02 D TD sensor adjustment error: C
-03 D TD sensor adjustment error: M
-04 D TD sensor adjustment error: Y
During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black, cyan, magenta, or
yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified value with SP3-238-001
to -004 (default: 2.5V) ± 0.2V
• Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack

• TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective
• TD sensor defective
• Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective
1. Remove the heat seal from each PCDU.

2. Replace the defective PCDU.
763
6. Troubleshooting
361
D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K
-01
-02 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: C
-03 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: M
-04 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Y
• The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor exceeds the
specified value (default: 4.7V) with SP3-020-002 for twenty counts.
• The [Vt - Vtref] value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor
exceeds the specified value (default: 5.0V) with SP3-020-001.
• Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor disconnected

- - • Harness between TD sensor and PCDU defective
• Defective TD sensor.
1. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector and

harness between the TD sensor and PCDU for damage.
2. Check the drawer connector.
362
D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: K
-01
-02 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: C
-03 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M
-04 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: Y
764
Service Call
The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is below the
specified value with SP3-020-004 (default: 0.5V) for 10 counts.
• TD sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective

• A drawer connector disconnected, loose, defective
• TD sensor defective
1. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector and

harness between the TD sensor and PCDU for damage.
2. Check the drawer connector.
ID sensor adjustment error
When the Vsg error counter reaches "3", the machine detects "SC370".
The Vsg error counter counts "1" when the Vsg detected by ID sensor is more than
the value (default: 4.5V) specified with SP3-324-005 or less than the value
(default: 3.5V) specified with SP3-324-006.
• Dirty or defective ID sensor

• ID sensor detection surface dirty
370 D
1. Check the harness of the ID sensor.
2. Clean or replace the ID sensor.
• After replacing the ID sensor, input the ID sensor correction coefficient

with SP3362-013 to -018. For details, refer to "ID sensor board" in the
Replacement and Adjustment section.
3. Replace the BCU.
4. Replace the ITB unit.
390
C Drum gear position sensor error: K
-01
765
6. Troubleshooting
-02 C Drum gear position sensor error: C
-03 C Drum gear position sensor error: M
-04 C Drum gear position sensor error: Y
The machine does not detect the drum position signal for 3 seconds at the drum
phase adjustment.
• Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor
1. Clean the drum gear position sensor.

2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the drum gear position sensor.
4. Replace the PCDU.
396
D Drum/Development motor error: K
-01
-02 D Drum/Development motor error: C
-03 D Drum/Development motor error: M
-04 D Drum/Development motor error: Y
The machine detects a High signal from the drum/development motor for 2
seconds after the drum/development motor turned on.
• Overload on the drum/development motor

• Defective drum/development motor
• Defective harness
• Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU
• Defective interlock system

2. Replace the drum/development motor.
3. Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU.
766
Service Call
SC4xx: Image Processing - 3
Image transfer unit motor error
The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor
START signal is on.
441 D • Motor overload

• Defective image transfer unit motor
1. Replace the image transfer belt unit.

2. Replace the IOB.
Image transfer belt contact motor error
The image transfer belt contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator
at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.
• Dirty image transfer belt contact sensor

442 D • Defective image transfer belt contact motor
• Disconnected connector of image transfer belt contact sensor or motor
• Disconnected cable
1. Replace the image transfer belt contact sensor.

2. Replace the image transfer belt contact motor.
767
6. Troubleshooting
Image transfer unit error
The machine detects the encoder sensor error.
• Defective encoder sensor

• Image transfer unit installation error
443 C
• Defective image transfer unit motor
1. Check if the image transfer unit is correctly set.

2. Replace the image transfer unit motor.
3. Replace the image transfer unit.
Paper transfer unit contact error
The paper transfer unit contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at
the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.
• Defective paper transfer unit contact sensor

• Defective paper transfer unit contact motor
• Broken +24V fuse on PSU
452 D
• Defective IOB
1. Check the connection between the paper transfer unit and PSU.
2. Replace the paper transfer unit contact sensor.
3. Replace the paper transfer unit contact motor.
4. Replace the +24V fuse on the PSU.
5. Replace the IOB.
768
Service Call
Separation power pack output error
An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 20 ms. This SC is issued if
the BCU detects a short in the power pack 10 times at D(ac).
• Damaged insulation on the high-voltage supply cable

460 D
• Damaged insulation around the high-voltage power supply.
1. Replace the high-voltage supply cable.

2. Replace the high-voltage power supply unit.
3. Replace the IOB.
Toner transport motor error
The LOCK signal is not detected for 2 seconds when the transport motor turns on.
• Toner transport motor overload

• Disconnected or broken harness
• Defective toner transport motor
490 D • Opened +24V fuse on the PSU
• Defective interlock switch

2. Replace the toner transport motor.
4. Replace the interlock switch.
769
6. Troubleshooting
High voltage power: Drum/ development bias output error
An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the drum or
development.
• High voltage leak

• Broken harness
491 D
• Defective drum unit or development unit
• Defective high voltage supply unit

2. Replace the drum unit or paper transfer unit.
3. Replace the high voltage supply unit.
High voltage power: Image transfer/ paper transfer bias output error
An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the separation, image
transfer bet or paper transfer roller.
• High voltage leak

• Broken harness
492 C
• Defective image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit
• Defective high voltage supply unit

2. Replace the image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit.
3. Replace the high voltage supply unit.
770
Service Call
Temperature and humidity sensor error 2
• The thermistor output of the temperature sensor was not within the prescribed
range (more than 0.5 V to less than 3.0 V).
• The thermistor output of the humidity sensor was not within the prescribed
range (less than 2.4V).
498 C
• Temperature and humidity sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Temperature and humidity sensor defective
1. Check the connector and harness.

2. Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing
501 B Paper Tray 1 error
502 B Paper Tray 2 error
771
6. Troubleshooting
• When the tray lift motor rotates counterclockwise, (if the upper limit is not
detected within 10 seconds), the machine asks the user to reset the tray.
• When the tray lift motor rotates clockwise, (if the upper limit is not detected
within 1.5 seconds), the machine asks the user to reset the tray.
If one of these conditions occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
• Disconnected or defective paper lift sensor

• Disconnected or defective tray lift motor
• Defective bottom plate lift mechanism
• Too much paper in the tray
• Defective IOB
1. Check if the paper is not loaded too much.

2. Check if the bottom plate smoothly moves up and down manually.
3. Check and / or replace the tray lift motor / paper lift sensor.
4. Replace the IOB.
772
Service Call
Tray 3 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT)
This SC is generated if the following condition occurs.

For the paper feed unit:
When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 15
seconds
For the LCT:
The upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray lift motor is
turned on to lift or lower the tray.
This SC is generated too if the following condition occurs 3 consecutive times.
When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
For the LCT:
When the main switch is turned on or when the LCT is set, if the end fence is not in
the home position (home position sensor ON), the tray lift motor stops.
503 B
If the upper limit does not go off for 1.5 seconds even the tray lift motor turns on to
lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at power on.

• Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection
• Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection
For the LCT:
• Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
• Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
• Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection
• Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection
1. Check the cable connections.

2. Check and/or replace the defective component.
773
6. Troubleshooting
Tray 4 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT)

For the two-tray paper feed unit
seconds.
For the LCT
If the upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray lift motor
is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
This SC is generated too if the following condition occurs 3 consecutive times.
For the LCT
504 B If the upper limit does not go off for 1.5 seconds even the tray lift motor turns on to
For the two-tray paper feed unit:

For the LCT:
• Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
• Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
• Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection
• Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection
1. Check the cable connections.

2. Check and/or replace the defective component.
774
Service Call
Tray 5 error (Optional Paper Feed Unit or LCT)

seconds.
For the LCT 1200-sheet
If the upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray lift motor
is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
505 B This SC is generated too if the following condition occurs 3 consecutive times.
For the LCT 1200-sheet
If the upper limit does not go off for 1.5 seconds even the tray lift motor turns on to

1. Turn the power switch off and on.
775
6. Troubleshooting
520
Registration motor error
-01
-02 Paper feed motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal.
• Motor overload
C • Defective registration motor

• Disconnected or broken harness
• Defective IOB

3. Replace the registration motor.
4. Replace the IOB.
Fusing fan error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal 100 ms after turning on the fusing fan.
530 D • Defective fusing fan motor or connector disconnection

• Defective IOB
1. Check the connector and/or replace the fusing fan motor.
776
Service Call
QSU fan error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the QSU
fan turns on.
• Disconnected harness
• Overload on the QSU fan motor
531 D
• Defective QSU fan motor
• Defective IOB

2. Replace the QSU fan.
3. Replace the IOB.
532
D Ventilation fan (at the left side of the machine) motor error: front end
-01
-02 D Ventilation fan (at the left side of the machine) motor error: rear end
The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 100 ms after turning on the
ventilation fan motor in the front end or rear end.
• Defective ventilation fan motor in the front end or rear end

• Defective IOB
1. Replace the ventilation fan (at the left side of the machine) motor in the front
end or rear end.
2. Replace the IOB.
777
6. Troubleshooting
Second duct fan error 1
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the
second duct fan turns on.
533 • Overload on the second duct fan motor
D
-01 • Defective second duct motor
• Defective IOB

2. Replace the second duct fan.
3. Replace the IOB.
Third duct fan error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the third
duct fan turns on.
534 • Overload on the third duct fan motor
D
-01 • Defective third duct motor
• Defective IOB

2. Replace the third duct fan.
3. Replace the IOB.
778
Service Call
Paper exit fan error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the paper
exit fan turns on.
• Overload on the paper exit fan motor
535 D
• Defective paper exit motor
• Defective IOB

2. Replace the paper exit fan.
3. Replace the IOB.
AC controller board fan error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the AC
controller board fan turns on.
• Overload on the AC controller board fan motor
538 D
• Defective AC controller board fan motor
• Defective IOB

2. Replace the AC controller board fan.
3. Replace the IOB.
779
6. Troubleshooting
Fusing/Paper exit motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal 100 ms after turning on the fusing/
paper exit motor.
• Motor overload
540 D • Defective fusing/paper exit motor
• Shorted +24V fuse on the PSU

2. Replace the fusing/paper exit motor.
Heating roller thermopile error
The temperature detected by the heating roller thermopile does not reach 0°C for
6 seconds.
• Loose connection of the heating roller thermopile

541 A
• Defective heating roller thermopile
• Defective thermopile
1. Check if the heating roller thermopile is firmly connected.

2. Replace the heating roller thermopile.
Heating roller warm-up error 1
• The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C for 20 seconds after the
inverter turned on.
• The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the ready
542 A temperature for 90 seconds after the fusing lamp turned on.
• Dirty or defective thermopile
1. Check if the heating roller thermopile is firmly connected.

2. Replace the thermopile.
780
Service Call
Heating roller overheat: Center (software error)
The detected fusing temperature stays at 215°C for 1 second for 10 consecutive
times.
• Defective AC controller board

543 A • Defective IOB
• Defective IPU
1. Replace the AC controller board.

2. Replace the IOB.
3. Replace the IPU.
Heating roller overheat: Center (hardware error)

SC544
RTB 31: Corrections
During stand-by mode or a print job, the detected heating roller temperature
RTB 39
reaches 220°C.

• Defective IOB
• Defective IPU
• Defective fusing control system
Related SC code: SC 543
544 A 1. Replace the AC controller board.

2. Replace the IOB.
3. Replace the IPU.
4. Replace the fusing unit and reset the counter of the fusing unit using
SP3-902-014.
• The fusing unit cannot be used because an abnormal high temperature was
detected.
• After this SC occurs, the counter reset of the fusing unit should be done
manually using SP3-902-014 because the counter reset is not done
automatically.
781
6. Troubleshooting
Fusing Heater error: Center
The fusing heater keeps full power for 23 seconds or more.
• Defective thermistors
545 A
• Disconnected cables
1. Replace the thermistors.

2. Check and replace the cables.
Zero cross error
• The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is
off when turning on the main power.
• The zero cross signal is not detected for 3 seconds even though the heater
relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
• The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal
detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is 39 or
less.
547 D
• Defective fusing relay
• Defective fusing relay circuit
• Shorted +24V fuse on the PSU
• Unstable power supply
1. Check the power supply source.

782
Service Call
Fusing heater connection error
The heating roller rotation sensor detects the target temperature as 50°C for 5
seconds or more after the fusing/paper exit motor has turned on.
549 A • Broken heater cables

• Defective connectors

2. Replace the heater cables.
Heating roller thermistor error
The temperature at the end of the heating roller measured by the heating roller
thermistor does not reach 0°C for 7 seconds.
• Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor

551 A
• Defective heating roller thermistor
1. Check that the heating roller thermistor is firmly connected.

2. Replace the heating roller thermistor.
Heating roller warm-up error 2
• The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C for 20 seconds after the
inverter turned on.
• The temperature at the end of the heating roller does not reach the ready
temperature for 89 seconds after the fusing lamp turned on.
552 A • Defective heating roller thermistor
• Defective inverter
1. Check if the heating roller thermistor is firmly connected.

2. Replace the inverter.
783
6. Troubleshooting
Heating roller overheat: End (software error)
The detected heating roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1 second for
10 consecutive times.

• Defective IOB
553 A
• Defective IPU

2. Replace the IOB.
3. Replace the IPU.
Heating roller overheat : End (hardware error)

SC554
RTB 31: Corrections
The heating roller thermistor detects 220°C or more.
RTB 39

• Defective IOB
554 A • Defective IPU

2. Replace the IOB.
3. Replace the IPU.
784
Service Call
Fusing Heater error: End
The fusing heater keeps full power for 19 seconds or more.
• Defective thermistors
555 A
• Disconnected cables
1. Replace the thermistors.

2. Check and replace the cables.
Zero cross frequency error
When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more in
11 detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557 occurs.
557 C • Noise (High frequency)

• Defective AC control board
1. Check the power supply source.

2. Replace the AC control board.
Consecutive fusing jam
The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times. The paper jam counter
is cleared if the paper is fed correctly.
559 A This SC is activated only when SP1-159-001 is set to "1" (default "0").
• Paper jam in the fusing unit.
Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit. Then make sure that the fusing
unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper feed path.
785
6. Troubleshooting
Pressure roller thermistor error: End
The temperature at the end of the pressure roller measured by the thermistor does
not reach 0°C for 37 seconds.
561 A • Loose connection of the thermistor

• Defective thermistor
1. Check if the thermistor is firmly connected.

2. Replace the thermistor at the end of the pressure roller.
Pressure roller thermistor warm-up error: End
The heating roller rotation sensor does not reach 20°C for 100 seconds after the
fusing/paper exit motor has turned on with sheets of 257 mm or more in width.
562 A • Dirty thermopile lenses

1. Clean the thermopile lenses.

Pressure roller overheat: End (software error)
The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1 second for

• Defective IPU

2. Replace the IOB.
3. Replace the IPU.
786
Service Call

SC564
Pressure roller overheat: End (hardware error)
RTB 31: Corrections
RTB 39
The thermistor detects 220°C or more.

• Defective IOB
• Defective IPU
564 A 2. Replace the IOB.

3. Replace the IPU.
4. Replace the fusing unit and reset the counter of the fusing unit using
SP3-902-014.
• The fusing unit cannot be used because an abnormal high temperature was
detected.
• After this SC occurs, the counter reset of the fusing unit should be done
manually using SP3-902-014 because the counter reset is not done
automatically.
Pressure roller contact sensor error
Pressure roller contact sensor does not detect the pressure roller position three
times.
• Broken or defective pressure roller contact sensor

569 • Deformed or broken pressure roller contact sensor feeler
D
-00 • Defective pressure roller contact motor
• Defective fusing unit
1. Check or replace the harness of the pressure roller contact sensor.

2. Replace the pressure roller contact sensor.
3. Replace the pressure roller contact motor.
787
6. Troubleshooting
Fusing shutter sensor error
Fusing shutter plate home position sensor error is detected three consecutive times.
569 • Defective fusing shutter plate home position sensor

D • Defective connectors
-01
1. Check or replace the harness of the fusing shutter plate home position
sensor.
2. Replace the fusing shutter plate home position sensor.
Pressure roller thermistor error: Center
The center temperature of the pressure roller measured by the thermistor does not
reach 0°C for 37 seconds.
571
A • Loose connection of the thermistor
-00
1. Check if the thermistor is firmly connected.

2. Replace the center thermistor.
Pressure roller thermistor warm-up error: Center
The center temperature of the pressure roller measured by the thermistor does not
reach 20°C within 100 seconds after the heater turns on.
572
A • Dirty thermopile lenses
-02
1. Clean the thermopile lenses.

788
Service Call

SC573
RTB 51
Pressure roller overheat : Center (software error)
The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1 second for

• Defective IPU
1. Replace the IOB.

2. Replace the IPU.

SC574 Pressure roller overheat : Center (hardware error)
RTB 31: Corrections
RTB 39 The thermistor detects 220°C or more.
• Defective IOB
574 A • Defective IPU
1. Replace the IOB.

2. Replace the IPU.
NC sensor broken: Center
The sensor detects -17°C or less for 100 seconds.
581 A • Broken cables of thermopile or thermistor

• Defective connection of connectors
1. Check and replace the connection of the cables and connectors.
789
6. Troubleshooting
NC sensor broken: End
The sensor detects -17°C or less for 100 seconds.
591 A • Broken cables of thermopile or thermistor

• Defective connection of connectors
1. Check and replace the connection of the cables and connectors.
SC6xx: Device Communication
Mechanical counter error: K
This SC is only for NA models.

The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5-987-001 is set to "1
610 D (ON)".
• Disconnected mechanical counter

• Defective mechanical counter
1. Check or replace the mechanical counter.
790
Service Call
ARDF communication error
After the ARDF is detected, the break signal occurs or communication timeout
occurs.
• Incorrect installation of ARDF

• ARDF defective
620 D • IPU board defective
• External noise
1. Check the cable connection of the ARDF.

2. Shut out the external noise.
3. Replace the ARDF.
4. Replace the IPU board.
621 D Finisher communication error
622 D Paper tray unit communication error
While the IOB communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is displayed if

one of following conditions occurs.
• The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the peripherals
only just after the main switch is turned on.
• When the IOB does not receive an OK signal from a peripheral 100ms after
sending a command to it. The IOB resends the command. The IOB does not
receive an OK signal after sending the command 3 times.
• Cable problems
• IOB problems
• BCU problems
• PSU problems in the machine
• Main board problems in the peripherals
1. Check if the cables of peripherals are correctly connected.

2. Replace the IOB or main board of peripherals.
3. Replace the BCU if no power is supplied to peripherals.
791
6. Troubleshooting
2nd Paper Bank communication error
This SC is not issued for this machine.

When a communication error signal between the 1st paper bank and 2nd paper
623 D bank is received.
• Loose or disconnected connector
Check the connection between the main machine and paper feed unit.
Counter device error 1
After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial
communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 ms.
• Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier
632 B control board is disconnected or damaged.
• Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter device.
1. Check if the setting of the SP5113 is correctly set.

2. Check the connection between the main machine and optional counter
device.
After communication is established, the controller receives the brake signal from
the accounting device.
• Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier
633 B control board is disconnected or damaged.
• Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter device.
1. Check if the setting of the SP5113 is correctly set.

2. Check the connection between the main machine and optional counter
device.
792
Service Call
A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.
634 B • Counter device control board defective

• Backup battery of counter device defective
Replace the counter device.
A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.
635 B • Counter device control board defective

• Backup battery of counter device defective
Replace the counter device.
636 D SD Card Error
793
6. Troubleshooting
Expanded authentication module error
There is no expanded authentication module in the machine.

The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken.
There is no DESS module in the machine.
• No expanded authentication module

• Defective SD card
• Defective file of the expanded authentication module
• No DESS module
01 - 1. Install the expanded authentication module.
2. Install the SD card.
3. Install the DESS module.
4. Set the super service SP as follows and turn the main switch off and on.
• User limitation: Set SP5-401-160 (expanded authentication
management setting) to 0.
• User limitation: Set SP5-401-161 (expanded authentication
management detailed setting) to 0.
5. Execute SP5-876-1 (security all clear). If this is a mass-produced machine,
replace the NVRAM on the controller board.
Version error
The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct.

02 -
• Incorrect module version
Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.
OSM user code file error
The correct "usercode" file could not be found in the root folder of the SD card
because the file is not present, or the existing file is corrupted or the wrong type
file.
11 -
Create the usercode files with the User Setting Tool "IDissuer.exe" and store the
files in the root folder of the SD card.
• Make sure the eccm.mod file is in the root folder of the SD card.
794
Service Call
637 D Tracking information notice error
Ttracking application error
Tracking information is lost.
-001 The machine failed to give notice of the tracking information to the tracking SDK
application.
Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
Management server error
Tracking information is lost.
-002 The machine failed to give notice of the tracking information to the management
server.
Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
Communication error: Engine Controller (Check sum error)
Sum value is added each command frame.

Sum check means:
STX xx xx xx xx sum ETX The least significant 7 bits of xx + xx + xx+ xx is
compared with the sum
640 -
Example: STX 80h 81h 82h 83h 06h ETX 80h + 81h + 82h + 83h = 206h If
sum value is 06h, data is correct.
This SC is not displayed when it occurs; count is executed only by logging.
Hard error with PCI
795
6. Troubleshooting
Communication error: Engine Controller (No response)
No response from engine to frame after frame sending from controller with RAPI
protocol. (No response after 3 attempts of sending every 100 ms)
641 D
Asserts the error detected by the serial driver from PSC module to SRM with RAPI
command.
Engine serial communication error
An error occurs in serial communication with engine.
• SC641-001: Timeout error

641 D • SC641-002: Retry over
• SC641-003: Download error
• SC641-004: UART error
Turn the main switch off and on.
650 B Communication error of the remote service modem (Cumin-M)
Authentication error
The authentication for the Cumin-M fails at a dial up connection.
• Incorrect SP settings
-01 • Disconnected telephone line

• Disconnected modem board
• Disconnected wireless LAN card
1. Check and set the correct user name (SP5-816-156) and password
(SP5-816-157).
796
Service Call
Incorrect modem setting
Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting.

-04
Same as -01
1. Check and set the correct AT command (SP5-816-160).
Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to the defective communication line or
-05 defective connection.
Same as -01
1. Consult with the user's local telephone company.
No modem board
Modem board is not installed even though the setting at Cumin-M (During the
operation)
Same as -01
-13
1. Install the modem board if it is not installed.
2. Check correct setting value for modem driver (SP5-816-160, SP5-816-165
to 171, SP5-816-188 and 189).
3. Replace the modem board.
The modem board is installed
The modem board is installed even though the setting at Cumin-N. Or wired/
wireless LAN is not working normally.
-14
Same as -01
1. Uninstall the modem board if it is installed.

2. Check that the wired/wireless LAN is working properly.
651 C Incorrect dial up connection
-01 Chat program parameter error
797
6. Troubleshooting
-02 Chat program execution error
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Cumin-M) tries to call the center
with a dial up connection.
• Caused by a software bug
No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the
machine.
Remote service ID2 mismatching
ID2 for @Remote certification is mismatching between the controller board and
NVRAM.
• Used controller board installed

652 D • Used NVRAM installed
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M) tries to call
the center with a dial up connection.
1. Install the correct controller board or anew controller board.

2. Install the correct NVRAM or new NVRAM.
Incorrect remote service ID2
ID2 stored in the NVRAM is incorrect.
653 D • Used NVRAM installed

An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M) tries to call
the center with a dial up connection
1. Clear the ID2 in the NVRAM, and then input a correct ID2.
798
Service Call
Engine start up error
The BCU fails to respond within the prescribed time when the machine is turned
on.
670 D Connections between BCU and controller board are loose, disconnected, or
damaged.
1. Replace the BCU

2. Replace the controller board
Controller start up error
• After the machine is powered on, the communication between the controller
and the operation panel is not established, or communication with controller
is interrupted after a normal startup.
• After startup reset of the operation panel, the attention code (FDH) or the
attention acknowledge code (FEH) is not sent from the controller within 30
seconds.
• After the controller issues a command to check the communication line with
672 D the controller at 30-second intervals, the controller fails to respond twice.
• Controller stalled
• Controller board installed incorrectly
• Controller board defective
• Operation panel connector loose or defective
• The controller is not completely shut down when the main switch is turned off.
1. Check the setting of SP5-875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it
to "0 (ON)"
799
6. Troubleshooting
Toner bottle ID: Communication error
• Communication error occurs when the toner bottle ID starts to communicate

with the toner bottle ID receptor.
• Retry of toner bottle ID communication fails three times after the machine has
detected the toner bottle ID communication error.
681 D • Defective toner bottle ID reader and writer

• Disconnected ASAP I/F
• No memory chip on the toner cartridge
• Noise
1. Replace the toner bottle detection board.

2. Replace the toner cartridge.
Memory chip at TD sensor: Communication error
Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the machine has
detected the memory chip communication error.
• Damaged memory chip data

682 D • Disconnected inter face
• No memory chip on the development unit
• Noise
1. Replace the PCDU.

2. Replace the BCU.
800
Service Call
Memory address command error
The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the controller 120
seconds after paper is in the position for registration.
687 D • Defective controller
• Defective BCU
1. Check if the controller is firmly connected to the BCU.

2. Replace the controller.
3. Replace the BCU.
SC7xx: Peripherals
Finisher exit guide plate motor error
After moving away from the guide plate position sensor, the exit guide is not
detected at the home position within the prescribed time. The 1st detection failure
issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
• Guide plate motor disconnected, defective

720
B • Guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
-24
• Guide plate position sensor disconnected, defective
1. Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned above.
2. Check for blockages in the guide plate motor mechanism.
3. Replace the guide plate position sensor and/or guide plate motor
4. Replace the finisher main board.
801
6. Troubleshooting
Finisher punch motor error
The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the punch
motor turned on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure
issues this SC code.
• Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective

720
B • Punch motor disconnected or defective
-25
• Punch motor overload due to obstruction
1. Check the connections and cables for the punch motor and HP sensor.
2. Check for blockages in the punch motor mechanism.
3. Replace the punch HP sensor and/or punch motor
Finisher jogger motor error
The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor output does
not change within the specified number of pulses.
The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.
• Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective

720
B • Jogger motor disconnected, defective
-30
• Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Finisher main board and jogger motor
2. Check for blockages in the jogger motor mechanism.
3. Replace the jogger HP sensor and/or jogger motor.
802
Service Call
Stack feed-out motor error
• The stack feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stack
feed-out belt 3000ms after the stack feed-out belt has moved to its home
position.
• The stack feed-out HP sensor does not turn off 200 ms after the stack feed-
out belt has moved from its home position.
• The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
SC code.
720 • Defective stack feed-out HP sensor
B
-41 • Overload on the stack feed-out motor
• Defective stack feed-out motor
• Defective main board
• Disconnected or defective harness
2. Check for blockages in the stack feed-out motor mechanism.
3. Replace the stack feed-out HP sensor and/or stack feed-out motor.
803
6. Troubleshooting
Finisher stapler movement motor error
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.
For the 2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher
• Staple movement is not finished for a certain time.
For the 1000-sheet finisher
• The stapler HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the
stapler motor turned on. (First detection: jam error, consecutive twice
detection SC code).
720
B
-42 • Motor overload
• Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor
• Loose connection of the stapler movement motor
• Defective stapler home position sensor
• Defective stapler movement motor
1. Check the connection of the stapler movement motor.

2. Check the connection of the stapler home position sensor.
3. Replace the stapler home position sensor.
4. Replace the stapler movement motor.
804
Service Call
Finisher corner stapler motor error
code.
For the 2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher
• Staple movement is not finished after a certain time.
For the 1000-sheet finisher
• The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after
operating.
720 • The HP sensor of the staple unit does not detect the home position after the
B staple unit moves to its home position.
-44
• The HP sensor of the staple unit detects the home position after the staple unit
moves from its home position.
• Staple jam
• Motor overload
• Defective stapler motor
2. Replace the HP sensor and/or stapler motor
Finisher folder plate motor error
The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position within the
specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure
• Folder plate HP sensor disconnected, defective

720
B • Folder plate motor disconnected, defective
-52
• Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction.
1. Check the connections and cables for the folder plate motor and HP sensor.
2. Check for blockages in the folder plate motor mechanism.
3. Replace the folder plate HP sensor and/or folder plate motor
805
6. Troubleshooting
Fold unit bottom fence motor error
The bottom fence of the fold unit moves but is not detected at the home position
within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd
failure issues this SC code.
720
B
-53 • Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Defective motor
1. Check the connections to the fold unit bottom fence motor.

2. Replace the fold unit bottom fence motor.
Clamp roller retraction motor error 1
The clamp roller retraction motor moves but is not detected at the home position
within the specified time.
720 code.
B
-58
• Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Defective motor
1. Check the connections to the clamp roller retraction motor.

2. Replace the clamp roller retraction motor.
Clamp roller retraction motor error 2
The drive roller swing motor moves but is not detected at the home position within
the specified time.
720 code.
B
-59
• Defective motor
1. Check the connections to the drive roller swing motor.

2. Replace the drive roller swing motor.
806
Service Call
1000/2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher: Tray lift motor error
code.
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the specified
time after the tray raises or lowers.
720
B
-70 • Motor overload
• Loose connection of the shift tray motor
• Defective shift tray motor
1. Check the connections to the shift tray motor.

2. Replace the shift tray motor.
Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error
The shift roller HP sensor of the upper tray does not activate within the prescribed
time after the shift tray starts to move toward or away from the home position. The
1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
• Shift tray HP sensor of the upper tray disconnected, defective

720
B • Shift tray motor of the upper tray is disconnected, defective
-71
• Shift tray motor of the upper tray overloaded due to obstruction
2. Check for blockages in shift motor mechanism.
3. Replace the shift tray HP sensor and/or shift motor
807
6. Troubleshooting
Punch movement motor error
The punch unit moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified
time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.
720
B
• Defective motor
1. Check the connections to the punch movement motor.

2. Replace the punch movement motor
Paper position sensor slide motor error
The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position within
the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure
720
B
• Defective motor
1. Check the connections to the paper position sensor slide motor.

2. Replace the paper position sensor slide motor.
808
Service Call
722
Paper feed motor error: proof tray
-10
-14 Paper feed motor error: lower tray
-17 Paper feed motor error: inner tray
Motor driver error signal is output.

B
• Defective motor
• Overload on the motor
1. Check the connections to the paper feed motor.

2. Replace the paper feed motor.
RTB 26a
SC722 No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Finisher front jogger motor error (D585)
The jogger fences of the 500-sheet finisher (D585) move out of the home position
but the HP sensor output does not change within the specified number of pulses.
code.

724 • Front jogger motor disconnected, defective
B
-31 • Front jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Finisher main board and front jogger motor defective

2. Check for blockages in the front jogger motor mechanism.
3. Replace the jogger HP sensor.
4. Replace the front jogger motor.
809
6. Troubleshooting
Finisher rear jogger motor error (D585)
The jogger fences of the 500-sheet finisher (D585) move out of the home position
but the HP sensor output does not change within the specified number of pulses.
code.

724 • Rear Jogger motor disconnected, defective
B
-32 • Rear Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Finisher main board and rear jogger motor defective

2. Check for blockages in the rear jogger motor mechanism.
3. Replace the jogger HP sensor.
4. Replace the rear jogger motor.
Positioning roller arm motor error
The positioning roller HP sensor does not turn on or off for a certain time at
power-on.
The positioning roller HP sensor does not turn on or off for a certain time when the
positioning roller returns to its home position from the lower position.
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC
code.
724
B • Disconnected or defective harness
-33
• Overload on the positioning roller arm motor
• Defective positioning roller arm motor
• Defective positioning roller HP sensor

2. Check for blockages in the positioning roller arm mechanism.
3. Replace the positioning roller arm motor.
4. Replace the positioning roller HP sensor.
810
Service Call
Stack pressure solenoid error
The stack pressure solenoid in the finisher is not operating.
• Solenoid harness loose, broken

• Solenoid obstructed
724 • Stack height sensor dirty, harness loose, broke
B
-38 • Solenoid defective
• Stack height sensor defective
1. Check or replace the solenoid harness.

2. Check for blockages in the stack pressure mechanism.
3. Replace the stack height sensor.
Stack feed-out motor error
The stack feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stack feed-
out belt for a certain time after the stack feed-out belt has moved to its home
position.
The stack feed-out HP sensor does not turn off for a certain time after the stack
feed-out belt has moved from its home position.
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC
code.
• Defective stack feed-out HP sensor

724
B • Overload on the stack feed-out motor
-41
• Defective stack feed-out motor
• Defective main board
• Disconnected or defective harness

2. Check for blockages in the stack feed-out mechanism.
3. Replace the stack feed-out HP sensor.
4. Replace the stack feed-out motor.
5. Replace the main board.
811
6. Troubleshooting
Finisher corner stapler motor error
code.
• The stapler HP sensor does not detect "ON"/"OFF" signal even the stapler
moves from the "OFF"/"ON" position for 0.6 seconds.
• The stapler HP sensor does not detect "ON" when a stapling job is
724 commanded or the stapler moves.
B
-44
• Staple jam
• Motor overload
• Defective stapler motor
2. Replace the HP sensor and/or stapler motor
Finisher stapler movement motor error
• The stapler HP sensor does not detect "OFF" signal even the stapler moves
from the "ON" position for 0.35 seconds.
• The stapler HP sensor does not detect "ON" signal even the stapler moves
from the "OFF" position for 5.5 seconds.
• Motor overload
724 • Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor
B
-42 • Loose connection of the stapler movement motor
• Defective stapler home position sensor
• Defective stapler movement motor
1. Check the connection of the stapler movement motor.

2. Check the connection of the stapler home position sensor.
3. Replace the stapler home position sensor.
4. Replace the stapler movement motor.
812
Service Call
500-sheet finisher: Tray lift motor error
• Motor overload
724 • Loose connection of the shift tray motor
B
-70 • Defective shift tray motor
1. Check the connections to the tray lift motor.

2. Replace the tray lift motor.
Upper limit switch error (D585)
The upper limit switch of the 500-sheet finisher (D585) is pushed due to tray lift
error or some problems.
724 • Upper limit switch pulled up

B
-85 • Defective upper limit swtich
1. Check the harness.

2. Check for blockage around the upper limit switch.
3. Replace the upper limit switch.
Shift motor error
The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1.86 seconds after the
shift motor has turned on at power on or during its operation.
770 B • Defective shift motor

• Defective shift motor HP sensor
1. Check the connections to the shift motor and the shift motor HP sensor.
2. Replace the shift motor or the shift motor HP sensor.
813
6. Troubleshooting
Bridge unit error
The machine recognizes the finisher, but does not recognize the bridge unit.
• Defective connector
791 D
• Broken harness
1. Check the connections between the bridge unit and the machine.
2. Install a new bridge unit.
Finisher error
The machine does not recognize the finisher, but recognizes the bridge unit.
• Defective connector
792 B • Defective harness
• Incorrect installation
1. Check the connections between the finisher and the machine.

2. Install a new finisher.
SC8xx: Overall System
Energy saving I/O sub-system error
The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error.

816 D
Replace the controller board.
814
Service Call
Monitor error
This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot
loader attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root system
files from the OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are
false or corrupted.
817 D
• OS Flash ROM data defective
• SD card data defective
1. Change the controller firmware.

2. Use another SD card.
Fatal kernel error

819 D Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing. One
of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel.
[0x5032] “0x455252nn” HAIC-P2 error
[0x5245] “0x53554D45” Link up error
[0x5355] “0x5350454E44” L2 status time out
[0x696e] “0x69742064” gwinit process ending
[0x766d] “0x5f706167” VM is full
---- Other error cord Error in the OS
• System program defective

• Optional board defective
1. Replace the controller firmware.
821 D Self-diagnostics error: ASIC
815
6. Troubleshooting
ASIC register check error
The write-&-verify check has occurred in the ASIC.

[0B00]
Defective ASIC device
ASIC detection error
The I/O ASIC for system control is not detected.
[0B06] • Defective ASIC

• Defective North Bridge and PCII/F
822 B Self-diagnostics error: HDD
HDD timeout
Check performed only when HDD is installed:

• HDD device busy for over 31 seconds.
• After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy
for over 6 seconds.
[3003] • Defective HDD device

• Defective HDD connector
• Defective ASIC device
1. Replace or uninstall the HDD device.

2. Replace the HDD connector.
Diagnostics command error
Result of the issuance of diagnostic command is error.

[3004]
• Defective HDD device
1. Replace or remove the HDD device.
816
Service Call
HDD timeout (First machine)
HDD device busy for over 31 seconds.

Mandolin is not detected.
After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy for
over 6 seconds.
[3013] • Defective HDD device

• Defective HDD connector
• Defective ASIC device
1. Replace or remove the HDD device.

2. Replace the HDD connector
3. Replace the controller board
Diagnostics command error (First machine)
Result of the issuance of diagnostic command is error.

Mandolin is not detected.
[3014]
A w/r/c error of the HDD register
• Defective HDD device
1. Replace the HDD device.
823 B Self-diagnostics error: NIC
MAC address check sum error
The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in
ROM.
[6101]
• Defective SEEP ROM
• Defective I2C bus (connection)
817
6. Troubleshooting
PHY IC error
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.
[6104] • Defective PHY chip

• Defective ASIC MII I/F
PHY IC loop-back error
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller.
• Defective PHY chip

[6105] • Defective MAC of ASIC (SIMAC/COMIC/CELLO)
• Defective I/F with the PHY board
• Defective solder on the PHY board
824 D Self-diagnostics error: NVRAM (resident)
NVRAM verify error
NVRAM device does not exist or NVRAM device is damaged.
• No NVRAM device
[1401] • Destructive NVRAM device
• NVRAM backup battery exhausted
• NVRAM socket damaged
1. Replace the NVRAM device.
833 D Self-diagnostic error: Engine I/F ASIC
818
Service Call
ASIC (Mandolin) for engine control could not be detected. After the PCI
configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
[0F30] • Defective ASIC (Mandolin) for system control

• Defective North Bridge and AGPI/F
1. Replace the Engine I/F board (mother board).
Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
• Defective connection bus

[50B1]
• Defective SSCG
Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.
• Defective connection bus

[50B2]
• Defective SSCG
834 D Self-diagnostic error: Optional memory
An error occurs after write/verify check for optional RAM on the engine I/F
board (mother board).
[5101]
• Defective memory device
838 D Self-diagnostic error: Clock generator
819
6. Troubleshooting
A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator via
the I2C bus
• Defective clock generator

[2701]
• Defective I2C bus
• Defective I2C port on the CPU
EEPROM access error
During the I/O processing, reading error is occurred. The 3rd reading failure
840 D During the I/O processing, writing error is occurred.
• Defective EEPROM
1. Replace the EEPROM.
EEPROM read error
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM.
841 D
• Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
Nand-Flash updating verification error
A writing error for the module written in Nand-Flash occurs when the remote
842 C ROM and ROM are updating.
• Damaged Nand-Flash
820
Service Call
Network I/F error
850 B • Inoperative
Bluetooth device connection error

(The Bluetooth interface unit was installed while the machine was turned on.)
The Bluetooth interface unit was installed while the machine was turned on.
853 B
Turn off the main power switch, and then confirm that the Bluetooth interface unit
was installed correctly.
And then, turn on the main power switch again.
Bluetooth device removed

(The Bluetooth interface unit was removed while the machine was turned on.)
The Bluetooth interface unit was removed while the machine was turned on.
854 B
Turn off the main power switch, and then confirm that the Bluetooth interface unit
was installed correctly.
And then, turn on the main power switch again.
Hardware Problem:wireless LAN board
The wireless LAN board can be accessed, but an error was detected.
855 B
• Defective wireless LAN card
1. Make sure that the Wireless LAN connection is good

2. Replace the wireless LAN card.
821
6. Troubleshooting
Data encryption conversion error

858 A
A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key.
Encryption key acquisition error:

The controller fails to get a new encryption key.
-00
• Defective controller board
Encryption key setting for HDD error:

The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD.
-01 • Defective SATA chip on the controller board

1. Turn the machine power off and on.
2. If the error reoccurs, replace the controller board.
NVRAM data encryption error 1:

An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-02
• Defective SATA chip on the controller board
1. Replace the NVRAM.
NVRAM data encryption error 2:

An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-30 • Defective controller board

1. Turn the machine power off and on.
2. If the error reoccurs, replace the controller board.
Other error:
-31 A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted.
Same as SC991
HDD data encryption error

859 B
Encryption of data on the hard disk failed.
822
Service Call
HDD check error:

The HDD is not correctly installed.
• No HDD installed
-08 • Unformatted HDD
• The encryption key on the controller is different from the one on the HDD
1. Install the HDD correctly.
2. Initialize the HDD.
Power failure during the data encryption:

The data encryption (NVRAM and HDD) has not been completed.
-09
• Power failure during the data encryption
1. Initialize the HDD.
Data read/write error:
-10 The DMAC error is detected twice or more.
Same as SC863.
HDD startup error at main power on
HDD is connected but a driver error is detected.

The driver does not respond with the HDD within 30 seconds.
860 D • HDD not initialized

• Label data is corrupted
• Defective HDD
1. Initialize the HDD with SP5-832-001.
823
6. Troubleshooting
HDD: Reboot error
The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied
to the HDD.
• Disconnection of the cables between HDD and HDC

861 D • Disconnection of the power supply connector
• Defective HDD
• Defective HDC
1. Turn the main power switch on.

2. Replace the HDD or the controller board.
Bad sector number error
The number of bad sectors in the HDD (image data area) goes over 101.
862 D • Defective HDD
1. Format the HDD with SP4-911-002 and replace with the alternate sector.
2. Replace the HDD.
HDD: Read error
The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly.
• Defective HDD
863 D
• Defective controller
1. Replace the HDD.

2. Replace the controller.
824
Service Call
HDD: CRC error
While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data transmission
fails.
864 D
• Defective HDD
1. Format the HDD.

2. Replace the HDD.
HDD: Access error
An error is detected while operating the HDD.

865 D
• Defective HDD
1. Replace the HDD.
SD card authentication error
A correct license is not found in the SD card.

866 B
• SD-card data is corrupted.
1. Store correct data in the SD card.
SD card error
The SD card is ejected from the slot.

867 D
1. Install the SD card.
825
6. Troubleshooting
SD card access error
An error occurs while an SD card is used.
• SD card not inserted correctly

• SD card defective
868 D
• If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
1. Check the SD card is inserted correctly.

2. Replace the SD card.
Address book error
Address book data stored on the hard disk was detected as abnormal when it
was accessed from either the operation panel or the network.
• Defective software program

• Defective HDD
• Incorrect path to the server
870 B • Incorrect encryption setting or encryption key

• Damaged address book data
1. Mount correctly the media that stores the address book data and turn the
main power switch off and on.
2. Initialize the address book data (SP5-846-050).
3. Initialize the partition for the HDD address book (Turn the main power switch
off and on) (SP5-832-006).
4. Replace the HDD.
826
Service Call
HDD mail data error
An error is detected in the HDD at power on.
• Defective HDD
872 B • Power failure during an access to the HDD

2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-007).
3. Replace the HDD.
HDD mail transfer error
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.
• Defective HDD
873 B
• Power failure during an access to the HDD
1. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-008).

2. Replace the HDD.
Delete All error: Data area
A data error is detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All option has
been used.
• The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit running from an
SD card.
874 D
• Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) not installed
• Defective HDD
1. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
2. Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit (D377) again.
3. Replace the HDD.
827
6. Troubleshooting
Delete All error: HDD
An error occurs while the machine deletes data from the HDD.
875 D • The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit (D377) running
from an SD card.
• The logical format for the HDD fails.
1. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again
Log Data Error
876 D An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is
operating.
Log Data Error 1
-01 • Damaged log data file in the HDD
Log Data Error 2
• An encryption module not installed

-02
1. Replace or set again the encryption module.
2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9-730-004 ("0" is off.).
Log Data Error 3
• Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data

-03
2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9-730-004 ("0" is off.)
Log Data Error 4
-04 • Unusual log encryption function due to defective NVRAM data
828
Service Call
Log Data Error 5
• Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine.

-05
1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
Log Data Error 99
-99 • Other than the above causes
1. Ask your supervisor.
HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error
The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the Data Overwrite Security Unit
(D377) is installed and activated.
877 B • Defective SD card

• SD card not installed
1. Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card.

2. Check and reinstall the SD card.
TPM electronic recognition error
The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM (security chip).
• Incorrect updating for the system firmware

878 D
• Incorrect operating of the USB flash
• Defective flash ROM on the controller board
829
6. Troubleshooting
File format converter error
A request to get access to the file format converter is not answered within the
880 D specified time.
• Defective file format converter
1. Replace the file format converter.
Authentication area error
Authentication application error is detected.

881 D
Error data in an authentication application reaches the management limit.
SC899 No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

RTB 22
Software performance error
If the processing program shows abnormal performance and the program is

abnormally ended, this SC is issued.

899 D
• Software defective

3. Update the firmware on the controller.
830
Service Call
SC9xx: Miscellaneous
Electric counter error
The total count contains something that is not a number.
• NVRAM incorrect type

• Defective NVRAM
900 D • NVRAM data scrambled
• Unexpected error from external source
1. Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller.

2. Replace the NVRAM.
910 External Controller Error 1
913 B External Controller Error 4
The external controller alerted the machine about an error.
1. Please refer to the instructions for the external controller (application).
External Controller Error 6
Egrt board error

915 A
The external controller alerted the machine about an error.
1. Replace the Egret controller board.
831
6. Troubleshooting
External Controller down
While EAC (External Application Converter), the conversion module, was

operating normally, the receipt of a power line interrupt signal from the FLUTE
serial driver was detected, or BREAK signal from the other station was detected.
919 D
• Power outage at the EFI controller
• EFI controller was rebooted
• Connection to EFI controller loose
920 B Printer application error
-00 No response when starting up the PM
-01 Timeout error during the PM operation
-02 Working memory error
-03 Cannot start-up the filtering process
-04 Abnormal exit from the filtering process
An error is detected in the printer application program and operation cannot

continue.
• Defective software
• Unexpected hardware resource (e.g., memory shortage)
1. Software defective; turning on and off the main power switch

2. Insufficient memory; additional memory
Printer font error
A necessary font is not found when starting up the printer application.

921 B
• A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
832
Service Call
925 B NetFile function error
-00 HDD is defective
-01 NetFile management file is broken
The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile

management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue.
The HDDs are defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the
Scan Router functions (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Web
services, and other network functions cannot be used.
HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code.
1. Refer to the four procedures below (Recovery from SC 925).
Here is a list of HDD status codes:
Display Meaning
(-1) HDD not connected
(-2) HDD not ready
(-3) No label
(-4) Partition type incorrect
(-5) Error returned during label read or check
(-6) Error returned during label read or check
(-7) "filesystem" repair failed
(-8) "filesystem" mount failed
(-9) Drive does not answer command
(-10) Internal kernel error
(-11) Size of drive is too small
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
(-13) Device file does not exist
Recovery from SC 925
833
6. Troubleshooting
Procedure 1
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery
procedures for SC860 to SC865.
Procedure 2
If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 to SC865), turn the machine power off
and on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with
SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting – Ridoc I/F).
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
• Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that:
• Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased
• All captured documents will be erased
• DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be erased
• Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be erased.
• The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management information must be
configured again (this will use a lot of time).
Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:
1. Go into the User Tools mode and do "Delivery Settings" to print all received fax documents that are
scheduled for delivery. Then erase them.
2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer Documents.
3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on.
Procedure 3
If "Procedure 2" is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD Formatting – All), then turn
the machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask the customer before
you do this SP code.
Procedure 4
If "Procedure 3" is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
834
Service Call
Software performance error
The software makes an unexpected operation.
• Defective software
990 D • Software error

2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine main firmware.
• See Note 1 at the end of the SC table.
Software continuity error
The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation. However,

unlike SC 990, the object of the error is continuity of the software.
991 C • Software program error

• Internal parameter incorrect
• Insufficient working memory
1. This SC is not displayed on the LCD (logging only).
Undefined error
Defective software program

992 D
• An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred
835
6. Troubleshooting
Operation panel management records exceeded
An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for images
managed in the service layer of the firmware. This can occur if too many
994 C
application screens open on the operation panel.
• No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the
machine.
995 D CPM setting error
• Defective BCU
• NVRAM Replacement error
-01 1. Install the previous NVRAM
2. Input the serial number with SP5-811-004, and turn the main power switch
off and on.
• Defective NVRAM
-02 1. Update the controller firmware.
2. Install a new NVRAM, and turn off and on the main power switch after
SC995-002 has occurred.
• Incorrect type controller installed
-03 • Defective controller
1. Replace the controller with the correct type.
• Incorrect model controller installed.

-04
1. Replace the controller with the correct model.
836
Service Call
Application function selection error
The application selected by the operation panel key works abnormally (No
response, abnormal ending).
• Software (including the software configuration) defective

• An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed.
997 B • Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated.
1. Check the devices necessary for the application program. If necessary

devices have not been installed, install them.
2. Check that application programs are correctly configured.
3. For a fax operation problem, simplify the nesting of the fax group addresses.
4. Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application program. If the
logs can be displayed on the operation panel, see the logs.
Application start error
No applications start within a specified time after the power is turned on.
• Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM

998 D • Software problem
1. Check the setting of SP5-875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it
to "0 (ON)".
2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-DIMM are correctly connected.
3. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
Note 1
If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the
problem may be caused by a software error. In this case, the following data and information needs to
be sent back to your product specialist. Please understand that it may take some time to get a reply on
how to solve the problem, because in some cases the design staff in Japan must analyze the data.
• Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
• Summary sheet (SP mode "Printer SP", SP1-004 [Print Summary])
837
6. Troubleshooting
• SMC - All (SP5-990-001)

• SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
• Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
• All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is
logged.)
• Image file which causes the problem, if possible
838
Process Control Error Conditions

Developer Initialization Result
SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result)

No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action
Successfully Developer initialization is

1 -
completed successfully completed.
• A cover was opened or the main switch

was turned off during the initialization.
1. Do the developer initialization again when
Forced Developer initialization
2 done in SP mode. Reinstall the engine main
termination was forcibly terminated.
firmware if the result is the same.
2. Turn the main switch off and on when done
at unit replacement.
1. Make sure that the heat seal on the

Vt is more than 0.7V development unit is not removed.
6 Vt error
when Vcnt is 4.3V.
2. Defective TD sensor
Vcnt is less than 4.7V 1. Defective TD sensor

7 Vcnt error 1 when Vcnt is Vt target 2. Vt target settings are not correct.
±0.2V. 3. Toner density error
Vt is more than 0.7V

when Vcnt is 4.3V and 1. Make sure that the heat seal on the
8 Vcnt error 2 Vcnt is less than 4.7V development unit is not removed.
when Vcnt is Vt target 2. Defective TD sensor
±0.2V.
1. Make sure that the heat seal on the

development unit is not removed
9 Vcnt error 3 Vcnt is less than 4.7V. 2. Defective TD sensor
3. Vt target settings are not correct.
4. Toner density error
839
6. Troubleshooting
• The machine starts developer initialization after you set “Enable” in SP3-902-005, 006, 007, or
008. Developer initialization automatically resumes when you open and close the front door or
turn the main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 occurs.
Process Control Self-Check Result
Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check.

00000000 = YYCCMMKK
SP3-012-001 to -010 (Process Control Self-check Result)

Process control self-

Successfully Check the Vsg adjustment. See the "Vsg
11 check successfully
completed Adjustment Result" following this table.
completed.
• Defective development unit

Vt maximum error and an image is faint:
1. Replace the toner supply pump unit.
Vt maximum error and an image is O.K:
Vt maximum or minimum
41 Vt error 1. Replace the development unit.
error is detected.
2. Replace the IOB board.
Vt minimum error:
1. Replace the development unit.
• Solid image is not sufficient density:

1. Retry the process control.
2. Replace the ID sensors.
ID sensor • Solid image is O.K.
Not enough data can be
53 coefficient (K5)
sampled. 1. Replace the ID sensors.
detection error
• ID sensor is dirty:
1. Clean the ID sensors.
2. Retry the process control.
840
When the K5 is more

ID sensor than the value of • ID sensor pattern density is too high or low.
coefficient (K5) SP3-362-003 or less
54 • ID sensor or shutter is defective.
maximum/ than the value of
minimum error SP3-362-004, the error Same as 53
54 is displayed.
• ID sensor pattern density is too high.

Gamma error: Gamma is out of range.
55 • Hardware defective.
Maximum 5.0 < Gamma
Same as 53
• ID sensor pattern density is too low.

Gamma error: Gamma is out of range. • Hardware defective.
56
Minimum Gamma < 0.15 1. Same as 53
2. Replace the toner supply pump unit.
• ID sensor pattern density is too low.

Vk error: Vk is out of range.
57 • Hardware defective.
Maximum 150 < Vk
Same as 53
• ID sensor pattern density is too high.

Vk error: Vk is out of range. • Background dirty
58
Minimum Vk < –150 • Hardware defective
Same as 53
Sampling data • ID sensor pattern density is too high or low.

Not enough data can be
error during
59 sampled during the • Hardware defective
gamma
gamma correction. Same as 53
correction
Unexpected • Power Failure

99 Process control fails.
error Check the power source.
841
6. Troubleshooting
Vsg Adjustment Result
SP3-325-001 to -010 (Vsg Adjustment Result)

Vsg adjustment is
1 O.K -
correctly done.
• Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or foreign material)

• Dirty transfer belt
• Scratched image transfer belt
• Defective ID sensor
• Poor connection
ID sensor Vsg cannot be • Defective IOB
2 adjustment adjusted within 4.0 1. Clean the ID sensor.
error ±0.5V.
2. Check the belt cleaning. Clean or replace the
transfer belt.
3. Replace the image transfer belt.
5. Check the connection.
• Poor connection
ID sensor output is
ID sensor more than "Voffset • Defective IOB
3
output error Threshold" 1. Replace the ID sensor.
(SP3-324-004)
2. Check the connection.
Vsg Vsg adjustment has • Other cases

9 Adjustment not been
error completed. Retry SP3-321-010.
Line Position Adjustment Result
SP2-194-010 to -012 (Line Position Adjustment Result: M, C, Y)

This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD. It shows which color has an
error (M, Y or C).
842
No. Result Description Note
0 Not done Line position adjustment has not been done. -
Completed
1 Line position adjustment has correctly been done, -
successfully
Cannot detect ID sensors have not detected the patterns for line
2 See Note
patterns position adjustment.
Fewer lines on the

The patterns, which ID sensors have detected, are not
3 pattern than the See Note
enough for line position adjustment.
target
More lines on the

4 pattern than the Not used in this machine. -
target
ID sensors have correctly detected the patterns for line

Out of the
5 position adjustment, but a shift of patterns is out of See Note
adjustment range
adjustable range.
6-9 Not used - -
• For details, see "Troubleshooting Guide - Line Position Adjustment" section. ( p.846)
843
6. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Guide
Image Quality
The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image quality problems on this
product.
844
845
6. Troubleshooting
Line Position Adjustment
When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows.
• Use A3/DLT size paper for this adjustment.
Test
1. Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment).

2. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed
successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to ‘Countermeasure list for color
registration errors’.
3. Do SP2-111-001 (Mode a: fine adjustment twice).
4. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed
successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to ‘Countermeasure list for color
registration errors’.
5. Put some A3/DLT paper on the by-pass tray.
• When you print a test pattern, use the by-pass tray to feed the paper.
6. Print out test pattern "7" with SP2-109-003.
7. Check the printed output with a loupe.
8. If there are no color registration errors on the output, the line position adjustment is correctly done.
If not, refer to the countermeasure list for color registration errors.
Countermeasure list for color registration errors
After Executing SP2-111-003

• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
846
Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure
White image, Abnormal image, Low • Defective laser optics housing unit shutter
density • Defective image processing unit
• Low density of test pattern
• Defective IPU
1. Replace the shutter motor.
2. Replace the high voltage power supply unit.
3. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply
some toner (SP3-015-xxx).
4. Replace the IPU.
Normal image, but with color • Defective ID sensor shutter

registration errors • Defective ID sensor
• Defective IPU
1. Replace the ID sensor shutter solenoid.
3. Replace the IPU.

• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• One of results: "5" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012.
The main scan registrations of Y, M, C • Defective laser optics housing unit

are shifted by more than ±15 mm • Defective IPU
from the main scan registration of K.
2. Replace the IPU.
The sub scan registrations of Y, M, C • Defective image transfer belt

are shifted by more than ±20 mm • Defective drive units
from the sub scan registration of K.
• Defective IPU
2. Replace the drum motor.
3. Replace the IPU.
847
6. Troubleshooting
The main scan registration is shifted • Defective ID sensor at center

by more than ±0.66 mm, but only at • Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
the central area of the image on the
• Defective IPU
output.
3. Replace the IPU.
The skew for Y, M, C is more than • Defective PCDU

±0.75 mm from the main scan • Defective laser optics housing unit
registration of K
• Defective IPU
3. Replace the IPU.
Others • Skew correction upper limit error

• Defective IPU
• Defective laser optics housing unit
1. Replace the IPU.

• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• Result: "0" in SP2-194-010, -011, -012.
Do SP2-111-001 or -002.

• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
848
White image, Abnormal image, • Defective laser optics housing unit shutter
Low density • Defective image processing unit
• Low density of test pattern
• Defective IPU
1. Replace the shutter motor.
2. Replace the high voltage power supply unit.
3. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply
4. Replace the IPU.
Normal image, but with color • Defective ID sensor shutter

registration errors • Defective ID sensor
• Defective IPU
1. Replace the ID sensor shutter solenoid.
3. Replace the IPU.

• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• Result: "5" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
Low image density on the output • Low pattern density

Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply
The main scan registrations of Y, M, C • No defective component

are shifted by more than ±1.4 mm • Defective laser optics housing unit
from the main scan registration of K.
• Defective IPU
1. Do SP2-111-003 again.
3. Replace the IPU.
849
6. Troubleshooting
The sub scan registrations of Y, M, C • No defective component

are shifted by more than ±1.4mm • Defective image transfer belt
from the sub scan registration of K.
• Defective drive units
• Defective IPU
1. Do SP2-111-003 again.
4. Replace the IPU.
The main scan registration is shifted • Defective ID sensor at center

by more than ±0.66 mm, but only at • Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
the central area of the image on the
• Defective IPU
output.
3. Replace the IPU.
The skew for Y, M, C is more than ± • Defective PCDU

0.75 mm from the main scan • Defective laser optics housing unit
registration of K. – at the end of the
• Defective IPU
scan line?
3. Replace the IPU.
Others • Skew correction upper limit error

• Defective IPU
1. Replace the IPU.

• Result: "0" in SP2-194-007
• Result: No color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
850
The main scan registration of K is • Abnormal SP setting value of main scan: K

shifted. Adjust the value with SP2-101-001.
The main scan length of K is shifted. • Abnormal SP setting value of main scan length
detection: K
Adjust the value with SP2-185-001.

• Result: "0" in SP2-194-007
• Result: Color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
Low image density on the output • Low pattern density

Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply
The main scan registration is shifted, • Defective ID sensor at center

but only at the central area of the • Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
image on the output.
• Defective IPU
3. Replace the IPU.
The main scan registrations of Y, M, C • Defective laser optics housing unit

are shifted. • Defective ID sensor
• Defective IPU
• Incorrect SP value
3. Replace the IPU.
4. Adjust the value with SP2-182-004 to -021.
851
6. Troubleshooting
The sub scan registrations of Y, M, C • Defective image transfer belt

are shifted. • Defective drive units
• Defective IPU
• Incorrect SP value
4. Replace the IPU.
5. Adjust the value with SP2-182-022 to -039.
The skew of Y, M, C is different. • Defective PCDU

• Defective IOB
3. Replace the IOB.
The sub scan lines are shifted. Shifted • Defective PCDU

lines appear cyclically. • Defective drive unit
• Drum phase adjustment error
1. Do SP1-902-001 (Drum phase adjustment); see
Replacement and Adjustment – Drive Unit – Gear Unit
for details.
3. Check or replace the drive unit.
Stain on the Outputs
If a stain appears at the edge of the output, do the following procedure.

1. Execute the fusing cleaning mode with SP1123-002.
• It takes 160 seconds to complete the fusing cleaning mode.
852
2. Make a sample copy, and then check if a stain appears on the output.
Stack Problem in the 1-Bin Tray
If a stack problem occurs on the 1-bin tray, raise the guide on the 1-bin tray.
If a stack problem occurs;

• Push the guide to lift the guide [A].
If another type or size of paper is used;
• Press down the guide [B].
Problem at Regular Intervals
Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain
components.
The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals).
853
6. Troubleshooting
[A]: Paper feed direction

[B]: Problems at regular intervals
• Colored spots at 47-mm intervals: Development roller
• Abnormal image at 51-mm intervals: ITB drive or bias roller
• Abnormal image at 85-mm intervals: Paper transfer roller
• Colored spots at 119-mm intervals: Drum
• Abnormal image at 101-mm intervals: Fusing unit (Pressure roller)
• Abnormal image at 107-mm intervals: Fusing unit (Heating roller)
Toner End Recovery Error
If the toner end message on the LCD is displayed in the following conditions, there are some possible
causes. Check the machine referring to the flow chart for the toner end recovery error.
• After a new toner bottle has been installed in the machine
• When a displayed color toner bottle still has toner inside
854
Flow Chart for the Toner End Recovery Error
855
6. Troubleshooting
Countermeasure 1
1. Check if the toner supply tube is bent or disconnected.
1. Straighten the toner supply tube or connect it correctly.
Countermeasure 2
1. Remove the target color toner bottle.
1. Disconnect the toner supply tube from the toner pump unit.
2. Remove the blocked toner in the toner supply tube with a vacuum cleaner.
Countermeasure 3
• Replace the toner pump unit ( p.245).
Countermeasure 4
• Replace the PCDU ( p.236).
Toner Bottles Detection Error
If the no toner bottles message is displayed on the LCD when turning on the main power switch, or SC
681-11 to 14 occurs during operation, deformed detection terminals of toner bottles may cause a toner
bottle ID communication error. If this occurs, follow the countermeasure below.
Countermeasure 1
• Replace the toner bottles.
856
Countermeasure 2
• Replace the toner bottle detection board ( p.362).
• When replacing the toner bottle detection board, make sure not to deform the toner bottle
detection terminals. This error does not occur if toner bottles are replaced correctly.
Solid Image or Halftone Image Error
The toner density of a solid image or halftone image may not be uniform ([A]: problem output, [B]:
normal output) if a large amount of sheets is printed at low coverage. If this occurs, follow the
countermeasure below.
Recovery Procedure

1. Set SP3-044-xxx (Toner Supply Type) to "1: PID (Vref Fixed)".
• Chose a target color SP number from -001 (Bk), -002 (Magenta), -003 (Cyan), and -004
(Yellow).
2. Set SP3-222-xxx (Vtref: Display/Set) to "4V".
• Chose a target color SP number from -001 (Bk), -002 (Magenta), -003 (Cyan), and -004
(Yellow).
3. Set SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern; Pattern Selection) to "23: Full Dot Pattern".
4. Set SP2-109-005 (Test Pattern; Color Selection) to "1: All Color (black)", "2: Magenta", "3:
Cyan", or "4: Yellow".
• Chose a target color selection number.
5. Press "Copy Window" on the LCD.
857
6. Troubleshooting
6. Copy 20 sheets for A4 size or 30 sheets for A3 size, and then check the setting of SP3-222-xxx
(Vtref: Display/Set).
• If the setting of this SP is more than 4V, go to next step. If not, copy again until the setting of
this SP is more than 4V.
7. Return the setting of SP3-044-xxx (Toner Supply Type) to "4: MBD (Vref_Control)".
• Return the setting of the SP which you have changed in step 2 before.
8. Execute SP3-015-xxx (Forced Toner Supply: Execute) twice.
• Chose a target color SP number from -003 (Bk), -004 (Magenta), -005 (Cyan) and -006
(Yellow).
9. Execute the SP3-011-002 (Process Cont. Manual Execution; Density Adjustment).
Problem Prevention Procedure
• Set the setting of SP3-516-025 (Refresh Mode; Job End Area Coefficient) to "0.5".
Faulty Cleaning
Black or color lines (2-3mm)
Possible Cause:
Wear of the cleaning blade at a specific point by image creation in the same place many times.
858
Solution:
Replace the drum unit.
Band Image Between 20mm and 30mm
Possible Cause:
Developer wear with time
Solution:
Replace the developer or the development unit.
Damaged Lift Sensor Switch or Motor
SC798 is displayed when the SR3070 (D585) is unpacked or installed, or later during machine
operation if the lift sensor switch or motor was damaged during machine installation.
Cause
• The section of the exit tray circled in the photo below is contacted (hit) during the shipping process.
• The customer lifts the tray all the way up.
859
6. Troubleshooting
Solution
If the symptom occurs at machine installation, do Procedure 1 below.

If the symptom occurs during machine operation after installation, do Procedure 2 below.
Procedure 1
Do this procedure if the symptom occurs at machine installation.
2. Shift tray ( x 2)
860
3. Shift tray bracket ( x 2)
Screws:
861
6. Troubleshooting
Connecter:
4. End fence ( x 3, x 1)
5. Snap attached beside the gear (snap x 1)
6. Push down the two tray support plates (left and right sides) all the way.
7. Attach the above gear and snap (snap x 1).
8. Attach all parts and connectors that you removed in steps 1 - 4.
862
9. Turn on the main power switch and make sure that SC798 does not occur.
Procedure 2
Do this procedure if the symptom occurs after installation, during regular operation.
1. Check the tray position.
2. Check the position and ON-OFF response of the tray lift sensor switch.
3. Check the tray lift motor and tray lift sensor harness.
4. Remove and reattach the tray lift motor.
5. Replace the tray lift motor or tray lift sensor.
• Whenever you lift or carry the SR3070, always hold it by the bottom edges of the front cover [C]
and rear cover [A], as the figure left below. If you do not, SC798 will occur when you attach the
finisher. DO NOT hold the finisher by the tray holder [B], as the figure right below.
Encryption Key Restoration for NVRAM
How to restore the old encryption key to the machine
The following message appears after the controller board is replaced, or after the hard disk and
controller board are replaced. In such cases, it is necessary to restore the encryption key to the new
controller board.
863
6. Troubleshooting
To do this, follow the procedure below.

1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the “restore_key” folder and name it the same as machine’s serial number,
“xxxxxxxxxxx” (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx“ folder. Write the
encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
• Ask an Administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed out by the
user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The function of back-up the
encryption key to the SD card directly is provided 11A products or later.)
5. Turn on the machine’s main power switch.
6. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the
encryption key.
8. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into Slot 2 (the lower slot).
• The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the
controller board.
10. Turn off the main power switch when the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from Slot 2.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
• The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

• Encrypted data will be deleted.
• User settings will be cleared.
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card. Then, save the
“nvram_key.txt” file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
864
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
• Write this string at the head of the file.

• Use all lower-case letters.
• Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
• It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is executed and
the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
4. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the
encryption key.
6. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into Slot 2 (the lower slot).
8. Turn on the main power switch, the machine automatically clear the HDD encryption.
9. Turn off the main power switch when the machine has returned to normal status.
10. Remove the SD card from Slot 2.
12. Memory clear SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP-5-801-001: All Clear and SP-5-801-002: Engine), and
clear SP5-846-046: address book.
13. Set necessary user settings in User Tools key.
Fax Icon is not Displayed
When the fax unit is installed on the machine, the fax icon [A] is displayed on the home screen of the
operation panel, as shown below. (The figure shown below is an example of the home screen. The
location of each icon depends on the settings.)
865
6. Troubleshooting
If the fax icon is not displayed (as shown below), the FCU should be replaced. Refer to the Fax service
manual for the FCU replacement procedure.
Other Symptoms
The following pages explain troubleshooting for the following symptoms:

• SC 861(HDD reboot error) to 865 (HDD access error)
• Any SC that indicates a defective controller board
• “Please wait” remains on display
Flowchart for the error
Test the machine using the flow chart below, to determine which parts are causing the problem.
866
Countermeasure list for the error
The following table shows what to do in each case: For example, if only the controller and HDD were
found to be defective, then it is No 4 in the table below.
HDD Encryption OFF *1

SD
CTL HDD NVRAM Action No
Card
R R R R Replace CTL / HDD / SD card / NVRAM 1
R R R (R) Replace CTL / HDD / SD card / NVRAM 2
R R - R Replace CTL / HDD / SD card 3
R R - - Replace CTL / HDD 4
R - R R Replace CTL / SD card / NVRAM 5
R - R (R) Replace CTL / SD card / NVRAM 6
R - - R Replace CTL / SD card 7
R - - - Replace CTL 8
867
6. Troubleshooting
SD
Card
- R R R Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM 9
- R R (R) Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM 10
- R - R Replace HDD / SD card 11
- R - - Replace HDD 12
- - R R Replace SD card / NVRAM 13
- - R (R) Replace SD card / NVRAM 14
- - - R Replace SD card 15
HDD Encryption ON *1
SD
Card
R R R R Replace CTL / HDD/SD card / NVRAM. 1
R R R (R) Replace CTL / HDD/SD card / NVRAM. 2
R R - R Replace CTL / HDD/SD card. 3
R R - - Replace CTL / HDD. 4
Replace CTL / SD Card/NVRAM, then the HDD

R - R R 5
is automatically formatted.
Replace CTL / SD Card/NVRAM, then the HDD

R - R (R) 6
is automatically formatted.
Replace CTL, then restore the old encryption key,

R - - R 7
then replace SD card.
R - - - Replace CTL, then restore the old encryption key. 8
- R R R Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM. 9
- R R (R) Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM. 10
- R - R Replace HDD / SD card. 11
- R - - Replace HDD. 12
868
SD
Card
- - R R Replace SD card / NVRAM. 13
- - R (R) Replace SD card / NVRAM. 14
- - - R Replace SD card. 15
(legends)
- : Not defective parts
R: Defective parts, must replace
(R): Not defective parts but must be replaced
*1: Data Overwrite Security (ON/OFF) does not affect the combination table.
869
6. Troubleshooting
Jam Detection
Paper Jam Display
SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
• CODE: Indicates the jam code.

• SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code.
• TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
• DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
Jam Codes and Display Codes
SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location.
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
7504 3 Tray 1: ON Paper is not fed from tray 1. A
7504 4 Tray 2: ON Paper is not fed from tray 2. A
7504 5 Tray 3: ON Paper is not fed from tray 3 (LCT). Y
7504 6 Tray 4: ON Paper is not fed from tray 4. Y
7504 7 LCT: ON Paper is not fed from LCT. U
7504 8 Bypass: ON Paper is not fed from the by-pass tray. A
7504 9 Duplex: ON Paper is jammed at the duplex unit. Z
7504 10 - - -
Vertical transport sensor 1 does not detect

7504 11 Vertical Transport 1: ON A
paper from tray 1.
870
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display

7504 12 Vertical Transport 2: ON A
paper from tray 2.

7504 13 Bank Transport 1 Y
paper from tray 3 (LCT).

7504 14 - Y
paper from tray 4.
7504 15 - - -
7504 16 - - -
7504 17 Registration: ON Registration sensor does not detect paper. A
7504 18 Fusing Entrance: ON Fusing entrance sensor does not detect paper. B
7504 19 Fusing Exit: ON Fusing exit sensor does not detect paper. B
7504 20 Paper Exit: ON Paper exit sensor does not detect paper. C
Tray exit sensor (bridge unit) does not detect

7504 21 Relay Exit: ON D
paper.
Relay sensor (bridge unit) does not detect

7504 22 Relay Transport: ON D
paper.
7504 23 - - -
Junction gate jam sensor does not detect

7504 24 Junction Gate Feed: ON C
paper.
7504 25 Duplex Exit: ON Duplex exit sensor does not detect paper. Z
Duplex entrance sensor does not detect

7504 26 Duplex Entrance: ON (In) Z
paper.
Duplex Entrance: ON Duplex entrance sensor does not detect paper

7504 27 Z
(Out) again after paper has passed this sensor.
7504 28 - - -
7504 51 SEF Sensor 1 Vertical transport sensor 1 does not turn off. A
7504 52 SEF Sensor 2 Vertical transport sensor 2 does not turn off. A
871
6. Troubleshooting
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
7504 53 Bank SEF Sensor 1 Vertical transport sensor 3 does not turn off. Y
7504 54 Bank SEF Sensor 2 Vertical transport sensor 4 does not turn off. Y
7504 55 - - -
7504 56 - - -
7504 57 Regist Sensor Registration sensor does not turn off. B
7504 58 LCT Sensor LCT sensor does not turn off. U
7504 59 - -
7504 60 Exit Sensor Paper exit sensor does not turn off. C
7504 61 Relay Exit Sensor Tray exit sensor (bridge unit) does not turn off. D
7504 62 Relay Sensor Relay sensor (bridge unit) does not turn off. D
7504 63 - - -
7504 64 Junction Gate Feed: OFF Junction gate jam sensor does not turn off. C
7504 65 Duplex Exit Sensor Duplex exit sensor does not turn off. Z
Duplex Entrance: OFF

7504 66 Duplex entrance sensor does not turn off. Z
(In)
Duplex Entrance: OFF Duplex entrance sensor does not turn off after
7504 67 Z
(Out) paper has passed this sensor.
7504 68 - - -
Paper does not reach to the entrance sensor

7504 100 Finisher Entrance (D588) R1-R2
or stay at the entrance sensor.
Finisher Shift Tray Exit Paper does not reach to the lower tray exit
7504 101 R1-R2
(D588) sensor or stay at the lower tray exit sensor.
Paper does not reach to the staple tray

7504 102 Finisher Staple (D588) entrance sensor or stay at the staple tray R3-R5
entrance sensor.
872
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Lower tray exit sensor does not detect paper

after the stack feed-out belt has fed paper.
7504 103 Finisher Exit (D588) Lower tray exit sensor still detects paper after R3-R5
the stack feed-out belt has returned to the
home position.
7504 104 - - -
Stack height sensor does not detect paper

Finisher Tray Lift Motor after the lower tray has lifted up.
7504 105 R1-R2
(D588) Stack height sensor still detects paper after the
lower tray has lifted down.
Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn off after

the jogger fence has moved from its home
Finisher Jogger Motor position.
7504 106 R3-R5
(D588) Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn on after
the jogger fence has returned to its home
position.
Shift roller HP sensor does not turn off after the

Finisher Shift Motor shift roller has moved from its home position.
7504 107 R1-R2
(D588) Shift roller HP sensor does not turn on after the
shift roller has returned to its home position.
Stapler HP sensor does not turn off after the

Finisher Staple Motor stapler has moved from its home position.
7504 108 R3-R5
(D588) Stapler HP sensor does not turn on after the
stapler has returned to its home position.
Stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not turn off

after the stack feed-out belt has moved from
Finisher Exit Motor its home position.
7504 109 R3-R5
(D588) Stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not turn on
after the stack feed-out belt has returned to its
home position.
7504 130 - - R1-R3
7504 131 - - R1-R3
873
6. Troubleshooting
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
7504 132 - - R1-R3
7504 133 - - R4-R6
7504 134 - - R4-R6
7504 135 - - R7-R11
7504 136 - - R7-R11
7504 137 - - R1-R3
7504 138 - - R7-R11
7504 139 - - R1-R3
7504 140 - - R1-R3
7504 141 - - R7-R11
7504 142 - - R1-R3
7504 143 - - R7-R11
7504 144 - - R7-R11
7504 145 - - R7-R11
7504 146 - - R7-R11
7504 147 - - R7-R11
7504 148 - - R7-R11
7504 160 - Paper does not reach the entrance sensor. R1
7504 161 - Paper stays at the entrance sensor. R1
7504 162 - Exit problem at the exit tray R2
Exit home position sensor does not change

7504 163 - R1
after the positioning roller has driven.
Jogger home position sensor does not change

7504 164 - R1
after the jogger motor (front) has driven.
874
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Jogger home position sensor does not change

7504 165 - R1
after the jogger motor (rear) has driven.
Exit home position sensor does not change

7504 166 - R1
after the exit motor has driven.
Stapler movement home position sensor does

7504 167 - not change after the stapler movement motor R1
has driven.
Stapler home position sensor does not change

7504 168 - R1
after the stapler motor has driven.
Paper height sensor does not change after the

7504 169 - R1
tray lift motor has driven.
Paper height sensor does not turn off after the

7504 170 - R1
solenoid has turned on.
Finisher Entrance: EUP Paper does not reach the finisher entrance
7504 191 R1-R4
(B804/B805) sensor or stays at the finisher entrance sensor.
Finisher Proof Exit: EUP Paper does not reach the proof tray exit
7504 192 R1-R4
(B804/B805) sensor or stays at the proof tray exit sensor.
Finisher Shift Tray Exit: Paper does not reach the upper tray exit
7504 193 R1-R4
EUP (B804/B805) sensor or stays at the upper tray exit sensor.
Stapling tray paper sensor does not turn on

after the finisher entrance sensor has turned
Finisher Stapler Exit: EUP on.
7504 194 R5-R7
(B804/B805)
Stapling tray paper sensor does not turn off
after it has turned on.
Upper tray exit sensor does not turn on while

the stack feed-out belt is turned on.
Finisher Exit: EUP (B804/
7504 195 Upper tray exit sensor does not turn off after R8-R12
B805)
the stack feed-out belt has returned to its
home position.
7504 196 - - -
7504 197 - - -
875
6. Troubleshooting
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Fold bottom fence HP sensor does not turn on

after the fold roller motor has stopped.
Finisher Folder: EUP Fold unit exit sensor does not turn on after the
7504 198 R8-R12
(B804 only) fold rollers have stopped.
Fold unit exit sensor does not turn off after the
fold rollers have stopped.
Upper tray limit sensor does not turn on after

Finisher Tray Motor: EUP the upper tray has lifted up.
7504 199 R1-R4
(B804/B805) Upper tray limit sensor does not turn off after
the upper tray has moved down.
Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn on/off

after the jogger motor has turned on.
Finisher Jogger Motor:
7504 200 Stack feed out belt HP sensor does not turn R8-R12
EUP (B804/B805)
on/off after the feed out belt motor has turned
on.
Shift roller HP sensor does not turn on/off

after the shift roller motor has turned on.
Exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn
Finisher Shift Motor: EUP on/off after the exit guide plate motor has
7504 201 R1-R4
(B804/B805) turned on.
Stacking roller HP sensor does not turn on/off
after the stacking sponge roller motor has
turned on.
Corner stapler HP sensor does not turn on/off

after the corner stapler movement motor has
Finisher Staple Moving turned on.
7504 202 Motor: EUP (B804/ R8-R12
B805) Stapler rotation HP sensor does not turn
on/off after the corner stapler rotation motor
has turned on.
Corner stapler does not finish stapling after a

Finisher Staple Motor: specified time.
7504 203 R8-R12
EUP (B804/B805) Booklet stapler does not finish stapling after a
specified time.
876
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Fold plate HP sensor does not turn on/off

after the fold plate motor has turned on.
Clamp roller HP sensor does not turn on/off
after the clamp roller retraction motor has
turned on.
Finisher Folder Motor:
7504 204 Fold bottom fence HP sensor does not turn R8-R12
EUP (B804 only)
on/off after the fold unit bottom fence lift
motor has turned on.
Stack junction gate HP sensor does not turn
on/off after the stack junction gate motor has
turned on.
7504 205 - - -
Punch encoder sensor does not turn on/off

after the punch drive motor has turned on.
Punch movement HP sensor does not turn
Finisher Punch Motor: on/off after the punch movement motor has
7504 206 R1-R4
EUP (B804/B805) turned on.
Paper position slide HP sensor does not turn
on/off after the paper position sensor slide
motor has turned on.
Finisher does not send the paper exit finish bin

7504 230 - R1-R3
number.
Finisher does not keep on accepting paper

7504 231 - because of insufficient data or command from R1
the main frame.
Paper Size Code
Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size
05 A4 LEF 141 B4 SEF
06 A5 LEF 142 B5 SEF
14 B5 LEF 160 DLT SEF
877
6. Troubleshooting
Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size
38 LT LEF 164 LG SEF
44 HLT LEF 166 LT SEF
132 A3 SEF 172 HLT SEF
133 A4 SEF 255 Others
134 A5 SEF - -
878
Jam Detection
Sensor Locations
879
6. Troubleshooting
Electrical Component Defects

Sensors
• The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the IOB.
Sensor Name/ Activ

No. CN Condition Symptom
Sensor Board Name e
"Open Cover" is
Open
displayed.
SW1 Right Door Open Switch L CN204/1
"Open cover" cannot be
Shorted
detected.
"Open Cover" is
Open
displayed.
S9 Duplex Door L CN232/B11
"Open cover" cannot be
Shorted
detected.
Open/
ID Sensor: Front A CN219/1 SC370
Shorted
Open/
S1 ID Sensor: Center and K A CN219/2 SC370
Shorted
Open/
ID Sensor: Rear A CN219/3 SC370
Shorted
Open Jam A (Jam8, 17)

S12 Registration Sensor L CN224/A2
Shorted Jam A, B (Jam1)
Drum Gear Position Open/

S30 H CN222/A2 SC390-01/SC396-01
Sensor-K Shorted

S31 H CN222/A5 SC390-02/SC396-02
Sensor-C Shorted

S32 H CN222/A8 SC390-03/SC396-03
Sensor-M Shorted
880
Sensor Name/ Activ

Sensor Board Name e

S33 H CN222/A11 SC390-04/SC396-04
Sensor-Y Shorted
CN207/ Toner end cannot be

S26 Toner End Sensor - K Open
B14 detected.
S27 Toner End Sensor - Y
L CN207/B3 Toner end is detected
S28 Toner End Sensor - C
CN207/B9 Shorted when there is enough
S29 Toner End Sensor - M
CN207/B6 toner.
Image Transfer Belt Open/

S34 H/L CN206/3 SC443
Rotation Sensor Shorted
Vertical Transport Open Jam A (Jam3, 11)

S19 L CN230/A7
Sensor 1 Shorted Jam A, B (Jam1)
Paper end is not detected

Open when there is no paper in
S20 Paper End CN230/ the paper tray.
L
S24 Sensor 1, 2 A10, B10 Paper end is detected
Shorted when there is paper in the
paper tray.
S21 CN230/ Open/

Paper Lift Sensor 1, 2 H SC501, SC502
S25 A13, B13 Shorted
Vertical Transport Open Jam A (Jam4, 12)

S23 L CN230/B7
Sensor 2 Shorted Jam A, B (Jam1)
S14 Tray 1 Paper Height CN224/ Open/ Remaining paper volume

L
S15 Sensor 1, 2 B2, B5 Shorted on the LCD is wrong.
S16 Tray 2 Paper Height CN224/ Open/ Remaining paper volume

L
S17 Sensor 1, 2 B10, B13 Shorted on the LCD is wrong.
Tray 1 Paper Feed Open/

S18 L CN230/A4 Jam A, B
Sensor Shorted
881
6. Troubleshooting
Sensor Name/ Activ

Sensor Board Name e
Tray 2 Paper Feed Open/

S22 L CN230/B4 Jam A, B
Sensor Shorted
Tray 1 is not detected

Open
when tray 1 is set.
SW4 Tray 1 Set Switch L CN224/A9
Tray 1 is detected when
Shorted
tray 1 is not set.
CN232/
By-pass Paper Size Open/
S11 L B16, B17, Paper size error
Sensor Shorted
B19, B20
Paper on the by-pass tray

Open is not detected when paper
By-pass Paper Detection CN232/ is set.
SW2 L
Sensor A10 Paper on the by-pass tray
Shorted is detected when paper is
not set.
By-pass Paper Length CN232/ Open

S10 L Paper size error
Sensor B14 Shorted
Open Jam C (Jam 18)

S8 Fusing Entrance Sensor L CN232/B2
Shorted Jam C (Jam 1)
Open Jam Z (Jam 26/27)

S6 Duplex Entrance Sensor L CN232/A2
Shorted Jam Z (Jam 1)
Open Jam Z (Jam 25)

S7 Duplex Exit Sensor L CN232/B8
Shorted Jam Z (Jam 1)
Open/
S39 TD Sensor - K A CN227/A7 SC360-01
Shorted
CN227/ Open/
S40 TD Sensor - C A SC360-02
A15 Shorted
882
Sensor Name/ Activ

Sensor Board Name e
Open/
S41 TD Sensor - M A CN227/B7 SC360-03
Shorted
CN227/ Open/
S42 TD Sensor - Y A SC360-04
B15 Shorted
Open Jam C (Jam 19)

S4 Fusing Exit Sensor L CN204/12
Waste toner near full

Open indicated when it is not
near full.
S13 Waste Toner Sensor H CN224/A5 Waste toner near full
cannot be detected when
Shorted
the waste toner bottle is
nearly full.
Waste toner bottle is not

Open detected when the waste
Waste Toner Bottle Set toner bottle is set.
SW3 L CN224/A7
Switch Waste toner bottle is
Shorted detected when the waste
toner bottle is not set.
CN224/
Tray 2 Paper Size Open/
SW5 L A11, A12, Paper size error
Switch Shorted
A13, A15
SC498
Printed image has some
Temperature/ Open/ problems such as rough
S35 A CN234/6, 8
Humidity Sensor Shorted image, dirty background,
weak image or poor
fusing.
Thermopile Center, Open/

S36 A CN212/3, 6 SC541, SC551
Edge Shorted
883
6. Troubleshooting
Sensor Name/ Activ

Sensor Board Name e
Thermistor
CN212/21, Open/
TH1 - Pressure Roller Center, A SC561, SC571
19 Shorted
Edge
Open Jam C (Jam 20)

S3 Paper Exit Sensor L CN204/9
Paper overflow message is

not displayed when the
Open
paper overflow condition
still remains.
S5 Paper Overflow Sensor L CN204/15
Paper overflow message is
displayed when the paper
Shorted
overflow condition does
not remain.
CN313/14 Open/ Original paper size cannot

Original Width Sensor 1 A
SIO Shorted be detected.
S41
CN313/11 Open/ Original paper size cannot
Original Width Sensor 2 A
Original Length Sensor CN313/8 Open/ Original paper size cannot

A
1 SIO Shorted be detected.
S42
A

S43 A
CN318/2 Open SC120

S39 Scanner HP Sensor H
SIO Shorted SC121
CN318/5 Open/ Platen cover open cannot

S40 Platen Cover Sensor L
884
Sensor Name/ Activ

Sensor Board Name e
Junction Paper Jam Open/

S2 L CN204/6 Jam C (Jam 24/64)
Sensor Shorted
NC Sensor Center, Open/

- A CN212/14,9 SC581, SC591
Edge Shorted
Blown Fuse Conditions
Power Supply Unit
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
115V 220V - 240V
FU1 15A/250V 8A/250V No response. (5V power to the PSU is not supplied.)
No response. (5V power to the IPU and controller is not

FU2 15A/250V 6.3A/250V
supplied.)
5V power to the scanner heater and tray heater is not

FU3*1 2A/250V 1A/250V
supplied.
FU4*1 5A/250V 5A/250V 5VE power to the SIO and IOB is not supplied.
FU5*1 5A/250V 5A/250V 5V power to the IOB not supplied.
FU6*1 5A/250V 5A/250V 5V power to the IPU not supplied.
FU7 8A/250V 8A/250V 24VS power to the IOB not supplied.
FU8 8A/250V 8A/250V 24VS power to the IOB not supplied.
FU9 8A/250V 8A/250V 24V power to the IOB and IPU not supplied.
FU10 8A/250V 8A/250V 24V power to the SIO not supplied.
FU11 8A/250V 8A/250V 24V power to the PFU or LCT and finisher not supplied.
*1 Replace the whole board or unit if this fuse blows, because it is soldered.
885
6. Troubleshooting
AC Drive Board
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
115V 220V - 240V
FU1 15A/250V 8A/250V SC574-02 occurs.
FU2 1A/250V 1A/250V No voltage detection
• For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse.
886
Scanner Test Mode
Scanner Test Mode

SBU Test Mode
Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU operates correctly. The
SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key.
• The CCD on the SBU board may be defective if the copy is abnormal but the SBU test pattern is
normal.
• The following can be the cause if the copy is abnormal and the SBU test pattern is also abnormal:
• The harness may not be correctly connected between the SBU and the IPU.
• The IPU or SBU board may be defective.
887
6. Troubleshooting
888
7. Energy Saving
Energy Save
Energy Saver Modes
Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are
at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different. For example, if
the timers are all set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is saved before 240 min.
expires.
Timer Settings
The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)
• Energy saver timer (1 – 240 min): Low Power Mode. Default setting: 1 min (for NA and EU)/10
min (others).
• Auto off timer (1 – 240 min): Off/Sleep Mode. Default setting: 1 min (for NA and EU)/16 min
(others).
Normally, Energy Saver timer < Auto Off timer. But, for example, if Auto Off timer < or = Energy Saver
timer, the machine goes immediately to Off mode when the Auto Off timer expires. It skips the Energy
Saver mode.
Example
• Low power: 15 min.
889
7. Energy Saving
• Auto Off: 1 min.

• The machine goes to Off mode after 1 minute. Low Power mode is not used.
Return to Stand-by Mode
Low Power Mode

The recovery time depends on the model and the region.
• C3a, b: 10 sec. or less.
Off/Sleep Mode
Recovery time.
• C3a, b: 10 sec. or less.
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.

• If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy
costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy
use.
• If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is not too
long. Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such as 60 min.) if the
customer is not satisfied.
• If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until 240
minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished using the
machine for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved.
• If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as explained
below.
Energy Save Effectiveness
SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode.
• 8941-001: Operating mode
• 8941-002: Standby mode
• 8941-004: Low power mode
• 8941-005: Off/sleep mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount
of energy that is used by the machine.
890
Energy Save
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are
measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the actual
energy consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
• At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005.
• At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 again.
• Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
measurement).
• Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
• Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
891
7. Energy Saving
Paper Save
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function
Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy
overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment.
1. Duplex:
Reduce paper volume in half!
2. Combine mode:
Reduce paper volume in half!
3. Duplex + Combine:
Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
892
Paper Save
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
• For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
• For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even though
two sheets are used.
How to calculate the paper reduction ratio
How to calculate the paper reduction ratio, when compared with Single-sided copying, with no 2-in-1
combine mode
Paper reduction ratio (%) = Number of sheets reduced: A/Number of printed original images: B x 100
• Number of sheets reduced: A
= Output pages in duplex mode/2 + Number of pages in Single-sided with combine mode +
Number of pages in Duplex with combine mode x 3/2
A = ((2) + (3) + (4))/2 + (5) + (6) x 3/2
• Number of printed original images: B
= Total counter6 + Number of pages in Single-sided with combine mode + Number of pages in
Duplex with combine mode
B = (1) + (5) + (6)
• (1) Total counter: SP 8581 001 (pages)
• (2) Single-sided with duplex mode: SP 8421 001 (pages)
• (3) Double-sided with duplex mode: SP 8421 002 (pages)
• (4) Book with duplex mode: SP 8421 003 (pages)
• (5) Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421 004 (pages)
893
7. Energy Saving
• (6) Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421 005 (pages)
894
Model AT-C3
Machine Code: D111/D142
Appendices
January, 2012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Appendices
General Specifications....................................................................................................................................... 5
Main Frame.................................................................................................................................................... 5
Printer...............................................................................................................................................................9
Scanner.........................................................................................................................................................11
Supported Paper Sizes.................................................................................................................................... 12
Paper Feed................................................................................................................................................... 12
North America.....................................................................................................................................12
Europe/ Asia.......................................................................................................................................14
Paper Exit......................................................................................................................................................15
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher..............................................................................................................15
1000-Sheet Finisher and 500-Sheet Finisher...................................................................................17
Platen/ARDF Original Size Detection........................................................................................................20
Software Accessories.......................................................................................................................................22
Printer Drivers............................................................................................................................................... 22
Scanner and LAN Fax drivers.....................................................................................................................22
Utility Software............................................................................................................................................. 23
Optional Equipment......................................................................................................................................... 24
ARDF (D578)............................................................................................................................................... 24
Paper Feed Unit (D580)..............................................................................................................................24
LCT 2000-sheet (D581)..............................................................................................................................25
LCT 1200-sheet (D631)..............................................................................................................................25
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher & Punch Unit (D589)..................................................................................26
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)...................................................................................................................... 27
Upper Tray...........................................................................................................................................27
Lower Tray........................................................................................................................................... 27
500-Sheet Finisher (D585).........................................................................................................................28
500-Sheet Finisher..............................................................................................................................29
Bridge Unit (D634)......................................................................................................................................30
Shift Tray (D633)......................................................................................................................................... 31
1-bin Tray Unit (D632)............................................................................................................................... 31
2. Preventive Maintenance Tables
Maintenance Tables........................................................................................................................................ 33
1
Preventive Maintenance Items.................................................................................................................... 33
Mainframe........................................................................................................................................... 33
ARDF (D578).......................................................................................................................................35
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D580).....................................................................................................36
1200-sheet LCT (D631).....................................................................................................................36
2000-sheet LCT (D581).....................................................................................................................37
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (D589)................................................................................................37
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher Punch Kit (B807)................................................................................37
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)..............................................................................................................38
1 Bin Tray (D632)...............................................................................................................................38
Bridge Unit (D634)............................................................................................................................. 38
Shift Tray (D633)................................................................................................................................ 38
One-tray Paper Feed Unit (D579).................................................................................................... 38
Side Tray (D635)................................................................................................................................ 39
Toner Scatterproof Filter Removal Procedure................................................................................... 39
Other Yield Parts.......................................................................................................................................... 39
Mainframe........................................................................................................................................... 40
ARDF.................................................................................................................................................... 40
3. SP Mode Tables
Main SP Tables-1.............................................................................................................................................41
SP1-XXX (Feed)............................................................................................................................................ 41
Main SP Tables-2.............................................................................................................................................84
SP2-XXX (Drum)........................................................................................................................................... 84
Main SP Tables-3.......................................................................................................................................... 156
SP3-XXX (Process)..................................................................................................................................... 156
Main SP Tables-4.......................................................................................................................................... 187
SP4-XXX (Scanner)....................................................................................................................................187
Main SP Tables-5.......................................................................................................................................... 205
SP5-XXX (Mode)....................................................................................................................................... 205
Main SP Tables-6.......................................................................................................................................... 273
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)............................................................................................................................... 273
Main SP Tables-7.......................................................................................................................................... 282
SP7-XXX (Data Log).................................................................................................................................. 282
2
Main SP Tables-8.......................................................................................................................................... 321
SP8-XXX: Data Log2................................................................................................................................. 321
Input and Output Check................................................................................................................................367
Input Check Table..................................................................................................................................... 367
Copier................................................................................................................................................367
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor..........................................................................................................370
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)............................................................................................... 371
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)...............................................................................................372
ARDF (D578).................................................................................................................................... 373
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804, B805)...................................................................374
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (D589)............................................................................................. 376
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)........................................................................................................... 379
500-Sheet Finisher (D585)..............................................................................................................380
Bridge Unit (D634) / Side Tray (D635)........................................................................................ 381
Internal Shift Tray (D633)................................................................................................................ 381
1 Bin Tray (D632)............................................................................................................................ 382
Output Check Table.................................................................................................................................. 382
Copier................................................................................................................................................382
ARDF (D578).................................................................................................................................... 390
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (D589)............................................................................................. 391
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)........................................................................................................... 392
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804/B805).................................................................. 393
500-Sheet Finisher (D585)..............................................................................................................394
Bridge Unit (D634) / Side Tray (D635)........................................................................................ 395
Shift Tray (D633)..............................................................................................................................395
1 Bin Tray (D632)............................................................................................................................ 395
Two-Tray PFU (D580) / LCIT 2000 (D581) / LCIT 1200 (D631)............................................ 396
Printer Service Mode.....................................................................................................................................397
SP1-XXX (Service Mode)..........................................................................................................................397
Scanner SP Mode..........................................................................................................................................404
SP1-XXX (System and Others)..................................................................................................................404
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)..........................................................................................................404
3
Test Pattern Printing........................................................................................................................................406
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................409
4
1. Appendices
General Specifications
Main Frame
Configuration: Desktop
Laser beam scanning & Dry electrostatic transfer system

Print Process:
4 drums tandem method
Number of scans: 1
Scan: 600 dpi

Resolution:
Print: 1,200 dpi
Scan: 600dpi / 10bits/pixel

Gradation:
Print: 600dpi / 4 bits/pixel
Original type: Sheets, book, objects
Maximum original size: A3/11" x 17"
Original reference
Left rear corner, ad hoc lists
position:
5
1. Appendices
Plain (ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF)

C3a: 30 cpm (color/black & white)
C3b: 35 cpm (color/black & white)
Thick 1 (169 g/m2 or less)
C3a: 17.5 cpm (color/black & white)
C3b 17.5 cpm (color/black & white)
Copy speed:
C3a: 15 cpm (color/black & white) from By-pass
C3b: 15 cpm (color/black & white) from By-pass
OHP, Glossy (1200 dpi)
Color
C3a: 7.3 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)
C3b: 7.2 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)
First copy (normal mode):
Black & white
C3a: 4.7 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)
C3b: 4.8 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)
Warm-up time: 22.1 seconds or less (23°C)
Standard tray: 550 sheets x 2 + 100

By-pass tray: 100 sheets (Normal), 40 sheets (Thick 1: 106 - 169g/
m2), 20 sheets (Thick 2/3: 170 - 256 g/m2), 16 sheets (Thick 4: 257 -
Print Paper Capacity: 300 g/m2), 35 sheets (Postcard)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb) Optional paper feed tray: 550 sheets x 2
2000-sheet LCT: 2000 sheets
1200-sheet LCT: 1200 sheets
6
(Refer to “Supported Paper Sizes”.)
- Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 A4/8.5" x 11" (LEF)
A5 (LEF)/
Tray 2 A3/11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 600 mm

Print Paper Size:
A5 (LEF)/
Optional Tray A3/11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
2000-sheet LCT A4/8.5" x 11" (LEF)
B5 (LEF)/ A4 (LEF)/
1200-sheet LCT
257 x 182mm 297 x 210mm
A6 (SEF)/
Envelope feeder A4/LT (SEF)
Postcard
Standard tray: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb)

Optional paper tray: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb)
Printing Paper Weight: By-pass tray: 60 to 300 g/m2 (16 to 79.8 lb)
Duplex unit: 60 to 169 g/m2 (16 to 45 lb)
LCT 1200: 60 to 216 g/m2 (10 to 571Ib)
Standard exit tray: 500 sheets or more (face down)*1

Shift Tray: 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
1-bin Tray: 125 (80 g/m2)
Output Paper Capacity: 500-sheet finisher 500 (80 g/m2)
1000-sheet finisher: 250 + 1000 sheets (80 g/m2)
1000-sheet booklet finisher: 100 + 1000 sheets (80 g/m2)
*1: T6200, A4 LEF
Continuous copy: Up to 999 sheets
7
1. Appendices
Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)
Fixed:
North America Europe
25% 25%
50% 50%
65% 61%
73% 71%
78% 82%
Zoom:
85% 87%
93% 93%
100% 100%
121% 115%
129% 122%
155% 141%
200% 200%
400% 400%
Memory: Standard: 1.5 GB
120 V – 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America)

Power Source:
220 V – 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 10A (for Europe/Asia)
- 120V 220 - 240V
Maximum 1584 W or less 1700 W or less

Power Consumption:
Energy Saver
1.2 W or less 1.6 W or less
( Sleep Mode )
8
Complete system
Model State Mainframe
(*1)
40 dB(A) 44 dB(A)
Standby
or Less or Less
B/W: 66.5 dB(A)

C3a -
or Less
Operating
Noise Emission: Color: 67.0 dB(A) or Color: 70.4 dB(A) or
Less Less
(Sound Power Level)
40 dB(A) 46.9 dB(A)
Standby
or Less or Less
B/W: 68.3 dB(A)

C3b -
or Less
Operating
Color: 68.5 dB(A) or Color: 71.9 dB(A) or
Less Less
(*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT.
The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Copier: 670 x 682 x 760 mm (26.4" x 26.9" x 29.9")
Copier + PFU or LCT: 670 x 671 x 1020 mm (26.4" x 26.4" x 40.2")
Weight: Less than 120 kg (265 lb.) [with ARDF excluding toner]
Printer
PCL 6/5c
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)
Printer Languages: PDF Direct
IPDS (optional)
PictBridge (optional)
MediaPrint: JPEG/TIFF (optional)
9
1. Appendices
PCL 5c:
300 x 300 dpi : Available only in B/W mode
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits)
PCL 6:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits) / 1200 x 1200
Resolution and dpi
Gradation: RPCS:
600 x 600 dpi, 1,800 x 600 dpi*, 9600 dpi x 600 dpi*
*1,800 x 600 dpi = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits)
*9600 dpi x 600 dpi* = 600 x 600 dpi (4 bits)
PS3:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits)
C3a:
30 ppm in Plain/Middle Thick mode
17.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper type)
Printing speed:
C3b:
35 ppm in Plain/Middle Thick mode
17.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper type)
PCL 6/5c (Standard):

45 Compatible fonts
13 International fonts
1 Bitmap font
Resident Fonts:
Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional)/PDF (Standard):
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
IPDS (Optional):
108 fonts
10
USB2.0 Type A and Type B: Standard

USB Host (PictBridge): Optional
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard
Host Interfaces: Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional
IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Optional
IEEE802.11a/b/g (Wireless LAN): Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional
Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX
Scanner
Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan

Resolution: 600 dpi
Twain Mode:
Available scanning 100 to1200 dpi
Resolution Range: Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB
Scan to E-mail / Folder:

Scanning Throughput
BW: 51 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text (Print) / 200dpi /Compression: On (MH))
(ARDF mode):
FC: 51 ipm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi / Compression: Standard)
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T/1000 Base-T for TCP/IP), Wireless

Interface:
LAN, GigaEthernet
B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)

Compression Method:
Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG
11
1. Appendices
Supported Paper Sizes

Paper Feed
North America
BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT
1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit
Size T2/3/ LCT LCT

Paper BT T1 DU
(W x L) 4 2000 1200
A3 W 12" x 18" M - - - - -
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm M - M - - M
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm M - A - - M
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm M S M S S M
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm M - - - - -
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm M S A - - M
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm M - - - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm M - M - - M
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm M - A - - M
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm M S M - S M
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm M - - - - -
Ledger 11" x 17" A - A - - M
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" A - A - - M
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" A M A M M M
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" M - A - - M
Government
8.25" x 14" M - M - - M
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" A - - - - -
12
Size T2/3/ LCT LCT

Paper BT T1 DU
(W x L) 4 2000 1200
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" M - M - - M
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" M - A - - M
F SEF 8" x 13" M - M - - M
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" M - M - - M
8.25" x 13" M - M - - M
11" x 15" M - M - - M
Folio SEF
10" x 14" M - M - - M
8" x 10" M - M - - M
8K 267 x 390mm M - M - - M
16K SEF 195 x 267mm M - M - - M
16K LEF 267 x 195mm M - M - - M
Custom M - M - - -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" M - - - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" M - - - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162mm M - - - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229mm M - - - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220mm M - - - - -
Remarks:
A Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
M Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
S Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
- Not supported
13
1. Appendices
Europe/ Asia
BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT
1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit
Size T2/3/ LCT LCT

Paper BT T1 DU
(W x L) 4 2000 1200
A3 W 12" x 18" M - - - - -
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A - A - - M
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm A - A - - M
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm A M A M S M
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm A - - - - -
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm A S A - - M
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm A - - - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm M - A - - M
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm M - A - - M
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm M S A - S M
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm M - - - - -
Ledger 11" x 17" M - M - - M
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" M - A - - M
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" M S M S S M
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" M - M - - M
Government
8.25" x 14" M - M - - M
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" M - - - - -
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" M - M - - M
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" M - M - - M
F SEF 8" x 13" M - M - - M
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" M - M - - M
14
Size T2/3/ LCT LCT

Paper BT T1 DU
(W x L) 4 2000 1200
8.25" x 13" M - M - - M
11" x 15" M - M - - M
Folio SEF
10" x 14" M - M - - M
8" x 10" M - M - - M
8K 267 x 390mm M - M - - M
16K SEF 195 x 267mm M - M - - M
16K LEF 267 x 195mm M - M - - M
Custom M - M - - -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" M - - - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" M - - - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162mm M - - - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229mm M - - - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220mm M - - - - -
Remarks:
A Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
M Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
S Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
- Not supported
Paper Exit
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher
MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple, SS: Saddle Stitch,
2/3 P: 2/3 Holes Punch, 4 P: 4 Holes Punch, N4P: North Europe 4 Holes Punch
15
1. Appendices
1000-sheet booklet finisher

Paper Size (W x L) MF
Prf Clr Shf Stp SS 2/3 P 4P N4P
A3 W 12" x 18" Y Y Y - - - Y Y Y
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y 30 30 Y Y Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y 50 50 - - Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y 50 50 Y Y Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y - - - - Y
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y Y - - - - Y
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y Y Y - - - - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y 30 30 Y Y Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y 50 50 - - Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y Y Y 50 50 Y Y Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Y Y Y - - - - - Y
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y 30 30 Y Y Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y 50 50 - - Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 30 - - Y
Government
8.25" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 30 Y Y Y
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y - - - - Y
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y Y Y 50 - - - Y
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 - - - Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 - - - Y
16
1000-sheet booklet finisher

Paper Size (W x L) MF
Prf Clr Shf Stp SS 2/3 P 4P N4P
8.25" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 - - - Y
11" x 15" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y Y
Folio SEF
10" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - Y
8" x 10" Y Y Y Y 30 - - - Y
8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y Y
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y Y 50 - - - Y
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y
Custom Y Y Y - - - - - -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Y Y - - - - - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" Y Y - - - - - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm Y Y Y - - - - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm Y Y Y - - - - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Y Y Y - - - - - -
Remarks:
Y Supported
30 Output up to 30 sheets
- Not supported
1000-Sheet Finisher and 500-Sheet Finisher
MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple
17
1. Appendices
Size 1000-sheet finisher 500-sheet finisher

Paper MF 1-Bin Shift
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp Clr Shf Stp
A3 W 12" x 18" Y Y Y - - - - - - Y
297 x
A3 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
420 mm
210 x
A4 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
297 mm
297 x
A4 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
210 mm
148 x
A5 SEF Y Y Y Y - Y Y - Y Y
210 mm
210 x
A5 LEF Y Y Y Y - Y Y - Y Y
148 mm
105 x
A6 SEF Y - - - - Y - - - Y
148 mm
257 x
B4 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
364 mm
182 x
B5 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
257 mm
257 x
B5 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
182 mm
128 x
B6 SEF Y Y - - - Y - - Y Y
182 mm
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
Government 8.25" x
Y Y Y Y - Y Y 30 Y Y
Legal SEF 14"
18

5.5" x
Half Letter SEF Y Y Y Y - Y Y - Y Y
8.5"
7.25" x
Executive SEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
10.5"
10.5" x
Executive LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
7.25"
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
8.25" x
Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
13"
Folio SEF 11" x 15" Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
10" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
8" x 10" Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
267 x
8K Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y
390 mm
195 x
16K SEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
267 mm
267 x
16K LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y
195 mm
Custom Y Y - - - - - - - Y
4.125" x
Com10 Env. Y - - - - Y Y - Y Y
9.5"
3.875" x
Monarch Env. Y - - - - - - - Y Y
7.5"
114 x
C6 Env. Y Y - - - - - - Y Y
162 mm
162 x
C5 Env. Y Y - - - - - - Y Y
229 mm
19
1. Appendices

110 x
DL Env. Y Y - - - - - - Y Y
220 mm
Remarks:
Y Supported
- Not supported
Platen/ARDF Original Size Detection
Size Platen ARDF Platen ARDF
(width x length) [mm] Inches Inches Metric Metric
A3 (297 x 420) L - Y Y*3 Y
B4 (257 x 364) L - - Y*3 Y
A4 (210 x 297) L Y*1 Y Y*3 Y
A4 (297 x 210) S Y*3 Y Y*3 Y
B5 (182 x 257) L - - Y*3 Y
B5 (257 x 182) S - - Y*3 Y
A5 (148 x 210) L - - -*1 Y
A5 (210 x 148) S - - -*1 Y
B6 (128 x 182) L - - - -
B6 (182 x 128) S - - - -
11" x 17" (DLT) Y Y*2 - Y*2
11" x 15" - Y*2 - -
20
10" x 14" - Y - -
8.5" x 14" (LG) Y Y*2 - -
8.5" x 13" (F4) - Y*2 Y*4 Y*4
8.25" x 13" - - Y*4 Y*4
8" x 13"(F) - - Y*4 Y*4
8.5" x 11" (LT) Y*3 Y*2 Y*3 Y*2
11" x 8.5" (LT) Y*3 Y*2 Y*3 Y*2
8" x 10" - Y*2 - -
5.5" x 8.5" (HLT) -*1 Y - -
8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) -*1 Y - -
8K (267 x 390) - - Y*3 Y*2
16K L (195 x 267) - - Y*3 Y*2
16K S (267 x 195) - - Y*3 Y*2
7.25" x 10.5" (Executive) - Y - -
10.5" x 7.25" (Executive) - Y*2 - -
*1: Use SP4-303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT when the message “Can-t detect
original size” shows.
*2: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1.
21
1. Appendices
Software Accessories
The printer drivers and utility software are provided as following two CD-ROMs;
1: Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM
2: Scanner/PostScript® Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM.
An auto-run installer lets you to select the components you want to install.
Printer Drivers
MacOS8.6 to 9.x,
Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista, MacOSX10.1
Printer Language
Server 2008, 7
or later
PCL5c
Yes No
/ PCL6
PS3 Yes Yes
RPCS No No
• The PCL5c/6 and PS3 drivers are provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM.
• The PS3 drivers are all genuine Adobe PS drivers, except for Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista/7.
Windows 2000 uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver.
• The PPD installer for Macintosh supports Mac OS X 10.1 or later versions.
• The LAN Fax driver lets you fax documents directly form your PC. Address Book Editor and Cover
Sheet Editor are to be installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)
Scanner and LAN Fax drivers
Windows 2000, XP, Server MacOS8.6 to 9.x, MacOSX10.1

Printer Language
2003, Vista, 7 or later
Network TWAIN Yes No
LAN-FAX Yes No
22
Software Accessories
• The Network TWAIN and LAN Fax drivers are provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM.
• This software lets you fax documents directly form your PC. Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet
Editor are to be installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)
Utility Software
Software Description
Font Manager A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer
(2000/XP/Server 2003/7) This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM.
A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB

Smart Device Monitor for Admin setup utilities are also available.
(2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/7)
This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM.
A printer management utility for client users.

A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP
DeskTopBinder – SmartDeviceMonitor network.
for Client (2000/XP/Server 2003/
Vista/7) A peer-to-peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This
provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.
This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM.
A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP

Printer Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient functions for
(Mac) printing from Macintosh clients.
This is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM.
DeskTopBinder Lite itself can be used as personal document

management software and can manage both image data
DeskTopBinder Lite
converted from paper documents and application files
(2000/XP/Server 2003/7) saved in each client’s PC.
This is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM.
23
1. Appendices
Optional Equipment
ARDF (D578)
Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT

Simplex
Weight 40 to 128 g/m2 (10 to 34 lb.)
Paper Size/Weight:
Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Duplex
Weight 52 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)
Table Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Original Standard Position: Rear left corner
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Copy - 32 to 200 %
Supported Magnification Ratios: Color 32.6 to 200 %

Fax
Black & white 48.9 to 200 %
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption: 50 W or less
Dimensions (W × D × H): 550 mm x 491 mm x 120 mm (21.7" x 19.3" x 4.7")
Weight: 10 kg (22 lb.)
Paper Feed Unit (D580)
Paper Feed System: FRR
Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10% (Near end), and Empty)
Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays
Paper Weight: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.)
24
Optional Equipment
Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
Power Consumption: Less than 60 W (Max.)/ Less than 35 W (Ave,)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2")
Weight: 26 kg (57.3 lb.)
LCT 2000-sheet (D581)
Paper Size: A4 LEF/LT LEF
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (16 lb. to 68 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb.)
5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10%, Empty): Right Tray

Remaining Paper Detection:
4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Empty): Left Tray
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 55 W (Max.)/30 W (Ave.)
Size (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2")
LCT 1200-sheet (D631)
Paper Size: A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 (16 lb to 57 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 1,200 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb)
Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 30%, 10%, End)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 55 W (Max)/ 25 W (Ave.)
25
1. Appendices
348 mm x 540 mm x 290 mm

Size (W x D x H):
(13.7" x 21.3" x 11.4")
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher & Punch Unit (D589)
No punch mode:
A3/11" x 17" to A5/8.5" x 5.5" (LEF)
Punch mode:
2 holes: A3/11" x 17" to B6/5.5" x 8.5" (SEF) or A4/8.5" x 11"
to A5/8.5" x 5.5" (LEF)
3 holes:
Print Paper Size: A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) or A4, B5, 8.5" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (Europe):
A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) or A4, B5, 8.5" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (North Europe):
A3/11" x 17" to B6/5.5" x 8.5" (SEF)
Staple mode:
A3/11" x 17" to B5/8.5" x 11"
No punch mode:
52 to 256 g/m2 (14 to 68 lb.) (Shift tray)
52 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.) (Proof tray)
Punch mode:
Paper Weight:
52 to 163 g/m2 (14 to 43 lb.)
Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb.)
Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled
[Proof tray]
100 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or less
50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or more
Tray Capacity:
[Shift tray]
1000 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" (LEF) or smaller
500 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
26
Optional Equipment
Single size:
Staple capacity: 50 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller
30 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
3 positions
Staple position: 1-staple: 2 positions (Top Left, Top Right)
2-staples: 1 positions
Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)
Power consumption: 60 W
Without punch unit: 48 kg (105.8 lb.)

Weight
With punch unit: 50 Kg (110.3 lb.)
Upper Tray
A3 to A6
Paper Size:
11" x 17" to 5.5" x 8.5"
250 sheets (A4 LEF/8.5" x 11" SEF or smaller)

Paper Capacity: 50 sheets (A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller)
30 sheets (B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger)
Lower Tray
No staple mode:
A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Paper Size:
Staple mode:
A3, B4, A4, B5, DLT to LT
27
1. Appendices
No staple mode: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb)

Paper Weight:
Staple mode: 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb)
30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)

Stapler Capacity:
50 sheets (A4, B5 LEF, LT)
No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple mode: (80 g/m2, 20 lb., number of sets)
Set Size 10 to 50 -
Paper Capacity: 2 to 9
Size 10 to 30 31 to 50
A4/LT LEF
100 100 to 20 100 to 20
B5 LEF
A4/LT SEF 100 50 to 10 50 to 10
A3, B4, DLT, LG 50 50 to 10 -
1 Staple: 2 positions (Front, Rear)

Staple positions:
2 Staples: 2 positions (Upper, Left)
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 527 x 520 x 790 mm (20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1")
Paper Size: A3 to B6 (SEF)
500 sheets: A4, LT or smaller

Tray Capacity:
250 sheets: B4, LG or larger
28
Optional Equipment
30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)

Staple capacity:
50 sheets (A4, LT or smaller)
3 positions
Staple position: 1-staple: 2 positions (Top right-oblique, Top left-oblique)
2-staples: 1 positions (Left)
Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)
500-Sheet Finisher
Target Line Speed 77 mm/sec. to 205 mm/sec
Target CPM 35 cpm
12"x18", A3 SEF to A6 SEF, DLT to HLT SEF

Face-down Output Size Shift sizes: A3 SEF to B5 SEF
A5, B6, A6 SEF labels possible
52 g/m2 (45 K) to 157 g/m2 (135 K)

Paper Thickness
Up to 253 g/m2 (220K) without shift
Stapling
50 sheets: A4, LT and smaller

Stack Height for Stapling
30 sheets: B4, LG and larger
Size A3 SEF to B5 SEF (can be mixed if same width)
Stack Thickness 64g/m2 (45 K) to 157 g/m (135 K)
Front/Oblique: 1, Front/Parallel: 1
Stapling Positions
Rear/Oblique: 1, Rear/Parallel: 1, 2 locations
Output Tray Capacity
Non-staple Mode 500 sheets: A4, LT and smaller
250 sheets: B4, LG

Staple Mode and larger Stacks Size
Stack Size (Stapling)
29
1. Appendices
2 to 9 Sheets 55 to 46
A4, B5, LT LEF
A4, B5, LT SEF
A3, B4, DLT, LG
Stacking Non-Stapling Mode Vertical: 15 mm or less
Horizontal: 15 mm or less
Jogging Precision
2 to 30 Sheets 2 mm
31 to 50 Sheets 3 mm
Dimensions (W x D x H) 396 x 551 x 276 mm (15.6 x 21.7 x 10.9 in.)
Weight 12 kg (26.4 lb)
Bridge Unit (D634)
Standard sizes
A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT
Paper Size: Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 600 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m2 to 256 g/m2, 16 lb. to 68 lb.
125 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.): B4 or larger

Paper Capacity:
250 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.): A4 or smaller
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer)
Weight 5 kg (11 lb.)
30
Optional Equipment
Shift Tray (D633)
250 sheet (A4/ 81/2" x 111/2" or smaller: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)

Paper Capacity:
125 sheet (B4 81/2" x 111/2" or larger: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)
Standard sizes
A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT
Paper Size: Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 600 mm
Paper Weight: 52-256 g/m2/ 14 - 68 lbs
Power Consumption: Max 10W (Power is supplied from the mainframe.)
Dimension (W x D x H): 423 mm x 468 mm x 114 mm (16.7" x 18.4" x 4.5")
Weight: Approx. 2kg (4.4lbs)
1-bin Tray Unit (D632)
Standard Size:
Paper Size:
A3 /DLT to A5/ HLT SEF
Paper Weight: 60 to 169 g/m2, 16 to 45 lb.
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb., A4)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption: Less than 1 W
Weight: 1.7 kg
Size (W x D x H): 565 mm x 410 mm x 115 mm (22.2" x 16.1" x 4.5")
31
1. Appendices
32
Maintenance Tables
Preventive Maintenance Items
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 3 copies / original (prints/job)
Ratio 30%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Mainframe
Item 150K 200K 300K 600K EM Remarks

RTB 26
Scanner Scanner PM is 300k, not 200k
Reflector C Optics cloth
1st/2nd/3rd mirrors C Optics cloth
Ricoh exposure glass

Exposure Glass C C
cleaner
Ricoh exposure glass

ADF Exposure Glass C C
cleaner
PCDU
PCDU - K R
PCDU - Y, M, C R
Replace when the

Toner collection bottle R waste toner bottle full
message appears.
Dev. Unit - K R
Dev. Unit - Y, M, C R: 480K
33
Developer - K R
Developer - Y, M, C R: 240
Transfer
Image Transfer Belt-

R
cleaning Unit
Image Transfer Belt R
Paper Transfer Roller Unit R
Fusing
RTB 26 Heating Sleeve Belt Unit R
Pressure Roller R
Pressure Roller Bearing R, C S552R
Entrance Guide Plate C C
Exit Guide Plate C C
Exit Separation Plate C C
Cotton swab with

Thermopile C C
alcohol
Fusing Drive Gear C Replace if worn.
Pressure Roller Gear C Replace if worn.
Idler Gear C Replace if worn.
Paper Path
Registration Roller C Damp cloth
Registration Sensor C Dry cloth
Paper Dust Container C
Vertical Transport Roller C Damp cloth
Vertical Transport Sensor C Dry cloth
34
Maintenance Tables
Paper Feed Sensor C Dry cloth
Feed Roller C Dry cloth
Separation Roller C Dry cloth
Pick-up Belt C Damp cloth
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth
Fusing Exit Sensor C Dry cloth
Junction Paper Jam Roller C Dry cloth
Junction Paper Jam Sensor C Dry cloth
Duplex Unit
Duplex Transport Roller C Damp cloth
Duplex Entrance Sensor C Dry cloth
Duplex Exit Sensor C Dry cloth
Duplex Exit Roller C Damp cloth
Miscellaneous
Ozone Filter R
Exhaust Filter R
See the last of this

section for the toner
Toner Scatterproof Filter R
scatterproof filter
removal procedure.
Dust Glass C
ID Sensor C
ARDF (D578)
Item EM Remarks
Sensors C Blower brush
35
Item EM Remarks
Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
White Plate C Dry or damp cloth
Drive Gear L Grease G501
Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D580)
Item EM Remarks
Relay Sensor C Dry cloth
Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth
1200-sheet LCT (D631)
Item EM Remarks
Pick-up Roller C Dry cloth
36
Maintenance Tables
Item EM Remarks
2000-sheet LCT (D581)
Item EM Remarks
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (D589)
Items EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher Punch Kit (B807)
Items EM Remarks
Punch Chads C Discard chads.
37
Items EM Remarks
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
1 Bin Tray (D632)
Items EM Remarks
Tray C Damp cloth
Sensor C Blower brush
Bearing C S552R
Bridge Unit (D634)
Items EM Remarks
Shift Tray (D633)
Items EM Remarks
Tray C Damp cloth
One-tray Paper Feed Unit (D579)
Item EM Remarks
38
Maintenance Tables
Item EM Remarks
Pick-up Roller C Dry cloth
Side Tray (D635)
Items EM Remarks
Toner Scatterproof Filter Removal Procedure
1. QSU fan (See "QSU Fan" in the "Main Chapters: 4. Replacement and Adjustment: Fusing".)
2. Toner scatterproof filter [A] ( x 1)
Other Yield Parts
The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made by
the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine’s targeted lifetime if the machine is used
39
under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these parts are categorized not
as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts).
Mainframe
Item 240K 480K 600K 1500K 2000K Remarks
Dev. Unit - K R
Dev. Unit - Y, M, C R
Developer - Y, M, C R
ITB Unit R
Toner Supply Unit - K R
Toner Supply Unit - Y,

R
M, C
ARDF
Item 80K 120K 240K Remarks
Pick-up Roller R Number of originals
Feed Belt R Number of originals
Separation Roller R Number of originals
40
3. SP Mode Tables
Main SP Tables-1
SP1-XXX (Feed)
[Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type Thin, Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or
1001 Thick 3
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing
for each mode.
002 Tray: Plain *ENG
003 Tray: Middle Thick *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
015 Duplex: Thick 1 *ENG
41
3. SP Mode Tables
017 Tray: Plain:1200 *ENG
018 Tray: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
019 Tray: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
020 By-pass: Plain:1200 *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
021 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
022 By-pass: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
023 Duplex: Plain:1200 *ENG
024 Duplex: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
025 Duplex: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
026 Tray: Thin *ENG
027 By-pass: Thin *ENG
028 Duplex: Thin *ENG
029 Tray: Thin: 1200 *ENG
030 By-pass: Thin: 1200 *ENG
031 Duplex: Thin: 1200 *ENG
[Side to Side Registration] Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment

1002 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each
mode.
42
Main SP Tables-1
001 By-pass Table *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
006 Duplex *ENG
008 Large Capacity Tray *ENG
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color mode), Paper Type Plain, Thick, Thick1
1003
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed
timing.
002 Paper Tray1: Plain *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
003 Tray1: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
004 Paper Tray1: Thick1 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
007 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Plain *ENG
008 Tray 2/3/4/5/LCT: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
009 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]

[–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
014 By-pass: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]

[–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
020 Duplex: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
43
3. SP Mode Tables
021 Paper Tray1: Plain: 1200 *ENG
022 Tray1: Middle Thick: 1200 *ENG
023 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Plain: 1200 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
024 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Mid: 1200 *ENG
025 By-pass: Plain: 1200 *ENG
026 By-pass: Middle Thick: 1200 *ENG
027 Paper Tray1: Thick1: 1200 *ENG
028 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1:1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
029 By-pass: Thick 1: 1200 *ENG
030 Duplex: Plain: 1200 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
031 Duplex: Middle Thick: 1200 *ENG
032 Duplex: Thick 1: 1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display
LG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass tray.
001 This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is less than
8.5”.
0: OFF (Letter/SEF), 1: ON (Legal/SEF)

1101
Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
001 Pre-rotation Start Temp. *ENG [-50 to 200 / -50 / 1 deg/step]
002 Reload Target Temp.:Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg/step]
003 Reload Target Temp.:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
004 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Delta:Cold:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
44
Main SP Tables-1
006 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]
[Forced Ready Set]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
007 Forced Reload Time :Cold *ENG [0 to 100 / 9 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for warm temperature in color mode.
008 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
009 Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
010 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for warm temperature in color mode.
011 Forced Reload Time:Warm *ENG [0 to 100 / 9 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for hot temperature in color mode.
012 Temp.:Delta:Hot:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
013 Temp.:Delta:Hot:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
014 Temp.:Delta:Hot:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for hot temperature in color mode.
015 Forced Reload Time:Hot *ENG [0 to 100 / 9 / 1 sec/step]
[Reload Permit Setting Temp.]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode.
016 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
017 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
018 Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode.
45
3. SP Mode Tables
Forced Reload
019 *ENG [0 to 100 / 9 / 1 sec/step]
Time:Cold:BW

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2.
Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Cent
020 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
er
021 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
022 Temp.Delta:Cold:BW2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
[Forced Ready Set]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2.
023 Time:Cold:BW2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
[Feed Permit Setting]

1102
Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing.
001 Temp.:Lower Delta:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
003 Temp.:Upper Delta:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
006 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
007 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1
Temp.:Upper
009 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
1
46
Main SP Tables-1
012 Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
013 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Upper
015 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
017 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
2
018 Rotation Time:Sp2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
019 Feed Permit Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
1105 [Print Target Temp]
(Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex)

Roller Type Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure Pressure roller
Paper Type Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special

001

002 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color
printing.

003

004

005
47
3. SP Mode Tables

006 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full coloe
printing.

007

008
009 Thin:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
010 Thin:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
011 Thin:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
012 Thin:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
013 M-thick:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
014 M-thick:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
015 M-thick:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 150 / 1 deg/step]
016 M-thick:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
48
Main SP Tables-1
041 Envelop:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step]
042 Envelop:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
103 *ENG [100 to 180 / 133 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
107 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:FC:Center:Low
109 *ENG [100 to 180 / 143 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
49
3. SP Mode Tables
110 M-thick:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
M-thick:BW:Center:Low
111 *ENG [100 to 180 / 143 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:BW:Press:Low
112 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
113 Thick1:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
114 Thick1:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Thick1:BW:Center:Low
115 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
116 Thick1:BW:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
117 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
118 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
119 *ENG [100 to 180/ 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
120 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
121 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
122 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
123 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
124 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
50
Main SP Tables-1
129 M-thick:Glossy:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
130 M-thick:Glossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
131 OHP:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 158 / 1 deg/step]
132 OHP:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
133 Envelop:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 163 / 1 deg/step]
134 Envelop:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
135 Thin:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 128 / 1 deg/step]
136 Thin:FC:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
137 Thin:BW:Center:Low Speed *ENG [100 to 180 / 128 / 1 deg/step]
138 Thin:BW:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
1106 [Fusing Temp. Display]
001 Heat Center - [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step]
002 Heat End - Displays the temperature of the heating roller.
003 Press Center - [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step]
004 Press End - Displays the temperature of the heating roller.
1107 [Standby Target Temp. Setting]
Stanby/Preheat1:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 sec/step]

001 Specifies the time that the fusing heater turns off after the fusing unit temperature has
reached its target temperature.
Stanby/Preheat1: Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the ready or energy save 1 mode.
51
3. SP Mode Tables
Preheat2:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 sec/step]

003
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the ready or energy save 2 mode.
Preheat2:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

004
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Low Power:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 sec/step]

005
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the low power mode.
Low Power:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 60 / 1 deg/step]

006
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the low power mode.
Print Ready:Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

007
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the print ready condition.
Print Ready:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

008
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the print ready condition.
1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.]
Center *ENG [0 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg/step]

001
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job.
Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job.
1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing]
Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step]

001 Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing temperature is 17°C
or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low temperature.
Temp.: Threshold: High *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]

002 Specifies the threshold temperature for high temperature. If the fusing temperature is 30°C
or more, the machine executes the fusing mode for high temperature.
52
Main SP Tables-1
Low Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

in low temperature condition, this temperature is added to the target temperature.
High Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

in high temperature condition, this temperature is added to the target temperature.
005 Job Low Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
006 Job High Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Job Low Temp.

007 *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
Job High Temp.

008 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
1113 [Curl Correction]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
Execute Pattern *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On (No Decurl), 2: On
Selects the curl correction type.
Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step]

002
Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.
Humidity:Threshold:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

003
Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity.
*ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step]
004 humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in middle humidity.
*ENG [0 to 200 / 50 / 1 deg/step]
005 humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity.
006 *ENG [0 to 200 / 50 / 1 deg/step]
humid:No Decurl
53
3. SP Mode Tables
Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in middle humidity.
*ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 1 deg/step]
007 humid:No Decurl
Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in high humidity.
CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

008 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in middle
humidity.
CPM:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

009 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high
humidity.
CPM:M-humid:No Decurl *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

010 Specifies the CPM ratio against of the no decurl control to the normal operation in middle
humidity.
CPM:H-humid:No Decurl *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

011 Specifies the CPM ratio against of the no decurl control to the normal operation in high
humidity.
1115 [Target Temp. Correction]
Temp.:Delta:End *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]

001
Specifies the different temperature between end and center of the heating roller.
[CPM Down Setting]

1124
Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode.
Low:Down Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -20 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the CPM down threshold temperature for the low temperature condition. If the
fusing temperature decreases -20°C (adjustable) below the target temperature, the
machine enters the CPM down mode.
54
Main SP Tables-1
Low:Up Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -15 / 1 deg/step]
002 Specifies the CPM up threshold temperature for the low temperature condition. If the fusing
temperature increases -15°C (adjustable) below the target temperature, the machine
enters the CPM up mode.
Low :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

003 Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature
condition.
Low :2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

004 Specifies the 2nd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature
condition.
Low :3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]

005 Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature
condition.
High :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

006 Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high temperature
condition.
High:2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]

007 Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high temperature
condition.
High:3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]

008 Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high temperature
condition.
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step]
009 Temp.:A3:Press End
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 185 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size.
55
3. SP Mode Tables
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step]
012 Temp.:DLT:Press End
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 185 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 145 / 1 deg/step]
015 Temp.:B4:Press End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 155 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B4 paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
018 Temp.:LT:Fuser End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 195 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT paper size.
56
Main SP Tables-1
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
021 Temp.:A4:Fuser End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 195 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A4 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
57
3. SP Mode Tables
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
High:1st CPM:Down
*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
033 Temp.:A6:Press Center
High:2nd CPM:Down
*ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
High:3rd CPM:Down
*ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
Judging Interval *ENG [0 to 250 / 5 / 1 sec/step]

051
Specifies the interval for CPM down judgment.
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
101 Time:A3
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
102 Time:A3
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
103 Time:A3
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
104 Time:DLT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT.
58
Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
105 Time:DLT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT.
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
106 Time:DLT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT.
High :1st CPM:Down [0 to 10,000 / C3c: 30, C3d: 20 / 1 sec/

*ENG
107 Time:B4 step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
108 Time:B4
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
109 Time:B4
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
110 Time:LT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT.
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
111 Time:LT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT.
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
112 Time:LT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT.
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
113 Time:A4
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
114 Time:A4
59
3. SP Mode Tables
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
115 Time:A4

*ENG
116 Time:B5 step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
117 Time:B5
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
118 Time:B5

*ENG
119 Time:A5 step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
120 Time:A5
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
121 Time:A5

*ENG
122 Time:B6 step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
123 Time:B6
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
124 Time:B6
60
Main SP Tables-1

*ENG
125 Time:A6 step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
126 Time:A6
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
127 Time:A6
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
151 Time:A3:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
154 Time:DLT:Low Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT.
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT.
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT.
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
157 Time:B4:Low Speed
61
3. SP Mode Tables
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
160 Time:LT:Low Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT.
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT.
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT.
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
62
Main SP Tables-1
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
63
3. SP Mode Tables
[CPM Down Setting]

1125
Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode.
High :1st CPM:A3:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
001 Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 Large paper size.
High :2nd CPM:A3:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 Large paper size.
High :3rd CPM:A3:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 Large paper size.
High :1st CPM:A3:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 Small paper size.
High :2nd CPM:A3:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 Small paper size.
High :3rd CPM:A3:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 Small paper size.
High :1st CPM:DLT:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT Large paper size.
High :2nd CPM:DLT:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Large paper size.
High :3rd CPM:DLT:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT Large paper size.
64
Main SP Tables-1
High :1st CPM:DLT:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT Small paper size.
High :2nd CPM:DLT:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Small paper size.
High :3rd CPM:DLT:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT Small paper size.
High :1st CPM:B4:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 90, C3d: 75 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 Large paper size.
High :2nd CPM:B4:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B4 Large paper size.
High :3rd CPM:B4:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 Large paper size.
High :1st CPM:B4:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 90, C3d: 75 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 Small paper size.
High :2nd CPM:B4:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B4 Small paper size.
High :3rd CPM:B4:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 Small paper size.
High :1st CPM:LT:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT Large paper size.
65
3. SP Mode Tables
High :2nd CPM:LT:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT Large paper size.
High :3rd CPM:LT:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT Large paper size.
High :1st CPM:LT:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT Small paper size.
High :2nd CPM:LT:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT Small paper size.
High :3rd CPM:LT:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT Small paper size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
High :3rd CPM:A4:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A4 Large paper size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High :2nd CPM:A4:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
66
Main SP Tables-1
High :3rd CPM:A4:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A4 Small paper size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c:80, C3d: 70 / 1 %/step]
High :2nd CPM:B5:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
High :3rd CPM:B5:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B5 Large paper size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c:80, C3d: 70 / 1 %/step]
High :2nd CPM:B5:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
High :3rd CPM:B5:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B5 Small paper size.
High :1st CPM:A5:Normal

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step]
037 Speed
High :2nd CPM:A5:Normal

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
038 Speed
High :3rd CPM:A5:Normal

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
039 Speed
67
3. SP Mode Tables
High :1st CPM:B6:Normal

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step]
040 Speed
High :2nd CPM:B6:Normal

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
041 Speed
High :3rd CPM:B6:Normal

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
042 Speed
High :1st CPM:A6:Normal

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step]
043 Speed
High :2nd CPM:A6:Normal

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
044 Speed
High :3rd CPM:A6:Normal

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
045 Speed

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
101 Size:Middle Speed

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
High:1st CPM:A3:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:A3:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
68
Main SP Tables-1
High:1st CPM:DLT:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:DLT:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Large paper size.
High:1st CPM:DLT:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:DLT:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Small paper size.
High:1st CPM:B4:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:B4:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
High:1st CPM:B4:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:B4:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
High:1st CPM:LT:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:LT:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT Large paper size.
69
3. SP Mode Tables
High:1st CPM:LT:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:LT:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT Small paper size.
High:1st CPM:A4:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:A4:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:A4:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:B5:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
High:2nd CPM:B5:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
70
Main SP Tables-1
High:1st CPM:A5:Middle
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
137 Speed
High:2nd CPM:A5:Middle
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
138 Speed
High:1st CPM:B6:Middle
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
140 Speed
High:2nd CPM:B6:Middle
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
141 Speed
High:1st CPM:A6:Middle
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
143 Speed
High:2nd CPM:A6:Middle
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
144 Speed
High:1st CPM:A3:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
201 Size:Low Speed
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
204 Size:Low Speed
High:1st CPM:DLT:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
207 Size:Low Speed
High:1st CPM:DLT:Small
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
210 Size:Low Speed
71
3. SP Mode Tables
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
213 Size:Low Speed
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
216 Size:Low Speed
High:1st CPM:LT:Large
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
219 Size:Low Speed
High :1st CPM:LT:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
222 Size:Low Speed

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
225 Size:Low Speed

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
228 Size:Low Speed

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
231 Size:Low Speed

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
234 Size:Low Speed
High :1st CPM:A5:Low

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
237 Speed
High :1st CPM:B6:Low

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
240 Speed
72
Main SP Tables-1
High :1st CPM:A6:Low

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
243 Speed
1141 [Fusing SC Issue Time Info]
001 SC Number *ENG Displays the issued SC number.
104 Htg Roller:End Det1 *ENG

[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]
Displays the temperature at the center
153 Press Roller:Ctr Det2 *ENG of the heating roller when an SC was
issued.
203 Press Roller:Ctr Det3 *ENG
1142 [Fusing Jam Detection]
SC Display *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection.
0: No detection, 1: Detection
1151 [Pressure Setting]
Pressure Change ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
001 Enables or disables the pressure switching control for the fusing unit.
0: OFF , 1: ON
73
3. SP Mode Tables

002

003

004
Depressure Position *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 220 / 10 msec/step]

005 Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the depression position
(no pressure).
Shift Time *ENG [0 to 3600 / 60 / 1 sec/step]

011 Specifies the timing for depressing the fusing unit. If the machine does not get any jobs for
specified time by this SP after copying or printing, the machine depresses the fusing unit.
101 Pressure:Plain1/2 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in normal speed.
2: Position 2
102 Pressure:Thin *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
103 Pressure:M-thick *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
110 Pressure:Envelope *ENG [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
74
Main SP Tables-1
151 Pressure:Plain1/2:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in low speed.
2: Position 2
152 Pressure:M-thick:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
153 Pressure:Thick1:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
156 Pressure:Plain1/2:Glossy *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
157 Pressure:M-thick:Glossy *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
158 Pressure:OHP *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
159 Pressure:Envelope:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
160 Pressure:Thin:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Pressure:Thick4 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for thick 4 paper.
161
2: Position 2
Pressure:Postcard *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for postcard.
162
2: Position 2
75
3. SP Mode Tables
Filler Edge Detection Counter ENG [0 to 9,000,000 / - / 1 /step]

201
Displays the detection time for the edge of the pressure roller actuator.
1152 [Fusing Nip Band Check]
Execute - [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller.
If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure roller or
install a new fusing unit.
Pre-idling Time *ENG [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 sec/step]

002
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001.
Stop Time * ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step]

003
Specifies the time for measuring the nip.
Pressure Position * ENG [1 to 3 / 3 / 1 ]

004
Specifies the pressure position for measuring the nip.
1153 [Fuser Cleaning]
001 Compulsion execution - Execute the fusing cleaning mode.
Operation interval *ENG [1 to 300 / 0 / 1 K/step]
002 Adjusts the execution interval for the fusing cleaning mode.
1K= 100 sheets
Control Temp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 180 / 1°C/step]

003
Specifies the heating roller temperature for the fusing cleaning mode.
Page Count *ENG [1 to 300000 / - / 1 page/step]

004
Displays the page counter for the fusing cleaning mode.
1801 [Motor Speed Adj.]
001 Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
002 Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
76
Main SP Tables-1
003 Registration:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
004 Registration:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
005 Registration:Middle Thick:High *ENG
006 Registration:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
007 Registration:Thick1:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]

[–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
010 Duplex CW:Plane:Low *ENG
011 Duplex CW:Normal:High *ENG
012 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Low *ENG
013 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG
014 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
016 Duplex CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
019 Duplex CCW:Normal:High *ENG
020 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
021 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:high *ENG
023 Duplex CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
024 Reverse CW:Normal:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step]
025 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
026 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step]
77
3. SP Mode Tables
028 Reverse CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
029 Reverse CCW:Normal:High *ENG
030 Reverse CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
031 Reverse CCW:Middle Thick:High *ENG
033 Reverse CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
034 Feed:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
035 Feed:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
036 Feed:Middle thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
037 Feed:Middle thick:Mid *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
038 Feed:Middle thick:High *ENG
039 Feed:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
040 Feed:Thick 1:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]

[–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
043 Bridge Motor:Low *ENG
044 Bridge Motor:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
045 Bridge Motor:High *ENG
060 KOpcDevMot:High *ENG
061 KOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.3 / 0.01 %/step]
062 KOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
063 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
064 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
065 MOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
78
Main SP Tables-1
069 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
070 YOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
071 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
072 Fusing: High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
073 Fusing: Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.8 / 0.01 %/step]
074 Fusing: Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.3 / 0.01 %/step]
075 TransferMot:High *ENG
076 TransferMot:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.1 / 0.01 %/step]
077 TransferMot:Low *ENG
078 TonerMot *ENG [–30 to 30 / 10 / 5 %/step]
079 Fusing: 1200 *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Drum Adjust *ENG
100 0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the drum amplitude adjustment.
101 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG
103 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG
104 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG
106 YOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG
107 MOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
109 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
110 MOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG
111 COpcDevMot:1200 *ENG [– 7 to 7 / 0 / 1 step/step]
112 YOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG
79
3. SP Mode Tables
120 Long:Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
121 Long:Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
122 Long:Registration:Middle Thick:High *ENG
Long:Registration:Middle [–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step]

123 *ENG
Thick:Middle
124 Long:Registration:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
125 Long:Registration:Thick 1:Middle *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1 / 0.1 %/step]
129 Long:Fusing:Plain:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step]
130 Long:Fusing:Plain:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.1 / 0.01 %/step]
131 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step]
132 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:Middle *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.4 / 0.01 %/step]
133 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.1 / 0.01 %/step]
134 Long:Fusing:Thick 1:Middle *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.01 %/step]
1902 [Amplitude Control]
001 Execute *ENG Execute the drum phase adjustment.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
Displays the result of the drum phase adjustment.
002 Result *ENG 0: Successfully done
2: Sampling failure
3: Insufficient detection number
80
Main SP Tables-1
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
003 Auto Execution *ENG Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on or off.
0: Off, 1: On
[Fan Cooling Time Set]

1950
Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end.
002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG
006 Main Suction Fan *ENG
007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG
008 PSU Fan *ENG
009 QSU Heater Cooling Fan *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
AC Control board Cooling

010 *ENG
Fan
012 Toner Supply Cooling Fan *ENG
[Fan Start Time Set]

1951
Adjust the start time for each fan motor after a job end.
002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
006 Main Suction Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
008 PSU Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
009 Fusing IH Coil Fan *ENG
010 IH Power Supply Fan *ENG

[0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
012 Third Duct Fan *ENG
81
3. SP Mode Tables
[Fan Control Off Mode Time Set]

1952
Specifies the time for fan control off mode.
001 - *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 min./step]
[Extra Fan Control]

1953
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Extra Fan Cooling State *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Displays the extra fan cooling is On or Off.
Extra Fan Cooling: Time: [0 to 180 / C2.5a: 110, C2.5b: 100 / 1

002 *ENG
Threshold min./step]
Extra Fan Cooling: Rotat:

003 *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 min./step]
Threshold
Displays the execution time and date of the

004 Extra Fan Cooling: Start Date *ENG
extra fan cooling.
Extra Fan Cooling Time *ENG [0 to 120 / 30 / 0.1 min./step]

005
Specifies the execution time for the extra fan cooling.
[Extra Fan Control]

1954
Fan Cooling Time:Fusing Exit

002 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Main

006 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Suction Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Paper Exit

007 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:PSU

008 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Fusing IH

009 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Coil Fan:Initial
82
Main SP Tables-1
Fan Cooling Time:IH Power

010 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Supply Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Second

011 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Duct Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Third Duct

012 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
83
3. SP Mode Tables
Main SP Tables-2
SP2-XXX (Drum)
[Charge DC Voltage] Charge Roller DC Voltage Adjustment

2005
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3-041-1 Default:
ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-041-1, the values in
these SP modes are used for printing.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 1000 / 690 / 10 –V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
[Charge DC: Correction]
[–100 to 100 / C3c: -26, C3d: -28 / 1 –V/

013 PCU:Plain *ENG
step]
014 PCU:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / -29 / 1 –V/step]
84
Main SP Tables-2
015 PCU:Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / -28 / 1 –V/step]
016 HVP:Plain *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step]
017 HVP:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step]
018 HVP: Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / 29 / 1 –V/step]
[Charge AC Voltage] Charge Roller AC Voltage Adjustment

2006
Adjusts the AC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (AC component) is adjusted by environment correction (SP2-007-xxx to
SP2-011-xxx). These SPs are activated only when SP2-012-1 is set to "1: manual
control".
001 Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
002 Plain: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
004 Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
005 Thick 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
010 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
011 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
2012 [Charge Output Control]
85
3. SP Mode Tables
Selects the AC voltage control type.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 AC Voltage *ENG 0: Process control
1: Manual control (AC voltages are decided
with SP2006.)
2013 [Environmental Correction: PCU]
Displays the environmental condition, which is

measured in absolute humidity.
[1 to 5 / – / 1 /step]
Current Environmental FC: 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m3)

001 *ENG
Display 2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m3)
3: MM (11.3 < MM <= 18.0 g/m3)
4: MH (18.0 < MH <= 24.0 g/m3)
5: HH (24.0 g/m3 < HH)
Selects the environmental condition manually.

[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Forced Setting *ENG 0: The environmental condition is determined
automatically.
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
Changes the humidity threshold between LL

Absolute Humidity: Threshold and ML.
003 *ENG
1
[0 to 100 / 3.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Changes the humidity threshold between ML

Absolute Humidity: Threshold and MM.
004 *ENG
2
[0 to 100 / 8.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Changes the humidity threshold between MM

Absolute Humidity: Threshold and MH.
005 *ENG
3
[0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Changes the humidity threshold between MH

Absolute Humidity: Threshold and HH.
006 *ENG
4
[0 to 100 / 22.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
86
Main SP Tables-2
Displays the current temperature.

007 Current Temp. FC: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]
Current Relative Humidity FC: Displays the current relative humidity.

008 *ENG
Display [0 to 100 / - / 1%RH/step]
Current Absolute Humidity Displays the absolute humidity.

009 *ENG
FC: Display [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Displays the previous environmental condition,

Previous Environmental Bk: which is measured in absolute humidity.
010 *ENG
Display [1 to 5 / - / 1 /step]
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
Displays the previous temperature.

011 Previous Temp. Bk: Display *ENG
[0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]
Previous Relative Humidity Displays the previous relative humidity.

012 *ENG
Bk: Display [0 to 100 / - / 1%RH/step]
Previous Absolute Humidity Displays the previous absolute humidity.

013 *ENG
Bk: Display [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
[Charge AC Adj: Result]

2015
Displays a result of the AC charge adjustment.
001 Bk *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Success
002 M *ENG
1: Out of tolerance range
003 C *ENG
2: Out of adjustable range
004 Y *ENG 3: Adjustment incompleted
[Color Registration Correction] FA
These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are
2101 adjusted at the factory. However, you must input a value for SP2101-001 after replacing
the laser optics housing unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Main
chapters: 4. Replacement and Adjustment: Laser Optics". The value should be provided
with the new laser optics housing unit.
87
3. SP Mode Tables
001 Main Dot: Bk *ENG
002 Main Dot: Ma *ENG

[–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
003 Main Dot: Cy *ENG
004 Main Dot: Ye *ENG
005 Sub Line: Bk *ENG
006 Sub Line: Ma *ENG

[–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
007 Sub Line: Cy *ENG
008 Sub Line: Ye *ENG
[Erase Margin Adjustment] (Area, Paper Size)

2103
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.
001 Lead Edge Width *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Trail. Edge Width *ENG
003 Left *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
004 Right *ENG
006 Duplex Trail. L Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 Duplex Trail. M Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
008 Duplex Trail. S Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
009 Duplex Left Edge *ENG

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
010 Duplex Right Edge *ENG
011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick *ENG

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
015 Duplex Right Edge:Thick *ENG
88
Main SP Tables-2
016 Lead Edge Width: Thin *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
017 Trail. Edge Width: Thin *ENG
018 Duplex Trail. L Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
019 Duplex Trail. M Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
020 Duplex Trail. S Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
[LD Power Adj.] (Process Speed, Color)
2105 Adjusts the LD power of each color for each process speed.
Each LD power setting is decided by process control.
001 High Speed: Bk *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]

002 High Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner on
the output.
003 High Speed: Cy *ENG
004 High Speed: Ye *ENG output.
005 Middle Speed: Bk *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]

006 Middle Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner on
the output.
007 Middle Speed: Cy *ENG
008 Middle Speed: Ye *ENG output.
009 Low Speed: Bk *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]

010 Low Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner on
the output.
011 Low Speed: Cy *ENG
012 Low Speed: Ye *ENG output.
[Test Pattern]
2109
Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD.
003 Pattern Selection - [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
89
3. SP Mode Tables
0 None 11. Independent Pattern (1dot)

3: Horizontal (1dot) 14. Trimming Area
4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line 17: Band (Horizontal)
6: Grid Horizontal Line 18: Band (Vertical)
7: Grid pattern Small 19: Checker Flag Pattern
8: Grid pattern Large 20: Grayscale Vertical Margin
9: Argyle Pattern Small 21: Grayscale Horizontal Margin
10: Argyle Pattern Large 23: Full Dot Pattern
Specifies the color for the test pattern.

[1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
005 Color Selection -
1: All colors, 2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4:
Cyan
006 Density: Bk -
Specifies the color density for the test pattern.
007 Density: Ma - [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
008 Density: Cy - 0: Lightest density

15: Darkest density
009 Density: Ye -
2111 [Forced Line Position Adj.]
Executes the fine line position adjustment twice.

001 Mode a - If this SP is not completed (NG is displayed), do
SP2111-003 first and then try this SP again.
Executes the fine line position adjustment once.

002 Mode b - If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003 first
and then try this SP again.
Executes the rough line position adjustment once.
003 Mode c - After doing this SP, make sure to execute

SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line
position adjustment is not perfectly done.
90
Main SP Tables-2
2112 [TM/ID Sensor Check] ID Sensor Check FA
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Execute - This SP is used to check the ID sensors at the

factory. The results of this SP are displayed in
SP2140 to SP2145.
[Skew Adjustment]
Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.

2117
These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or when
SC2.585 occurs. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Main chapters: 4.
Replacement and Adjustment: Laser Optics".
001 Pulse: M *ENG
002 Pulse: C *ENG [–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
003 Pulse: Y *ENG
2118 [Skew Adjustment]
001 Execute: M *ENG Changes the current skew adjustment values to

the values specified with SP2117.
002 Execute: C *ENG
These SPs must be used when a new laser optics
housing unit is installed or when SC2.585
occurs. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing
003 Execute: Y *ENG
Unit" in the "Main chapters: 4. Replacement and
Adjustment: Laser Optics".
[Skew Adjustment Display]

2119
Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor.
001 M *ENG
002 C *ENG [–50 to 50 / - / 1 pulse/step]
003 Y *ENG
91
3. SP Mode Tables
[Area Mag. Correction] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA
Adjusts the magnification for each area. The main scan (297 mm) is divided into 8 areas.
Area 1 is at the front side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 8 is at the rear
2150 side of the machine (right side of the image).
Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print.
Increasing a value makes the image shift to the right side on the print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
027 Area 0: Bk *ENG [-255 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]
028 Area 1: Bk *ENG
029 Area 2: Bk *ENG
030 Area 3: Bk *ENG
031 Area 4: Bk *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
032 Area 5: Bk *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
033 Area 6: Bk *ENG
034 Area 7: Bk *ENG
035 Area 8: Bk *ENG
036 Area 9: Bk *ENG

Not used
92
Main SP Tables-2
080 Area 1: Ma *ENG
081 Area 2: Ma *ENG
082 Area 3: Ma *ENG
083 Area 4: Ma *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
085 Area 6: Ma *ENG
086 Area 7: Ma *ENG
087 Area 8: Ma *ENG
088 Area 9: Ma *ENG

Not used
132 Area 1: Cy *ENG
133 Area 2: Cy *ENG
134 Area 3: Cy *ENG
135 Area 4: Cy *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
137 Area 6: Cy *ENG
138 Area 7: Cy *ENG
139 Area 8: Cy *ENG
140 Area 9: Cy *ENG

Not used
93
3. SP Mode Tables
184 Area 1: Ye *ENG
185 Area 2: Ye *ENG
186 Area 3: Ye *ENG
187 Area 4: Ye *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
189 Area 6: Ye *ENG
190 Area 7: Ye *ENG
191 Area 8: Ye *ENG
192 Area 9: Ye *ENG

Not used
[Area Shad. Correct. Setting] FA
Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power.

The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited from area 1
2152 to area 14.
For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image) and
area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
For Cyan and Yellow, area 1 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image)
and area 14 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image).
94
Main SP Tables-2
001 Area 0: Bk *ENG
002 Area 1: Bk *ENG
003 Area 2: Bk *ENG
004 Area 3: Bk *ENG
005 Area 4: Bk *ENG
006 Area 5: Bk *ENG
007 Area 6: Bk *ENG

008 Area 7: Bk *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
009 Area 8: Bk *ENG
010 Area 9: Bk *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

033 Area 0: Ma *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
95
3. SP Mode Tables
034 Area 1: Ma *ENG
035 Area 2: Ma *ENG
036 Area 3: Ma *ENG
037 Area 4: Ma *ENG
038 Area 5: Ma *ENG
039 Area 6: Ma *ENG
040 Area 7: Ma *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
041 Area 8: Ma *ENG
042 Area 9: Ma *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

065 Area 0: Cy *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
96
Main SP Tables-2
066 Area 1: Cy *ENG
067 Area 2: Cy *ENG
068 Area 3: Cy *ENG
069 Area 4: Cy *ENG
070 Area 5: Cy *ENG
071 Area 6: Cy *ENG
072 Area 7: Cy *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
073 Area 8: Cy *ENG
074 Area 9: Cy *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

097 Area 0: Ye *ENG
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
97
3. SP Mode Tables
098 Area 1: Ye *ENG
099 Area 2: Ye *ENG
100 Area 3: Ye *ENG
101 Area 4: Ye *ENG
102 Area 5: Ye *ENG
103 Area 6: Ye *ENG
104 Area 7: Ye *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
105 Area 8: Ye *ENG
106 Area 9: Ye *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
[Line Position Adj. Result]
Displays the values for each correction.

• "Paper Int. Mag: Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value between two
sheets of paper.
• "Mag.Cor. Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value.
2181
• "M. Scan Erro." indicates the shift correction value in the main scan direction.
• "S. Scan Erro." Indicates the shift correction value in the sub scan direction.
• "M. Cor.: Dot" indicates the dot correction value in the main scan direction.
• "M. Cor.: Subdot" indicates the sub dot correction value in the main scan direction.
• Bk: Black, M: Magenta, C: Cyan, Y: Yellow
001 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
98
Main SP Tables-2
002 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
003 Skew: M *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
005 M. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG
006 M. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG
007 M. Scan Erro.: Right: M *ENG

[–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
008 S. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG
009 S. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG
010 S. Scan Erro.: Right: M *ENG
011 M. Cor.: Dot: M *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
012 M. Cor.: Subdot: M *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
013 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: M *ENG
014 Mag.Cor. Subdot: M *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
015 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
016 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
021 Skew: C *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
023 M. Scan Erro.: Left: C *ENG
024 M. Scan Erro.: Center: C *ENG
025 M. Scan Erro.: Right: C *ENG

[–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
026 S. Scan Erro.: Left: C *ENG
027 S. Scan Erro.: Center: C *ENG
028 S. Scan Erro.: Right: C *ENG
029 M. Cor.: Dot: C *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
99
3. SP Mode Tables
030 M. Cor.: Subdot: C *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
031 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: C *ENG
032 Mag.Cor. Subdot: C *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
033 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
034 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
039 Skew: Y *ENG
041 M. Scan Erro.: Left: Y *ENG
042 M. Scan Erro.: Center: Y *ENG
043 M. Scan Erro.: Right: Y *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
044 S. Scan Erro.: Left: Y *ENG
045 S. Scan Erro.: Center: Y *ENG
046 S. Scan Erro.: Right: Y *ENG
047 M. Cor.: Dot: Y *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
048 M. Cor.: Subdot: Y *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
049 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Y *ENG
050 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Y *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
051 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
052 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
100
Main SP Tables-2
[Line Position Adj. Offset]

2182
(Color) M. Scan: Main scan, S. Scan: Sub-scan
001 M Magnification *ENG

Adjusts the line position manually.
002 C Magnification *ENG
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%/step]
003 Y Magnification *ENG
When line shifts are not corrected by the automatic line position adjustment, do this SP.
Increasing a value reduces the image in the main scan direction.
Decreasing a value enlarges the image in the main scan direction.
004 M. Scan: High: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
005 M. Scan: High: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
006 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
007 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
008 M. Scan: Low: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
009 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
010 M. Scan: High: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
011 M. Scan: High: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
012 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
013 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
014 M. Scan: Low: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
015 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
016 M. Scan: High: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
017 M. Scan: High: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
018 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
019 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
020 M. Scan: Low: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
021 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
101
3. SP Mode Tables
022 S. Scan: High: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
023 S. Scan: High: Subline: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
024 S. Scan: Medium: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
025 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
026 S. Scan: Low: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
027 S. Scan: Low: Subline: M *ENG Not used
028 S. Scan: High: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
029 S. Scan: High: Subline: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
030 S. Scan: Medium: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
031 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
032 S. Scan: Low: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
033 S. Scan: Low: Subline: C *ENG Not used
034 S. Scan: High: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
035 S. Scan: High: Subline: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
036 S. Scan: Medium: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
037 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
038 S. Scan: Low: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
039 S. Scan: Low: Subline: Y *ENG Not used
[Main Scan Length Target Display]
Displays/adjusts the target value for the main scan length correction of the line position
adjustment.
2185
After replacing the laser optics housing unit, input the standard value for Bk provided with
the new unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Main chapters: 4.
Replacement and Adjustment: Laser Optics". It is not necessary to input the values for the
other colors; these are automatically adjusted after doing the line position adjustment.
102
Main SP Tables-2
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 266667 / 249449 / 1 sub-dot/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
2193 [MUSIC Condition Set] Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ]
Auto Execution *ENG
001 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables/disables the automatic line position adjustment
Page: Job End: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 500 / 1 page/step]

002 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode after
job end.
Page: Job End: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

003
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode after job end.
Page: Interrupt: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

004 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode during
job.
Page: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]

005
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode during jobs.
Page: Stand-By: BW *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand-by
006 mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in BW printing
Page: Stand-By: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for FC printing mode in stand-by
007 mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in color printing
103
3. SP Mode Tables
Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1deg/step]
008 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b:
adjustment once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of
several conditions.
Time *ENG [1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]

009 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment once). The
Magnification *ENG [0 to 10 / 0.1 / 0.01%/step]

010 Adjusts the magnification threshold for line position adjustment. If the length of the main
scan is changed by this amount since the previous MUSIC, then MSUIC is done again.
Temp. 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1deg/step]
011 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a:
adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of
several conditions.
Time 2 *ENG [1 to 9999 / 600 / 1 minute/step]

012 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a: adjustment twice). The
Page: Power ON:BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and FC printing mode at
013 power-on. The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in BW and
color printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the condition of
SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
2194 [MUSIC Execution Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result
Year *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1 year/step]

001
Displays the year of the last MUSIC execution.
Month *ENG [1 to 12 / - / 1 month/step]

002
Displays the month of the last MUSIC execution.
Day *ENG [1 to 31 / - / 1 day/step]

003
Displays the date of the last MUSIC execution.
104
Main SP Tables-2
Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / - / 1 hour/step]

004
Displays the time (hour) of the last MUSIC execution.
Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / - / 1 minute/step]

005
Displays the time (minute) of the last MUSIC execution.
Temperature *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]

006
Displays the temperature of the last MUSIC execution.
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
007 Execution Result *ENG
0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed
008 Number of Execution *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step]
009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step]
010 Error Result: M *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1 /step]

0: Not done
011 Error Result: C *ENG
1: Completed successfully
2: Cannot detect patterns
3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target
012 Error Result: Y *ENG 4: Not used
5: Out of the adjustment range
6 to 9: Not used
[Music A/D Interval]

2198
ADC Trigger Counter
001 ADC Trigger Counter *ENG [7.5 to 20 / 10 / 0.1 s/step]
[Skew Origin Set]

2220
Executes the skew motor initialization in the laser optics unit.
001 M: Skew Motor *ENG -
002 C: Skew Motor *ENG -
003 Y: Skew Motor *ENG -
105
3. SP Mode Tables
[LD Power] LD Power Control
Adjusts the fixed LD power for each line speed and color.
2221
These SPs are activated only when SP3-041-002 is set to "0".
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step]

Increasing this value makes the image density
007 Thick 1: C *ENG darker.
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
[Development DC Vias] Development DC Bias Adjustment
Adjusts the development bias.

Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting
2229 these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-041-001 Default: ON) is
activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-041-001, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
106
Main SP Tables-2
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / 550 / 10 –V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2&FINE:Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2&FINE:M *ENG
011 Thick 2&FINE:C *ENG
012 Thick 2&FINE:Y *ENG
[Temperature/Humidity: Display]
2241
Displays the environment temperature and humidity.
001 Temperature - [-50 to 450 / - / 0.1deg/step]
002 Relative Humidity - [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 %RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity - [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
004 AIT Temperature - [0 to 70 / - / 0.1deg/step]
005 Correction Coefficient A - [0 to 70 / 1 / 0.1/step]
006 Correction Coefficient B - [-70 to 70 / 0 /0.1/step]
[TS Operation Env. Log]

2242
Displays TS Operation Env. logs.
001 TS <= 40 - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
002 40 < TS <= 45 - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
003 45 < TS - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
107
3. SP Mode Tables
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
004 Log Clear -
1: Clear
[Environmental Correction: Transfer]

2302
Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit
Current Environmental
001 - Displays the current environment condition.
Display
Sets the environment condition manually.

[0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Automatic environment control
1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity)
002 Forced Setting *ENG
2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity)
3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle humidity)
4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity)
5: HH (High temperature/ High humidity)
Absolute Humidity: Adjusts the threshold value between LL and ML.

003 *ENG
Absolute Humidity: Adjusts the threshold value between ML and MM.

004 *ENG
Adjusts the threshold value between MM and

Absolute Humidity: MH.
005 *ENG
Threshold 3
[0 to 100 / 16 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Absolute Humidity: Adjusts the threshold value between MH and HH.

006 *ENG
007 Temp Threshold *ENG [–5 to 30 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[Paper Size Correction]

2308
Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction.
[0 to 350 / 297 / 1 mm/step]

001 Threshold 1 *ENG Threshold 1 ≤ paper:
108
Main SP Tables-2
[0 to 350 / 257 / 1 mm/step]

[0 to 350 / 210 / 1 mm/step]

[0 to 350 / 148 / 1 mm/step]

Threshold 4 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 3:
004 Threshold 4 *ENG Paper is detected as "S4" size.
Paper ≤ Threshold 4:
2311 [Non Image Area: Bias]
Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt

between images. This value is added to the value
001 Image Transfer *ENG of the image transfer belt bias.
[10 to 250 / 100 / 5 %/step]
Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller

002 Paper Transfer *ENG between images.
[0 to 2100 / 500 / 100 V/step]
2326 [Transfer Roller CL: Bias] Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment
Positive *ENG [0 to 2100 / 500 / 100 V /step]

001 Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer
roller.
Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]

002 Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer
roller.
Positive *ENG [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 100 V/step]

003 Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer
roller.
109
3. SP Mode Tables
004 Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
[Common: BW: Bias]

2351
ITB unit: Plain *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1 *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]

002
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]

003 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 2 paper or FINE
mode.
[Common: FC: Bias] Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment
2357
ITB unit: Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 A]

002 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for plain
paper.
ITB unit: Plain: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]

003
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 28 / 1 A]

004
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]

005
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]

006 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for thick 1
paper.
110
Main SP Tables-2
ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]

007
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 14 / 1 A]

008 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for thick 1
paper.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]

009 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for Thick 2 and
fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]

010 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for Thick 2
and fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]

011 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for Thick 2 and
fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 14 / 1 A]

012 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for Thick 2 and
fine.
2360 [Common: BW Env. Correction]
001 ITB unit: Plain *ENG
002 ITB unit: Thick 1 *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
003 ITB unit: Thick 2 *ENG
004 ITB unit: Plain: Bk *ENG [1 to 60 / 13/ 1 /step]
005 ITB unit: Plain: M *ENG
006 ITB unit: Plain: C *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
007 ITB unit: Plain: Y *ENG
111
3. SP Mode Tables
010 ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG

[1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
011 ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG
014 ITB unit: Thick 2: C *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
015 ITB unit: Thick 2: Y *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
[Plain: Bias]
2401 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for plain paper.
001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
004 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[Plain: Bias: BW]
2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in black-and-white mode.

001 *ENG
Side
[0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]
002 *ENG
Side

003 *ENG [0 to 250 / 7 / 1 - A /step]
Side

004 *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
Side
112
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Bias: FC]
2407 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color mode.

001 *ENG [0 to 250 / 27 / 1 - A /step]
Side

002 *ENG [0 to 250 / 33 / 1 - A /step]
Side

003 *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 – A /step]
Side

004 *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
Side
[Plain: Paper Size Correction]
Paper Transfer: Plain : 1st

001 *ENG
Side: S1

002 *ENG
Side: S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)

003 *ENG
Side: S1

004 *ENG
Side: S1

005 *ENG

006 *ENG

007 *ENG
113
3. SP Mode Tables

008 *ENG [100 to 600 / 150 / 5%/step]
Side: S2

009 *ENG

010 *ENG
Side: S3 [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm (Paper width)
011 *ENG
Side: S3

012 *ENG [100 to 600 / 300 / 5%/step]
Side: S3

013 *ENG

014 *ENG

015 *ENG

016 *ENG [100 to 600 / 340 / 5%/step]
Side: S4

017 *ENG

018 *ENG

019 *ENG

020 *ENG [100 to 600 / 400 / 5%/step]
Side: S5
114
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Leading Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Leading Edge Correction

001 *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
Side

002 *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
Side

003 *ENG
Side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
004 *ENG
side
mode. SP2401 is multiplied by these SPs values.
2421

005 *ENG
Side

006 *ENG
Side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
007 *ENG
Side
Separation DC: 1200:

008 *ENG
2nd Side
[Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
115
3. SP Mode Tables

001 *ENG
Side

002 *ENG
Side

003 *ENG
Side

004 *ENG
side
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 *ENG
Side

006 *ENG
Side

007 *ENG
Side

008 *ENG
Side
[Plain: Trailing Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2423 edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
116
Main SP Tables-2

001 *ENG
Side

002 *ENG
Side

003 *ENG
Side

004 *ENG
side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
005 *ENG
Side

006 *ENG
Side

007 *ENG
Side

008 *ENG
Side
[Plain: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge]
004 Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd side *ENG

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
008 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side *ENG
117
3. SP Mode Tables
[Thin: Bias]
2451 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thin paper.

*ENG
002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 -V/
003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side step]
*ENG
[Thin: Bias: BW]
2453 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white mode.

*ENG [0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]

*ENG [0 to 250 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
[Thin: Bias: FC]
2457 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode.

*ENG [0 to 250 / 30 / 1 - A /step]

*ENG [0 to 250 / 15 / 1 - A /step]
[Thin: Paper Size Correction]
Plain: High speed
118
Main SP Tables-2
*ENG
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S1 S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
017 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5

*ENG [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]
018 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5
[Thin: Leading Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2471

*ENG
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
*ENG
2471
119
3. SP Mode Tables

*ENG
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
*ENG
[Thin: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed,

*ENG

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
*ENG

*ENG
[Thin: Trailing Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2473

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
120
Main SP Tables-2

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thin: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge]

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
*ENG

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
*ENG
[Thin: Environment Correction]

2480

*ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side

*ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 2nd Side
005 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st Side

*ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
006 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 2nd Side
121
3. SP Mode Tables

*ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
009 Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 1st Side
Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 2nd *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]

010
Side
011 Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 1st Side

*ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
012 Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 2nd Side
2481 [Glossy: Bias]
Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]

001
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for glossy paper.
2482 [Glossy: Bias: BW]

001
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for glossy paper in black-and-white mode.
2483 [Glossy: Bias: FC]

001
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for glossy paper in full color mode.
2484 [Glossy: Paper Size Correction]
2485 [Plain: Leading Edge Correction]
122
Main SP Tables-2
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
005 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]]
2486 [Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2487 [Plain: Trailing Edge Correction]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]
2488 [Plain:SwitchTiming:Trail. Edge]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2489 [Glossy: Environment Correction]
001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Thick 1: Bias]
2501 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 1 paper.
123
3. SP Mode Tables
[Thick 1: Bias: BW]
2502 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in black-and-white mode.

[0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
[Thick 1: Bias: FC]
2507 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color mode.

[0 to 250 / 15 / 1 - A /step]
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: S1 *ENG [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S1 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 130 / 5%/step]

width)
124
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 115 / 5%/step]

013 Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 190 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

017 Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st Side: S5 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 220 / 5%/step]

018 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

125
3. SP Mode Tables
2521

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thick 1: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
001 Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st Side *ENG
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 Separation DC: Plain 1: 1st Side *ENG
006 Separation DC: Plain 1: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
126
Main SP Tables-2
2523

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Thick 1: Environment Correction]

2530

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
127
3. SP Mode Tables

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Thick 2: Bias]
2551
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 2 paper.

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[Thick 2: Bias: BW]

2553
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in black-and-white mode.
[Thick 2: Bias: FC]

2558
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in full color mode.

128
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]


[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
129
3. SP Mode Tables
2571

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
003 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
004 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

130
Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2580 [Thick 2 Environment Correction]

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]

[0 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[OHP: Bias]
2601
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for OHP.
001 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[OHP: Bias: BW]

2603
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black-and-white mode.
[OHP: Bias: FC]

2608
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode.
[OHP: Paper Size Correction]

131
3. SP Mode Tables
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 200 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 330 / 5%/step]

[OHP: Leading Edge Correction]
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2621
002 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[OHP: Switch Timing: Leading Edge]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
132
Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
002 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2630 [OHP: Environment Correction]
001 Separation DC *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
002 Paper Transfer: BW *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: FC *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
[Thick3: Bias]
2650

[0 to 3500 / 0 / 10 –V/step]
[Thick3: Bias: BW]

2651
133
3. SP Mode Tables
[Thick3: Bias: FC]

2652

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
134
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]


[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2654

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
135
3. SP Mode Tables

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]


[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
2660

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
136
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick4: Bias]
2670

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[Thick4: Bias: BW]

2671
[Thick4: Bias: FC]

2672

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
137
3. SP Mode Tables
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]


[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2674
138
Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]


[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
139
3. SP Mode Tables


[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
2680

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Special1: Bias]
Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/
step]
003 Paper Transfer: Thick 1: 1st Side *ENG
mode.
Plain: High speed

[0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]
140
Main SP Tables-2
Plain: High speed, Fine: Low speed

297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

141
3. SP Mode Tables
[Special 1: Leading Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each
2771
2771

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
142
Main SP Tables-2
2773

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

2780
143
3. SP Mode Tables

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Special2: Bias]

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/
step]
mode.

[0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]
Plain: High speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed
144
Main SP Tables-2

[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

145
3. SP Mode Tables
[Special 2: Lead Edge Correction] Special 2 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2821
2821

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
146
Main SP Tables-2
2823

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

2830
147
3. SP Mode Tables
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Special 3: Bias]

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/
step]
[Special 3: Bias: BW]
mode.

[0 to 250 / 22 / 1 - A /step]
[Special 3: Bias: FC]
148
Main SP Tables-2
[Special 3: Paper Size Correction]

[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer:: 2nd Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

017 Paper Transfer:: 1st Side: S5 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

018 Paper Transfer:: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG
149
3. SP Mode Tables
[Special 3: Lead. Edge Correction] Special 3 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
2871
2871

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
150
Main SP Tables-2
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each
2873

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

2880
151
3. SP Mode Tables

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Dev Rvs Time] Development Roller Reverse Time
2905 Specified the time of the development roller reverse rotation after the development unit has
stopped. The reverse rotation of the development roller is used for removing dust from the
development roller.
001 K *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 200 / 80 / 10 msec/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[Dev Rvs Threshold Counter]
Specified the threshold distance for the development roller reverse mode. This SP refers to
005
the counters for SP2905-006 to -009.
All *ENG [0 to 400000 / 4000/ 10 mm/step]
2905 [Dev Rvs Counter]
006 K *ENG
007 M *ENG
[0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
008 C *ENG
009 Y *ENG
152
Main SP Tables-2
[Acs Setting (FC to Bk)]
Adjusts the threshold for moving away the image transfer belt from the color PCDUs. This
2907 SP moves the image transfer belt away from the color PCDUs when the number of B/W
image printouts reaches the number of sheets specified with this SP after consecutive full
color image printouts in the full color mode.
If this SP is set to "0", the image transfer belt does not move away.
001 Continuous Bk Pages *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
2920 [Trans Mot Control]
0: Encorder 1 :FG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Selects the speed control mode for the ITB.
If SC443 occurs and machine does not recover, change this setting to "1".
SC443-00 Count *ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]

002 Displays the number of the ITB encodre error. SC443 is displayed if this counter counts to
"3".
[SecondaryFB: Threshold] Paper Transfer Roller Feed-back: Threshold Adjustment

2930 Adjusts the threshold between high resistance (division 1) and low resistance (division 2)
at the paper transfer roller. This SP affects SP2931 to SP2939.
001 Voltage *ENG [0 to 7000 / 6000 / 10 –V/step]
2960 [Process Interval]
Additional Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

001
Adjusts the additional time for ending the machine's process.
2970 [Cleaning After JOB]
[0 to 100 / 33 / 1 /step]
No Refresh *ENG
0: No cleaning
001
Specifies the threshold sheets for the cleaning of the paper transfer roller without the
refresh mode.
153
3. SP Mode Tables
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
002 Refresh *ENG
0: No cleaning, 1: Cleaning
2971 T1 Non Image Area ON Timing
Standard Speed *ENG [–400 to 290 / 0 / 10 msec/step]

001
Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller.
002 Medium Speed *ENG [–400 to 290 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
003 Low Speed *ENG [–790 to 410 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
2972 B/W Image Request Timing
2973 Forced Process Down Threshold
001 - *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 10 page/step]
2974 OPC PreCharge Time Control
2980 Continuous Job Page
001 - *ENG [0 to 300 / 100 / 10 page/step]
002 - *ENG [0 to 600 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
003 - *ENG [0 to 600 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
2990 Print Duty Control
154
Main SP Tables-2
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
001 Duty Control State *ENG
0: No limit, 1: Limit
002 Exec Interval: Duty Control *ENG [60 to 3600 / 300 / 10 min./step]
003 Duty Control Thresh *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

004 *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
No Duty Control
Drum Stop Time: No Duty

005 *ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
ITB Stop Time: No Duty

006 *ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
Control

007 *ENG [0 to 5000 / 1 / 1 page/step]
Duty Control
Drum Stop Time: Duty

008 *ENG [300 to 20000 / 7500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
009 ITB Stop Time: Duty Control *ENG [300 to 20000 / 7500 / 10 msec/step]
Displays the time of the duty control

010 Duty Control: Start Time *ENG
execution.

011 Execution Temp. Threshold *ENG execution temperature.
[ 20 to 70 / 39.8 / 0.1/step]

Cancellation Temp. cancellation temperature.
012 *ENG
Threshold
[ 0.1 to 20 / 1 / 0.1/step]
Turns duty control off or on.

013 ON/OFF Setting *ENG 0: OFF
1: ON
155
3. SP Mode Tables
Main SP Tables-3
SP3-XXX (Process)
3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution]
Executes the normal process control manually

(potential control).
001 Normal -
Check the result with SP3-325-001 and
3-012-001 after executing this SP.
002 Density Adjustment - Executes the toner density adjustment manually.

before ACC.
003 Pre-ACC -
The type of process control is selected with
SP3-041-004.

004 Full MUSIC - at the same time as MUSIC. This SP does the
MUSIC (line position adjustment) twice.

005 Normal MUSIC - at the same time as MUSIC. This SP does the
MUSIC (line position adjustment) once.
[Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result
Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.

All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “Y C M K”
3012
e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were
successful.
See "Process Control Self-Check Result" in the "Main chapters: 6. Troubleshooting:
Process Control Error Conditions" for details.
156
Main SP Tables-3
001 History: Latest *ENG

[1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
3013 [T Sensor Initial Set: Exe] Developer Initialization Setting
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the developer initialization for each

004 Execution: M - color.
005 Execution: C -
006 Execution: Y -
[T Sensor Initial Set:Exe]

3014
Developer Initialization Result: Display
[0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ]
Display: YCMK *ENG
1: Success, 2 to 9: Failure
Displays the developer initialization result. See "Developer Initialization Result" in the
001 "Main chapters: 6. Troubleshooting: Process Control Error Conditions" for details on the
meaning of each code.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order Y C M Bk.
e.g., 1 (Y) 2 (C) 1 (M) 1 (Bk): Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded.
157
3. SP Mode Tables
3015 [Forced Toner Supply: Execute] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the manual toner supply to the

004 Execution: M - development unit.
005 Execution: C -
006 Execution: Y -
[Forced Toner Supply: Setting]

3016
Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
001 Supply Time: Bk *ENG
002 Supply Time: M *ENG

[0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step]
003 Supply Time: C *ENG
004 Supply Time: Y *ENG
3041 [Process Control Type]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the charge DC
Voltage Control *ENG bias and development DC bias set with SP2-005
001 and SP2-229.)
1: CONTROL
Enables or disables potential control.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
LD Power Control *ENG 0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx)
002
1: CONTROL (adjusted by process control)
Selects the LD power control mode.
158
Main SP Tables-3
AutoControl Prohibition [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
*ENG
003 Set 0: Permit, 1: Forbid
Enables or disables the automatic process control prohibition.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0: Not Executed
Pre-ACC Process Control *ENG 1: Process Control
004
2: TC Control (TD Adjustment)
3: Not used
Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
Pattern Calculation 0: FIXED
*ENG
005 Method 1: INITIALIZED
2: CALCULATED
Selects the process control method.
3043 [TD Adjustment Mode]
Repeat Number: Power ON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at power on.
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Initialization *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at the developer
initialization.
002
6 to 9: Disabled
159
3. SP Mode Tables
Repeat Number: Non-use *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in stand by
mode.
003
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: ACC *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at ACC.
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Recovery *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]

005
Not used
Repeat Number: Job End *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at job end.
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat: Interrupt *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]

007 Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment during printing.
DFU
Toner Supply Coefficient *ENG [0 to 25.5 / 10 / 0.1 sec/step]

008
Adjusts the time for the toner supply mode when a toner density is detected to be low.
160
Main SP Tables-3
Consumption pattern: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

009 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density when toner
Consumption pattern: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

010 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density when toner
Consumption pattern: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

011 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the cyan toner density when toner
Consumption pattern: Y *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]

012 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the yellow toner density when toner
T1 Bias: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 µA/step]

013
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Black.
T2 Bias: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 µA/step]

014
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Magenta.
T3 Bias: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 µA/step]

015
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan.
T4 Bias: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 28 / 1 µA/step]

016
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Yellow.
Developer Mixing Time *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

017
Specifies the developer mixing time at the toner density adjustment.
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: Bk *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
018
161
3. SP Mode Tables
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: M *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
019
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: C *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
020
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: Y *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
021
[Toner Supply Type]

3044
Selects the toner supply method type.
001 Bk *ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric

0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with SP
002 M *ENG
3401)
003 C *ENG 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed)
2: PID (Vtref_Control)
004 Y *ENG 3: Not used
4: MBD (Vtref_Control)
[Toner End Detection: Set]

3045
Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
001 ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Detect, 1: Not Detect
162
Main SP Tables-3
[Toner End Recovery]

3102 Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the TD sensor
continues to detect toner end during toner recovery.
001 Repeat: Bk *ENG
002 Repeat: M *ENG

[1 to 20 / 5 / 1 time/step]
003 Repeat: C *ENG
004 Repeat: Y *ENG
[TE Count m: Display]

3131
Display the number of toner end detections for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 99 / - / 1 time/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[TD Sensor: Vt Display]

3201
Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
[Vt Shift: Display/Set]
3211 Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed.

Thick 1: 154 mm/sec, Thick 2&Fine: 77 mm/sec
001 Thick 1 Shift: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
002 Thick 1 Shift: M *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Thick 1 Shift: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
163
3. SP Mode Tables
004 Thick 1 Shift: Y *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.31 / 0.01 V/step]
005 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
006 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: M *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.26 / 0.01 V/step]
008 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: Y *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.31 / 0.01 V/step]
009 Mid TCShift: Bk *ENG
010 Mid TCShift: M *ENG

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
011 Mid TCShift: C *ENG
012 Mid TCShift: Y *ENG
013 Low TCShift: Bk *ENG
014 Low TCShift: M *ENG

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
015 Low TCShift: C *ENG
016 Low TCShift: Y *ENG
[Vtcnt: Display/Set]
3221
Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
005-008 Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization. DFU
006 Initial: M *ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: C *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
164
Main SP Tables-3
[Vtref: Display/Set]
3222
Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
005-008 Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization. DFU
006 Initial: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: C *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
009-012 Displays and adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color. DFU
009 Pixel Correction: Bk *ENG
010 Pixel Correction: M *ENG

[-5 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
011 Pixel Correction: C *ENG
012 Pixel Correction: Y *ENG
[Vtref Correction: Setting]

3239
Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control.
165
3. SP Mode Tables
001 (+)Consumption: Bk *ENG
002 (+)Consumption: M *ENG
003 (+)Consumption: C *ENG
004 (+)Consumption: Y *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.04 / 0.01 V/step]
005 (-)Consumption: Bk *ENG
006 (-)Consumption: M *ENG
007 (-)Consumption: C *ENG
008 (-)Consumption: Y *ENG
009-012 Threshold for development gamma rank.
013-014 Threshold for image density rank on the image transfer belt.
013 T Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [-1 to 0 / -0.2 / 0.01 V/step]
014 T Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 V/step]
021-028 Sets the correction coefficient of the Vtref correction.
166
Main SP Tables-3
3241 [Background Potential Setting]
001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG These are parameters for calculating the charge
bias referring to the development bias at process
002 Coefficient: M *ENG control.
003 Coefficient: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 1 /step]
004 Coefficient: Y *ENG 0.001 x these vales) + SP3-241-005 to -008
005 Offset: Bk *ENG These are additional values for calculating the
charge bias referring to the development bias at
006 Offset: M *ENG process control.
007 Offset: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 140 / 1 V/step]
008 Offset: Y *ENG 0.001 x SP3-241-001 to -004) + these values
[LD Power Setting]

3242
Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control.
001 StdSpd:Coefficient: Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 118 / 1 /step]
002 StdSpd:Coefficient: M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 117 / 1 /step]
003 StdSpd:Coefficient: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 79 / 1 /step]
004 StdSpd:Coefficient: Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 92 / 1 /step]
005 StdSpd:Offset: Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 47 / 1 /step]
006 StdSpd:Offset: M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 41 / 1 /step]
007 StdSpd:Offset: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 72 / 1 /step]
008 StdSpd:Offset: Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
009 MidSpd:coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 118 / 1 /step]
010 MidSpd:Coef:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 117 / 1 /step]
011 MidSpd:Coef:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 79 / 1 /step]
012 MidSpd:Coef:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 92 / 1 /step]
013 MidSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 47 / 1 /step]
167
3. SP Mode Tables
014 MidSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 41 / 1 /step]
015 MidSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 72 / 1 /step]
016 MidSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
017 LowSpd:Coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 98 / 1 /step]
018 LowSpd:Coef:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 104 / 1 /step]
019 LowSpd:Coef:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 78 / 1 /step]
020 LowSpd:Coef:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 84 / 1 /step]
021 LowSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
022 LowSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 45 / 1 /step]
023 LowSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 69 / 1 /step]
024 LowSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 65 / 1 /step]
[Coverage]
3251
These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
001 Latest Pixel: Bk *ENG
002 Latest Pixel: M *ENG Displays the latest coverage for each color.
003 Latest Pixel: C *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 cm2/step]
004 Latest Pixel: Y *ENG
005-008 "Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the
005 Average S: Bk *ENG
006 Average S: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
007 Average S: C *ENG
008 Average S: Y *ENG
168
Main SP Tables-3
009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the
009 Average M: Bk *ENG
010 Average M: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
011 Average M: C *ENG
012 Average M: Y *ENG
013-016 "Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the
number specified with SP3-251-019.
013 Average L: Bk *ENG
014 Average L: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
015 Average L: C *ENG
016 Average L: Y *ENG
017 Total Page Setting: S *ENG [1 to 100 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
018 Total Page Setting: M *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
019 Total Page Setting: L *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
020 Total Page Setting: S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 40 / 1 sheet/step]
021 Total Page Setting: M2 *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
022 Total Page Setting: L2 *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color.
024 Latest Coverage: Bk *ENG
025 Latest Coverage: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
026 Latest Coverage: C *ENG
027 Latest Coverage: Y *ENG
169
3. SP Mode Tables
Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not.

028
DevMix Threshold *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]
[ID Sensor DetectValue: Vofset]

3311
Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
002 Voffset reg: M *ENG
003 Voffset reg: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
004 Voffset reg: Y *ENG
005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
005 Voffset dif: M *ENG
006 Voffset dif: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
007 Voffset dif: Y *ENG
008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
008 Voffset TM (Front) *ENG
009 Voffset TM (Center) *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
010 Voffset TM (Rear) *ENG
3321 [Vsg Adjustment: Execution]
Execute the ID sensor initialization setting for

010 P/TM Sensor All -
all sensors
[Vsg Adjustment Result: Vsg]

3322
Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor.
170
Main SP Tables-3
001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG
002 Vsg reg: M *ENG
003 Vsg reg: C *ENG
004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG
005 Vsg dif: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
006 Vsg dif: C *ENG
007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG
008 Vsg TM (Front) *ENG
009 Vsg TM (Center) *ENG
010 Vsg TM (Rear) *ENG
[Vsg Adjustment Result]
Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.

3325
The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front, sensor for Bk,
sensor for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor for Yellow and sensor for
Rear).
001 Latest *ENG
004 Result: Latest 3 *ENG [111 to 999 / - / 1 /step]

9: Unexpected error
3: Offset voltage error
2: Vsg adjustment value error
007 Result: Latest 6 *ENG 1: O.K
171
3. SP Mode Tables
[Fixed Supply Mode]

3401
Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode.
001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG
002 Fixed Rate: M *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step]

These SPs are used only when SP3-044 is set
003 Fixed Rate: C *ENG to "1".
004 Fixed Rate: Y *ENG
[Toner Supply Rate: Display]

3411
Displays the current toner supply rate.
001 Latest: Bk *ENG
002 Latest: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Latest: C *ENG
004 Latest: Y *ENG
3421 [Toner Supply Range]
001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG
002 Upper Limit: M *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during
printing.
003 Upper Limit: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
004 Upper Limit: Y *ENG
005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk *ENG
006 Minimum Supply Time: M *ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply time.
007 Minimum Supply Time: C *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
008 Minimum Supply Time: Y *ENG
[Process Control Target M/A]

3501
Adjusts the target M/A.
172
Main SP Tables-3
001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG
002 Maximum M/A: M *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.4 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
003 Maximum M/A: C *ENG
004 Maximum M/A: Y *ENG
[ImageQuality Adj. Counter:Disp]

3510
Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode.
001 Potential Control: BW *ENG
002 Potential Control: FC *ENG
003 Power ON: BW *ENG
004 Power ON: FC *ENG
005 MUSIC: BW *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
006 MUSIC: FC *ENG
007 Vsg Adj. *ENG
008 Charge AC Control *ENG
009 MUSIC: Power ON: BW *ENG
010 MUSIC: Power ON: FC *ENG
[Execution Interval: Setting]

3511
Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode.
001 Job End: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
002 Job End: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
003 Interrupt: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
004 Interrupt: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]
005 Initial: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
006 Initial: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
173
3. SP Mode Tables
007 Vsg Adj. Counter *ENG

[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
008 Charge AC Control Counter *ENG
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
019 Environmental Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
020 Gamma Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
021 Non-use Time Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
022 Correction Coef 1: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 page/step]
023 Correction Coef 2: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
024 Correction Coef 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step]
025 Correction Coef 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
026 Cor Coef 1: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]
027 Cor Coef 2: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
028 Cor Coef 1: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01/step]
029 Cor Coef 2: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
030 Max. Number Cor Threshold *ENG [0 to 99 / 5 / 1/step]
031 Max. Number Correction Counter *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step]
[Image Quality Adj.: Interval]

3512
Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position adjustment.
001 During Job *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 page/step]
002 During Stand-by *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
174
Main SP Tables-3
[PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk]
3513 Displays the last time that the PCDU motors stopped.
001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1/step]
002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / - / 1/step]
003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / - / 1/step]
004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / - / 1/step]
005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / - / 1/step]
[Environmental Display: Job End]
3514 Displays the environmental conditions for the last job.

001 Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / - / 0.1°C/step]
002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/m3/step]
004 AIT Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / - / 0.1 deg/step]
[Execution Interval: Display]
3515 Displays the current interval for process control execution.

When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of
conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions.
001 Job End: Pot Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
002 Job End: Pot Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
003 Interrupt: Pot Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
004 Interrupt: Pot Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
175
3. SP Mode Tables
[Blade damage prevention mode]
3517 Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the transfer belt
cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this value, toner is applied
to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to prevent the blade from flipping over.
001 Execution Temp. Threshold *ENG [0 to 50 / 40 / 1°C/step]
[Toner End Prohibition Setting]

3519
Enables or disables each adjustment at toner near end.
001 Process Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner near
002 MUSIC *ENG
end condition)
1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner near
003 TC Adj. *ENG
end condition)
[ITB Idling Number]

3520
Specifies the number of the ITB idling rotation for each condition.
001 Temperature: H *ENG
002 Temperature: M *ENG

[0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
003 Temperature: L *ENG
004 Temperature: L: Power ON *ENG
[Temperature Threshold]
Specifies the threshold temperature for each condition. These settings affect the conditions
3521 of SP3-520.
t1: Threshold between L (low temp.) and M (medium temp.)
t2: Threshold between M (medium temp.) and H (high temps)
176
Main SP Tables-3
[Initial Process Control Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on.

3522
compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at power on is
executed.
006 AIT Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 25 / 1°C/step]
007 Vtref Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 20 / 1°C/step]
[Rapi_timer]
100 Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the time-out time for the Rapi timer.
[Non-use Time Process Control Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by.

3531
compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at stand-by is
executed.
Adjusts the maximum execution time for the

005 Maximum Execution Number *ENG process control at stand-by.
[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 time/step]
3611 [Development Gamma: Display/Set]
177
3. SP Mode Tables
001 Bk (Current) *ENG
002 M (Current) *ENG Displays the current development gamma for

each color.
003 C (Current) *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
004 Y (Current) *ENG
005 Bk (Target Display) *ENG
006 M (Target Display) *ENG Displays the target development gamma for
each color.
007 C (Target Display) *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
008 Y (Target Display) *ENG
009 Bk (Standard Target Set) *ENG
010 M (Standard Target Set) *ENG Displays the standard target development
gamma for each color.
011 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
012 Y (Standard Target Set) *ENG
Turns on or off the environmental correction

for target development gamma.
013 Environmental Correction *ENG
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not Correct, 1: Correct
014 K (Max Correction) *ENG Adjusts the maximum correction value for
015 M (Max Correction) *ENG each color. These SPs are effective only
when the setting of SP3-611-013 is set to
016 C (Max Correction) *ENG "1".
017 Y (Max Correction) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.15 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/ step]
018 K (Max Abs Hum) *ENG Adjusts the maximum humidity correction
019 M (Max Abs Hum) *ENG value for each color. These SPs are effective
only when the setting of SP3-611-013 is set
020 C (Max Abs Hum) *ENG to "1".
021 Y (Max Abs Hum) *ENG [1 to 99 / 20 / 1 g/m3/step]
022 K (Min Correction) *ENG [0 to 0.1 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/ step]
178
Main SP Tables-3
[Vk Display]
3612
Displays Vk for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[-300 to 300 / - / 1 V/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[Development DC Control: Disp]

3621
Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed
and color.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
[Charge DC Control: Display]

3631
Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line speed and
color.
179
3. SP Mode Tables
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
008 Thick 1& FINE: Y *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
[Charge AC Control: Display]
3641 Plain: High speed
Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each color.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 3 / - / 0.01 kV/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
[LD Power Control: Display]
3651 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed
Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment.
180
Main SP Tables-3
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
[HST Concentration Control: Set]
3710 TD Sensor: Toner Concentration Control Setting
Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory, which is in the TD sensor.
001 Control Method: Selection *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Not Use, 1: Use
[HST Concentration Control: Bk]

3711
Displays the factory settings of the black PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]
181
3. SP Mode Tables

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
[HST Concentration Control: M]

3712
Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
182
Main SP Tables-3
[HST Concentration Control: C]

3713
Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
[HST Concentration Control: Y]

3714
Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]
183
3. SP Mode Tables

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
[Waste Toner Full Detection]

3800 Displays/ adjusts the toner collection bottle detection settings. These SPs are used for
NRS.
001 Condition *CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Detection Times *CTL [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Print Page After Near Full *CTL [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
004 Pixel Count After Near Full *CTL [0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
Displays the pixel counter after replacement

Pixel Count After of toner collection bottle.
005 *CTL
Replacement
[0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
008 Coefficient *ENG [0.1 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.1 /step]
Enables or disables the calling for @Remote.

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
Notice Setting *ENG
0: Enable @Remote calling
1: Disable @Remote calling
011
NOTE:
If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects used toner
near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect toner collection bottle
near full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
184
Main SP Tables-3

*ENG [1 to 30 / 5 / 1 day/step]
Collection bottle:NF
012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the toner collection bottle
is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected the actuator in the toner
collection bottle.
Displays the total amount of the used toner.

013 Total:Toner Collection Bottle *ENG
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1]
Mechanism Full Detection Displays the date of the full detection for he
014 *ENG
Date toner collection bottle.
[Waste Toner New Detection]

3900
Turns toner collection bottle full detection on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
[New PCU Detection]

3901
Turns new PCDU detection on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
[Manual New Unit Set]
3902 Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off.
The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant parts of section
3 (Replacement and Adjustment).
002 Development Unit: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Development Unit: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
185
3. SP Mode Tables
006 Developer: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Developer: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
009 PCU: Bk *ENG
010 PCU: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
011 PCU: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
012 PCU: M *ENG
013 Image Transfer Unit *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
015 Cleaning Unit *ENG Do not use 3902-013 if you only change the
cleaning unit.
016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG 3902-015: This is for the image transfer belt
cleaning unit.
017 Toner Collection Bottle *ENG
018 Fusing Roller *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: OFF, 1: ON
019 Pressure Roller *ENG "Fusing Roller" is designated as "Heating
Roller" in this manual.
020 Pump Unit: Bk *ENG
021 Pump Unit: M *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
022 Pump Unit: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
023 Pump Unit: Y *ENG
186
Main SP Tables-4
Main SP Tables-4
SP4-XXX (Scanner)
[Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment]

4008
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
001 - *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA
[L-Edge Regist Adjustment]

4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan
direction.
001 - *ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
[S-to-S Regist Adjustment]

4011 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main scan
direction.
001 - *ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
[Scanner Erase Margin: Scale]

4012 Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale.

*ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right
007 ADF: Right *ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
008 ADF: Left
187
3. SP Mode Tables
[Scanner Free Run]
4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

*ENG
002 Lamp: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON
[Scan]
4014
Execute the scanner free fun with each mode.
001 HP Detection Enable - Scanner free run with HP sensor check.
002 HP Detection Disable - Scanner free run without HP sensor check.
4020 [Dust Check]
Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/ off.

001 Dust Detect:On/Off *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the detect level.

[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detect:Lvl *ENG
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level
Selects the level of the sub scan line correction

when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
003 Dust Reject:Lvl *ENG
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest
011 Dust Detect:On/Off:Rear *ENG Not used
012 Dust Detect:Lvl:Rear *ENG Not used
188
Main SP Tables-4
[APS Operation Check]

4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors. See
"Input Check Table" ( p.367).
001 APS Operation Check - -
[APS Min. Size]

4303
Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all OFF.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 - *ENG 0: No Original
1: A5-Lengthwise (16K SEF if 4305 is set to 3)
[8K/16K Detection]
4305
This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Normal Detection (the machine detects A4/LT
size as A4 or LT, depending on the paper size
001 - *ENG setting)
1: A4-Sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-Sideways A4-Lengthwise
3: 8K 16K
4308 [Scan Size Detection]
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Detection ON/OFF *ENG 0: OFF
001 1: ON
Turns on or off the CCD original size detection. This detection is used only when an
original is scanned in book scanning mode.
4309 [Scan Size Detect:Setting]
189
3. SP Mode Tables
Original Density Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit/step]

001 Specifies the threshold between an original area and non-original area for the scan
original size detection in book scanning mode.
Detection Time *ENG [20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec/step]

002
Specifies the detection time for the scan original size detection in book scanning mode.
Lamp ON:Delay Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec/step]

003
Specifies the lamp on timing for the scan original size detection in book scanning mode.
LED PWM Duty *ENG [0 to 100 / 60 / 1/step]

004
Sets the LED lamp intensity.
[Scan Size Detect Value]

4310 Displays the detected value by CCD. Each detection point for paper size and color is
displayed on the LCD.
001 S1:R *ENG
002 S1:G *ENG
003 S1:B *ENG
004 S2:R *ENG
005 S2:G *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit/step]
006 S2:B *ENG
007 S3:R *ENG
008 S3:G *ENG
009 S3:B *ENG
[Scanner Erase Margin] *ENG
4400 Set the Mask for Original.

These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
190
Main SP Tables-4
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 ADF: Right
008 ADF: Left
[IPU Test Pattern]

4417
Selects the IPU test pattern.
001 Test Pattern Selection [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: Scanned image
13: Grid pattern CMYK
1: Gradation main scan A
14: Color patch CMYK
2: Gradation main scan B
3: Gradation main scan C
4: Gradation main scan D
17: Gray Pattern (3)
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
18: Shading pattern
6: Grid pattern
19: Thin line pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK
21: Scanned + Gray scale
9: UCR pattern
22: Scanned + Color patch
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
12: Color patch 64
4429 [Illegal Copy Output]
001 Copy
002 Scanner *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
003 Fax
191
3. SP Mode Tables
4450 [Scan Image Path Selection]
Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

001
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF

002
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
[ACC Target Den]

4501
Selects the ACC result.
001 Copy: K: Text *ENG
002 Copy: C: Text *ENG
003 Copy: M: Text *ENG
004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
005 Copy: K: Photo *ENG 10: Darkest density
006 Copy: C: Photo *ENG
007 Copy: M: Photo *ENG
008 Copy: Y: Photo *ENG
[ACC Cor:Bright]
4505
Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
005 Photo:K *ENG
006 Photo:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG
192
Main SP Tables-4
[ACC Cor:Dark]
4506
Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
005 Photo:K *ENG
006 Photo:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG
[Print Coverage]
4540 This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors [R, G, B,
Option]) for a total of 48 parameters.
001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B
005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B
009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B
013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B
017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B
021-024 CG Phase: Option/R/G/B Specifies the printer vector correction

*ENG value.
025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
029-032 BC Phase: Option/R/G/B
033-036 BM Phase: Option/R/G/B
037-040 MB Phase: Option/R/G/B
041-044 MR Phase: Option/R/G/B
045-048 RM Phase: Option/R/G/B
193
3. SP Mode Tables
4600 [SBU Version Display]
001 SBU ID *ENG Displays the ID of the SBU.
002 GASBU-N ID *ENG Displays the ID of the GASBU.
003 VSP5100 ID *ENG Displays t he ID of the VSP5100.
4602 [Scanner Memory Access]
Enables the read and write check for the SBU

001 Scanner Memory Access -
registers.
4603 [AGC Execution]
001 HP Detection Enable - Executes the AGC.
002 HP Detection Disable - DFU
4609 [Gray Balance Set: R]
001 Book Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
4610 [Gray Balance Set: G]
001 Book Scan

*ENG [-384 to 255 / -20 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan
4611 [Gray Balance Set: B]
001 Book Scan

*ENG [-384 to 255 / -28 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan

4623

001 Latest: RE Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
194
Main SP Tables-4

002 Latest: RO Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4624

001 Latest: GE Color *ENG green signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Latest: GO Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4625
Displays the black offset value for the even blue signal in
001 Latest: BE Color *ENG the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Displays the black offset value for the odd blue signal in
002 Latest: BO Color *ENG the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4628
001 Latest: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4629
001 Latest: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
195
3. SP Mode Tables

4630
001 Latest: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4631
001 Latest: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: RO Color *ENG

4632
001 Latest: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: GO Color *ENG

4633
001 Latest: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: BO Color *ENG
4645 [Scan Adjust Error]
001 White level *ENG

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Black level *ENG
[Scanner Hard Error]

4647
Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
[0 to 35535 / - / 1digit /step]

001 Power-ON *ENG 0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure
If the SBU connection check fails, SC144 occurs.
196
Main SP Tables-4

4654

Last Correct Value: RE signal in the CCD circuit board.
001 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: RO signal in the CCD circuit board.
002 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4655

Last Correct Value: GE green signal in the CCD circuit board.
001 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: GO signal in the CCD circuit board.
002 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4656
Displays the black offset value for the even blue

Last Correct Value: BE signal in the CCD circuit board.
001 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Displays the black offset value for the odd blue

Last Correct Value: BO signal in the CCD circuit board.
002 *ENG
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4658
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Last Correct Value: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
197
3. SP Mode Tables

4659
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Last Correct Value: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4660
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Last Correct Value: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4661 [Digital Gain Adjust] RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: RO Color *ENG
4662 [Digital Gain Adjust] GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: GO Color *ENG
4663 [Digital Gain Adjust] BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: BO Color *ENG

4673

level adjustment for the even red signal in the
001 Factory Setting: RE Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

level adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD
002 Factory Setting: RO Color *ENG circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]
198
Main SP Tables-4

4674

level adjustment for the even green signal in the
001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

level adjustment for the odd green signal in the
002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

4675

level adjustment for the even blue signal in the
001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

level adjustment for the odd blue signal in the
002 Factory Setting: BO Color *ENG CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

4677
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
001 Factory Setting: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4678
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green.
001 Factory Setting: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4679
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue.
199
3. SP Mode Tables
001 Factory Setting: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4680
001 Factory Setting: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: RO Color *ENG

4681
001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG

4682
001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: BO Color *ENG
[Scan Image Density Adjustment]
4688 Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF or 1-pass
DF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different.
001 ARDF *ENG [80 to 120 / 98 / 1%/ step]
002 1-pass DF *ENG [80 to 120 / 98 / 1%/ step]

001 RE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 RO *ENG
200
Main SP Tables-4

001 GE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 GO *ENG

001 BE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 BO *ENG

001 RE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 RO *ENG

001 GE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 GO *ENG

001 BE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 BO *ENG
201
3. SP Mode Tables
4796 [Low Density Color Correction]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Front Side *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the low color density correction for the front side of originals.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Rear Side *ENG
002 0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the low color density correction for the back side of originals.
4802 [DF Shading FreeRun]
001 Lamp OFF Executes the scanner free run of shading

movement with exposure lamp on or off.
*ENG
002 Lamp ON Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the
free run lasts.
4804 [Home Position]
001 - *ENG Executes the scanner HP detection.
4806 [Carriage Save]
Moves the carriage from the scanner home

position.
001 - *ENG Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass.
Therefore, do this SP when you transport the
machine a long distance.
4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change]
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Scanning image
1: Fixed pattern
001 - *ENG 2: Main scanning gradation
3: Sub scanning gradation
4: Grid pattern
(5 to 255 : Scanning images)
202
Main SP Tables-4
4808 [Factory Setting Input]
002 Execution Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
[Disp ACC Data]
This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution.
4902
A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
002 G DATA1 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
005 G DATA2 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit)
[Man Gamma:Pht:Y]
4918 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
See “Printer Gamma Correction" in the "Main chapters: 4. Replacement and Adjustment:
Image Adjustment" for how to use.
Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen

009 - *ENG
(-001 to 008).
4954 [Read/Restore Std]
001 Read New Chart *ENG Execute the scanning of the A4 chart.
002 Recall Prev Chart *ENG Clear the data of the scanned A4 chart.
003 Read Std Chart *ENG Execute the scanning of the A4 standard chart.
004 Set Std Chart *ENG Overwrite the standard data.
005 Chromaticity Rank *ENG Restores the standard chromaticity rank.
203
3. SP Mode Tables
[IPU Image Pass Selection]
4991 Selects the image path.

Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key pad.
RGB Frame Memory *ENG [0 to 11 / 2 / 1 /step ]
0: Scanner input RGB images

1: Scanner I/F RGB images
001
2: RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)
3: Shading data
4 to 11: Not used
4993 [High Light Correction]
Selects the Highlight correction level.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
Selects the range level of Highlight correction.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
002 Range Selection *ENG
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction
[Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.]

4994
Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF.
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Text priority
001 High Compression PDF *ENG
1: Normal
2: Photo priority
204
Main SP Tables-5
Main SP Tables-5
SP5-XXX (Mode)
[mm/inch Display Selection]

5024
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
0: mm (Europe/Asia)
001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL
1: inch (USA)
[Accounting counter]
Selects the counting method.

5045
• The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter
value is negative or positive.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 Counter Method *CTL 0: Developments SP 5045
Modified
1: Prints
[Paper Display]
5047
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Backing Paper *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
[TonerRefillDetectionDisplay]
5051
Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
5051 1 - *CTL 0: ON
1: OFF
205
3. SP Mode Tables
[Display IP Address]
5055
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF 1: ON
SP5056
Deleted [Coverage Counter Display]
5056
Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
[Toner Remaining Icon Display Change]

5061
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
[Parts Replacement Alert Display]

5062
Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD.
002 Drum Unit: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Drum Unit: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
005 Development Unit: Bk *CTL
006 Development Unit: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Development Unit: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
008 Development Unit: Y *CTL
206
Main SP Tables-5
010 Developer: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
011 Developer: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL
014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit *CTL
015 Fusing Unit *CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit *CTL
017 Waster Toner bottle *CTL
018 Fusing Roller *CTL
019 Pressure Roller *CTL
[PM Parts Display]

5066
Display or does not display the “PM parts” button on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
[Part Replacement Operation Type]
5067 Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts.
If the user service is selected, PM alert is displayed on the LCD.
002 Drum Unit: M *CTL

003 Drum Unit: C *CTL
207
3. SP Mode Tables
005 Development unit: Bk *CTL
006 Development unit: M *CTL

007 Development unit: C *CTL
008 Development unit: Y *CTL
010 Developer: M *CTL

011 Developer: C *CTL
013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
015 Fusing Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
017 Waste Toner bottle *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
018 Fusing Roller *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
019 Pressure Roller *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
5071 [Set Bypass Paper Size Display]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
- *CTL
0: Off, 1: On
001
Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up prevents
mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation panel and an actual paper
size on the by-pass tray.
[Home Screen Login]

5074
Sets the application that appears when the home key is pressed.
0: Function disable
091 (0:OFF 1:SDK 2:Reserve) *CTL 1: SDK application
2: Legacy application (reserved)
208
Main SP Tables-5
Sets the Application product ID.

092 Product ID *CTL
[0x00 to 0xffff / - / 1/step]
Sets the display category of the application that is

093 Application ID *CTL specified in the SP5075-001,002
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
[USB Keyboard]
5075
Sets the function of the external keyboard.
0: Disable
001 Function Setting *CTL
1: Enable
209
3. SP Mode Tables
Sets the external keyboard type.

0: None
1: English (NA)
2: Turkish
3: Korean
4: Chinese (Simplified)
5: Chinese (Traditional)
6: English (UK)
7: French (France)
8: French (Belgium)
9: French (Canada)
10: German
11: Italian
12: Spanish
002 Keyboard Type Setting *CTL 13: Spanish (Latin America)
14: Dutch
15: Norwegian
16: Danish
17: Swedish
18: Portuguese
19: Portuguese (Brazil)
20: Finnish
21: Catalan
22: Portuguese
23: Hungarian
24: Czech
25: Russian
26: Japanese
27: Greek
RTB 26c
SP5101 added
210
Main SP Tables-5
[Counter: Size Setting] A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. “Yes” counts except from the
5104* bypass tray. When “Yes” is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4
x2 and LT x2 respectively.
Default setting: Yes
5113 [Optional Counter Type]
This program specifies the counter type.

0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
Default Optional Counter 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card
001 *CTL
Type 4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
This program specifies the external counter type.

0: None
External Optional Counter
002 *CTL 1: Expansion Device 1
Type
5114 [Optional Counter I/F]
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

001 MF Key Card Extension *CTL
accounting)]
[Disable Copying]
5118
This program disables copying.
[Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal]

5120 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or remove
an optional counter, check the settings.
[0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but not

001 - *CTL
used)/ 2: No (not removed)]
211
3. SP Mode Tables
[Counter Up Timing]
5121 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper feed” and
“paper exit” respectively.
001 0:Feed 1:Exit *CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit]
[F Size Original Setting]

5126
Selects F size original setting.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap)
001 - *ENG
1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio)
2: 8" x 13" (F)
[APS Mode]
5127
This program disables the APS.
[Paper Size Type Selection]

5131 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB system
(0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
001 - *ENG [0: JP (Japan)/ 1: NA / 2: EU]
5148 Size Detection Off *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
0: Detect
1: Not Detect
[Bypass Length Setting]
5150 Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited to 600
mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
001 0: OFF 1: ON *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
212
Main SP Tables-5
5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [0: Soft Key Set/ 1: Hard Key Set]
001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]

5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used
when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL 0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
[CE Login]
5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this SP
before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 CE Login *CTL 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
[Size Adjust]
5181
Adjusts the paper size for each tray.
[0 to 3 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step]

001 TRAY 1 *ENG
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF, 3: A5 LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
002 TRAY 2: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
003 TRAY 2: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
004 TRAY 2: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
005 TRAY 2: 4 *ENG
213
3. SP Mode Tables
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
006 TRAY 3/T-LCT: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
007 TRAY 3: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
008 TRAY 3: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
009 TRAY 3: 4 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
010 TRAY 4: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
011 TRAY 4: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
012 TRAY 4: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
013 TRAY 4: 4 *ENG
[0 to 2 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
018 LCT *ENG
0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF, 2: B5LEF
[RK4]
5186 Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection.
If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine
automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - *ENG 0: Disable
1: Enable
[Copy Nv Version]
5188
Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board.
001 - - -
214
Main SP Tables-5
5193 [External Controller Info. Settings]
Sets the external controller type. This setting is

appropriately adjusted if an external controller is installed
in the machine.
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - - 0: No external controller installed

1: EFI controller
2: Ratio controller
3: Egret controller
4 to 10: Reserved
5199 [Paper Exit After Staple End.]
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling.
• If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum number of
the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum
number).
• If this setting is "0: OFF", paper is fed out with stapling at the maximum number of the
finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum
number).
5212 [Page Numbering] *CTL
This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A "– value" moves the page number positions to the left edge. A "+ value" moves the page
number positions to the right edge.
Duplex Printout Right/Left

003 [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Position
Duplex Printout High/Low

004 [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Position
215
3. SP Mode Tables
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302 NA: -300 (New York)
EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
*CTL
002 Time Difference [-1440 to 1440 / -300 / 1 min./step]
#
5307 [Summer Time]
[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled
Setting -
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
001
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
• Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not
activated even if this SP is set to "1".
216
Main SP Tables-5
Rule Set (Start) - -
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so
the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
003
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)

The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
Rule Set (End) - -
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
004
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
5404 [User Code Count Clear]
001 UCodeCtrClr - Clears all counters for users.
5411 [LDAP Certification]
Determines whether easy LDAP certification is

004 Easy Certification *CTL done.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 1: On, 0: Off
217
3. SP Mode Tables
This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set

to "1" (On).
005 Password Null Not Permit *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
Determines whether LDAP option (anonymous

certification) is turned on or off.
006 Detail Option *CTL
Bit0
0: OFF, 1: ON
5413 [Lockout Setting]
Switches on/off the lock on the local address

book account.
001 Lockout On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for

002 Lockout Threshold *CTL account lockouts.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1/step]
Determines whether the system waits the

prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and
password after an account lockout has occurred.
003 Cancellation On/Off *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct
user ID and password are entered.
Determines the length of time that the system waits

for correct input of the user ID and password after
004 Cancellation Time *CTL a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only if
SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).
[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min./step]
5414 [Access Mitigation]
218
Main SP Tables-5
Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs

and passwords that are identical.
001 Mitigation On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets the length of time for excluding continuous

002 Mitigation Time *CTL access for identical user IDs and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min./step]
5415 [Password Attack]
Sets the number of attempts to attack the system

with random passwords to gain illegal access to
001 Permissible Number *CTL the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt/step]
Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once

002 Detect Time *CTL such an attack has been detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec./step]
5416 [Access Information]
Limits the number of users used by the access

exclusion and password attack detection
001 Access User Max Num *CTL functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users/step]
Limits the number of passwords used by the

Access Password Max access exclusion and password attack detection
002 *CTL functions.
Num
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 password/step]
Sets the processing time interval for referencing

003 Monitor Interval *CTL user ID and password information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
5417 [Access Attack]
219
3. SP Mode Tables
Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive

number of attempts are detected for MFP
001 Access Permissible Number *CTL features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1/step]
Sets the length of time for monitoring the

002 Attack Detect Time *CTL frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec./step]
Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of

certification when an excessive number of access
003 Productivity Fall Wait *CTL attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
Sets a limit on the number of requests received for

certification in order to slow down the
004 Attack Max Num *CTL certification speed when an excessive number of
access attempts have been detected.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 attempt/step]
[User Authentication]
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

5420
• These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled.

before a user can use the copy applications.
001 Copy *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
220
Main SP Tables-5
Color Security Setting *CTL -
Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the user
authentication is "ON".
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
Bit0: B/W mode
002
Bit1: Mono color mode
Bit2: Two colors mode
Bit3: Full color mode
Bit4: Automatic color mode
Bit5 to 7: Reserved

before a user can use the document server.
011 DocumentServer *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the fax application.
021 Fax *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the scan applications.
031 Scanner *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the printer applications.
041 Printer *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
051 SDK1
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2 *CTL Determines whether certification is required
before a user can use the SDK application.
071 SDK3
221
3. SP Mode Tables
[Authentication Error Code]

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
Determines whether an error code appears in the

system log after a user authentication failure
001 System Log Disp *CTL occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Off, 1: On
Determines whether an error code appears on

the operation panel after a user authentication
002 Panel Disp *CTL failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 1 /1]
1: On, 0: Off
RTB 4 5490 [MF KeyCard (Japan only)]

F/W ver 1.11
Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Job Permit Setting *CTL 0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a user
code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user
code.
002 Count Mode Setting *CTL -
5501 [PM Alarm] *CTL -
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Alarm off
001 PM Alarm Level
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x
1000 > PM counter
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: No alarm sounds
002 Original Count Alarm
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing
through the ARDF > 10,000
5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL -
222
Main SP Tables-5
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Zero (Off)
001
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level.

5505 The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm
counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied
sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / C3a: 25, C3b: 35 / 100 copies /

001 - *CTL
step]
5508* [CC Call] *CTL -
Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable

001*
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable

002*
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable

003*
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
Jam Detection: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]

011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”. This
setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is set to "1".
Jam Detection: Continuous Count [2 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]

012* Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is
enabled only when SP5508-004 is set to "1".
223
3. SP Mode Tables
Door Open: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]
013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5-508-004 is set to "1".
[SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL -
5515 With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call
when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC
error occurs.
001 SC Call
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
002 Service Parts Near End Call
0: Off
003 Service Parts End Call
1: On
004 User Call
006 Communication Test Call
007 Machine Information Notice
008 Alarm Notice

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
009 Non Genuine Tonner Alarm 0: Off
1: On
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
[Individual PM Part Alarm Call] *CTL -

5516 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call when one of
SP parts reaches its yield.
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not send, 1: [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

001
Send) 0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
5610 [Base Gamma Control Point: Command]
224
Main SP Tables-5
Factory Setting *ENG -

004
Recalls the factory settings.
Restore *ENG -
005
Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.
Restore *ENG -
006
Recalls the previous settings.
5611 [Toner Color in 2C]
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-C *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-M *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-C *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-Y *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-M *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-Y *ENG
5618 [Color Mode Display Selection]
225
3. SP Mode Tables
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour,
- *CTL
001 Single colour
1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White
Selects the color selection display on the LCD.
• Memory Clear (SP5-801)

• The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information, meter charge
setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and 586) are not cleared.
5801 [Memory Clear]
Resets all correction data for process control and all

001 All Clear software counters, and returns all modes and adjustments
to their default values.
002 Engine Clears the engine settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control

003 SCS Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and
ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clr Initializes the IMH settings.
005 Mcs Initializes the Mcs settings.
006 Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax Application
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
226
Main SP Tables-5
The following service settings:

• Bit switches
• Gamma settings (User & Service)
• Toner Limit
The following user settings:
008 Printer Application
• Tray Priority
• Menu Protect
• System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver
• I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
• PCL Menu
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the
009 Scanner Application
scanner SP modes.
Deletes the network file application management files and

010 Web Service
thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)

011 NCS
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for

012 R-Fax
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)

015 Clear UCS Setting
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)

016 MIRS Setting
settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control

017 CCS
Service) settings.
018 SRM Memory Clr Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings.
020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings.
021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings.
227
3. SP Mode Tables
[FreeRun]
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
5802
• The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT, A3 or
A4 SEF printing from the 1st or 2nd tray. Therefore, the correct paper should be
loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is not fed.
• The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a test.
001 B/W A4 LEF -
002 FC A4 LEF - -
003 FC A3 LEF *ENG
5803 [Input Check] - See “Input Check Table” ( p.367).
0: Unlock
044 Cooling Fan: Lock *ENG
1: Lock
0: Unlock
045 2nd Duct Fan2: Lock *ENG
1: Lock
5804 [Output Check] *ENG See “Output Check Table” ( p.382).
5805 [Anti-Condensation Heater]
002 0:OFF / 1:ON *ENG -
[SC Reset]
Resets a type A service call condition.

5810
• Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
001 Fusing SC Reset -

-
002 Hard High Temp. Detection -
5811 [MachineSerial] Machine Serial Number Display
228
Main SP Tables-5
002 Display Displays the machine serial number.

*ENG
004 BCU Inputs
5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]
Service *CTL -
001 Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the
Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu.
Facsimile *CTL -
002 Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on
the Counter List.
Supply *CTL -
003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the
number and press #.
Operation *CTL -
004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press
#.
5816 [Remote Service] *CTL -
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
001
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
229
3. SP Mode Tables
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
• This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.

003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL during an

RCG send for the @Remote over a network interface.
007
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote Communication
Gate) connects during a call via the @Remote network.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to the RCG
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written from the RCG
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
230
Main SP Tables-5
Port 80 Enable -
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port 80 on the
@Remote network.
011
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
RFU Timing
Selects the timing for the remote firmware updating.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Any status of a target machine

1: Sleep or panel off mode only
RCG – C Registed
This SP displays the RCG-N installation end flag.

021
0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the RCG-N connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.

061 Cert Expire Timing DFU
[0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when

the machine communicates with the service center.
062 Use Proxy [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not use
1: Use
231
3. SP Mode Tables
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between the RCG
device and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server
address.
063 The address is necessary to set up the embedded RCG-N.
• The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond the 128
character are ignored.
• This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy PortNumber
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between the
embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up the embedded
064
RC Gate-N.
• This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
• The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066
• The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the
31st character is ignored.
232
Main SP Tables-5
CERT:Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by RCG-N is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW
1
URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
2
successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed
3
update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being
4
sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting
11
is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of
067 12
the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully,
13 and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW
URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW
14
controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the
15
successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
16
failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW
URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but an
17
certification error has been received, and the rescue certification is being
recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being
18
notified of the failure of the certification update.
233
3. SP Mode Tables
CERT:Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the
certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired.
068 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has
2
expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT:Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the

previous version of the firmware before the firmware update
execution. If the option to confirm the previous version is
085 Firm Up User Check
selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the
firmware update is done with the firmware files from the
URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the

086 Firmware Size
firmware data files during the firmware update execution.
087 CERT: Macro Ver. Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification.
088 CERT: PAC Ver. Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces are

089 CERT: ID2 Code displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (****) indicate
that no @Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the @Remote certification

subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are displayed
090 CERT: Subject
as underscores (_). Asterisks (****) indicate that no DESS
exists.
234
Main SP Tables-5
Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks

091 CERT: Serial No
(****) indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote

092 CERT: Issuer certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes
(****)indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the current
093 CERT: Valid Start
Displays the end time of the period for which the current
094 CERT: Valid End
Displays cryptic strength of the NRS certification.

102 CERT: Strength 1: 512 bit
2: 2048 bit
Selection Country
Select the country where embedded RCG-M is installed in the machine. After selecting
the country, you must also set the following SP codes for embedded RCG-M:
• SP5816-153
150
• SP5816-154
• SP5816-161
0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France, 6: Italy,
7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain
Line Type AutomaticJudgment
Press [Execute].
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG-M is connected as
either dial-up (pulse dial) or push (DTMF tone) type, so embedded RCG-M can
151 automatically distinguish the number that connects to the outside line.
• The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be displayed with
SP5816-152.
• If the execution succeeded, SP5816-153 will display the result for confirmation
and SP5816-154 will display the telephone number for the connection to the
outside line.
235
3. SP Mode Tables
Line Type Judgment Result
Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a list of
what the numbers mean.
0: Success
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
152 3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress – ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.
Selection Dial / Push
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the access point
for embedded RCG-M. The number displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the execution of
SP5816-151. However, this setting can also be changed manually.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
153 0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
Inside Japan "2" may also be displayed:
0: Tone Dialing Phone
236
Main SP Tables-5
Outside Line Outgoing Number
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for embedded
RCG-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).
• If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and embedded RCG-M has
connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
154 • If embedded RCG-M has connected to an internal line, then the number of the
connection to the external line is displayed.
• If embedded RCG-M has connected to an external line, a comma is displayed with
the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.
• The number setting for the external line can be entered manually (including
commas).
Dial Up User Name
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when
156
marks (").
Dial Up Password
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when
157
marks (").
Local Phone Number
161 Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where embedded RCG-M is
connected. This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)
237
3. SP Mode Tables
Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming
When the Call Center calls out to an embedded RCG-M modem, it sends a repeating ID
tone (*#1#). This SP sets the time the line remains open to send these ID tones after the
162 number of the embedded RCG-M modem is dialed up and connected.
[0 to 24 / 1 / 1 /step]
The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if you set "2" the line will
remain open for 4 sec.
Access Point
This is the number of the dial-up access point for RCG-M. If no setting is done for this SP
163 code, then a preset value (determined by the country selected) is used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Line Connecting
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates the line to
RCG-M only, or sets the line for sharing between RCG-M and a fax unit.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Sharing Fax
164
1: No Sharing Fax
• If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.
• SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used to interrupt a
RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction.
173 Modem Serial No. This SP displays the serial number registered for the RCG-M.
Retransmission Limit
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update requests, and
for the notification that the certification has been completed. However, RCG-M
174 generates charges based on transmission time for the customer, so a limit is placed upon
the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP to cancel
the time restriction.
238
Main SP Tables-5
FAX TX Priority -
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a RCG-M
transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP can be used only if
187
SP5816 164 is set to "0".
[0 or 1/ 0 / - ]
200 Manual Polling - Executes the manual polling.
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the registered device by the external nor embedded RCG device is set.
1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
201 status, this unit cannot answer a polling request from the external RCG.
2. The embedded RCG device is set. In this status, the external RCG unit cannot answer
a polling request.
3. The registered device by the external RCG is being set. In this status the embedded
RCG device cannot be set.
4 The registered module by the external RCG has not started.
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the

202 Letter Number
RCG-N device.
203 Confirm Execute Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote GW URL.
Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
204
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing
239
3. SP Mode Tables
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the
inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

8: Other error
9: Registration executing
240
Main SP Tables-5
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
[-2147483647 to 2147483647 / 0 / - ]
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without

-12002
acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without execution of an

-12003
inquiry and no previous registration.
Operation Error,
208 Attempted setting with illegal entries for
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited. The

-12005 device has an Embedded RC gate-related
problem.
A confirmation request was made after the

-12006
confirmation had been already completed.
The request number used at registration was

-12007
different from the one used at confirmation.
Operation Error,
Update certification failed because mainframe
was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual

-12009
certification and NVRAM
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.
241
3. SP Mode Tables
Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

-2385
international prefix for the telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2391 Two registrations for same device

208
Response from GW URL
-2393 Basil not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal
-2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal
-2398 Incorrect request number format
209 Instal Clear Releases the machine from its embedded RCG setup.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
5821 [Remote Service Address]
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote

002 RCG IP Address *CTL Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.
[NV-RAM Data Upload]
5824 Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from the
NVRAM to an SD card. For details, see "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the
"Main chapters: 5. System Maintenance".
001 NV-RAM Data Upload # -
242
Main SP Tables-5
[NV-RAM Data Download]

5825 Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For details, see
"NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the "Main chapters: 5. System Maintenance".
001 NV-RAM Download # -
5828 [Network Setting] *CTL -
Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

1284 Compatibility
050 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
(Centro)
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
052 ECP (Centro)
• This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is set to

"1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.

065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power on.

Job Spooling Clear: Start
066 0: ON (Data is cleared)
Time
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
243
3. SP Mode Tables
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each

protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
069 Job Spooling (Protocol)
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
Enables or disables the Web operation.

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet

or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
Active IPv6 Link Local
145 "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
Address
244
Main SP Tables-5

147
Address 1

149
Address 2 These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5) referenced
on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
151 "Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
Address 3
Active IPv6 Stateless blocks of 16 bits each.
153
Address 4

155
Address 5
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
156 IPv6 Manual Address "Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The IPv6 address
158 IPv6 Gateway Address
consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
each.
Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6 stateless.

IPv6 Stateless Auto
161 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Setting
Displays or does not display the Web system items.

[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1:
Displayed
236 Web Item visible
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the

Web shopping link top page and link page of the web system.
237
visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
245
3. SP Mode Tables
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable

Supplier on the top page and link page of the web system.
238 Web supplies Link visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page

239 Web Link1 Name of the web system. The maximum characters for the URL
name are 31 characters.
This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link

240 Web Link1 URL page of the web system. The maximum characters for the
URL are 127 characters.
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top

page of the web system.
241 Web Link1 visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL -
246
Main SP Tables-5
001 HDD Formatting (ALL)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only if
there is a hard disk error.
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
HDD Formatting (Data for a

009
Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5836 [Capture Setting] *CTL -
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable

001 With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
Panel Setting 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

002
Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.
5836-71 to 5836-78, Copier and Printer Document Reduction

The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the
071 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
074 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
075 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
247
3. SP Mode Tables
076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2:

077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200dpi
skipped) , 6: 2/3
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2:

078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200dpi
skipped) , 6: 2/3
5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the
081 Format for Copy Color
082 Format for Copy B&W Text
083 Format Copy B&W Other
084 Format for Printer Color
085 Format for Printer B&W
086 Format for Printer B&W HQ
Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server via
the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
248
Main SP Tables-5
Sets the IP address for the primary capture server. This is

101 Primary srv IP address
102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
103 Primary srv port number This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
104 Primary srv URL path This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Sets the IP address for the secondary capture server. This is

111 Secondary srv IP address
112 Secondary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Secondary srv port

113 This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
number
114 Secondary srv URL path This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
120 Default Reso Rate Switch This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Reso: Copy (Color) [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
121 Selects the resolution for color copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi
Reso: Copy (Mono) [0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
122 Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.

Reso: Print (Color)
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
123 Selects the resolution for color print mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi

Reso: Print (Mono)
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
124
Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
249
3. SP Mode Tables

Reso: Fax (Color)
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
125
Selects the resolution for color fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

Reso: Fax (Mono)
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
126
Selects the resolution for BW fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system.

Reso: Scan (Color)
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
127 Selects the resolution for color scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.

Reso: Scan (Mono)
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
128 Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote
system.
5840 [IEEE 802.11]
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel Max *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless
are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the
maximum number of channels. DFU
250
Main SP Tables-5
[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel Min *CTL Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless
are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the
minimum number of channels. DFU
0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix
0 x 0F - 36M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix
0 x 0D - 12M Fix
008 Transmission Speed *CTL 0 x 0B - 9M Fix
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
Selects the WEP key.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
011 WEP key Select *CTL
251
3. SP Mode Tables
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the

IEEE802.11 card.
042 Fragment Thresh *CTL [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
card is installed.
Determines whether the CTS self function is turned

on or off.
043 11g CTS to Self *CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
card is installed.
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

044 11g Slot Time *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
Selects the debug level for WPA authentication

application.
045 WPA Debug Lvl *CTL [1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
card is installed.
5841 [Supply Name Setting]
252
Main SP Tables-5
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta
007 OrgStamp
011 Staple Std1 Specifies supply names. These appear

*CTL on the screen when the user presses the
012 Staple Std2 Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
013 Staple Std3
014 Staple Std4
021 Staple Bind 1
022 Staple Blind2
023 Staple Blind 3
5844 [USB]
0x01: Full speed

Transfer Rate *CTL
001 0x04: Auto Change
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
002 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU
003 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version

004 Device Release Number *CTL
number. DFU
[Delivery Server Setting] *CTL -

5845
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]

001
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
253
3. SP Mode Tables
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Primary)
255.255.255.255
002
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab
can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a
test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external
device.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Secondary)
255.255.255.255
008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the
secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP
address without reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model [0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
009 1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr. Capability [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists Changes the capability of
010
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists the registered that the
I/O device registered.
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set

to “0”)
254
Main SP Tables-5
Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
011
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Server Scheme (Primary) DFU

013
Server Port Number (Primary) DFU

014
Server URL Path (Primary) DFU

015
Server Scheme (Secondary) DFU

016
Server Port Number (Secondary) DFU

017
Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU

018
Rapid Sending Control
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error.
022
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
5846 [UCS Setting] *CTL -
Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID
001 Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only
displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394
EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
255
3. SP Mode Tables
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
002 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute
this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the
ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries [2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and
the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]

008 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information
managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]

010
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
WSD Maximum Entries [5 to 250 / 250 / 1 /step]

020
Sets the maximum entries for the address book of the WSD (WS-scanner).
Addr Book Migration (USB HDD)

040
Not used in this machine.
256
Main SP Tables-5
Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic

machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the
new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM
and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be
accessed only by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service
technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
041
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes successfully, any user
can access the address book.
Displays the slot number where an address book data is

in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
043 Addr Book Media 1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
Clears the local address book information, including the

047 Initialize Local Addr Book
user code.
Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book information, except
048
Book the user code.
Clears the LDAP address book information, except the

049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book
user code.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS,

050 Initialize All Addr Book
including all user codes.
257
3. SP Mode Tables
051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
052 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the

service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this
machine.
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
053 Clear Backup Info
• After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and then

turn the power off.
• Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops
flashing.
Search option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address
book.
Bit: Meaning
060 0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
Complexity option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book.
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the
password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.

• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password
policy to control access to the address book.
258
Main SP Tables-5
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server

091 FTP Auth Port Setting address book that is used in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function for the

094 Encryption Stat
address book data.
[Rep Resolution Reduction] *CTL -
SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data transferred
externally by the Net File page reference function. [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
5847
SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.
“Net files” are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
001 Rate for Copy Color 0: 1x
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text 1: 1/2x

2: 1/3x
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
3: 1/4x
004 Rate for Printer Color 4: 1/6x
005 Rate for Printer B&W 5: 1/8x
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
006 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
259
3. SP Mode Tables
Network Quality Default for JPEG
021 Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function
is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
[Web Service] *CTL -
5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
5848 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is equal
to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control

Access Ctrl: Repository (only
002 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Lower 4 bits)
0010: No writing control
Access Control: Doc. Svr. Print

003
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Control: udirectory

004
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax

007
(Lower 4 bits)
Switches access control on and off.
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4
009 0000: No access control
bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Access Ctrl: Devicemanagement
011
(Lower 4bits)
Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4

021
bits)
Access Ctrl: uadministration

022
(Lower 4bits)
Repository: Download Image

099 DFU
Setting
Specifies the max size of the image data that the

Repository: Download Image machine can download.
100
Max. Size
[1 to 2048 / 2048 / 1 MB /step]
260
Main SP Tables-5
212 Setting: LogType: Access
213 Setting: PrimarySrv

NIA
214 Setting: SecondarySrv
215 Setting: StartTime
216 Setting: IntervalTime
217 Setting: Timing
5849 [Installation Date] *CTL -
The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to

001 Display
“Installation Date” or “Inst. Date”.
Determines whether the installation date is printed on

the printout for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
003 Total Counter -
5850 [Address Book Function] *CTL -
Replacement of Circuit Classification Japan Only
003 The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at once
to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the G4 line
becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
5851 [Bluetooth] *CTL -
mode
001 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
261
3. SP Mode Tables
[Stamp Data Download]
Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and
copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This SP must be
5853
executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
• This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
[Remote ROM Update]

5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port (IEEE1284) when
updating the remote ROM.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port *CTL 0: Disable
1: Enable
5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL -
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON

001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this
feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with
SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
Save to HDD
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
005
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card.
Save to SD Card
006
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.
009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
010 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
262
Main SP Tables-5
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
013 Free Space on SD Card
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug
[Debug Save When] *CTL -
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination
5858 selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error
codes.

Engine SC Error
001 copier engine errors.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]

Controller SC Error
002 GW controller errors.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.

004 Jam (0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL -
263
3. SP Mode Tables
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
005 Key 5 functions that use common memory on the controller
board.
006 Key 6
[–9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL -
Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour/step]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The
received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this
prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
Determines whether RFC2.5298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

021
0: No
1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
022 account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. “From” item not switched.
1: Yes. “From item switched.
264
Main SP Tables-5
SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / - / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
• Bit 0: LOGIN
• Bit 1: PLAIN
025
• Bit 2: CRAM MD5
• Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
• Bit 4 to 7: Not used
• This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent

by S/MIME.
S/MIME: MIME Header [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]

026 -
Setting 0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5870 [Common Key Info Writing]
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for

001 Writing *CTL
validating the device for @Remote specifications.
Initializes the data area of the common proof for

003 Initialize *CTL
validating.
5873 [SD Card Appli Move]
This SP copies the application programs from the original SD card in

001 Move Exec
SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.
This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in SD

Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot 1. Use this menu
002 Undo Exec
when you have mistakenly copied some programs by using "Move
Exec" (SP5873-1).
5875 [SC Auto Reboot]
265
3. SP Mode Tables
Enables or disables the automatic reboot function

when an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 / – ]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error
001 Reboot Setting *CTL
code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does
not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error
occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC codes.
Selects the reboot method for SC.

002 Reboot Type *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5878 [Option Setup]
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. Press

001 Data Overwrite Security - "EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then turn the
machine off and on.
002 HDD Encryption - Installs the HDD Encryption unit.
5881 [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]
001 - - Deletes the fixed phrase.
[Line Speed Selection]

5883
Selects the line speed for middle thick paper.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: MID CARD: Half Speed (115 mm/sec)
001 Middle Thick *ENG
1: MID CARD: Normal Speed (C2.5c: 154,
C2.5d: 205 mm/sec)
[Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings

5885
Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor.
266
Main SP Tables-5
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit Meaning
0: Forbid all document server access (1)
1: Forbid user mode access (1)
2: Forbid print function (1)
020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl *CTL
3: Forbid fax TX (1)
4: Forbid scan sending (1)
5: Forbid downloading (1)
6: Forbid delete (1)
7: Reserved
Selects the display type for the document box

list.
050 DocSvr Format *CTL
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details
Sets the number of documents to be displayed in

051 DocSvr Trans *CTL the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
Selects whether the signature is added to the

scanned documents with the WIM when they
are transmitted by an e-mail.
100 Set Signature *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Setting for each e-mail
1: Signature for all
2: No signature
Determines whether the scanned documents with

the WIM are encrypted when they are
101 Set Encrypsion *CTL transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
200 Detect Mem Leak *CTL Not Used
201 DocSvr Timeout *CTL Not Used
267
3. SP Mode Tables
[SD Get Counter]

5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in

SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The operation stores.
The file is stored in a folder created in the root
directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER.
The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with
the number of the machine.
001 - *CTL
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower
slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are
prompted.
5888 [Personal Information Protect]
Selects the protection level for logs.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
001 - *CTL 0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an
administrator can see the logs)
[SDK Application Counter] *CTL -

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
[External Counter Setting]

5894
Test Name1_1
268
Main SP Tables-5
001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
[Application Invalidation]
5895 Enables or disables the printer or scanner application.

These SPs are used only when an external controller is installed in the machine.
001 Printer *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]

0: Enable
002 Scanner *CTL
1: Disable
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be
001 registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the
setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913 [Switchover Permission Time]
Print Application Timer *CTL [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]
002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the
operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain control
of the display.
5967 [Copy Server : Set Function] *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image
001 data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you
must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.
[Cherry Server]
5974
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, “Lite” or “Full”, is installed.
001 (0:Light 1:Full) *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
269
3. SP Mode Tables
[Device Setting]
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable
and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the
controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is limited
only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
• Other network applications than NRS or LDAP/NT

authentication are not available when this SP is set to "2".
Even though you can change the initial settings of those
network applications, the settings do not work.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
5987 [Mech. Counter]
This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is

001 0: OFF / 1: ON *ENG
removed. If it is detected, SC610 occurs.
[SP print mode]

5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
270
Main SP Tables-5
003 User Program -
004 Logging Data -
006 Non-Default - -
007 NIB Summary -
008 Capture Log -
022 Scanner SP -
024 SDK/J Summary -

-
[SP Text mode]

5992
Exports the SMC sheet data to the SD Card.
271
3. SP Mode Tables
003 User Program -
004 Logging Data -
006 Non-Default -
007 NIB Summary - Press “Execute” key to start exporting the SMC
008 Capture Log - data in the SP mode display.
022 Scanner SP -
024 SDK/J Summary -
026 Printer SP mode -
[Fusing Cont mode] Fusing Control Mode

5998
Turns the silent fusing warm-up mode on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 fast/silent *ENG 0: Silent (less noise)
1: Fast (less time)
272
Main SP Tables-6
Main SP Tables-6
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
6006 [ADF Adjustment]
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.
001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front

*ENG [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear
003 Leading Edge Registration *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rear sides.
005 Buckle: Duplex Front [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

*ENG
006 Buckle: Duplex Rear [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.
007 Rear Edge Erase *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
[ADF INPUT Check]

6007 Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF. Only Bit 0 is used
for ADF input check ( p.367).
[ADF OUTPUT Check]
6008 Activates the electrical components for functional check.

It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time ( p.382).
[ADF Free Run]

6009
Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode.
001 Free Run Simplex Motion *ENG
002 Free Run Duplex Motion *ENG -
003 Free Run Stamp Motion *ENG
273
3. SP Mode Tables
[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

6010
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
001 - *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Original Size Detect Setting]

6016 Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original sensors
cannot recognize all sizes.
[0 or 1 / - / - ]
*ENG
0: Setting 1, 1: Setting 2
Setting 1 Setting 2
DLT SEF Folio SEF 11" x 15"
NA LG SEF Foolscap SEF

001 -
LT SEF US EXE 8" x 10"
LT LEF US EXE LEF
DLT SEF 8K 267 x 390 mm

EU/
LT SEF 16K 195 x 267 mm
ASIA
LT LEF 16K 267 x 195 mm
[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment

6017
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
001 - *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
[Skew Correction Moving Setting]

6020
Turns the original skew correction in the ARDF for all original sizes on or off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *ENG 0: Off (only for small original sizes)
1: On (for all original sizes)
274
Main SP Tables-6
[Punch Position: Sub Scan]

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction.

001 *ENG
2Hole)

[-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
[Punch Position: Main Scan]

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction.

001 *ENG
2Hole)

[-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.4 mm/step]
[Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.]

6130
Adjusts the paper buckle for each paper size.
275
3. SP Mode Tables
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG
006 B5Y *ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step]
007 DLT-T *ENG
008 LG-T *ENG
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Skew Correction Control]

6131 Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. These are only activated for
B804/B805.
276
Main SP Tables-6
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
006 B5Y *ENG
0: No (No skew correction)
007 DLT-T *ENG
1: Roller Stop Skew Correction
008 LG-T *ENG
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Jogger Fence Fine Adj]
6132 This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the
finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher B804/B805. The adjustment is done
perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
277
3. SP Mode Tables
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]

006 B5Y *ENG + Value: Increases distance between jogger
fences and the sides of the stack.
007 DLT-T *ENG
- Value: Decreases the distance between the
008 LG-T *ENG jogger fences and the sides of the stack.
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Staple Position Adjustment]
Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (B408/B804/B805).

6133
+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
001 Finisher1 *ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 1/step]
[Saddle Stitch Position Adjust]

6134 Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled
and folded in the Booklet Finisher B804.
278
Main SP Tables-6
001 A3T
002 B4T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step]

003 A4T
004 B5T
005 DLT-T
006 LG-T
007 LT-T
008 12*18
009 Other
[Folder Position Adj.]

6135 This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet
Finisher B804.
001 A3T
002 B4T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step]

003 A4T
004 B5T
005 DLT-T
006 LG-T
007 LT-T
008 12*18
009 Other
[Folding Number]
6136
Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher B804.
001 - [2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
279
3. SP Mode Tables
[FIN (KIN) INPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Input Check

6139
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher. ( p.367)
[FIN (EUP) INPUT Check] Finisher (B804/B805) Input Check

6140 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. ( p.
367)
[FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Output Check

6144
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher. ( p.382)
[FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B804/B805) Output Check

6145 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. ( p.
382)
[Max. Pre-Stack Sheet] *ENG Number of Pre-Stack Sheets
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149
• You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick paper.
001 - [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheet/step]
[INPUT Check]
6150 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the bridge unit (D386) / side
tray (D542) ( p.367).
[OUTPUT Check]
6151 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the bridge unit (D386)/ side
tray (D542) ( p.382).
[INPUT Check]
367).
280
Main SP Tables-6
[OUTPUT Check]
382).
[INPUT Check]
367).
[OUTPUT Check]
382).
001 1 bin: Junction Solenoid
[INPUT Check]
(D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.367).
[OUTPUT Check]
(D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.382).
281
3. SP Mode Tables
Main SP Tables-7
SP7-XXX (Data Log)
[Total SC]
7401
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
002 Total SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
[SC History]
7403 Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be
seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
001 -
002 -
003 -
004 -
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
[Total Paper Jam]

7502
Displays the total number of jams detected.
001 Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
002 Total Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
282
Main SP Tables-7
[Total Original Jam]

7503
Displays the total number of original jams.
001 Original Jam counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 original/step ]
002 Total Original Counter *CTL -
[Paper Jam Loc]

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
7504 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.
• The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
001 At Power On *CTL
003 Tray 1: On *CTL
004 Tray 2: On *CTL
005 Tray 3: On *CTL
006 Tray 4: On *CTL For details, see “Jam Detection” in the

007 LCT : On *CTL "Main Chapters: 6. Troubleshooting".
008 Registration Sn: On (Bypath) *CTL
009 Registration Sn: On (Duplex) *CTL
283
3. SP Mode Tables
017 Registration: On *CTL
018 Fusing Entrance: On *CTL

For details, see “Jam Detection” in the
019 Fusing Exit: On *CTL
"Main Chapters: 6. Troubleshooting".
020 Paper Exit: On *CTL
021 Bridge Tray Exit: On *CTL
022 Bridge Relay: On *CTL
024 Junction Gate Sensor : On *CTL
025 Duplex Exit: On *CTL
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In) *CTL
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out) *CTL
053 Vertical Trans. 3: Off *CTL For details, see “Jam Detection” in the
054 Vertical Trans. 4: Off *CTL "Main Chapters: 6. Troubleshooting".
058 LCT Feed Sensor : Off
060 Paper Exit Off *CTL
061 Bridge Tray Exit: Off *CTL
062 Bridge Relay: Off *CTL
284
Main SP Tables-7
064 Junction Gate Sensor : Off *CTL
065 Duplex Exit: Off *CTL
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In) *CTL
067 Duplex entrance : Off (Out) *CTL
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN *CTL
101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN *CTL

102 Finisher Staple: KIN *CTL
103 Finisher Exit: KIN *CTL
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN *CTL
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN *CTL
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN *CTL
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN *CTL
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN *CTL
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP *CTL
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP *CTL
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP *CTL
194 Finisher Stapler Exit: EUP *CTL
195 Finisher Exit: EUP *CTL
198 Finisher Folder: EUP *CTL

199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP *CTL
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP *CTL
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP *CTL
202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: EUP *CTL
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP *CTL
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP *CTL
206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP *CTL
285
3. SP Mode Tables
[Original Jam Det]

7505
Displays the total number of original jams by location.
001 At Power On *CTL -
003 Skew Correction Sensor: On *CTL

-
008 Reverse Sensor: On *CTL
053 Skew Correction Sensor: Off *CTL

-
058 Reverse Sensor: Off *CTL
[Jam Count by Paper Size]

7506
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
005 A4 LEF *CTL
006 A5 LEF *CTL
014 B5 LEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
038 LT LEF *CTL
044 HLT LEF *CTL
286
Main SP Tables-7
132 A3 SEF *CTL
133 A4 SEF *CTL
134 A5 SEF *CTL
141 B4 SEF *CTL
142 B5 SEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
160 DLT SEF *CTL
164 LG SEF *CTL
166 LT SEF *CTL
172 HLT SEF *CTL
255 Others *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
[Plotter Jam History]

7507
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
001 -
002 -
003 -
004 -
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
[Original Jam History]

7508
Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
287
3. SP Mode Tables
001 -
002 -
003 -
004 -
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF

7624
Selects the PM maintenance for each part.
001 Drum unit: Bk
002 Drum unit: M
003 Drum unit: C
004 Drum unit: Y
005 Development unit: Bk

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
006 Development unit: M
0: Not PM maintenance
007 Development unit: C
1: PM maintenance
008 Development unit: Y
009 Developer: Bk
010 Developer:M
011 Developer:C
012 Developer:Y
288
Main SP Tables-7
014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit
015 Fusing Unit

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit 0: Not PM maintenance
1: PM maintenance
017 Waste Toner bottle
018 Fusing Roller
019 Pressure Roller
7801 [ROM No/ Firmware Version]
Displays all versions and ROM numbers in the

002 Engine *CTL
machine.
[PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color])
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed. Therefore,
the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be deactivated.
7803 When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed.
Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter - Previous
(SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to “0”.
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-1 to 10.
001 Paper *CTL -
289
3. SP Mode Tables
002 Page: PCU: Bk
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: C
005 Page: PCU: Y

*ENG -
015 Page: Cleaning Unit *ENG -
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current maintenance
unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-11
to 20.
021 - *ENG
290
Main SP Tables-7
Displays the number of pages of the pump unit for each current maintenance unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step ]
SP7-906-020 to 112.
022 Page: Pump Unit: M [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/

*ENG
023 Page: Pump Unit: C step ]
036 Rotation: Development Unit: M [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/

*ENG
037 Rotation: Development Unit: C step ]
291
3. SP Mode Tables
043 Rotation: Image Transfer *ENG
044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *ENG
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit *ENG

[0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG
step ]
047 Measurement: Toner Collection bottle *ENG
048 Rotation: Fusing Roller *ENG
049 Rotation: Pressure Roller *ENG

The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter is
050 - *ENG
Displays the running time of the pump unit for each current maintenance unit.
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
SP7-906-020 to 112.
050 Run Time: Pump Unit : Bk
051 Run Time: Pump Unit : M [0 to 999999999 / - / 1

*ENG
052 Run Time: Pump Unit : C msec/step]
053 Run Time: Pump Unit : Y
292
Main SP Tables-7
061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk
062 Rotation (%): PCU: M
063 Rotation (%): PCU:C
064 Rotation (%): PCU:Y
065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: M [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG
067 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C (See SP7-803-079 below.)
068 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation (%): Developer: Bk
070 Rotation (%): Developer: M
071 Rotation (%): Developer: C
072 Rotation (%): Developer: Y
073 Rotation (%): Image Transfer Belt
074 Rotation (%): Cleaning Unit
075 Rotation (%): Fusing Unit
076 Rotation (%): Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
077 Measurement (%): Toner Collection bottle

The Rotation (%) counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations
reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count
lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R (%)
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
293
3. SP Mode Tables
- *ENG

080
The Run Time (%) counter is based on the running time, not printouts nor revolutions. If the
number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If
the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end condition,
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
080 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: Bk
081 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
082 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: C
083 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: Y
091 -

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
091 Page (%): PCU: Bk
092 Page (%): PCU: M
093 Page (%): PCU: C
094 Page (%): PCU: Y

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk
096 Page (%): Development Unit:M
097 Page (%): Development Unit:C
098 Page (%): Development Unit:Y
294
Main SP Tables-7
099 Page (%): Developer: Bk
100 Page (%): Developer: M
101 Page (%): Developer: C
102 Page (%): Developer: Y
103 Page (%): Image Transfer [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG
104 Page (%): Cleaning Unit (See SP7-803-091 below.)
105 Page (%): Fusing Unit
106 Page (%): Paper Transfer Unit
109 - *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear (Unit, [Color])
Clears the PM counter.

Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?”, which will store the PM counter
value in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of the current PM counter
(SP7-803) to “0”.
295
3. SP Mode Tables
002 PCU (Drum Unit): Bk - -
003 PCU (Drum Unit): M - -
004 PCU (Drum Unit): C - -
005 PCU (Drum Unit): Y - -
006 PCU (Drum Unit): All - -
007 Development Unit: Bk - -
008 Development Unit: M - -
009 Development Unit: C - -
010 Development Unit: Y - -
011 Development Unit: All - -
012 Developer: Bk - -
013 Developer: M - -
014 Developer: C - -
015 Developer: Y - -
016 Developer: All - -
017 ITB Unit - -
018 Cleaning Unit - -
019 Fusing Unit - -
020 PTR Unit - -
021 Toner Collection Bottle - -
022 Fusing Roller (Heating Roller) - -
023 Pressure Roller - -
024 Pump Unit: Bk - -
025 Pump Unit: M - -
026 Pump Unit: C - -
027 Pump Unit: Y - -
296
Main SP Tables-7
028 Pump Unit: All - -
100 All - -
[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

7807
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
001 SC/Jam Clear - -
[Self-Diagnose Result Display]

7832
Displays the result of the diagnostics.
001 Diag. Result *CTL -
7835 [ACC Counter]
001 Copy ACC *CTL Displays the ACC exectuion times for each
002 Printer ACC *CTL mode.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
[DF Glass Dust Check]
7852 Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on the scanning
glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter. Counting is done only if SP4-020-1
(ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on.
001 Dust Detection Counter *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detection Clear Counter *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
003 Dust Detection Counter: Back *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
[Replacement Counter]
7853
Displays the PM parts replacement number.
297
3. SP Mode Tables
001 PCU: Bk *ENG
002 PCU: M *ENG
003 PCU: C *ENG
004 PCU: Y *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
007 Development Unit: C *ENG
008 Development Unit: Y *ENG
011 Developer: C *ENG
012 Developer: Y *ENG
013 Image Transfer *ENG
014 Cleaning Unit *ENG
015 Fusing Unit *ENG
016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
017 Tonner Collection Bottle *ENG
018 Fusing Roller *ENG
019 Pressure Roller *ENG
020 Pump Unit: Bk
021 Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
022 Pump Unit: C
023 Pump Unit: Y
298
Main SP Tables-7
[Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.

Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
• [A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
• [B] 20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.
7855
• The setting value [B] must be set larger than [A].

The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each coverage range
are displayed with the following SPs.
[Prev. Unit PM Counter]
7906 (Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
299
3. SP Mode Tables
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: M
003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: Y

*ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
016 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units.
(See SP7-906-031 to 046 below.)
020 Page: Pump Unit *ENG
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
300
Main SP Tables-7
021 Page: Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
022 Page: Pump Unit: C
036 Rotation: Development Unit: M [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

*ENG
037 Rotation: Development Unit: C (See SP7-906-019 above.)
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

*ENG
(See SP7-906-019 above.)
047
bottle
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge.
050 Run Time: Pump Unit *ENG
301
3. SP Mode Tables
Displays the running time of the previous pump unit

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
050 Run Time: Pump Unit: Bk
051 Run Time: Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
052 Run Time: Pump Unit: C
053 Run Time: Pump Unit: Y
061 Rotation %: PCU: *ENG

(Current revolution / Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected
The Rotation % counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the Rotation %
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
061 Rotation %: PCU: BK
062 Rotation %: PCU:M
063 Rotation %: PCU:C
064 Rotation %: PCU:Y

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
065 Rotation %: Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation %: Development Unit: M
067 Rotation %: Development Unit: C
068 Rotation %: Development Unit: Y
302
Main SP Tables-7
069 Rotation %: Developer: Bk
070 Rotation %: Developer: M
071 Rotation %: Developer: C
072 Rotation %: Developer: Y
073 Rotation %: Image Transfer Belt
074 Rotation %: Cleaning Unit

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit
076 Rotation %: Paper Transfer Unit
Measurement %: Toner Collection

077
bottle

(Current count / Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values in the
counter for the part, and “Yield count” is the recommended yield.
Run Time (%): Pump Unit *ENG

080
The Run Time (%) counter is based on the total running time, not printouts nor revolutions. If
the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
If the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end condition,
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
080 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: Bk
081 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
082 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: C
083 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: Y
303
3. SP Mode Tables
Page %: PCU *ENG

091
The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the revolution count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the Page% counter is
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
091 Page %: PCU: Bk
092 Page %: PCU: M
093 Page %: PCU: C
094 Page %: PCU: Y
095 Page %: Development Unit: Bk
096 Page %: Development Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
097 Page %: Development Unit: C
098 Page %: Development Unit: Y
099 Page %: Developer: Bk
100 Page %: Developer: M
101 Page %: Developer: C
102 Page %: Developer: Y
304
Main SP Tables-7
103 Page %: Image Transfer
104 Page %: Cleaning Unit
105 Page %: Fusing Unit
106 Page %: Paper Transfer Unit

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
[Toner Bottle Bk]

7931
Displays the toner bottle information for Bk.
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
305
3. SP Mode Tables
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle M]
7932
Displays the toner bottle information for M.
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
306
Main SP Tables-7
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle C]
7933
Displays the toner bottle information for C.
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
307
3. SP Mode Tables
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle Y]
7934
Displays the toner bottle information for Y.
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
308
Main SP Tables-7
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
7935 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
309
3. SP Mode Tables
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
7936 [Toner Bottle Log 1: M]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
310
Main SP Tables-7
041 Serial No.

*ENG
7937 [Toner Bottle Log 1: C]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
311
3. SP Mode Tables
7938 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
[Unit Replacement Date]

7950
Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.
312
Main SP Tables-7
002 Cleaning Unit
003 Paper Transfer Unit
004 Fusing Unit
005 Toner Collection Bottle
006 AIT:Bk
007 AIT:M
008 AIT:C *ENG -
009 AIT:Y
010 Fusing Roller
011 Pressure Roller
012 Pump Unit: Bk
013 Pump Unit: M
014 Pump Unit: C
015 Pump Unit: Y
[Remaining Day Counter]

7951
Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit.
313
3. SP Mode Tables
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: M
003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: Y

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
314
Main SP Tables-7
036 Rotation: Development Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
047
bottle
315
3. SP Mode Tables
101 Minimum: PCU: Bk
102 Minimum: PCU: M
103 Minimum: PCU: C
104 Minimum: PCU: Y
105 Minimum: Development Unit: Bk
106 Minimum: Development Unit: M
107 Minimum: Development Unit: C Displays one of the three, Remaining

Day Counter: Rotation or Runtime, or
108 Minimum: Development Unit: Y Remaining Day Counter: Page, which
is the minimum value.
109 Minimum: Developer: Bk
*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
110 Minimum: Developer: M
For toner collection bottle, this SP is
111 Minimum: Developer: C not displayed because its Remaining
Day Counters is calculated with its
112 Minimum: Developer: Y weights only.
113 Minimum: Image Transfer
114 Minimum: Cleaning Unit
115 Minimum: Fusing Unit
116 Minimum: Paper Transfer Unit
117 Minimum: Fusing Roller
118 Minimum: Pressure Roller
119 Minimum: Pump Unit: Bk

Displays either Remaining Day
120 Minimum: Pump Unit: M Counter: time or Page, which is less
*ENG value.
121 Minimum: Pump Unit: C
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
122 Minimum: Pump Unit: Y
[PM Yield Setting]

7952
Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit.
001 Rotation: Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 256597000 / 1 mm/step]
316
Main SP Tables-7
002 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 128299000 / 1 mm/step]
003 Rotation: Fusing Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 155595000 / 1 mm/step]
004 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 192448000/ 1 mm/step]
011 Page: Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0 to 999999 / 320000 / 1 sheet/step]
012 Page: Cleaning Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet/step]
013 Page: Fusing Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet/step]
014 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 240000/ 1 sheet/step]
021 Day Threshold: PCU: Bk
022 Day Threshold: PCU: M
023 Day Threshold: PCU: C
024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y

025
Unit: Bk
Adjusts the threshold day for the near end fro
026 each PM unit.
Unit: M
*CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
027 These threshold days are used for @Remote
Unit: C
alarms.
028
Unit: Y
029 Day Threshold: Developer: Bk
030 Day Threshold: Developer: M
031 Day Threshold: Developer: C
032 Day Threshold: Developer: Y
317
3. SP Mode Tables
Day Threshold: Image

033
Transfer Belt
034 Day Threshold: Cleaning Unit Adjusts the threshold day for the near end fro
each PM unit.
035 Day Threshold: Fusing Unit
*CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
Day Threshold: Paper Transfer These threshold days are used for @Remote
036
Unit alarms.

037
Collection Bottle
038 Rotation: PCU Bk
039 Rotation: PCU M

*CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
040 Rotation: PCU C
041 Rotation: PCU Y

042
Bk

043 *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
M

*CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
050 Page: PCU: Bk
051 Page: PCU: M

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
052 Page: PCU: C
053 Page: PCU: Y
318
Main SP Tables-7

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
[Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk]
7953 Displays the PCDU rotation distance in each specified operation environment.
T: Temperature (°C), H: Relative Humidity (%)
001 T<=0
002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30
003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70
004 0<T<=5:70<=H<=100
005 5<T<15:0<=H<30
*CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
006 5<T<15:30<=H<55
007 5<T<15:55<=H<80
008 5<T<15:80<=H<=100
009 15<=T<25:0<=H<30
010 15<=T<25:30<=H<55
319
3. SP Mode Tables
011 15<=T<25:55<=H<80
012 15<=T<25:80<=H<=100
013 25<=T<30:0<=H<30
014 25<=T<30:30<=H<55
015 25<=T<30:55<=H<80
016 25<=T<30:80<=H<=100 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
017 30<=T<35:0<=H<30
018 30<=T<35:30<=H<55
019 30<=T<35:55<=H<80
020 30<=T<35:80<=H<=100
021 35 <= T
[Operation Env. Log Clear]

7954
Clears the operation environment log.
001 - - -
7955 Fusing Stop
Near End: Page - [1 to 999999 / 318000 / 1 sheet/step]

001
Displays the threshold sheet for the heating roller near end.
End: Page - [1 to 999999 / 330000 / 1 sheet/step]

002
Displays the threshold sheet for the heating roller end.
[0 to 999999999 / C3a: 173327000, C3b:

Near End: Rotation -
003 162570000 / 1 mm/step]
Displays the threshold distance for the heating roller near end.
[0 to 999999999 / C3a: 179868000, C3b:

End: Rotation -
004 168705000 / 1 mm/step]
Displays the threshold distance for the heating roller end.
320
Main SP Tables-8
Main SP Tables-8
SP8-XXX: Data Log2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color
faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others,
can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that
you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F,

T: Total: (Grand Total).
P, etc.).
C: Copy application.
F: Fax application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application
P: Print application. when the job was not stored on the document server.
S: Scan application.
321
3. SP Mode Tables
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L:

counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they
count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can
be in document server mode (from the document server
Local storage (document
L: window), or from another mode, such as from a printer
server)
driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy
mode window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document server.
Each counter will be discussed case by case.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in the
example) future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the
small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and
refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
322
Main SP Tables-8
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to

DesApl
store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count
up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number
GPC
that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up
11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
ImgEdt
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines

NRS
remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
323
3. SP Mode Tables
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print
jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and
Palm 2
allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different
formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
PGS count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
R
machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
SMC
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
324
Main SP Tables-8
• All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
T:Total Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of times each application is
8 001
used to do a job.
8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL
8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL • The L: counter is the total number of times the other
applications are used to send a job to the document
8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL server, plus the number of times a file already on the
document server is used.
8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer using
the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is counted
at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not (the
document server is not used).
• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are not
counted separately).
• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one
transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has
been completed.
• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a print
job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters both
increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server, only
325
3. SP Mode Tables
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments.
8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL
8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document
8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL server by each application, to reveal how local storage is
being used for input.
8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL
8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter
document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL
8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL

These SPs reveal how files printed from the document
8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL server were stored on the document server originally.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL
8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL
8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C: counter
increments.
326
Main SP Tables-8
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document
server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both
increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S:
counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the L:
counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are
printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image
Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

These SPs reveal what applications were used to
8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL output documents from the document server.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the application
that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor,
etc.) the L: counter increments.
327
3. SP Mode Tables
8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored files on
the document server that were later accessed for
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL transmission over the telephone line or over a
8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by
I-Fax).
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL • Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
• The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL scanned from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e-
mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

These SPs count the applications used to send files
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from the document server over the telephone line or
over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax
8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
image by I-Fax). Jobs merged for sending are
8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL counted separately.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
328
Main SP Tables-8
F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is specified
8 063 by the application.
• Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is specified
8 065 by the application.
• Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print
window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application, over
the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set for
8 06x 1 Sort Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter increments.
(See SP8-066-1)
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple mode,

8 06x 4 Booklet
the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set
8 06x 5 Z-Fold
for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print job,
8 06x 6 Punch
the P: counter increments. (See SP8-064-6.)
329
3. SP Mode Tables
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job,
C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number
F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 073 These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number
S:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 075 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number
L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 076 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web Image
Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
330
Main SP Tables-8
8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode,
the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the
error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of
the copy job (SP 8072).
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted.
T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax, either
8 111 directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone line.
• Color fax sending is not available at this time.
F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax
8 113 directly on a telephone line.
8 11x 1 B/W
8 11x 2 Color

• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents
stored on the document server.
• If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started.
• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where both
are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also increments.
331
3. SP Mode Tables
T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent, either
8 121 directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax.
F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored on the
8 123 document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color

• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time.
T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 131 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
S: S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 135 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and attached
to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS

• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color or
black-and-white then counted.
332
Main SP Tables-8
sent, the job is not counted.
• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or if
one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example, if the
same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for
Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

to a Scan Router server.
S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in scanner
mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8 14x 1 B/W
8 14x 2 Color
8 14x 3 ACS

• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server
cannot be confirmed.
• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a "Color"
job.
delivered, the job is not counted.
T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent
8 151 to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
• At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
333
3. SP Mode Tables
S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 15x 3 ACS

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission
jobs. A job is counted from when it is registered for
sending, not when it is sent.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL
• At the present time, these counters perform

identical counts.
• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to the
destination from the PC through the copier.
8 171 T:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS.
8 175 S:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
-001 B/W
-002 Color
-003 ACS
8 181 T:Scan to Media Jobs *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a media by
the scanner application.
8 185 S:Scan to Media Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
334
Main SP Tables-8
-001 B/W
-002 Color
-003 ACS
8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL

These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL application that uses the scanner to scan images.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S: count
is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File
button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy
8 201 jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted.
• These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
335
3. SP Mode Tables
F: LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax
8 203 transmission.
S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only.
8 205 Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted.
8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the
document server.
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL within the Copy mode screen
• Reading user stamp data is not counted.

• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the
L: count is 6.
ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 221 These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side
scanning.
336
Main SP Tables-8
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count
is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex
scanning.
8 221 1 Front
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side
scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user loads face
up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the
8 221 2 Back same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is
the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side scanning.
• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also,
the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the
work load on the ADF.
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in

8 231 1 Large Volume
the ADF at one time.
8 231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF.
Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation

8 231 3 Mixed Size
panel.
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original

8 231 5 Platen
directly on the platen.
8 231 6 Mixed 1side/ 2side Simplex and Duplex mode.
• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the original's
page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
337
3. SP Mode Tables
• If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF,
the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 241 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs,
C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 242
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 243
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 245
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 246 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within
the Copy mode screen
8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246
8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No
338
Main SP Tables-8
8 24x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit features
have been selected at the operation panel for each
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL application. Some examples of these editing features
8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL are:
• Erase> Border
8 255 S : Scan PGS/ImgEdr *CTL
• Erase> Center
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL • Image Repeat
• Centering
• Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

• The count totals the number of times the edit
features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have been
used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8 265 S:Scn PGS/Color *CTL -
8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 26x 1 Color Conversion
8 26x 2 Color Erase These SPs show how many times color creation
8 26x 3 Background features have been selected at the operation panel.
8 26x 4 Other
339
3. SP Mode Tables
8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned using
a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the
TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL
• At the present time, these counters perform

identical counts.
8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages stamped with
the stamp in the ADF unit.
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL
within the Copy mode screen
T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size
[SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page
size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application.
8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application.
8-445].
340
Main SP Tables-8
L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within
8 306 the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page
size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
8 30x 5 B5
8 30x 6 DLT
-
8 30x 7 LG
8 30x 8 LT
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed
T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

S: Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
8 315 applications that can specify resolution settings.
• At the present time, SP8-311 and SP8-315 perform identical counts.
341
3. SP Mode Tables
8 31x 1 1200dpi <
8 31x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi
8 31x 3 400dpi to 599dpi
8 31x 4 200dpi to 399dpi
8 31x 5 < 199dpi
• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

• The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the
Fax application.
8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed by the
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL customer. The counter for the application used for
storing the pages increments.
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL
operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL button from within the Copy mode screen go to the
C: counter.
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted
as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for
the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following
pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
342
Main SP Tables-8
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
8 391
• In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed from
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL the document server. The counter for the application
8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL used to print the pages is incremented.
8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last
8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL pages printed only on one side are not counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the fax application.
343
3. SP Mode Tables
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the
operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

processed for printing by Other applications
8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex
8 42x 3 Book> Duplex
8 42x 4 Simplex Combine
8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
8 42x 6 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8 42x 12 Booklet
8 42x 13 Magazine
• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their
compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
344
Main SP Tables-8
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below,
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server
mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Other applications.
345
3. SP Mode Tables
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count for a

8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed as

8 43x 2 Series/Book
a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were applied,

8 43x 3 User Stamp
including page numbering and date stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 441
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 442 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 443 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 445 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 446 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
346
Main SP Tables-8
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5
8 44x 6 DLT
8 44x 7 LG
8 44x 8 LT
8 44x 9 HLT
8 44x 10 Full Bleed
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8 451 1 Bypass Tray Bypass Tray
8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
347
3. SP Mode Tables
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on
8 461 feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However,
these counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 462
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 463
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 464
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 466 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel.
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
8 46x 8 Other
PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
348
Main SP Tables-8
8 471 1 < 49%
8 471 2 50% to 99%
8 471 3 100%
8 471 4 101% to 200%
8 471 5 201% <
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also
counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of
100%.
8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched
on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed in the
8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
Color Mode by each application.
8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 49x 1 B/W
349
3. SP Mode Tables
8 49x 3 Two Color
8 49x 4 Full Color

These SPs count the number of pages printed in
8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
the Color Mode by the print application.
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Mono Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
8 50x 5 Two Color
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 511
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 514
350
Main SP Tables-8
8 514 1 RPCS
8 514 2 RPDL
8 514 3 PS3
8 514 4 R98
8 514 5 R16
8 514 6 GL/GL2
8 514 7 R55
8 514 8 RTIFF
8 514 9 PDF
8 514 10 PCL5e/5c
8 514 11 PCL XL
8 514 12 IPDL-C
8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 514 14 Other
• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 523 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax
application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
351
3. SP Mode Tables
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
• If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are
still counted.
• The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are
counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the

8 531 Staples *CTL machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 581 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
352
Main SP Tables-8
8 581 1 Total
8 581 2 Total: Full Color
8 581 3 B&W/Single Color
8 581 4 Development: CMY
8 581 5 Development: K
8 581 6 Copy: Color
8 581 7 Copy: B/W
8 581 8 Print: Color
8 581 9 Print: B/W
8 581 10 Total: Color
8 581 11 Total: B/W
8 581 12 Full Color: A3
8 581 13 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
8 581 14 Full Color Print
8 581 15 Mono Color Print
8 581 16 Full Color GPC
8 581 17 Twin Color Mode Print
8 581 18 Full Color Print (Twin)
8 581 19 Mono Color Print (Twin)
8 581 20 Full Color Total (CV)
8 581 21 Mono Color Total (CV)
8 581 22 Full Color Print (CV)
8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color
output.
353
3. SP Mode Tables
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Mono Color
8 584 3 Full Color
8 584 5 Two Color
8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
O:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed,
and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.
354
Main SP Tables-8
8 591 1 A3/DLT
-
8 591 2 Duplex
T: Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for
each printing mode.
8 601 1 B/W
8 601 2 Color
8 601 11 B/W Printing Pages
8 601 12 Color Printing Pages -
SDK Apli Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion.
8 617 1 SDK-1
8 617 2 SDK-2
8 617 3 SDK-3
-
8 617 4 SDK-4
8 617 5 SDK-5
8 617 6 SDK-6
T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

number.
355
3. SP Mode Tables
F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

number.
8 63x 1 B/W
8 63x 2 Color
B/W or Color.
are the same.
each destination.
T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 641 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images
using I-Fax.
F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 643 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using
I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color
B/W or Color.
are the same.
each destination.
356
Main SP Tables-8
T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

the Scan application only.
8 65x 1 B/W
8 65x 2 Color
• The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is
cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
• If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages
are sent to the same SMTP server together).
• If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is
sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
• Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to a
large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For example, if a
10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the
count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

server by the Scan application.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color
• The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router
server.
357
3. SP Mode Tables
• If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done.
• The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC
(Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S: Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with
the Scan application.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax.
These SPs are provided for the Fax application only, so
the counts for SP8 681 and SP8 683 are the same.
8 683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier to the
destination.
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only
counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes
up by 10, not 20.)
8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages sent from the
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL document server. The counter for the application that
was used to store the pages is incremented.
8 693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL panel. Pages stored with the Store File button from within
the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
• If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the
application that stored them.
358
Main SP Tables-8
• When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of
pages sent to each destination.
TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 701 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them. For
example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for
ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network
8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 715
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other
8 715 5 PDF/Comp
8 721 T:Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: Dvliv PGS/WSD *CTL
8 725
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
x 1 B/W -
x 2 Color -
359
3. SP Mode Tables
8 731 T:Scan PGS/Media *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Media *CTL
8 735 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by each scanner
mode.
x 1 B/W -
x 2 Color -
RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 741 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive
them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1 -
8 741 2 PSTN-2 -
8 741 3 PSTN-3 -
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4) -
8 741 5 Network -
Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers)
for black and other color toners.
8 771 1 Total
8 771 2 K
8 771 3 Y
8 771 4 M
8 771 5 C
Toner_Bottle_Info. *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
360
Main SP Tables-8
8 781 1 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles
8 781 2 Toner: Y The number of yellow-toner bottles
8 781 3 Toner: M The number of magenta-toner bottles
8 781 4 Toner: C The number of cyan-toner bottles
This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for storing
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the
8 801 user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better
than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10%
steps).
8 801 1 K
8 801 2 Y
8 801 3 M
8 801 4 C
CVr Cnt: 0-10% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

is from 0% to 10%.
8 851 11 0 to 2%: BK 8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK
8 851 12 0 to 2%: Y 8 851 32 5 to 7%: Y
8 851 13 0 to 2%: M 8 851 33 5 to 7%: M
8 851 14 0 to 2%: C 8 851 34 5 to 7%: C
8 851 21 3 to 4%: BK 8 851 41 8 to 10%: BK
8 851 22 3 to 4%: Y 8 851 42 8 to 10%: Y
361
3. SP Mode Tables
8 851 23 3 to 4%: M 8 851 43 8 to 10%: M
8 851 24 3 to 4%: C 8 851 44 8 to 10%: C
CVr Cnt: 11-20% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

is from 11% to 20%.
8 861 1 BK
8 861 2 Y
8 861 3 M
8 861 4 C
CVr Cnt: 21-30% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

is from 21% to 30%.
8 871 1 BK
8 871 2 Y
8 871 3 M
8 871 4 C
CVr Cnt: 31%- *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

is 31% or higher.
8 881 1 BK
8 881 2 Y
8 881 3 M
8 881 4 C
Page/Toner Bottle *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 891
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color.
362
Main SP Tables-8
8 891 1 BK
8 891 2 Y
8 891 3 M
8 891 4 C

8 901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color.
8 901 1 BK
8 901 2 Y
8 901 3 M
8 901 4 C

8 911
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color.
8 911 1 BK
8 911 2 Y
8 911 3 M
8 911 4 C
Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 921
363
3. SP Mode Tables
8 921 1 Coverage (%) Bk
8 921 2 Coverage (%) Y
8 921 3 Coverage (%) M
8 921 4 Coverage (%) C
8 921 11 Coverage /P: Bk
8 921 12 Coverage /P: Y
8 921 13 Coverage /P: M
8 921 14 Coverage /P: C
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode.
These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for
improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while

8 941 1 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves

8 941 2 Standby Time data to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy Save,
Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing background

8 941 3 Energy Save Time
printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. Includes

8 941 4 Low Power Time
time while machine is performing background printing.
Includes time while machine is performing background

8 941 5 Off Mode Time printing. Does not include time machine remains powered
off with the power switches.
8 941 6 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Total time when paper jams have been staying during

8 941 7 PrtJam
printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying during

8 941 8 OrgJam
scanning.
364
Main SP Tables-8
8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
AddBook Register *CTL

8 951
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration.
User Code/User
8 951 1 User code registrations.
ID
8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 951 4 Group Group destination registrations.
Fax relay destination registrations

8 951 5 Transfer Request
for relay TX.
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
Copy application registrations with

8 951 7 Copy Program
Fax application registrations with

8 951 8 Fax Program
Printer application registrations with [0 to 255 / 0 / 255]

8 951 9 Printer Program
Scanner application registrations

8 951 10 Scanner Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Admin. Counter List *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 999
365
3. SP Mode Tables
8 999 1 Total
8 999 2 Copy: Full Color
8 999 3 Copy: BW
8 999 4 Copy: Single Color
8 999 5 Copy: Two Color
8 999 6 Printer Full Color
8 999 7 Printer BW
8 999 8 Printer Single Color
8 999 9 Printer Two Color
8 999 10 Fax Print: BW
8 999 12 A3/DLT
8 999 13 Duplex
8 999 14 Coverage: Color (%)
8 999 15 Coverage: BW (%)
8 999 16 Coverage: Color Print Page (%)
8 999 17 Coverage: BW Print Page (%)
8 999 101 Transmission Total: Color
8 999 102 Transmission Total: BW
8 999 103 FAX Transmission
8 999 104 Scanner Transmission: Color
8 999 105 Scanner Transmission: BW
366
Input and Output Check

Input Check Table
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to
a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Copier
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 1 2nd Tray Size Detection See table 2 following this table.
5803 2 1st Tray Set Detection Set Not set
5803 7 1st Tray Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 8 2nd Tray Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 9 1st Tray Upper Limit Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 10 2nd Tray Upper Limit Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 11 Bypass Paper Width Detection See table 3 following this table.
5803 12 Bypass Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 13 Bypass Paper Length Detection See table 3 following this table.
5803 14 1st Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 15 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
367
3. SP Mode Tables
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 16 Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 17 Tray Full Exit Sensor Paper not full Paper full
5803 18 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5803 19 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 20 1st Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 21 2nd Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 22 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 23 Registration Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 24 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 25 Junction Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5803 26 2nd Tray Set Detection Set Not set
5803 30 Toner End Sensor: Bk Toner end Toner remaining
5803 31 Toner End Sensor: M Toner end Toner remaining
5803 32 Toner End Sensor: C Toner end Toner remaining
5803 33 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner end Toner remaining
Actuator not
5803 34 Drum Phase Sensor: Bk Actuator detected
detected
Actuator not
5803 35 Drum Phase Sensor: M Actuator detected
detected
Actuator not
5803 36 Drum Phase Sensor: C Actuator detected
detected
Actuator not
5803 37 Drum Phase Sensor: Y Actuator detected
detected
368
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 40 Right Door Closed Open
5803 41 Duplex Cover Closed Open
5803 42 Toner Collection Bottle Set Set Not set
5803 43 Toner Collection Full Sensor Not full Full
5803 46 ITB New Unit Detection Not new New
5803 49 Duplex Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 50 Airflow Fan: Front: Lock Normal Lock
5803 51 Airflow Fan: Rear: Lock Normal Lock
5803 52 Fusing Exit Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 53 2nd Duct Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 54 3rd Duct Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 55 Paper Exit Fan:Lock Normal Lock
5803 56 Fusing Coil Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 57 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 58 Airflow Fan: Middle 1: Lock Not used
5803 59 Airflow Fan: Middle 2: Lock Not used
5803 60 ITB Contact Motor Position Not contact Contact
5803 61 Paper Transfer Contact Motor Position Not contact Contact
5803 62 Toner Relay Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 63 ITB Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 64 K Drum/Development Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 65 M Drum/Development Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 66 C Drum/Development Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 67 Y Drum/Development Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
369
3. SP Mode Tables
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 68 Fusing Exit Motor:Lock Normal Lock
5803 80 HVPS:TTS:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 81 HVPS:CB:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 82 HVPS:D:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 83 Fusing Destination Detection: DOM (Dom) Set Not set
5803 84 Fusing Destination Detection: NA Set Not set
5803 87 Fusing New Unit Detection New Not new
5803 90 Zero-cross Signal - -
Actuator not
5803 91 Fusing Rotation Sensor Actuator detected
detected
5803 92 Fusing Pressure Release Sensor Not contact Contact
Closed Open
5803 94 GAVD Open/Close Detection
(LD5V ON) (LD5V OFF)
5803 100 Keycard: Set Set Not set
5803 101 Mechanical Counter: Set Set Not set
5803 102 Mechanical Counter FC: Set Set Not set
5803 103 Key Counter: Set Set Not set
5803 110 IOB Version - -
5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Closed
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor
0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
370
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full 0 0
Nearly full 1 0
Near end 1 1
Almost empty 0 1
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)
Switch 1 is used for tray set detection.

0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 0 1
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF*2 B4 SEF*2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 1 0
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 0 0
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
371
3. SP Mode Tables
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-003.
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-004.
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-002.
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-005.
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)
0: ON, 1: OFF

Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
1 0 0 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
1 0 0 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 1 0 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
1 1 0 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 1 0 0 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
1 1 1 0 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
*1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001.
372
ARDF (D578)
Reading
6007 Description
0 1
6007 1 Original Length 1 (B5 Detection Sensor) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 2 Original Length 2 (A4 Detection Sensor) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 3 Original Length 3 (LG Detection Sensor) Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 4 Original Width S Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 5 Original Width M Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 6 Original Width L Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 7 Original Width LL Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 9 Original Detection Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 10 Rear Edge Detection Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 11 Skew Correction Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 12 Scan Entrance Secsor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 13 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 14 Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 15 Feed Cover ADF cover close ADF cover open
6007 16 Lift Up ADF cover close ADF cover open
6007 17 Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 18 Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
6007 19 Original Set HP Sensor Original not detected Original detected
6007 23 Rear Edge Detection (Not used) - -
373
3. SP Mode Tables
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804, B805)
Reading
0 1
6140 1 Entrance Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 2 Proof Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 3 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
Paper not
6140 4 Trailing Edge Detection: Shift Paper detected*1
detected*1
6140 5 Staple Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 6 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 7 Shift Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 8 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 9 Paper Detection Sensor: Staple Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 10 Paper Detection Sensor: Shift Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 11 Paper Full Sensor: 2000-Sheet Not Full Full
6140 12 Oscillating Back Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 13 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 14 Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor HP Not HP
6140 17 Skew HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 18 Limit SW Not Limit Limit
6140 19 DOOR SW Closed Open
6140 20 Stapler 1 Rotation Not HP HP
6140 21 Staple Detection Staple not detected Staple detected
6140 22 Staple Leading Edge Detection Staple not detected Staple detected
374
Reading
0 1
6140 23 Punch Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 24 Punch Registration HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 25 Punch Registratioin Detection Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 26 Punch Chad Full Sensor Not Full Full
6140 27 Punch HP Not HP HP
Stack Junction Gate Open/Closed HP

6140 30 Not HP HP
Sensor
6140 31 Leading Edge Detection Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 32 Drive Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 33 Arrival Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6140 34 Rear Edge Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 35 Folder Cam HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 36 Folder Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 37 Folder Pass Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
Paper not
6140 38 Saddle Full Sensor: Front Paper detected*2
detected*2
Paper not
6140 39 Saddle Full Sensor: Rear Paper detected*2
detected*2
6140 40 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation: Front Not HP HP
6140 41 Saddle Stitch Detection: Front Staple not detected Staple detected

Front
6140 43 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation: Rear Not HP HP
375
3. SP Mode Tables
Reading
0 1
6140 44 Saddle Stitch Detection: Rear Staple not detected Staple detected

Rear
6140 46 Full Sensor: 3000-Sheet Not Full Full
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type
0 0 Japan
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (B804 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "2000/3000 (Booklet)
Finisher".
Reading
6138 Description
0 1
Interference Escape Sensor

6138 1 Not interfered Interfered
(Stapler Safety Sensor)

(Staple Unit HP Sensor)
Stuck Relay1 Release HP Sensor

(Stopper S HP Sensor)
Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor

6138 4 Home position Not home position
(Stack Feed Out HP Sensor)
376
Reading
6138 Description
0 1
Jogger HP Sensor
Staple Tray Paper Sensor

(Staple Tray Paper Sensor)
Rear Edge Fence HP Sensor

(Paper Stack Stopper HP Sensor)
6138 8 Saddle Stitch Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
Stuck Relay2 Roller HP Sensor

(Clamp Roller HP Sensor)
Folder Tray Full Sensor 1

6138 10 Full Not full
(Bottom Tray HP 1 Sensor)
Folder Tray Full Sensor 2

(Bottom Tray HP 2 Sensor)
Folder Plate HP Sensor

(Fold Plate HP Sensor)
Saddle Stitch Arrival Sensor

(Fold Unit Entrance Sensor)
Folder Cam HP Sensor

(Fold Plate Cam HP Sensor)
Staple Exit Sensor

(Stapler Tray Exit Sensor)
Shift Tray Paper Sensor Shift tray not

6138 16 Shift tray detected
(Shift Tray Paper Position Sensor) detected
6138 17 Shift Tray Full Full Nor full
6138 18 Shift Roller HP Sensor Not home position Home position
377
3. SP Mode Tables
Reading
6138 Description
0 1
Entrance Sensor
(Finisher Entrance Sensor)
Shift Exit Sensor

(Shift Tray Exit Sensor)
Proof Exit Sensor

(Proof Tray Exit Sensor)
6138 23 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not home position Home position
Proof Full Sensor

(Proof Tray Full Sensor)
6138 25 Upper Cover Sensor Open Close
Door SW
6138 26 Close Open
(Front Door Switch)
6138 27 Clincher Timing Sensor Encoder
6138 28 Clincher HP Sensor Home position Not home position
6138 29 Driver Timing Sensor Encoder
6138 30 Staple Near End Staple remaining Staple near end
Staple not
6138 31 Self Priming Staple detected
detected
6138 32 Driver HP Sensor Home position Not home position
6138 33 Punch Registration Detection HP Sensor Not home position Home position
Punch Moving HP Sensor

(Punch Movement HP Sensor)
Punch HP Sensor
(Punch HP Sensor)
Punch Pulse Count Sensor

6138 36 Encoder
(Punch Encoder Sensor)
378
Reading
6138 Description
0 1
Punch Chad Full Sensor

(Punch Hopper Full Sensor)
Punch Registration Detection Sensor

(Paper Position Sensor)
Reading
0 1
Shift Exit Sensor

(Lower Tray Exit Sensor)
Staple Entrance Sensor

(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor)

(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
6139 6 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor Home position Not home position
Staple Rotation Sensor

(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
Staple not
6139 9 Staple Sensor Staple detected
detected
Staple not
6139 10 Staple READY Detection Staple detected
detected
379
3. SP Mode Tables
Reading
0 1
Exit Guide Plate HP

(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
6139 12 Shift HP Sensor Not home position Home position
Paper Sensor Output tray not Output tray

6139 13
(Stack Height Sensor) detected detected
Tray Lower Sensor

6139 14 Lower limit Not lower limit
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
Proof Full Sensor

(Paper Limit Sensor)
Reading
6145 Description
0 1
6145 2 Hitroll HP Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
Front Jogger HP Sensor

(Front Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
Rear Jogger HP Sensor

(Rear Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
6145 5 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
6145 7 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Not HP HP
6145 8 Shift Tray Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
6145 9 Upper Cover Sensor HP Not HP
6145 10 Staple Rotation Sensor HP Not HP
380
Reading
6145 Description
0 1
6145 11 Staple Near End HP Not HP
6145 12 Self Priming HP Not HP
6145 13 Shift Tray Limit Sensor Not full Full
Bridge Unit (D634) / Side Tray (D635)
Reading
6150 Description
0 1
6150 1 Bridge/Left: Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
6150 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
6150 3 Bridge/Left: Shift Set Detection Set Not set
6150 4 Bridge/Left: Exit Cover Detection Closed Open
6150 5 Bridge/Left: Feed Cover Detection Closed Open
6150 6 Left/Left Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
Internal Shift Tray (D633)
Reading
6152 Description
0 1
6152 1 Shift:Set Sensor Set Not Set
6152 2 Shift: Position Sensor Tray position: front Tray position: rear
381
3. SP Mode Tables
1 Bin Tray (D632)
Reading
6154 Description
0 1
6154 1 1 bin: Set Sensor Set Not Set
6154 2 1 bin: Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
Reading
6160 Description
0 1
6160 7 Bank: Feed Cover Detection Closed Open
6160 11 Bank: Palau: Paper Supply Switch Closed Open
6160 12 Bank: Palau: Slide Switch Closed Open
Output Check Table
Copier
Drum/Development Drive Motor-K:

5804 3 Drum/Dev Motor: K: HighSpeed
HighSpeed
382
Drum/Development Drive Motor-K: Middle

5804 4 Drum/Dev Motor: K: MiddleSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-M: Low

5804 5 Drum/Dev Motor: K: LowSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor- C:

5804 10 Drum/Dev Motor: M: HighSpeed
HighSpeed

5804 11 Drum/Dev Motor: M: MiddleSpeed
Speed
5804 12 Drum/Dev Motor: M: LowSpeed Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Low Speed

5804 17 Drum/Dev Motor: C: HighSpeed
HighSpeed

5804 18 Drum/Dev Motor: C: MiddleSpeed
Speed
5804 19 Drum/Dev Motor: C: LowSpeed Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Low Speed

5804 24 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: HighSpeed
HighSpeed

5804 25 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: MiddleSpeed
Speed
5804 26 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: LowSpeed Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Low Speed
5804 37 Toner Relay Motor Toner Transport Motor
5804 40 Image Transfer Motor: HighSpeed ITB Drive Motor: HighSpeed
5804 41 Image Transfer Motor: MiddleSpeed ITB Drive Motor: Middle Speed
5804 42 Image Transfer Motor: LowSpeed ITB Drive Motor: Low Speed
5804 50 Feed Motor: HighSpeed Paper Feed Motor: High Speed
383
3. SP Mode Tables
5804 51 Feed Motor: IncreaseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Increase Speed
5804 52 Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Middle Speed
5804 53 Feed Motor: MiddleIncreaseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Middle Increase Speed
5804 54 Feed Motor: LowSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Low Speed
5804 55 Feed Motor: LowInceraseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Low Incerase Speed
5804 60 Regist Motor: HighSpeed Registration Motor: High Speed
5804 61 Regist Motor: MiddleSpeed Registration Motor: Middle Speed
5804 62 Regist Motor: LowSpeed Registration Motor: Low Speed
5804 67 Duplex Feed M:CW:HighSpeed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: High Speed
5804 68 Duplex Feed M:CW:MiddleSpeed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Middle Speed
5804 69 Duplex Feed Motor: CW: LowSpeed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Low Speed

5804 74 Duplex Feed M:CCW:HighSpeed
High Speed

5804 75 Duplex Feed M:CCW:MiddleSpeed
Middle Speed

5804 76 Duplex Feed Motor: CCW: LowSpeed
Low Speed
5804 81 Duplex Reverse M:CW:HighSpeed Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: High Speed
5804 82 Duplex Reverse M:CW:MiddleSpeed Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Middle Speed
Duplex Reverse Motor: CW:

5804 83 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Low Speed
LowSpeed
Duplex Inverter Motor: CCW:

5804 88 Duplex Reverse M:CCW:HighSpeed
High Speed
Duplex Reverse Duplex Inverter Motor: CCW:

5804 89
M:CCW:MiddleSpeed Middle Speed
384
Duplex Reverse Motor: CCW: Duplex Inverter Motor: CCW:

5804 90
LowSpeed Low Speed
5804 95 ITB Contact Motor Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor
5804 96 Paper Transfer Contact Motor Paper Transfer Contact Motor
5804 97 1st Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Up
5804 98 1st Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Down
5804 99 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Up
5804 100 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Down
5804 102 Fusing Pressue Release Motor Pressure Roller Contact Motor
5804 104 Polygon Moter: LL Polygon Motor: LL
5804 105 Polygon Moter: L Polygon Motor: L
5804 107 Polygon Moter: HH Polygon Motor: HH
5804 110 Air Flow Fan: Front Ventilation Fan – Front
5804 111 Air Flow Fan:Rear Ventilation Fan – Rear
5804 112 Fusing Fan:H Fusing Fan: High Speed
5804 113 Fusing Fan:L Fusing Fan: Low Speed
5804 114 PSU Cooling Fan PSU Fan 1: High Speed
5804 115 2nd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 2: High Speed
5804 117 3rd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 3: High Speed
5804 119 Paper Exit Fan:H Paper Exit Fan: High Speed
5804 121 Fusing Coil Fan QSU Fan
5804 122 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan AC controller board Fan
5804 126 Development Clutch: Bk Development Clutch-K
5804 127 Development Clutch: M Development Clutch-M
5804 128 Development Clutch: C Development Clutch-C
385
3. SP Mode Tables
5804 129 Development Clutch: Y Development Clutch-Y
5804 130 Toner Bottle Clutch: Bk Toner Bottle Clutch-K
5804 131 Toner Bottle Clutch: M Toner Bottle Clutch-M
5804 132 Toner Bottle Clutch: C Toner Bottle Clutch-C
5804 133 Toner Bottle Clutch:Y Toner Bottle Clutch-Y
5804 134 Toner Supply Pump: Bk Toner Supply Clutch: Bk
5804 135 Toner Supply Pump: M Toner Supply Clutch: M
5804 136 Toner Supply Pump: C Toner Supply Clutch: C
5804 137 Toner Supply Pump: Y Toner Supply Clutch: Y
5804 138 1st Paper Feed Clutch Paper Feed Clutch 1
5804 139 2nd Paper Feed Clutch Paper Feed Clutch 2
5804 140 Bypass Feed Clutch By-pass Feed Clutch
5804 141 Bypass Pickup Solenoid Bypass Pickup Solenoid
5804 143 TD Sensor Shutter Solenoid ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid
5804 144 Exit Junction Solenoid Junction Gate 1 Solenoid
5804 145 1st Feed Pickup Solenoid 1st Pickup Solenoid
5804 146 2nd Feed Pickup Solenoid 2nd Pickup Solenoid
5804 150 Duplex Fan: HighSpeed -
5804 151 Duplex Fan: LowSpeed -
5804 152 Air Flow Fan: Middle 1 -
5804 153 Reserve Fan1: LowSpeed -
5804 154 Air Flow Fan: Middle 2 -
5804 155 Reserve Fan2: LowSpeed -
5804 161 PCL: Bk -
5804 162 PCL: M -
386
5804 163 PCL: C -
5804 164 PCL: Y -
5804 166 HST Sensor:Bk TD Sensor:Bk
5804 167 HST Sensor: M TD Sensor: M
5804 168 HST Sensor: C TD Sensor: C
5804 169 HST Sensor: Y TD Sensor: Y
5804 170 Toner End Sensor: Bk Toner End Sensor: Bk
5804 171 Toner End Sensor: M Toner End Sensor: M
5804 172 Toner End Sensor: C Toner End Sensor: C
5804 173 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner End Sensor: Y
5804 174 TM Sensor: Front ID Sensor: Front
5804 175 TM Sensor: Center ID Sensor: Center
5804 176 TM Sensor: Rear ID Sensor: Rear
5804 177 TM Sensor: M ID Sensor: M
5804 178 TM Sensor: C ID Sensor: C
5804 179 TM Sensor: Y ID Sensor: Y
5804 181 PP:Charge AC:Y:HighSpeed -
5804 182 PP:Charge AC:Y:MiddleSpeed -
5804 183 PP:Charge AC:Y:LowSpeed -
5804 186 PP:Development:K -
5804 187 PP:Development:M -
5804 188 PP:Development:C -
5804 189 PP:Development:Y -
5804 190 PP:Separation -
5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: K -
387
3. SP Mode Tables
5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: Y -
5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: C -
5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: M -
5804 196 RFID COM ON:K -
5804 197 RFID COM ON: Y -
5804 198 RFID COM ON: C -
5804 199 RFID COM ON: M -
5804 202 Scanner Lamp -
5804 216 LD1: K -
5804 217 LD2: K -
5804 218 LD1: Ma -
5804 219 LD2: Ma -
5804 220 LD1: Cy -
5804 221 LD2: Cy -
5804 222 LD1: Ye -
5804 223 LD2: Ye -
5804 224 PP:ITB:K PP: Image Transfer Roller: K
5804 225 PP:ITB:M PP: Image Transfer Roller: M
5804 226 PP:ITB:C PP: Image Transfer Roller: C
5804 227 PP:ITB:Y PP: Image Transfer Roller: Y
5804 228 PP:PTR:+ PP: Paper Transfer Roller:+
5804 229 PP:PTR:- PP: Paper Transfer Roller:-
5804 231 PP: ChargeDC: K -
5804 232 PP: ChargeDC: M -
5804 233 PP: ChargeDC: C -
388
5804 234 PP: ChargeDC: Y -
5804 237 PP:Charge AC:K:HighSpeed -
5804 238 PP:Charge AC:K:MiddleSpeed -
5804 239 HVPS: ChargeAC: K: LowSpeed -
5804 244 PP:Charge AC:M:HighSpeed -
5804 245 PP:Charge AC:M:MiddleSpeed -
5804 246 HVPS: ChargeAC: M: LowSpeed -
5804 251 PP:Charge AC:C:HighSpeed -
5804 252 PP:Charge AC:C:MiddleSpeed -
5804 253 HVPS: ChargeAC: C: LowSpeed -
389
3. SP Mode Tables
5804
Fusing Exit Motor

Note: These SP modes will be moved to Super SP mode in the near future.
Important: Use the procedure below to do the output checks for the fusing exit motor. If
you do not follow this procedure, a kink will form in the fusing belt sleeve, and the fusing
sleeve belt unit will need to be replaced.
• Open the right cover of the paper bank
• Remove one of the toner bottles
• Pull out the waste toner bottle half-way
• Remove the fusing unit
-31 to -35 2. Enter SP mode.

3. Do the following out output checks:
• SP5-804-031 (Fusing exit motor: High speed)
• SP5-804-032 (Fusing exit motor: Middle speed)
• SP5-804-033 (Fusing exit motor: Low speed)
• SP5-804-035 (Fusing exit motor: Very low speed)
4. Without exiting SP mode, turn the main power switch off and then on again.
Important: If you exit SP mode before you turn the main power switch off, the fusing exit
motor will stay off when the machine warms up. Heat will be concentrated in one area
of the fusing belt sleeve and cause a kink to form. If this happens, you will need to
replace the fusing sleeve belt unit.
5. Do the reverse of what you did in step 1 (for example, reattach the fusing unit).
5804 31 Fusing Exit Motor: HighSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: HighSpeed
5804 32 Fusing Exit Motor: MiddleSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Middle Speed
5804 33 Fusing Exit Motor: LowSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Low Speed
5804 35 Fusing Exit Motor: LLowSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: LLowSpeed
ARDF (D578)
6008 1 Pick-Up Motor Forward -
390
6008 2 Pick-Up Motor Reverse -
6008 3 Feed Motor Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation
6008 4 Feed Motor Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation
6008 5 Relay Motor Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 6 Relay Motor Reverse Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 7 Inverter Motor Reverse Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 8 Inverter Motor Reverse -
6008 10 Feed Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid
6008 11 Inverter Solenoid -
6008 12 Stamp Stamp Solenoid
6008 13 Fan Motor -
6008 15 Feed Solenoid -
6143 1 Shift Motor Shift Tray Motor
6143 2 Entrance Motor -
6143 3 Staple Relay Motor Stapler Unit Motor
6143 4 Knock Solenoid -
6143 5 Junction Gate SOL 1 Proof Tray Gate Solenoid
6143 6 Junction Gate SOL 2 Staple Tray Gate Solenoid
6143 7 Folder Roller Rotation Motor Fold Roller Motor
391
3. SP Mode Tables
6143 8 Staple Motor Staple Fold Motor
6143 11 Shift Relay Motor Upper Transport Motor
6143 12 Tray Motor Shift Tray Motor
6143 13 Stack Feed-out Motor Positioning Roller Solenoid
6143 14 Stuck Relay1 Motor Upper Clamp Roller Motor
6143 15 Stuck Relay1 Release Motor Upper Retraction Motor
6143 16 Rear Edge Fence Drive Motor Bottom Fence Lift Motor
6143 17 Folder Plate Motor -
6143 18 Drive Roller Oscillating Motor Lower Retraction Motor
6143 19 Staple Moving Motor Staple Unit Driver Motor
6143 20 Jogger Motor Jogger Motor
6143 21 Punch Registration Moving Motor Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor
6143 22 Punch Motor -
6144 1 Relay Up Motor Upper Transport Motor
6144 2 Relay Down Motor Lower Transport Motor
6144 3 Exit Motor -
6144 4 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor
392
6144 7 Staple Moving Motor Stapler Motor
6144 8 Staple Motor Stapler Hammer
6144 9 Staple Junction Gate SOL Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
6144 10 Positioning Roller Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid
6144 11 Stack Feed-out Motor -
6144 12 Shift Motor -
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804/B805)
6145 1 Entrance Motor Finisher Entrance Motor
6145 2 Upper Feed Motor Upper Transport Motor
6145 3 Lower Feed Motor Lower Transport Motor
6145 4 Exit Motor Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor
6145 5 Knock Roller Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor
6145 6 Shift Motor Shift Roller Motor
6145 7 Exit Guide Plate Open/Close Motor Exit Guide Plate Motor
6145 8 Tray Lift Motor Upper Tray Lift Motor
6145 9 Oscillating Back Roller Motor Stacking Sponge Roller Motor
6145 11 Stack Feed-out Motor Feed Out Belt Motor
6145 12 Staple Moving Motor Corner Stapler Movement Motor
6145 13 Staple Skew Motor Corner Stapler Rotation Motor
6145 14 Staple Motor Corner Stapler EH530
393
3. SP Mode Tables
6145 15 Upper Junction Gate Solenoid Proof Junction Gate Solenoid
6145 16 Lower Junction Gate Solenoid Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
6145 17 Knock Solenoid Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid
6145 18 Trailing Edge Hold Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid
6145 19 Saddle Stitch Hold Solonoid Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid
Stack Junction Gate Open/Close

6145 20 Stack Junction Gate Motor
Motor
6145 21 Trailing Edge Fence Moving Motor Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor
6145 22 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: Front Booklet Stapler EH185R: Front
6145 23 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: Rear Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear
6145 24 Folder Plate Motor Fold Plate Motor
6145 25 Folder Roller Motor Fold Roller Motor
6145 26 Drive Roller Oscillating Motor Positioning Roller Motor
6145 27 Punch Motor Punch Drive Motor
6145 29 Punch Registration Detection Motor Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor
6146 1 Carry Motor Transport Motor
6146 2 Hitroll Motor Positioning Roller Arm Motor
6146 3 Front Jogger Motor Front Fence Motor
6146 4 Rear Jogger Motor Rear Fence Motor
6146 5 Staple Moving Motor Stapler Movement Motor
6146 6 Stack Feed-out Motor Feed-Out Belt Motor
394
6146 7 Tray Motor Tray Lift Motor
6146 8 Staple Motor Stapler Motor
6146 9 Stopper Solenoid Stack Depressor Solenoid
Bridge Unit (D634) / Side Tray (D635)
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Current

6151 1 Bridge: Feed Motor: Current switching signal
Selection
6151 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Reset Bridge: Feed Motor:Reset
6151 3 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Enable Bridge: Feed Motor:Enable
6151 6 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: High Speed Bridge: Feed Motor: High Speed
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Middle

6151 7 Bridge: Feed Motor: Middle Speed
Speed
6151 8 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Low Speed Bridge: Feed Motor: Low Speed
6151 11 Bridge/Left: Junction Solenoid Bridge: Junction Solenoid
Shift Tray (D633)
6153 1 Shift: Lift-up Motor -
1 Bin Tray (D632)
6155 1 1 bin: Junction Solenoid -
395
3. SP Mode Tables
Two-Tray PFU (D580) / LCIT 2000 (D581) / LCIT 1200 (D631)
Feed Motor:High Speed

6161 5 Bank1: Feed Motor: HighSpeed
(D580/ D581)
Feed Motor: Increase Speed

6161 6 Bank1: Feed Motor: IncreaseSpeed
(D580/ D581)
6161 7 Bank1: Feed Motor:242mm/s Feed Motor:242 mm/s (D580/ D581)
Feed Motor: Middle Speed

6161 8 Bank1: Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed
(D580/ D581)
Feed Motor: Low Speed

6161 9 Bank1: Feed Motor: LowSpeed
(D580/ D581)
Bank1: Feed Motor: Feed Motor:Low Increase Speed

6161 10
LowIncreaseSpeed (D580/ D581)
6161 15 Bank2: Feed Motor:HighSpeed Feed Motor:High Speed (D580)
6161 16 Bank2: Feed Motor: IncreaseSpeed Feed Motor: Increase Speed (D580)
6161 17 Bank2: Feed Motor:242mm/s Feed Motor:242 mm/s (D631)
6161 18 Bank2: Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed Feed Motor: Middle Speed (D580)
6161 19 Bank2: Feed Motor: LowSpeed Feed Motor: Low Speed (D580)
Bank2: Feed Motor:

6161 20 Feed Motor: Low Increase Speed (D580)
LowIncreaseSpeed
6161 21 Bank2: Feed Motor:154mm/s Feed Motor:154 mm/s (D631)
6161 30 Bank:Tray3: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D580/D581 or D579)
6161 31 Bank:Tray4: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D580/D631)
6161 32 Bank:Tray5: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D631)
6161 35 Bank:Tray3: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D580/D581 or D579)
6161 36 Bank:Tray4: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D580/D631)
6161 37 Bank:Tray5: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D631)
396

SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never
occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot. For details, see
"Card Save Function" in the "Main chapters: 5. System Maintenance”.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the
printable area.
1001 Bit Switch
397
3. SP Mode Tables
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Collate Normal Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have
a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
• If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL
switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
398
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be
changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
1001 Bit Switch
399
3. SP Mode Tables
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch

Disable Enable
Type" buttons on the operation panel.
If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch
bit 0 Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on the device and
configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools Printer Features System"
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a

job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000 Disable Enable (1000)
jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via
Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 Face-up output Disable Enable
Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
1001 Bit Switch
400
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without requiring

Disable Enable
User Code
Enable: BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if usercode
authentication is enabled.
• Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 [PS]: Orientation Auto Detect Function Enable Disable
Disable: Automatically chooses page orientations of PostScript jobs (Landscape or

Portrait) based on the content printed on the page.
bit 7 [PDF]: Orientation Auto Detect Function Enable Disable
Automatically chooses page orientations of PDF jobs (Landscape or Portrait) based

on the content printed on the page.
1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 1
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 3 Delete Program
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Summary
1004 1
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
401
3. SP Mode Tables
1005 [Display Version]
Disp. Version
1005 1
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On
Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document server is
1006 1 enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When you select
"1," the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
[Data Recall]
1101 Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous
setting, or c) the current setting.
1101 1 Factory
1101 2 Previous
*CTL
1101 3 Current
1101 4 ACC
[Resolution Setting]
1102
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
2400x600 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 2400x600 Text, 1800x600,
1102 1
Text, 600x600 Text
[Test Page]
1103
Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.
1103 1 Color Gray Scale
1103 2 Color Pattern
[Gamma Adjustment]
1104
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection" menu.
402
1104 1 Black: Highlight
1104 2 Black: Shadow
1104 3 Black: Middle
1104 4 Black: IDmax
1104 21 Cyan: Highlight
1104 22 Cyan: Shadow
1104 23 Cyan: Middle
1104 24 Cyan: IDmax

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 41 Magenta: Highlight
1104 42 Magenta: Shadow
1104 43 Magenta: Middle
1104 44 Magenta: IDmax
1104 61 Yellow: Highlight
1104 62 Yellow: Shadow
1104 63 Yellow: Middle
1104 64 Yellow: IDmax
[Save Tone Control Value]
1105 Stores the print gamma adjusted with the "Gamma Adj." menu item as the current setting.
Before the machine stores the new "current setting", it moves the data currently stored as
the "current setting" to the "previous setting" memory storage location.
1105 1 Save Tone Control Value
[Toner Limit]
1106
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106 1 Toner Limit Value *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]
403
3. SP Mode Tables
Scanner SP Mode
SP1-XXX (System and Others)
[Compression Type]
1004
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1004 1 Compression Type *CTL
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase margin(Remote scan)]
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is activated
only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
1009 [Remote scan disable] *CTL
0: enable, 1: disable
1009 1 0:enable 1:desable
[Non Display Clear Light [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

1010 *CTL
PDF] 0: Display, 1: No display
1010 1 Non Display ClearLight PDF
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)
[Compression Level (Gray-scale)]

2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three settings
that can be selected at the operation panel.
404
Scanner SP Mode
2021 1 Comp1:5-95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2021 2 Comp2:5-95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
2021 3 Comp3:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]
2021 4 Comp4:5-95 [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2021 5 Comp5:5-95 [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]

2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at
the operation panel.
2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal image) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]

*CTL
2024 2 Compression Ratio (High comp image) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
405
3. SP Mode Tables
Test Pattern Printing

Printing Test pattern: SP2-109
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design
testing.
• Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an SC
occurs.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
3. When you want to select the single color of Magenta, Yellow or Cyan for printing a test pattern,
select the color with SP2-109-005 (2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan).
4. When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern, select the density with
SP2-109-006 to -009 for each color.
• If you select "0" with SP2-109-006 to -009, the color to be adjusted to "0" does not come up
on a test pattern.
5. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, touch "Yes" to select the test pattern for printing.
6. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print (paper
size etc.).
• If you want to use black and white printing, touch "Black & White" on the LCD. If you want to
use color printing, touch "Full Colour" on the LCD.
7. Press the "Start" key to start the test print.
8. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to the SP mode display.
9. Reset all settings to the default values.
10. Touch "Exit" twice to exit SP mode.
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 11 Independent Pattern (1-dot)
1 Vertial Line (1dot) 12 Independent Pattern (2-dot)
2 Vertial Line (2dot) 13 Independent Pattern (4-dot)
3 Horizontal Line (1dot) 14 Triming Area
406
Test Pattern Printing
No. Pattern No. Pattern
4 Horizontal Line (2dot) 16 Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 17 Band (Horizontal)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 18 Band (Vertical)
7 Grid Pattern Small 19 Checker Flag Pattern
8 Grid Pattern Large 20 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 21 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern
407
3. SP Mode Tables
408

Model AT-C3 Machine Code: D111/D142 Field Service Manual: January, 2012 Subject To Change

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model AT-C3 Machine Code: D111/D142 Field Service Manual: January, 2012 Subject To Change

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model AT-C3 Machine Code: D111/D142 Field Service Manual: January, 2012 Subject To Change

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model AT-C3

Machine Code: D111/D142

Field Service Manual

Health Safety Conditions

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

1. Scanner HP sensor 14. Paper transfer roller

1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit.

3.ITB (Image Transfer Belt) contact

Turns on/off the drive power to the development unit (K, Y,

6. Drum/Development drive motor

10. Registration motor: Drives the registration roller.

Drives the by-pass pick-up, feed and separation roller, and

Moves the paper transfer roller in contact with the image

16. Fusing unit shutter plate drive

Machine Codes and Peripheral Configuration

Mainframe D111/D142 [1]

Platen cover D593 [2]

1-bin tray D632 [4] -

Requires Tray 2 of the Mainframe or

One-tray paper feed unit D579 [9]

Caster table D593 [10] -

Side tray D635 [13]

Shift tray D633 [15]

500-sheet finisher D585 [16] Requires [14].

Punch unit: 3/2 holes B807-17 -

Punch unit: 4/2 holes B807-27 -

Punch unit: 4 holes B807-30 -

Punch unit: 2 / 4 holes D570-01 (EU) -

Punch unit: 4 holes D570-02 (Scandinavia) -

Card reader bracket D593-61 -

Optional counter interface

ADF handle D593-81 - -

The included bracket is not for these

Gigabit Ethernet Type B D377-21 [F] -

IEEE 1284 Interface

(IEEE 802.11g Interface D377-19 (EU)

File Format Converter

Bluetooth Interface Unit

SD Card for Netware

This card should already be in SD

Copy Data Security Unit

G3 Interface Unit Type D643-11 (NA)

Memory Unit Type B G578 - -

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with

Controller Type GW+ Controller GW Controller

New Fusing Unit without

Fusing Unit New QSU-DH fusing system IH roller fusing system

SMC data SD card download or printing Printing only

Operation Panel Tiltable Operation Panel

USB2.0/SD Slot Standard Optional

Scanner Lamp LED Xenon

Data Overwrite Security,

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

• Do not leave the toner bottle in a place directly exposed to sunlight.

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")

Machine Space Requirements